JP7249596B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine").

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with guide rails for guiding game media into a game area where a game is played. Static electricity is generated when the game medium comes into contact with the guide rail, and the static electricity may generate noise or damage electronic parts. Therefore, it has been proposed to release the static electricity generated by the contact of the game media by connecting a conductive member to which a ground wire is connected to the guide rail (for example, Patent Document 1).

However, in the technique of Patent Document 1, since the ground wire is connected to the conductive member connected to the guide rail on the front surface of the game panel where the guide rail is provided, the ground wire etc. can be seen from the front. As a result, there is a problem that the appearance of the game machine is deteriorated. In addition, in the technique disclosed in Patent Document 1, the conductive member and the ground wire are connected by sandwiching the plate-shaped portion of the conductive member between a pair of contact portions provided at the tip of the ground wire. There is a problem that the tip of the wire is easily detached, and the detachment of the ground wire causes problems due to static electricity caused by contact between the guide rail and the game medium.

JP-A-2002-253764

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing problems caused by static electricity generated on a guide rail.

Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game machine equipped with a game board having a game area in which games are played with game balls,
The game board is
a game panel provided with the game area in front;
a mounting unit on which the game panel is mounted on the front;
A metal guide rail provided on the front surface of the game panel for guiding game balls to the game area,
The mounting unit behind the game panel has a metal plate electrically connected to the guide rail and grounded,
The metal plate is arranged in the mounting unit so that a surface on the game panel side thereof has a portion exposed to the game panel side,
An opening is formed in the game panel in which a center accessory is arranged , and the guide rail and the metal plate are pressed against a portion of the metal plate exposed to the game panel without passing through the opening. It is characterized by being electrically connected through a predetermined connection metal part which is elastically deformable .

Here, the ``game area'' is defined as ``a receiving port (for example, a starting port, a variable starting port, etc.) where a special lottery is conducted to generate an advantageous gaming state in which a player is advantageous by receiving game media. "Area where is provided", "receiving entrance where benefits including payout of game media are granted by accepting game media (for example, general winning entrance, start opening, big winning opening, accessory winning opening, V winning opening , etc.)”, “A plurality of obstructing nails that form a flow path of the game medium are implanted”, “A receiving port that can be received according to the progress of the game (for example, The game media accepted by the prize winning slot) are supplied to a sorting device and distributed to either a specific receiving slot (for example, a V winning slot) or a losing slot where a privilege that is advantageous to the player is awarded. Things", etc. can be mentioned.

The "game panel" includes "opaque plate", "transparent plate", etc., and the material includes "plywood (for example, plywood)", "laminated wood such as plywood", and "metal plate". , “acrylic resin plate”, “polystyrene”, “polycarbonate resin plate”, “ABS resin plate”, “polypropylene plate”, “polyarylate resin plate”, “methacrylic resin plate”, “glass plate”, etc. . In addition, the ``game panel'' is defined as ``made of a single plate material'', and ``composed of a plate-shaped panel plate with a game area provided on the front side and a panel holder that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate. What is being done", etc.

Furthermore, as the "game board", "a front unit and a rear unit formed separably without using a tool such as a screwdriver", "a frame-shaped center accessory provided in the game area" "," "provided with an effect display device that displays an effect image according to the progress of the game", "effect device (effect unit ) are provided”, etc.

Also, the "metal plate" includes "a reinforcing plate that reinforces the rear unit in the game board which is configured to be divisible into a front unit and a rear unit", and "a metal plate whose outer shape is formed into a shape such as a character or pattern." "Decorative body with decorativeness", "reinforcing plate reinforcing the back unit attached behind the game panel", "base supporting movable accessories", and the like. In addition, the “metal plate” includes “frame-shaped”, “U-shaped”, “L-shaped”, and “band-shaped”. and "consisting of a plurality of members", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 1, the game machine is provided with a game board having a game area in which a game is played using game media, wherein the game board comprises a game panel having a game area provided in front thereof, A metal guide rail provided in front of the panel to guide the game medium to the game area, and a metal plate electrically connected to the guide rail, provided behind the game panel and grounded. , (In [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the section [9. Game board of the second embodiment], the outer rail 1001, the first connection fitting 1056, the second connection fitting 1057, the mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132, and FIG. etc.)

As a result, since the metal guide rail guides the game medium into the game area, the generation of static electricity due to contact with the game medium can be reduced compared to the case where the resin rail guides the game medium. , the generated static electricity can be immediately grounded through the metal plate to be released, and problems caused by the static electricity generated in the guide rail can be prevented. At this time, since the metal plate is provided behind the game panel, the metal plate can be made difficult to see from the front, and the appearance of the game machine does not deteriorate. We can provide good gaming machines.

In addition, since the metal guide rail that guides the game medium to the game area is grounded via the metal plate, the statically charged game medium tends to be supplied into the game area. Also, static electricity can be removed from the game media by contacting and being guided by the guide rails. Therefore, since non-charged game media can be supplied into the game area, problems caused by the supply of charged game media into the game area (for example, between the game medium and the sensor) problems caused by discharge or short circuit, problems caused by discharge or short circuit between the game medium and the LED or board, etc.). can be prevented, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the metal plate connected to the ground is provided behind the game panel, the metal plate forming the ground path can be used as a sensor, LED, IC, or a substrate on which they are mounted. Since it is possible to install it in a position away from the electrical parts, it is possible to prevent electrical discharges and short circuits from occurring between the metal plate and the electrical parts, which can damage the electrical parts and cause noise. can be avoided.

In addition, since the metal plate connected to the ground is provided behind the game panel, it is possible to make the metal plate larger in area (volume) than the guide rail. It can be expected to diffuse and weaken the static electricity (reduce the voltage), making it difficult for discharge and short circuits to occur.

It should be noted that the metal plate may pass through the game panel and be grounded forward. As a result, the ground of the metal plate is connected to the front through the game panel, so that the ground path including the metal plate is connected to an electric component (for example, a game controller) provided behind the game panel. Main control board (main control unit) for control, peripheral control board (peripheral control unit) for controlling performance, sensors, relay boards and decorative boards (LED mounted board, etc.).Therefore, it is possible to minimize the risk of electrical discharge or short-circuiting between the ground path from the metal plate and the electrical parts provided behind the game panel. , it is possible to avoid interruptions in the game due to problems such as damage to electrical parts due to static electricity and noise.

Also, it is desirable that the metal plate is electrically connected to the portion of the guide rail that the game medium comes into contact with first. As a result, the portion of the guide rail that the game medium comes into contact with first is the portion that is likely to generate a high level of static electricity because the game medium comes into contact with the force the most. Since it is connected, the static electricity generated by the contact of the game media can be immediately released to the metal plate, preventing the occurrence of discharge and short circuit between the guide rail and other members, thereby preventing defects. The occurrence can be suppressed.

Also, the metal plate may be provided at a position away from the electrical parts. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of electrical discharges and short circuits between the metal plate and the electrical parts, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as damage to the electrical parts and noise caused by static electricity. To reliably provide a game machine capable of suppressing a player from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest in the game due to interruption of the game due to a malfunction.

Furthermore, the game board may be composed of a front unit having a game panel and guide rails, and a rear unit having a metal plate which is provided separably from the front unit. As a result, since the game board is composed of a front unit and a rear unit that can be separated back and forth, the game specifications and When you want to change the model, you can replace the front unit by separating the front unit while the rear unit of the game board is attached to the main body frame. Changes can be made easily. In addition, as described above, by configuring the game board with the front unit and the rear unit, the front unit of the game board can be replaced, so compared to the case of replacing the entire game board, the game specifications and model can reduce the cost of changing

As described above, when the game board is composed of the front unit and the rear unit, the front unit and the rear unit can be easily separated, so that the front unit can be installed in the game hall without having to take the game board to the factory. can be exchanged. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required to change the game specifications and models as much as possible, reduce the cost required for the change, and suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machines (island facilities) in the game hall. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Furthermore, as described above, when the game board is composed of the front unit and the rear unit, when the front unit and the rear unit are attached to each other, the guide rail and the metal plate are automatically electrically connected. It is desirable to As a result, the work of separating and attaching the front unit and the rear unit can be facilitated, and the time required for changing the game specifications and the model due to the replacement of the front unit can be shortened as much as possible.

Also, as described above, when the game board is composed of a front unit and a rear unit, the front unit and the rear unit can be separated (replaced) without using a tool such as a screwdriver. desirable. As a result, the front unit can be easily replaced without preparing any tools on the game hall side, and the staff at the game hall can easily perform the replacement work.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The metal plate
It is characterized by being grounded forward through the game panel.

Here, the configuration for "earth connection to the front" includes "configuration for ground connection to the door frame provided in front of the game panel", "configuration for ground connection from the front surface of the game panel to the main body frame", and the like. .

By the way, after the game panel, there are a main control board (main control unit) for controlling the game, a peripheral control board (peripheral control unit) for controlling the performance, and connected to the main control board and the peripheral control board. Electric parts such as a sensor, a relay board, a decorative board (a board on which LEDs are mounted), and the like are provided. When the ground path for grounding the metal plate is provided behind the game panel, depending on the ground path, the electrical parts provided behind the game panel may be approached, and the ground path and the electrical part may be separated. There is a high possibility that an electric discharge or a short circuit will occur between them, and if an electric discharge or short circuit occurs, the electric parts may be damaged or noise may be generated, which may cause the game to be interrupted.

According to the configuration of the means 2, the metal plate penetrates the game panel and is grounded forward. (See the description regarding the second connection fitting 1057 and the attachment reinforcing sheet metal 1132 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, the ground of the metal plate is connected to the front through the game panel, so that the ground path including the metal plate is connected to an electric component (for example, a game controller) provided behind the game panel. Main control board (main control unit) for control, peripheral control board (peripheral control unit) for controlling performance, sensors, relay boards and decorative boards (LED mounted board, etc.).Therefore, it is possible to minimize the risk of electrical discharge or short-circuiting between the ground path from the metal plate and the electrical parts provided behind the game panel. , it is possible to avoid interruptions in the game due to problems such as damage to electrical parts due to static electricity and noise.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The metal plate
The guide rail is electrically connected to a portion of the guide rail with which the game medium first contacts.

By the way, in the guide rail, if the portion where static electricity is generated by contact with the game medium and the portion connected to the metal plate are separated, the portion between the guide rail and the other member may be displaced. A discharge or short circuit may occur.

According to the structure of the means 3, the metal plate is electrically connected to the part of the guide rail that the game medium comes into contact with first. (See the description regarding the outer rail 1001 and the first connection fitting 1056 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, the portion of the guide rail that the game medium comes into contact with first is the portion that is likely to generate a high level of static electricity because the game medium comes into contact with the force the most. Since it is connected, the static electricity generated by the contact of the game media can be immediately released to the metal plate, preventing the occurrence of discharge and short circuit between the guide rail and other members, thereby preventing defects. The occurrence can be suppressed.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The metal plate
It is characterized by being "provided at a position at a predetermined distance from the electrical component".

Here, the ``electric parts'' include ``sensors for detecting game media accepted in the prize winning openings'', ``actuators (solenoids, motors, etc.) for opening and closing the prize winning openings'', and ``detecting magnetism acting on the winning openings. magnetic sensor", "vibration sensor that detects vibrations acting on the winning opening (functional part)", "relay board", "light source (LED) that makes the winning opening emit light", "LED for decoration", "light guide plate LED that emits light", "decoration board on which the LED is mounted", "main control board for controlling the game", "peripheral control board for controlling the performance", "connection with other electrical parts A relay board that relays", and the like.

Moreover, the "predetermined distance" is preferably within the range of 10 mm to 30 mm, or 10 mm to 20 mm. If the distance is shorter than this range, electrical discharge or short circuit may occur between the metal plate and electrical parts. If the distance is longer than this range, the metal plate and electrical parts cannot be placed freely. This is because it may become difficult to provide a gaming machine that can entertain players if the situation deteriorates.

According to the configuration of means 4, the metal plate is provided at a position distant from the electrical parts. (Refer to the description regarding mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention])

As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of electrical discharges and short circuits between the metal plate and the electrical parts, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as damage to the electrical parts and noise caused by static electricity. To reliably provide a game machine capable of suppressing a player from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest in the game due to interruption of the game due to a malfunction.

Means 5: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 4,
"The game board is
a front unit having the game panel and the guide rail;
a rear unit provided separably from the front unit and having the metal plate;
It is characterized by being "consisting of

Here, the "front unit" includes, in addition to the game panel and the guide rail, "a unit provided with a certificate stamp affixing section to which a certificate stamp is affixed", "a channel capable of forming a channel for game media" Equipped with a member (e.g., center accessory)," Equipped with a receiving slot that can accept game media (e.g., winning unit), "Playing a game according to the lottery results of special symbols Equipped with a variable receiving port that opens and closes to accept the medium (e.g., large prize winning port, prize winning port, etc.) (e.g., attacker unit, prize winning port unit, etc.)”, “Decorative sticker Attached", "Equipped with light emitting means (e.g., LED) that emits light according to the game situation", "Equipped with a movable decorative body that can be moved according to the game situation" ”, and the like.

In addition to the metal plate, the ``rear unit'' includes ``reinforcing units (mounting units) having the same size as the outer shape of the game board'', having a guiding unit for receiving and ejecting downward", "having a detection sensor for detecting game media received in the receiving port of the front unit", and "an actuator for opening and closing the variable receiving port of the front unit (e.g. , solenoids, motors, etc.)," "having light-emitting means (e.g., LED) for decorating the front unit with light," "having a mounting unit for mounting on the body frame," "game having a production device (production unit) capable of executing a movable production or a luminous production according to the progress of the game", "having a production display device capable of displaying a production image according to the progress of the game", "controlling the game "having a main control unit that controls", "having a peripheral control unit that controls effects according to the progress of the game", and the like.

The relationship between the front unit and the rear unit is as follows: "the rear unit is fixed to the main body frame, and the front unit is fixed to the rear unit"; separately fixed", "the rear unit is supported by the main body frame and the front unit is fixed to the main body frame so that the rear unit cannot be removed", "the front unit is fixed to the main body frame and , in which the rear unit is fixed to the front unit”, and the like.

Furthermore, as the electrical connection between the guide rail of the front unit and the metal plate of the rear unit, there are two types of electrical connection: "connection fittings attached to the guide rail are electrically connected by contacting the metal plate"; A connector attached to a rail is electrically connected by engaging a connector attached to a metal plate,” “Electrically connecting a guide rail and a metal plate with a wiring cable,” etc.

By the way, on the game hall side, there is a case where a game machine with a predetermined game specification once installed in an island facility is desired to be changed to a machine with a different game specification. In such a case, the game machine manufacturer takes over the game machine from the game hall side to the factory, cleans it, changes it to the desired game specifications, and ships it to the game hall side. However, when a game machine is brought back to the factory, it takes time to return the game machine whose game specifications have been changed. There was a problem that the operating rate decreased and the burden was placed on the game hall side.

According to the configuration of means 5, the game board is composed of a front unit having a game panel and guide rails, and a rear unit provided separably from the front unit and having a metal plate. It is the one that was made. (See the description regarding the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention])

As a result, since the game board is composed of a front unit and a rear unit that can be separated back and forth, the game specifications and When you want to change the model, you can replace the front unit by separating the front unit while the rear unit of the game board is attached to the main body frame. Changes can be made easily. In addition, by constructing the game board with a front unit and a rear unit, the front unit of the game board can be replaced, so compared to replacing the entire game board, the cost of changing game specifications and models is reduced. can be reduced.

In addition, since the game board consists of a front unit and a rear unit, the front unit can be easily separated from the rear unit, so that the front unit can be replaced at the game hall without having to take the game board back to the factory. It is possible to make it possible. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required to change the game specifications and models as much as possible, reduce the cost required for the change, and suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machines (island facilities) in the game hall. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Moreover, since the rear unit has the metal plate, the presence of the metal plate can increase the strength and rigidity of the rear unit. Therefore, since it is possible to easily equip the rear unit with a heavy production device (for example, a movable production unit, a production display device, etc.), it is possible to provide a production device that is more enjoyable for the player, and the game is played. It is possible to provide a game machine (game board) that is highly appealing to people. In addition, since the metal plate increases the strength and rigidity of the rear unit, there is no need to share the strength with the game panel of the front unit. can be configured, and the weight and cost of the front unit can be reduced.

It is desirable that the guide rail and the metal plate are automatically electrically connected when the front unit and the rear unit are attached to each other. As a result, the work of separating and attaching the front unit and the rear unit can be facilitated, and the time required for changing the game specifications and the model due to the replacement of the front unit can be shortened as much as possible.

Moreover, it is desirable that the front unit and the rear unit can be separated (replaced) without using a tool such as a screwdriver. As a result, the front unit can be easily replaced without preparing any tools on the game hall side, and the staff at the game hall can easily perform the replacement work.

Means 6: In the gaming machine,
"A game machine equipped with a game board having a game area in which games are played using game media,
The game board is
a front unit having a game panel in front of which the game area is provided, and a metal guide rail provided in front of the game panel for guiding game media to the game area;
It is electrically connected to the portion of the guide rail with which the game medium comes into first contact, is provided at a position behind the game panel at a predetermined distance from the electric parts, and is grounded forward through the game panel. a rear unit having a metal plate that is attached and provided separably with respect to the front unit;
characterized in that it consists of

According to the configuration of means 6, the game machine is provided with a game board having a game area in which a game is played using game media, wherein the game board comprises a game panel having a game area provided in front thereof, and a game A front unit having a metal guide rail provided on the front surface of the panel for guiding the game medium to the game area is electrically connected to a portion of the guide rail with which the game medium first abuts. It has a metal plate which is provided at a position behind the game panel at a predetermined distance from the electric parts and is grounded forward through the game panel, and is separable from the front unit. and a unit.

As a result, since the metal guide rail guides the game medium into the game area, the generation of static electricity due to contact with the game medium can be reduced compared to the case where the resin rail guides the game medium. The portion of the guide rail that the game medium comes into contact with first is the portion that is likely to generate a high level of static electricity because the game medium comes into contact with the force the most. This portion of the guide rail is electrically connected to the metal plate. As a result, the static electricity generated by the contact of the game media can be immediately released to the metal plate connected to the ground, preventing the occurrence of discharge and short circuit between the guide rail and other members. Therefore, the occurrence of defects can be suppressed. At this time, since the metal plate is provided behind the game panel, the metal plate can be made difficult to see from the front, and the appearance of the game machine does not deteriorate. We can provide good gaming machines.

In addition, since the metal guide rail that guides the game medium to the game area is grounded via the metal plate, the statically charged game medium tends to be supplied into the game area. Also, static electricity can be removed from the game media by contacting and being guided by the guide rails. Therefore, since non-charged game media can be supplied into the game area, problems caused by the supply of charged game media into the game area (for example, between the game medium and the sensor) problems caused by discharge or short circuit, problems caused by discharge or short circuit between the game medium and the LED or board, etc.). can be prevented, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the metal plate is provided at a position away from the electrical parts, and the metal plate's ground is connected to the front through the game panel, and the metal plate and the ground path are provided behind the game panel. electrical parts (for example, the main control board (main control unit) for controlling the game, the peripheral control board (peripheral control unit) for controlling the performance, the sensors connected to the main control board and the peripheral control board , relay board, and decoration board (board on which LED is mounted, etc.) Therefore, there is no discharge or short circuit between the metal plate (ground path) and the electrical parts provided behind the game panel. Since it is possible to avoid the occurrence of this, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as damage to electrical parts and noise due to static electricity, and the interruption of the game due to the problem can cause discomfort to the player. It is possible to reliably provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in playing games.

In addition, since the metal plate connected to the ground is provided behind the game panel, it is possible to make the metal plate larger in area (volume) than the guide rail. It can be expected to diffuse and weaken the static electricity (reduce the voltage), making it difficult for discharge and short circuits to occur.

Furthermore, since the game board is composed of a front unit and a rear unit that can be separated back and forth, the game specifications and model of the game board mounted on the main body frame attached to the island facility of the game hall can be adjusted. By separating the front unit while the rear unit of the game board is attached to the main body frame, it is possible to replace the front unit, making it possible to change the game specifications and model without replacing the entire game board. can be easily done. In addition, as described above, by configuring the game board with the front unit and the rear unit, the front unit of the game board can be replaced, so compared to the case of replacing the entire game board, the game specifications and model can reduce the cost of changing

In addition, since the game board consists of a front unit and a rear unit, the front unit can be easily separated from the rear unit, so that the front unit can be replaced at the game hall without having to take the game board back to the factory. It is possible to make it possible. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required to change the game specifications and models as much as possible, reduce the cost required for the change, and suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machines (island facilities) in the game hall. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the guide rail and the metal plate are automatically electrically connected when the front unit and the rear unit are attached to each other, the front unit and the rear unit can be easily separated and attached. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required for changing the game specifications and the model by exchanging the front unit as much as possible.

In addition, if the front unit and the rear unit can be separated (replaced) without using a tool such as a screwdriver, the front unit can be easily replaced without preparing tools at the game hall side. The replacement work can be easily carried out even by the staff of the game hall.

Means 7: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 6,
The game machine is
a plurality of receiving ports provided in the game area so as to be able to receive game media;
a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the receipt of game media into the receiving slot;
The pachinko machine is characterized by

Here, the ``acceptance opening'' includes a ``general prize winning opening that is always open within the game area'', and a ``advantageous game state that is always open within the game area and gives an advantage to the player by accepting game media.'' A start prize winning opening (starting opening) where a special lottery is held to determine whether to generate a Acceptable variable winning openings (variable starting openings, prize winning openings, etc.)", "Normal symbols that are drawn when game media pass through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) within the game area Depending on the result of the lottery, a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, prize winning opening, etc.) that enables the acceptance of game media, and a specific area within the game area (e.g., gate, chucker, etc.) Depending on the lottery result of the ordinary symbols drawn by passing the medium, it is possible to accept the game medium, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous due to the acceptance of the game medium. Variable start winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winning that generates an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous when the game media received in the accessory winning opening is distributed and accepted by the distribution means , and ``advantageous gaming states in which the player is advantageous, such as a large winning opening or a prize winning opening that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to accept game media'', and the like.

In addition, the ``pachinko machine'' includes ``lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting game media into the starting port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. A special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result drawn by the combination of the stopped and displayed special symbols after variably displaying the special symbols in response to the display, and displaying an advantageous game state in the special lottery result display means. Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing a large winning opening in a predetermined pattern when a special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called digipachi machine), A distribution means for distributing the game media received in the mouth, and when the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V winning port, the prize winning port is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to give an advantage to the player. Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state (so-called Hanemono machine)", "has a large winning opening and a prize winning opening, and is drawn by receiving game media into the starting opening Depending on the result of the special lottery, the large prize winning opening or the special prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium received in the special prize winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special prize winning opening or the special prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. (a so-called multi-function machine) having advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by opening and closing in a pattern of .

According to the configuration of the means 7, the gaming machine comprises a plurality of receiving ports provided within the game area so as to be able to receive game media, and a predetermined number of game media being paid out according to the receiving of the game media into the receiving ports. and a payout device. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to obtain the effects of any of the means described above.

Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing problems caused by static electricity generated on the guide rail.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the back and front, and (c) is a cylinder in a conventional pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the rear. be. (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown in a state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a). and (c) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a). (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when it is disassembled and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when it is exploded and viewed from behind; Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit when it is disassembled and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from behind; FIG. 41(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 1; It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a main part of a conventional door frame cut at the same part as (a). and (c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray between the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. It is a top view which expands and shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the tray unit of a door frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the production operation unit with the production operation button directed upward, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the production operation unit of (a). FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from above. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front lower part. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state in which the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member is in the upward movement end position; is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where has moved to the raised position. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/unsprung holding member is in the downward movement end position; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board, button outer decoration board, and button inner decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. FIG. 11 is a plan view of an effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit; (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) is a connection between the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a). FIG. 10C is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a switching part is provided between the plate units, and FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of the same. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. is a perspective view. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Wu-Wu. (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit. , and (d) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-E. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO. (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is made opaque in the door frame; Fig. 10 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a closed state; It is a front view which shows each decoration board|substrate of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board|substrate of the site|part of the production|presentation operation unit of a door frame. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame; It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction; (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. (a) is a plan view of a body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. FIG. 100(a) is exploded and it is the exploded perspective view seen from the front. It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side. It is the perspective view which shows the part of a tank rail enlarging and seeing the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail etc. of 2nd embodiment from back. (a) is a plan view showing the assembled state of the tank rail etc. of FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of a) from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the carker line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 107 is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the flow of game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107; FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with tank rails and the like according to the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as seen from the rear right. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with tank rails and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as viewed from the rear left. (a) is a rear view of the body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal plate, and (b) is a left side view of the body frame showing an enlarged upper portion. 113(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and FIG. 113(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 114(b) is an enlarged explanatory view showing the vicinity of the tank rail. (a) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a ) is a perspective view of the tank rail, etc., seen from the lower right rear. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail, etc. of FIG. 116 and viewed from the front; FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail, etc., shown in FIG. 116 and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is the board unit of (a) viewed from the front left. Fig. 3 is a viewed perspective view; 119(a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the lower right rear. 119(b) is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a), viewed from the front; FIG. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) being exploded and viewed from behind; (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the squeak line in FIG. 119 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku-ku line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view in (a). It is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line. 119(a) is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in the pachinko machine having the board unit of FIG. 119(a). FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at an out-ball outlet of an out-ball passage; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which an out-sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor is removed in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, omitting the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit, as seen from the front right; (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the front left; is a perspective view. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the lower right rear. (a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the corrugated line in (a), and (c) is cut along the corrugated line in (a). It is a cross-sectional view. FIG. 129(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the sea line in FIG. 129(a). FIG. 128 is an exploded front perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 when it is exploded and viewed from behind; 128 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 128 is an explanatory view showing elimination of clogged balls in the board unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 128 is an explanatory view showing prevention of entry of a linear unauthorized tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 127; 128 is an explanatory view showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127; FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second sphere path in the substrate unit cut at the second sphere sensor and viewed from behind, and (b) is the exit of the first sphere path and the second sphere path in (a). It is a principal part enlarged view which expands and shows vicinity. (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the ball path and the ground metal fitting in the board unit, and (b) is the ball sensor and the outlet when the ball path extends vertically from the ball sensor to the outlet. FIG. 4C is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship with the grounding fitting, and FIG. 4C is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the ball sensor, the outlet, and the grounding fitting when the grounding fitting is provided on the bottom wall of the ball passage; . FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board showing the transparent center accessories and the like as opaque; 140 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 139 as seen from the front right; FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 139 as seen from the front left; FIG. 140 is a rear perspective view of the game board of FIG. 139; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel. (a) is a rear view of the first specification main control unit, which is one of the main control units, (b) is a perspective view of the first specification main control unit as seen from the front, and (c) is the first It is the perspective view which looked at the specification main control unit from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the first specification main control unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the first specification main control unit as seen from the rear. (a) is a rear view of a second specification main control unit, which is one of the main control units, and (b) is a perspective view of the second specification main control unit as seen from behind. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the second specification main control unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the second specification main control unit as seen from the rear. (a1) is a rear view of the first specification main control unit, and (a2) is a cross-sectional view showing the portion of the setting key switch in (a1). It is an explanatory diagram, (b1) is an enlarged explanatory diagram showing the same part as (a1) in the rear view of the second specification main control unit, (b2) is the same part as (a2) in (b1) It is explanatory drawing shown in a cross section. (a) is a front view of the lottery accessory in the center accessory, and (b) is a perspective view of the lottery accessory as seen from the front above. It is a side cross-sectional view of the lottery accessory in the center accessory cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a state in which a game ball cannot loop in a lottery accessory, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a game ball can loop in a lottery accessory. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a lottery accessory. It is a front view of the game board shown in a normal state. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front lifting decorative body unit of the back front effect unit is dropped from the normal state to the effect position from the standby position. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the rear-back elevating decorative body of the rear-back production unit is moved from the normal state to the appearance position from the retracted position; From the normal state, the back front elevation decorative body unit of the back front production unit is dropped from the standby position to the production position, and the back rear elevation decoration body of the back rear production unit is shown moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. (a) is a front view of a decoration having a production substrate, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the decoration of (a). In the production of the performance board in FIG. 160, after forming the outer periphery of the performance board by leaving a connecting portion on the standard board, after mounting electronic components such as LEDs, before separating the performance board and the waste board is an explanatory diagram showing the state of . (a) is an explanatory view showing a state before forming the outer periphery of the production board while leaving the connecting part and separating it from the waste board, and (b) shows the production board and the waste board by cutting the part of the connecting part. (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the connection portion of the effect board is finished. (a) is an explanatory view showing the effect board in a state in which the effect board and the waste board are separated from the state of FIG. 161, and (b) shows the state in which the outer periphery of the effect board is finished from the state of (a) It is an explanatory diagram. 161(a) is an explanatory view showing a form of a connecting portion different from that of FIG. 161, and (b1) to (b3) are explanatory views showing a still different form of a connecting portion, and also showing the process of separating from a waste substrate and finishing. is. (a1) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of a connecting portion with a waste board in the effect board of the second embodiment, and (a2) is a state in which the waste board and the effect board are separated from the state of (a1). FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the connection portion is finished from the state of (a2), and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the production|presentation board|substrate which is. FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing a decorative body effect board of the second embodiment in which the configuration of FIG. 165 is applied to the decorative body effect board of the first embodiment such as FIG. (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the main part of the decoration of the third embodiment, (b) is an explanatory view showing the main part of the decoration of the fourth embodiment in cross section, and (c) is It is explanatory drawing which shows the principal part of the decoration of 5th embodiment in a cross section. (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross-section of a main part of the decoration of the sixth embodiment, (b) is a cross-section of a main part of the decoration of the seventh embodiment, and (c) is It is an explanatory view showing a section of the main part of the decoration of the eighth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment. It is a rear view of the game board of the second embodiment. It is a front view showing only the front unit in the game board of the second embodiment. It is a front view showing only the rear unit in the game board of the second embodiment. (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the game board of the second embodiment is locked to the main body frame by the game board lock member, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the lock by the game board lock member is released; is. (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state in which the front unit is locked to the back unit by locking with the front unit lock member in the unit fixing portion of the game board of the second embodiment; It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which unlocked by the front unit locking member from the state of a), (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the front unit from the rear unit in the state of (b). It is an explanatory view showing the positioning of the front unit and the rear unit on the game board of the second embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing a ground path in the game board of the second embodiment. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning opening of the front unit and the ball receiving opening of the rear unit on the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) shows the front unit and the rear unit from the state of (a). is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the are separated. (a) is a front view showing the first front unit as the front unit shown in FIG. 171 in the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is different from the first front unit in the game board of the second embodiment. It is a front view which shows the second front unit of a form. It is a front view showing a state in which the game board of the second embodiment in which the second front unit shown in FIG. 178(b) is attached to the rear unit is attached to the body frame. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the game board of the second embodiment is locked to the body frame by the rear unit lock member, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the lock by the rear unit lock member is released. is. (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the peripheral control unit is attached to the performance display device in a cross section, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the peripheral control unit is removed from the performance display device in a cross section. 181(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a state in which the peripheral control unit is attached to the effect display device in a form different from that of FIG. 181, and (b) is a connection between the peripheral control board and the connection relay board in (a). It is an explanatory view showing typically. 169 is a front view showing a state in which the game board of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 169 is attached to the body frame; FIG. 184 is a front view showing a state in which the front unit of the game board is removed from the state in FIG. 183; FIG. (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the game board of the second embodiment attached to the body frame from the side, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the state in which the front unit is removed in (a). . It is a modification 1 of the game board of the second embodiment, (a1) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the lower right corner of the game board from the front with the game board attached to the main body frame, (a2) is ( 1) is an explanatory diagram showing a1) from the side, (b1) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the lower right corner of the game board removed from the main body frame from the front, and (b2) is a diagram showing the game board with the main body frame removed. It is an explanatory view schematically showing from the side along with the game board in a state of being folded. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing FIG. 186(a1) in plan view, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing FIG. 186(b2) in plan view. FIG. 10A is a second modified example of the game board of the second embodiment, and FIG. 11A is an explanatory view schematically showing a front unit provided with a movable certificate stamp pasting auxiliary member together with a rear unit and a body frame from the side; FIG. 11 is an explanatory view schematically showing a front unit provided with a movable certificate stamp pasting assisting member having a form different from that of FIG.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B (see FIG. 89) are driven by.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player can operate the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player side and a power board 630 having a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501; I have.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310 and a setting change board, a function display unit 1400 displaying a game situation based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a game panel 1100 are arranged behind the game panel 1100. a peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 attached to the front surface thereof. A front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game ball B, and a predetermined privilege given to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B. General winning opening 2001, normal winning opening 2002, first starting opening 2003, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006, first A V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 are provided. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁General winning gate 2001, normal winning gate 2002, first starting gate 2003, second starting gate 2004, big winning gate 2005, accessory winning gate 2006 (first V winning gate 2007, second V winning gate 2008) It is provided in unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 by the player. As a result, the game ball B is the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006 (the first V winning opening). 2007, the second V winning opening 2008), etc., the player can be entertained with the driving operation of the handle 195 so as to be accepted.

In addition, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, the start opening display unit 2110, and the effect count according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. The display section 3005, the back decoration unit 3200, the back front effect unit 3300, the back back effect unit 3400, etc. can perform light emitting effects and movable effects to entertain the players.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a right side from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends short in the direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recess portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10 .

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. Lateral fixing portion 23b, flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the rear side of horizontal fixing portion 23a, and from the rear side of upper lateral fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends short to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The upper hooking member 24 extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending to the left and right, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the placement portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b that are spaced apart in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grille member 46 communicates the interior of the panel front member 42 (the panel interior space 40a) with the outside through the gaps between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by means of two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the interior space 40a of the curtain board by the main body frame speaker 622 to the outside is transmitted to the handle cover unit 290 diagonally upward and forward by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b. can be directed into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is accommodated through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 at the . As a result, when the player is rotating the handle 195 (striking device for the game ball B) by sticking his or her finger inside the handle cover 295 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291), the body frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and blowing air into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of vanes 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward. Therefore, the balls are discharged from the port member 47 to a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and to other players wandering around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, since the effect sound can also attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output an effect sound with a deeper bass, and it is possible to amuse the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recessed portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the outer frame upper hinge member 51. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the form of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door, a handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the tray unit 200. A door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. A speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end when viewed from the rear at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and the rear surface of the door frame main relay board 104. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the view, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the rear view left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame secondary relay. A door frame relay board cover 107 covering a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 covering the wiring cable. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 has a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and the handle unit 180 operates a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to release the ball. 540 is used to play a game of hitting the game area 5 a of the game board 5 .

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular flat plate door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view. .

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame top hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 at the lower front corner, a tray unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 at the left outer front of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery thereof, and is close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and a lower side forming the inner periphery extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, and a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42). A cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted through the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a in the front-rear direction, and the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b in a front view. and a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates in the front-rear direction and exposes the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 forward.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper tray ball passage opening 101g) when viewed from the front and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is positioned in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is positioned behind. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker opening 211b in the plate unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be favorably guided forward (toward the player).

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, door frame sub relay board 105, and rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 82). and FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame left side lower decoration board. 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4; It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 (parts extending vertically in an inverted L shape) are covered. It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical gap therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The notch portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101 d of the door frame base 101 .

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 . The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a locking spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1 g. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 allows the door frame 3 to rotate with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. can support.

[3-1h. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. Figure 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the front and back, and (c) is a conventional pachinko machine. 2 is a front perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 2, and (d) is a rear perspective view of the cylinder lock in (a). 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. Fig. 36(a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Fig. 34(a) from the front, and Fig. 36(b) shows the state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the state of Fig. 34(a). It is explanatory drawing of a cylinder lock, (c) is explanatory drawing of the cylinder lock shown in the state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used for opening and closing with the frame 4 . The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a regular keyhole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 which is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder main body 131 and rotates together with a regular key inserted into the keyhole 132, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. A second cam member 135 attached rotatably about an axis in the front-rear direction at a portion below the cylinder body 131 in the upper end side rotates at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 A band plate-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached to the second cam member 135 at the lower end side of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135, and the upper end side is the first cam member 134 that rotates. a strip-shaped second arm 137 which is rotatably attached at a portion below the center and whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a portion below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135; ing.

Also, the cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder main body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from behind except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). Rivets that rotatably attach the rear cover 138 attached to 115 and the upper and lower end sides of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139 and .

The first cam member 134 has the upper end side of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side across the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to be integrally rotatable. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side ahead of the first arm 136 .

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are spaced apart at an angle of 90 degrees around their respective rotation axes. are doing. In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is located farther from the center of rotation than the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. .

The rear cover 138 has a cylindrical shaft portion 138a that protrudes outward from the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces of the rear cover 138. The shaft portion 138a is engaged with the L-shaped engagement slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115. It is detachably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 by means of.

In this cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmission member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are made of metal. .

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3 , the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440 b of the door frame right side unit 430 .

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130A has a cylinder main body 131 which passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end of which is attached to the front piece. there is A rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of a cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130A.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 has a rotation transmitting member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131. 34(a) and 34(b), etc., a rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131. As shown in FIGS.

In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 36(a), the cylinder lock 130 has the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 positioned at the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The upper and lower end sides of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower portions of the rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state by using a proper key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will happen. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 should be rotated counterclockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, the second arm 137 has its upper end side attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is reversed from the second arm 137. Almost no force acts to rotate it in the clockwise direction.

Thus, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise. direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135 . The force that acts upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is generated by the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the portion where the first cam member 134 is attached. 134 is proportional to the horizontal distance from the center of rotation. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 decreases, while the force acting upward on the second arm 137 decreases. greater power to do so.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from the normal state, the upward force acting on the second arm 137 becomes greater than that on the first arm 136 . , mainly via the second arm 137, the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(b)).

It should be noted that when the key is turned counterclockwise from the normal state by 90 degrees and then rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is performed. It will work.

On the other hand, when the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is used to rotate the first cam member 134 clockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 from the normal state, the upper end side of the first cam member 134 rotates to the right of the center of rotation. As the first arm 136 attached to the side moves downward, the second arm 137 attached to the lower end of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. Almost no force acts to rotate in the direction of .

Thus, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate clockwise. It rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135 . The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. , and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 in the horizontal direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force of the first arm 136 that tends to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases. The arm 137 exerts a greater force to rotate the second cam member 135 .

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from the normal state, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. As a result, the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise mainly via the second arm 137 . Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

It should be noted that when the key is turned clockwise from the normal state by 90 degrees and then rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to return to the normal state, the operation is reversed to that described above. It will be done.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, in which the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are phased at an angle of 90 degrees to each other, are attached. , so that at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is engaged regardless of the rotational position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132). , the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated, and the locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 can be improved.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 can be provided at a different position, the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 can be changed to any position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided in a part that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be used. cost increase can be suppressed.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a fraudulent person who has knowledge of the structure may insert a tool behind the cylinder body 131 from the front. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool, the door frame 3 may be opened to commit a fraudulent act. On the other hand, in the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool can be inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, since the rotation transmission member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated, and the door frame 3, the body frame 4, etc. are opened. can be prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, which are separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees. A straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135 at the part attached to one of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of the one arm 136 or the second arm 137 Even when positioned above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. be in a state where Therefore, by positioning the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 at the dead center by either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if it cannot be transmitted, the rotation from the first cam member 134 can be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, so the rotation of the first cam member 134 The key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be smoothly rotated without a large resistance to rotation, and unlocking/locking can be easily performed, and the key inserted in the keyhole can be forcibly rotated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the key from being damaged.

In addition, since the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 transmit the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position, for some reason Even if one of the arms is damaged, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having the highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position by the smooth rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. Therefore, if the rotation is transmitted by a gear, the tip of the tool may be hooked on the teeth of the gear, causing the gear to rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate. Since the arm 136 and the second arm 137 have a rod shape with a smooth surface, it is possible to prevent the tip of the tool from being caught on the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, thereby preventing the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 from moving. It is possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and to reliably prevent the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 from being unlocked due to illegal operation of the locking unit 650.例文帳に追加be able to.

In the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , but not limited to, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a gear and a rack gear, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt , and so on.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. FIG. 37(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 37(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tamper-proof member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and can also supply the game balls stored in the upper tray 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540, and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. As a result, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding working rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball-feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball-feeding solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is disposed on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the shaft portion 147b extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38(b)) projecting downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 159) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

When the player presses downward the upper tray ball release button 222 of the tray unit 200, the upper tray ball release slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the operation transmission portion 242b moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the inlet 141a and the ball removal opening 141b. partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is biased upward by the spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if the game ball B is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the operating rod 143c, preventing the ball extracting member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B being caught in the partition portion 143a. You can prevent bouncing.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this tampering prevention member 148, an illicit game ball B to which a string is attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illicit game ball B. An illegal game ball B is launched (hit ball) by the ball launching device 540 when a fraudulent act such as inserting or ejecting an illegal game ball B into or out of the normal prize winning port 2002 or the first starting port 2003 is performed by operating the attached string. By the momentum of the game ball B, the string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the V-shaped narrowed part, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1j. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. FIG. 39(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 39(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. - 特許庁As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, through which the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200 are communicated. A ball passage 150a and a full ball receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in a front view and can communicate with a lower full discharge passage 610b of a lower full ball passage unit 610 of the body frame 4. and a mouth 150b.

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and even though the ball is fired by the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4, it does not reach the game area 5a. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B received by a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c which are open forward near the lower right corner in front view. and a ball discharge port 150d that discharges the balls forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and the movable piece 153 and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and they can be urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with a projecting portion 163 b of a glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit viewed from the rear. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--E in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a sectional view of only the door frame 3 with the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is moved by the player's operation. It can be driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 .

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, the rear end of which is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290, which will be described later. a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 to be described later; A cover pedestal 183, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration substrate 184. a front lens 185;

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, and the handle 195 is attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

One end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle 195 so that the handle 195 can be returned to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylindrical portion 291 c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291, which will be described later. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handlebar cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, and the protrusions 291d can be inserted into the three grooves 181c. is inserted, the handle base 181 is brought into a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291 .

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b radially extending outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the portions 195b, and two ring portions extending in an arc around the rotating shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. A slit 195d and a locking projection 195e projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center relative to the slit 195d and locking the other end side of the handle return spring 190 are provided. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 rotate clockwise and clockwise around one spoke portion 195b horizontally extending leftward from the central hub portion 195a when the handle 195 is in a free state (not rotated). Two spokes 195b extend counterclockwise from 120 degree angles. The three spoke portions 195b extend to such a length that a gap is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c so that a player's finger can be inserted thereinto.

An outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape in which the rounded side of the U-shape faces forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to be translucent as a whole, and is partially provided with an electrically continuous plating portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 is detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be hit by rotating the outer ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that opens toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends toward the center from the front end of the guide portion 196a. there is The mounting stays 196b of the three handle guides 196 are attached to the rear side of the spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portions 196a are positioned behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 . A guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291, which will be described later, is inserted into the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196, thereby restricting movement in the front-rear direction.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in the shape of a disk having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 passes through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The number of handle decoration substrates 184 is 1 in the center, 3 in the middle circumference at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and 6 at regular intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10. LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are divided into 5 groups: 1 in the center, 3 in the middle, 2 in the upper left corner of the outer circumference, 2 in the upper right corner of the outer circumference, and 2 in the lower part of the outer circumference. (see Figure 72). This handle decoration board 184 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups with 3 systems for a total of 15 systems so that each group can emit light in full color. I'm trying

Although not shown, the handle decoration board 184 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and a command and address line from the peripheral control board 1510. , and a clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510 are connected. . Then, in the LED driver 184b of the handle decoration board 184, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), it is divided into five groups according to the command. Each set of ten LEDs 184a can be illuminated with an appropriate color and intensity.

In this way, since the handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the light emission of the LEDs 184a, which is larger in number than the number of electric wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected, can be individually (in this case, assembled). Since it is possible to control each unit, the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration of electric wiring can be simplified.

The handle front lens 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and is translucent. The handle front lens 185 has a lens member inside which is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The steering wheel front lens 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 .

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor. When the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and transmission gear 188. FIG. The internal resistance of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance, and the handle 195 rotates. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a with strength according to the angle.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, detects static electricity acting from the player when the player touches the handle 195, and detects the player's contact with the handle 195. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

The one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the driving of the ejection solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button can be pressed. By canceling the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength before the single-shot button 193 is operated.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be explained. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and includes a handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. An inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200, an annular handle cover decorative substrate 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface, An annular board cover 294 covering the handle cover decoration board 293 from the front and a handle cover 295 covering the outer periphery of the inner 292 and having the rear end attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 are provided.

The handle cover base 291 includes a cylindrical front cylindrical portion 291a extending in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, and a front cylindrical portion 291a whose inner diameter decreases forward from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a. a tubular rear tubular portion 291c penetrating through the intermediate wall portion 291b and extending in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter allowing insertion of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181; and the inner periphery of the rear tubular portion 291c. A plurality of (here, three) projections 291d are provided at positions corresponding to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion on the rear side of the front end of the outer circumference of the front cylindrical portion 291a, and a portion extending from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front cylindrical portion 291a. a cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f projecting forward to the front cylinder portion 291f; and an opening 291h penetrating at the lower portion of the portion 291a.

The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arcuate cross section from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to near the center in the front-rear direction. The rear cylindrical portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 at its rear end. The rear tubular portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by being inserted into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylindrical portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In the handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylindrical portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer tubular portion 291f to a position near the front tubular portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided three in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 behind the guide piece 291g through the space between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, a U-shaped guide portion is formed. A guide piece 291g can be positioned within 196a to restrict movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h extends from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e in the front-rear direction, and extends through the front cylindrical portion 291a with a size within an angle range of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. .

The inner member 292 has an annular base portion 292a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (here, four) notch portions 292c that are cut from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is positioned behind the flange portion 291e with the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 inserted from the front. The leg portion 292 b extends outward in a curved shape, and its rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 . The notch portions 292c are provided in the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The steering wheel cover decoration board 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 sets of 2 on the lower left, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right from the center. divided (see Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups with 3 systems for a total of 18 systems so that each group can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the steering wheel cover decoration board 293 has two power lines (one of which is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, commands from the peripheral control board 1510 and A wiring cable made up of four wires, one control signal line for receiving signals such as addresses and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. there is Then, when the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decoration board 293 receives a command addressed to the address through the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), it is divided into six groups according to the command. The 12 LEDs 293a can be made to emit light in appropriate colors and intensities for each set.

The substrate cover 294 includes an annular front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and having an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292, and the front plate portion 294a. and a cylindrical side plate portion 294b with an outer peripheral edge of the cylindrical side plate portion 294b extending short rearward. The substrate cover 294 has a front plate portion 294a located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and a side plate portion 294b extending to the base portion 292a of the inner 292. As shown in FIG.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having the same inner diameter as the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at its front end, and has a spindle frustum (kamakura type or bowl type) that bulges toward the rear. , etc.), and a plurality of (here, four) notch openings 295b are provided in the circumferential direction by notching forward from the rear end. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and has a plurality of cutout openings 295b that are aligned with the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 via the inner 292 .

The handle cover 295 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. , circular and radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled to the pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. A portion behind the handle cover unit 290 is inserted, and the handle 195, the handle front lens 185, and the like are positioned on the front side of the handle cover unit 290. As shown in FIG. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291, and the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101 is mounted. 101b.

A handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is rotatably supported by a handle base 181 at a central hub portion 195a. In addition, the handle 195 is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a. The rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) between the front cylindrical portion 291a and the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), and is rotatably supported while its movement in the longitudinal direction (axial direction) is restricted.

The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to have translucency, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293 is made to emit light. In addition to the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 being decorated with light, the interior of the handle cover base 291 (front cylindrical portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be decorated with light.

The handle cover unit 290 has cutout openings 295b and cutouts 292c that match each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, so that when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 is positioned on both the left and right sides and on the lower side. It is possible to make it look as if a hole communicating with the inside of the front tubular portion 291a is open. As a result, the player is relieved from the mental anxiety of sticking his/her hand (fingers) into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. can be done.

The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper cutout 292c of the inner 292) is closed by the right plate decoration unit 275 and the right side unit 430 of the door frame.

In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is positioned below the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

In addition, when the liquid or the game ball B enters the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, it passes through the gap between the front cylinder portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292, It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the cutout 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are formed into the outer frame base assembly of the outer frame 2, as shown in FIG. It is provided on the extension line of the slanting direction of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the three-dimensional structure 40. As shown in FIG. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) emitted obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the opening portion 291h, the cutout portion 292c, and the cutout opening portion 295b to the front cylinder. It can be made to enter into the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player is rotating the handle 195 (striking device for the game ball B) by sticking his/her fingers into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291), the main body frame speaker By vibrating the 622 and blowing air into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised, and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the body frame 4, the right cutout opening 295b can be pulled with a finger, and the door frame 3 and the like can be pulled. It can be used as a handle when opening.

In addition, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even if only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B can be typed.

In addition, since the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by placing a finger on the outer ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b of the handle 195. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously hit into the game area 5a with a constant strength even without continuing to twist the hand. In this way, the game ball B can be hit by rotating the handle 195 in a variety of ways, so the pachinko machine 1 can be provided that allows the player to select a hitting operation suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and can perform the rotation operation without discomfort.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the left side is provided to be openable and closable, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, there is a disc-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b projecting radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer circumference connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. A handle 195 having a ring portion 195c and a cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c is provided, so that the handle in a conventional pachinko machine is provided. A handle 195 and a handle cover unit 290 in a form never seen before can be seen at the site where the player is, which can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest. At the same time, the player can be motivated to play the game with the pachinko machine 1, and the player who is playing in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can play the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

In addition, since the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can When the player grips the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's fingers are inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the player can be given a feeling different from the handle of the conventional pachinko machine for the operation of the handle 195, and the player can be entertained and entertained by the operation of hitting the game ball B with a new feeling. can be suppressed.

Then, when the player operates the handle 195 and causes the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to output the production sound, the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 causes the speaker to be output. The air inside the enclosure 624 due to the box 623 vibrates, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 through the inner space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 and the port member 47 causes the sound pressure to rise. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is transmitted to the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover by the plurality of vanes 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291, and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Sound pressure stimulation can be applied to the player's finger operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Accordingly, sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the player's fingers inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a. , the player can be surprised, the player can feel the arrival of a chance, and the operation amount of the steering wheel operation can be changed, which can entertain the player and prevent the player from getting bored. , it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, sound pressure (sound wind) from the body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h. The interior of the unit 290 can be cooled, and the environment around the fingers of the player operating the handle 195 can be made comfortable, thereby relieving the stress on the player and suppressing the loss of interest in the game. can.

In addition, as described above, the handle 195 and the handle 195 may be pressed against the finger of the player operating the handle 195 while inserting the finger into the handle cover unit 290 through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 on which the handle cover unit 290 is provided is applied to the grill member 46. Since stimulation is applied by guiding by a plurality of blades 46b, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are reduced compared to the case where the handle 195 is provided with a vibrating device. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.) and the bearing mechanism, etc., and the handle unit 180 can be made difficult to break. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant feeling, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile. Although the appearance is greatly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who sees the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and the pachinko machine can be played without hesitation. It is possible to facilitate the selection of the machine 1.

In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided at a portion facing downward on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which the player's fingers can be inserted through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. is provided, when the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the area below the handle cover unit 290 is visible through the opening 291h and the lower notch opening 295b. Since it is possible to give a sense of openness to the cylindrical handle cover unit 290, it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety about inserting the finger into the handle cover unit 290, and the player is relieved. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

In addition, a cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided through the portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 facing downward, and the port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward through the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid discharged downward from the cutout opening 295 b and the opening 291 h to enter the port member 47 .

Further, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, and the handle cover unit 295 of the handle cover unit 290 has the same diameter at the front end as the outer ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be grasped and operated in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke portion 195b can be operated with only fingers, and the outer ring The portion 195c can be operated like a steering wheel of an automobile, the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b can be gripped by a finger, or the handle cover unit can be operated by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of performing an operation such as pinching the inside and outside of the 290 with fingers and capable of various game ball B hitting operations (handle operation). Therefore, the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a in a manner that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, etc., and the player is less likely to get bored. It is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Alternatively, fingers may be hung between the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 to grasp them, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be gripped by fingers while straddling the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing so, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to the handle operation similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to perform a handle operation that cannot be performed with a conventional pachinko machine, so that a variety of handle operations can be provided to the player. , making it difficult for the player to get bored by entertaining the steering wheel operation.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer ring portion 195c. The appearance can be such that the 290 is integrated with the handle 195, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance to attract the attention of the players.

In addition, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as that of the outer ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from increasing more than necessary. By suppressing the game area 5a (door window 101a) from being pressed upward, it is possible to avoid narrowing of the game area 5a, and it is possible to relatively enlarge the game area 5a, The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by the large game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to strongly attract the interest of the players.

Furthermore, by appropriately lighting the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be decorated with light. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the luminous decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c are conspicuous. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

A handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the hinge side, and a notch opening 295b is provided at a portion facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle for opening and closing the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that deteriorates its appearance, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

In addition, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports an outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and a flange portion 291e for restricting movement in the front-rear direction, and A guide piece 291g is provided, and even if the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the forward movement of the outer ring portion 195c can be restricted by the guide piece 291g or the like. 195c and spoke portions 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, after detecting that the player is touching the handle 195 by the handle touch sensor 192, since the operation of the handle 195 is received and the game ball B is hit, only the spoke portion 195b and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are used. The game ball B can be hit even if the handle 195 is operated in a touched state. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball B in a state in which the handle 195 is not touched, prevent the handle operation using a tool, and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . Mounting base (illustration omitted) protruding forward attached to the mounting base, Dish unit relay board (illustration omitted) attached to the right of the mounting base, and ball attached to the top surface of the mounting base A rental operation unit 220, an upper tray ball removal pre-unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray ball removal pre-unit, It has

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate right decoration unit 275 is provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a contact operation unit 302 that can be touch-operated by the player and a press operation unit 303 that can be press-operated by the player. The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation part cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation part base 315 housed in the production operation part cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation part base 315. A ring-shaped effect operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer periphery board cover 325 covering the upper side of the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. and a partial relay board unit 330 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit 350, which can protrude upward from the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 is provided, and the operation unit base 315, and is attached to the effect operation unit 350. A production operation part elevating mechanism 360 that supports the part unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a projection force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward projection force of the production operation part unit 350 by the production operation part lifting mechanism 360. there is

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper tray 201 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower tray 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper tray 201. - 特許庁

[3-5a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 extends from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, the outer diameter of the game ball B is inclined so as to become lower toward a position slightly below. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port.

In addition, the guiding passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball B static electricity can be removed.

[3-5b. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. FIG. 50(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a conventional door frame cut at the same part as (a). It is a cross-sectional view showing the main part, and (c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray between the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the horizontal center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in front view. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be ejected through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in the left side with respect to the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided in front of the center axis. The lower tray ball supply port 211j is shaped like a cylinder extending straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 150d goes straight to the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b by the lower tray ball supply port 211j, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, Since the plate ball extraction hole 202b and the lower plate ball supply port 211j are provided in the vicinity of the right end of the lower plate 202, there is a possibility that the game balls B are concentrated in the region on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202. There is Then, when the game balls B concentrated in the right area in the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B flow from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 toward the lower tray 202 side. As a result, the full-tank detection sensor 154 may be activated and the lower tray 202 may be determined to be full even though there is still room left in the lower tray 202. There is

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall (ball guiding portion 213) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is extended obliquely to the left and forward, as shown in FIG. is tilted to More specifically, the distance between the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the tray unit base 211 directly behind the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is such that at least one game ball B can flow. It is tilted diagonally to the left and forward so that it becomes a distance.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is positioned to the left of the center axis line (the line indicated by the dashed line) of the rear end (ball outlet 150d) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. are moving to

As a result, the lowest portion of the lower plate 202 (the portion of the lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is moved leftward by moving the lower plate ball removal hole 202a to the left. In the state where 202a is closed, it is possible to reduce the concentration of game balls B stored on the right side of the lower tray 202. - 特許庁In the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the portion of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray balls are supplied. Since the left side wall of the port 211c extends obliquely and forms a gap between it and the rear end of the lower plate 202 through which the game ball B can flow, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball The game ball B released from the post-extraction unit 240 (ball extraction guide path 241c) to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side is guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 along the obliquely extending left side wall and released. , and the game balls B can be properly stored in the entire lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area for storing the game balls B in the lower tray 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. It has a main body 212 and a plate unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

In addition, the plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the top of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and an upper plate ball attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the ball rental operation unit 220. It has a pre-extraction unit (not shown) and an after-extraction upper tray unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the pre-extraction upper tray unit.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. and an upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) extending vertically and having an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper plate main body 212 .

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opened in the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end through which the upper tray balls of the door frame base 101 pass. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed opening, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the upper tray. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball feed guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the post-ball removal unit 240 and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feed opening 211a is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210. The game ball B inside is supplied from the ball receiving opening of the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

Further, the plate unit base 211 of this embodiment has a ball guiding portion 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower plate 202 to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The ball guiding portion 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper tray 201 by the ball extraction guide path 241c to a position far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (left portion of the lower tray 202). be. As shown in FIG. 50(a), the ball guiding portion 213 forms part of the inner wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. More specifically, the ball guiding portion 213 forms a left inner wall facing the right inner wall where the ball extraction guide path 241c is opened in the inner wall of the cylindrically formed lower tray ball supply port 211c. It is inclined so as to move leftward from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the left inner wall (ball guiding portion 213), at least one game ball B is placed between the front surface of the plate unit base 211 (the rear end of the lower plate 202) and the portion directly behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. A distance (gap) is formed through which the liquid can flow. As a result, when the game ball B, which has flowed through the ball extraction guide portion 241c from the upper tray 201, contacts the ball guide portion 213 from the right side, it is guided left forward by the inclination of the ball guide portion 213, and the game is played. The ball B can be guided to the left end side in the lower plate 202 away from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a in the lower plate 202. - 特許庁In other words, the ball guiding portion 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest portion in the lower tray 202 (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the lower dish ball supply port 211j in the conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as conventional product) extends straight in the front-rear direction, so that it is guided by the ball extraction guideway 241c. When the game ball B contacts the inner wall on the left side of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, it rolls forward while rebounding to the right, and is sent to a position far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b in the lower tray 202. Instead, it is stored in the area on the right side of the bottom plate 202 where the bottom plate ball extraction hole 202b is provided. Therefore, in the conventional product, the accumulation of the game balls B (indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 50(b)) concentrates in the area on the right side of the center of the lower tray 202, and the right side in the lower tray 202 When the game balls B concentrated in the area block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B are not released from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower tray 202 side, and the tank is full. There is a risk that the detection sensor 154 will be activated and determine that the lower tray 202 is full even though there is still room in the left area within the lower tray 202 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the ball guide portion 213 is provided, the game ball B flowing through the ball extraction guide portion 241c is guided to the left area in the lower tray 202. can do. Also, in the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the portion of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray balls are supplied. From the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guidance path 241c) The game balls B discharged to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side can be guided to the left side in the lower tray 202, and the game balls B can be accumulated throughout the lower tray 202. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area for storing the game balls B in the lower tray 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

As evidence of the above effects, the inventors of the present application have found that when the full tank detection sensor 154 is activated, the fuel is stored in the respective lower trays 202 in the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. The number of game balls B was counted. The game ball B was counted 10 times in each case. As a result, as shown in the table of FIG. 50(c), the lower tray 202 of the present embodiment (product of the present embodiment) holds more game balls B than the conventional product at any time. It was confirmed that it was possible to store about 40% more game balls B than the conventional product on average.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Plate unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the left plate decorative board 273, the right plate decorative board 278, and the operation part relay board 332. It is for The plate unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 . The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a plan view showing an enlarged portion of the ball rental operation unit in the plate unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed, and the ball lending machine This is for returning cash or a prepaid card thrown into the machine after subtracting the amount of the rented game ball B, adjusting the sound volume, and adjusting the amount of light.

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the top of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball ejection button 222 located near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and a button on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the upper tray ball extraction button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball rental operation base 223, a ball rental display unit 226 arranged in the rear lower part of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental button 224 on the outside of the base unit 221. A volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has the letters "ball" on its upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball-shaped LED, and can be visually recognized from the player's side through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. A ball lending display section 226 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume control button 227 is used to adjust the volume of sound for presentation such as music, voice, and sound effects output from the top central speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. It is for adjustment. The volume control button 227 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character at the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character at the center of the other (lower) circle. A pattern is applied to the part of , as if the sound is coming out of the speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the volume control button 227 increases the volume, and pressing the "-" side decreases the volume.

The light amount adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . This light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle. A pattern of a light bulb is applied to the part of . The diameter of the circle on the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228 is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228 brightens the light, and pressing the "-" side darkens it.

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are colored in different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player is unlikely to make a mistake.

By the way, when the sound volume and the amount of light are adjusted using the contact operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation portion 301, the player participation type effect requiring the operation of the effect operation portion 301 is not executed. Sometimes, the effect operation unit 301 is operated appropriately to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, the amount of light, etc. on the effect display device 1600, and after selecting an item to be adjusted, the contact operation unit 302 is operated. Since the volume of the sound and the brightness of the amount of light have to be changed, it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume and the light amount can be directly adjusted. can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after upper plate ball removal]
Mainly referring to FIG. 49, a detailed description will be given of the unit before ball removal of the upper plate and the unit after removal of upper plate ball 240 in the plate base unit 210 . The unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging B to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed opening from the rear, and a rear base 241 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be vertically slidable. , a spring (not shown) that urges the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. ing.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball. A ball feeding guideway 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward; A ball removal guidance path 241c for guiding the game ball B downward from the position and then guiding it rightward in rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port is opened forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 in the state assembled to the plate base unit 210. formed in position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving opening and the ball feeding guiding path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper disk ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an operation receiving portion (not shown) projecting forward from the upper left corner, and a rear surface that is the rear side of the operation receiving portion. and a projecting operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion penetrates the tray unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward. The lower end of button 222 abuts. When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extracting slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

In the post-upper-disc-ball-extraction unit 240, the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper-movement end by the biasing force of the spring, and the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242 moves through the operation receiving portion of the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242. The pull-out button 222 is positioned at the end of upward movement. In addition, since the upper disk ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball ejection button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring, the upper bowl ball ejection slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper bowl ball ejection slider 242. The actuating rod 143c of the contacting ball extracting member 143 can move downward, and the ball extracting member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball extracting member 143, and the partition portion 143a moves toward the entrance 141a. It retreats from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B, which has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port and the ball feed guide path 241b from the upper tray 201, is discharged forward from the ball exit port 141b opening below the entry port 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring, the upper tray ball removal button 222 rises, and comes into contact with the operation transmission part 242b. The ball extraction member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c which is engaged, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 or discharged to the lower tray 202 side by the upper tray ball extraction unit 240. can do.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. A left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower front portion of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . In addition, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body is located below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211 when assembled with the tray unit 200. 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. and a lower front decorative portion 252b that protrudes forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. - 特許庁

A left plate decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side protrusions 252a, respectively.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the plate unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a at the center in the left-right direction, and is provided with an effect operation unit attachment portion to which the effect operation unit 300 is attached. . The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. .

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower tray ball removal unit 260 includes a lower tray ball removal button 263 and a lower tray ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower tray ball removal button 263 .

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b of the tray unit main body 252, and the lower tray ball removal lid. 265 closes the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pushed backward, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is moved to open the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B can be discharged below the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

When the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pressed to move the lower tray ball removal lid 265, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a remains open. , and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pressed rearward and then released. returns to its normal position, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5d-4. Plate left decorative unit and plate right decorative unit]
The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200 .

The left plate decoration unit 270 includes a left plate decoration body 271 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and which has translucency, and a left plate decoration which has translucency penetrating the left plate decoration body 271. It is provided with a lens 272 and a left plate decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the left plate decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The left plate ornament 271 has a semi-circular arc projecting forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The left plate decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction of the left plate decorative body 271 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the left plate decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the left plate decoration body 271 can be decorated with light.

The left plate decoration unit 270 is connected to the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420 at its left end when assembled to the door frame 3 . Since the left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The right plate decoration unit 275 includes a right plate decoration body 276 that is semi-cylindrical and extends in the left and right direction and has translucency, and a right plate decoration that has translucency penetrating through the right plate decoration body 276. A lens 277 and a right plate decorative substrate 278 provided behind the right plate decorative lens 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The right plate ornament 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the center axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The right plate decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The right plate decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right plate decoration body 276 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the right plate decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the right plate decoration 276 can be decorated with light.

The plate right decorative unit 275 is connected to the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430 at its right end when assembled to the door frame 3 . Since the right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the right plate decoration substrate 278 are lit, the entire front surface of the right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 partially protrude upward from the front end of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled on the door frame 3. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a, a step can be formed in which the plate left decorative unit 270 and the plate right decorative unit 275 are higher. As a result, the player can hook his finger on the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side swelling portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. Alternatively, it can be used as a finger hold when operating an effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. In addition, the step between the left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. FIG. 52(a) is a front perspective view of the production operation unit with the production operation button directed upward, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the production operation unit of (a). Fig. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from above, and Fig. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from front and lower. be. FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member is at the upper movement end position, and (b) is a effect operation from the state of (a). FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the part unit has moved to the raised position; FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the downward movement end position.

The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be touch-operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. (vibration) so that the player can participate not only in the operation of hitting the game ball B but also in the performance during the game. The effect operation section 301 has a contact operation section 302 provided above a pressing operation section 303 . In the effect operation unit 301 , the contact operation part 302 and the press operation part 303 are formed in a circular shape with a diameter about 5/8 the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300 .

The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation unit cover unit 310 which is provided on the front surface of the plate unit 200 at the center in the left-right direction and has a spherical outer shape, and the production operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the outside and is attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and an effect operation unit provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit top cover 312). An outer periphery decoration board 320, an outer periphery board cover 325 attached to the operation part base 315 so as to cover the performance operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 from above, and an operation part relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 315. 330 and .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes the effect operation unit 350 having the effect operation unit 301, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for lifting and lowering the effect operation unit 350, and the projection force of the effect operation unit 350. and a projection force adjustment mechanism 380 for adjusting the projection force. The effect operation section unit 350 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat upward from the upper surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 by the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 .

[3-5e-1. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The production operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the production operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315 . The effect operation section cover unit 310 decorates the outer circumference of the effect operation unit 300 (the periphery of the effect operation section unit 350) at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The production operation section cover unit 310 has a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward, and an annular shape having an insertion opening 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 and through which the production operation section 301 is inserted. and a unit top cover 312 . The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and lower sides of the operation portion base 315 . The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311 . In other words, the effect operation section cover unit 310 has a substantially spherical outer surface. Incidentally, the effect operation section cover unit 310 of this embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The front end of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled on the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

At least the upper unit cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is translucent, and can be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320, which will be described later.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加Further, the effect operation section cover unit 310 is connected so that the left plate decoration 271 and the right plate decoration 276 extend outward from both left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation section base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 212 a of the upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 . The operation unit base 315 is covered with the unit lower cover 311 on the front and the bottom, and is covered with the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 on the top. The operation unit base 315 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped body portion 315a with an open top, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the body portion and having a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body portion 315a accommodates the effect operation portion unit 350 therein. In addition, the lower ends of a pair of guide shafts 362 and a central shaft 366 of a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 in the production operation section unit 350, which will be described later, are attached to the bottom wall of the main body section 315a. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the board base 331 of the operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear wall of the main body section 315a.

The effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange section 315b. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 therebetween. A unit upper cover 312 is attached to the peripheral board cover 325 .

The upper surface of the flange portion 315 b of the operation portion base 315 is positioned substantially flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 when assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

[3-5e-3. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 315 . The operation part relay board unit 330 covers the board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body part 315a of the operation part base 315, the operation part relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and the operation part relay board 332 from behind. and a board cover 333 attached to the board base 331 as shown.

The operation part relay board 332 includes the production operation part peripheral decoration board 320 (front decoration board 321 and rear decoration board 322), button outer decoration board 355, vibration motor 356, contact detection sensor main body 358, inside button decoration board 364, and operation buttons. It relays connection between the elevation drive motor 367 , the pressure detection sensor 373 , the elevation detection sensor 374 , the protrusion force detection sensor 375 , the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 .

[3-5e-4. Production control unit]
The effect operation section unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation section unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the effect operation section cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303. is.

The effect operation unit 350 includes a bottomed tubular button body 351 whose upper end side is closed, a disk-shaped contact detection body 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351, and a button body 351 from below. A cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported so as to be able to move up and down by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and arranged above the button base 354 and an annular button exterior decoration substrate 355 having a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the upper surface thereof.

In addition, the effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 attaching the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. a contact sensor body 358 connected to and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353 .

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 includes a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved to bulge upward, a tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer circumference of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. and a locking portion 351c protruding downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351 a is formed in a shape that constitutes a portion of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 . The upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular shape whose diameter is about half the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351 a (cylindrical portion 351 b ) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation portion cover unit 310 . The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351 c is locked to the button base 354 . Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer periphery and is formed in a dish shape in which the inner side of a certain width bulges upward from the outer periphery. The contact detection member 352 is located below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, and is formed to bulge upward obliquely and have a flat inner surface. Thereby, the contact detection body 352 looks like a part of decoration of the button body 351 . The contact detection body 352 has flat plate-shaped downward extending pieces 352a extending downward from the left and right ends and the rear end of the outer peripheral edge. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351 a of the button body 351 . The contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal. The contact detection body 352 has a plurality of holes in the punching metal to suppress the capacitance with respect to the entire area, thereby preventing erroneous detection. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351 can be satisfactorily controlled. It can be decorated with light emission in a normal state.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358 . As a result, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and can detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface or side surface of the button body 351. can be done. In other words, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 allow the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302 .

The button sleeve 353 has a vertically extending tubular sleeve body 353a and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is formed entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353 a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351 , and the length of the sleeve body 353 a is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351 b of the button body 351 . The button sleeve 353 can upwardly transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button external decoration substrate 355 through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 has a disc shape with a diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the button body 351 and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351 . The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a vertically penetrating at symmetrical portions with respect to the center, a center hole 354b vertically penetrating at the center, and protruding from the inner surface of the center hole toward the center. and a pair of guide pins 354c. The guide shafts 362 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b is formed with an inner diameter large enough for the elevation cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward, and further has a flat detection piece 354 d that is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 . The locking portion 351c of the button body 351 of the button base 354 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. A pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted into a pair of guide holes 354a, and the button base 354 is guided so as to be vertically movable. Further, the button base 354 is vertically moved by guiding the pair of guide pins 354 c to the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 . The bottom surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the upper ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 and is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365 .

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the external button decoration board 355. As shown in FIG. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a line on a concentric double circumference. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and at a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately lighting the LED 355a of the button exterior decoration substrate 355, the portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detection body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be decorated with light.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. Vibration motor 356 is arranged such that its rotating shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation section 301 . Also, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a portion on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the effect operation section 301 (the effect operation section unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the effect operation section 301 . In addition, the vibration caused by the vibration motor 356 can reduce the influence on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 includes a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, and supplies power to the sensor IC and the output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrodes that it has inside. The connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352 . That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can cause the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrodes and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by the external resistance. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined value, but signals in multiple stages may be output according to the magnitude of the capacitance.

The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detection body 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by a contact detection sensor main body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352 . In addition, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body can be detected with the effect operation unit 350 projecting upward. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of 351 . Thus, the effect operation section unit 350 can cause the button body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302 with the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 .

The effect operation unit unit 350 is supported by a effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be vertically movable. When the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 looks like one sphere. When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation portion 303. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, when the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), it does not move further downward even if it is pressed, and is in a state in which the pressing operation cannot be performed. . In this normal state, the detection piece 354 d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 . Then, when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373, and enters a non-detection state. . Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pushed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower movement end against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressing force. It is detected by sensor 373 . Thereby, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

In addition, since the effect operation section unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button main body 351, when the contact operation section 302 is operated, the upper surface of the smooth spherical button main body 351 is touched. As a result, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having unevenness due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302 . Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351 , by forming minute unevenness or a plurality of streaks on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351 , an arbitrary tactile sensation can be given to the contact operation part 302 . can be provided, the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player more can be provided.

In the above description, the button body 351 is transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button body 351 may be made opaque or translucent so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351 . This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is made opaque, it is desirable to have translucency. As a result, the button main body 351 can be illuminated with light emitted from the LED 355a of the outer button decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 provided below. can entertain.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit lifting mechanism]
The effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can raise and lower the production operation unit unit 350. As shown in FIG. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached inside the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the effect operation unit 350, and has a substantially circular outer circumference. A pair of cylinders arranged symmetrically, the lower ends of which are attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 and the upper ends of which extend upward through the operating portion base 315 and the button base 354. A guide shaft 362 and a disk-shaped upper base 363 connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having an outer circumference smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353 are attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 to direct light upward. and a button interior decoration board 364 on which a plurality of irradiable LEDs 364a are mounted.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and urging the button base 354 upward. and a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 315 a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363 .

Furthermore, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operating button elevating drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft protrudes upward, and the rotating shaft of the operating button elevating drive motor 367. a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 that meshes with the lifting drive gear 368 and is rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361; and a lift cam drive gear member 370 having a central shaft 366 therethrough and rotatably mounted thereon.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is connected at the lower end to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366. When rotated, the elevating cam raises and lowers the button base 354. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 is attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a press detection sensor 373 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and an elevating mechanism base 361 that is attached to the elevation cam drive gear member 370. (Elevation cam member 371) up-and-down detection sensor 374 that detects the up-and-down of the production operation unit 350 by detecting the rotation position, and the elevation mechanism base 361 attached to the elevation mechanism base 361, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 of the elevation undersprung holding member A projection force detection sensor 375 that detects the projection force of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the 385 is provided.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a, a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 and lifting springs that penetrate the base body 361a. and a pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 . A driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a projecting force detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, an operation button elevation drive motor 367, an elevation detection sensor 374, and a protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a. The lifting mechanism base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b. Thus, a space in which the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is arranged is formed between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. As shown in FIG. A pair of through-holes 361c are provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through-holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, forward and rearward from the center, at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a. . The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their respective lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 and their respective upper ends attached to the upper base 363 . A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods.

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . The upper base 363 has a lower projection projecting downward. The lower protrusion of the upper base 363 is brought into contact with the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372 to form a space between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361 in which the lifting cam member 371 can be accommodated. can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button middle decoration substrate 364 are full-color LEDs. The button interior decoration substrate 364 can light-embellish the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 364a.

The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, through which the guide shaft 362 is inserted. The pair of lifting springs 365 have their lower ends in contact with the lower lifting spring holding members 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 and their upper ends in contact with the button base 354 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two opposing locations and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 374. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevation cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 . The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371 a guides the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354 .

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see FIG. 55, etc.). The second cam 371 d and the third cam 371 e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371 a are spaced apart by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354 .

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The lift cam member 371 is configured so that when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated counterclockwise in plan view of the lift cam member 371, it extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b. is formed in The elevation cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 by the cam portion 371a by rotating, and the button base 354 (the effect operation portion unit 350) which is urged upward by the elevation spring 365. can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and the lifting cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion projecting upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 . The gear cover 372 forms a space capable of accommodating the elevation cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper projection into contact with the lower end of the lower projection of the upper base 363 . be able to.

The pressing detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operation unit 350. The press detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state). This press detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 from the normal state. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower movement end against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the press detection sensor 373 detects the button base 354. The detection piece 354d can be detected to detect the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

The elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation detection piece 370 c of the elevation cam drive gear member 370 , thereby detecting the elevation cam member 371 via the connected portion 371 f connected to the connection portion 370 b of the elevation cam drive gear member 370 . is detected.

The projection force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385 d of the lift unsprung holding member 385 in the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 .

The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can vertically support the effect operation unit 350 via a button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in the front-rear direction, and the button base 354 is lifted by a pair of elevating springs 365. The effect operation section unit 350 can be urged upward through it. In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 rotates the elevation cam member 371 by the operation button elevation drive motor 367 to move the effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) up and down with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310. can be made In addition, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 can light-embellish the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the button interior decoration substrate 364 .

In the normal state, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 has the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 engaged with the engaging section 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55(a)). ). In this normal state, the effect operation section unit 350 is positioned at the downward movement end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303) is pressed downward, the effect operation is performed. The part unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected. In addition, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button main body 351 of the effect operation section unit 350 match, and the effect operation section cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form one sphere.

In a normal state (state in which the effect operation section unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the elevation drive gear 368 is engaged. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam driving gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c while rolling from the 371c to the left part of the engaging portion 371c of the first cam 371b.

Then, when the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second cam member 371 rotates. Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. At the same time, the button base 354 rises, and the effect operation section unit 350 is in the state of the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The lower lifting spring holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 abuts can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381, although the details will be described later. can. Since the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 can be changed according to the vertical position of the lifting spring lower holding member 385, the effect operation unit 350 is lifted with a projecting force corresponding to the compression amount of the lifting spring 365. Can be protruded into position.

When the effect operating unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam portion 371d of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the effect operation section unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. In addition, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) is moved upward, and the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351 is above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. also protrudes upwards.

When the button main body 351 (pressing operation portion 303) of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of this raised position, the effect operation unit 350 , and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 . When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation section unit 350 (the pressing operation section 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

In this way, when the button base 354 contacts the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the button main body 351 ( Pressing of the pressing operation portion 303) is detected.

In order to return the effect operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. In (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c). is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

In addition, when returning the effect operation section unit 350 to the lowered position, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 moves the lifting spring lower holding member 385 downward to reduce the compression amount of the lifting spring 365. state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevation spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward is weakened, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also increases. It is possible to reduce the load applied to the operation button elevation drive motor 367 that rotates the elevation cam member 371, thereby reducing damage (failure) of the operation button elevation drive motor 367. Also, as the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops, and the guide pin 354c moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the effect operation section unit 350 returns to the original lowered position.

In the above description, in the effect operation section lifting mechanism 360, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise to move the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 to the first cam 371b ( An example has been described in which the button base 354 (button body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at once by moving from the engaging portion 371c) to the second cam 371d. In a normal state where the button main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) is locked by the locking portion 371c of the 371 and is moving to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 moves the lifting cam member 371 in a plan view. You may make it rotate in the direction of rotation. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (the effect operation unit unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in this embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevation cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e. will move upward along the When the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e, if the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 is stopped, the button body 351 can be protruded upward at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. can be stopped. By protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, the button body 351 can be pushed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 can be pushed downward. can function as

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. is desirable. As a result, the load applied to the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 (operation button elevation drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operational feeling of pressing the button body 351 can be reduced.

Thus, depending on the rotational position of the elevation cam member 371, it is possible to change the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350), depending on the game state (for example, the first start opening 2003 and By varying the amount of projection of the button body 351 (according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second start port 2004), it is possible to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game. can.

At least one shallow concave portion capable of engaging the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371. As shown in FIG. As a result, the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same amount of projection, and variations in the amount of projection can be prevented. Further, when a concave portion is provided in at least one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is engaged with the concave portion so that the operation button elevation drive motor 367 stops the elevation cam member 371 from rotating. There is no need to continue, and the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Projection power adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The projection force adjustment mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevation spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward, thereby causing the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) to protrude upward ( projection force) can be changed. The protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 and the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 .

The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and from the gear portion 384a An adjusting screw 384, which has a screw portion 384b extending downward in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on its outer periphery, through which a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported, and an adjusting screw 384, the pair of guide shafts 362 pass therethrough, and the lower ends of the pair of lifting springs 365 are in contact with each other.

The protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to form a gap with the lower surface of the base body 361a. The rotation shaft of the projection force adjusting drive motor 381 protrudes into the gap between it and the base body 361a.

The adjusting screw 384 has a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 to the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . A screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The lower lifting spring holding member 385 includes a main body portion 385a extending in the front-rear direction, a screw hole 385b that penetrates vertically through the center of the main body portion 385a and is screwed with the screw portion 384b, and a front and rear portion of the main body portion 385a. It has spring holding recesses 385c which are provided at both ends and which are recessed downward to accommodate the lower ends of the lifting springs 365, and flat detection pieces 385d which extend upward from the front end of the body portion 385a. . The lift lower spring holding member 385 is penetrated by the guide shafts 362 at the centers of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385 d is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 .

The protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 can rotate the adjusting screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a when the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381 . The projection force adjustment mechanism 380 rotates the adjustment screw 384 by the projection force adjustment drive motor 381, thereby vertically moving the lifting unsprung holding member 385 through the screw hole 385b that meshes with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

In the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved upward, and the compression amount of the lift spring 365 is increased. Become. On the other hand, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the compression amount of the lift spring 365 becomes smaller (see FIG. 56). reference). In other words, when the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved upward, the biasing force of the lifting/lowering spring 365 that urges the effect operating unit 350 upward can be increased, and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward. As a result, the urging force that urges the effect operation section unit 350 upward by the lifting spring 365 can be reduced. As a result, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 can adjust the upward projection force of the effect operation section unit 350 .

The detection piece 385d of the lift unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 when the lift unsprung holding member 385 is raised to the maximum. That is, the detection piece 385d is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 when the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 is maximized. As a result, when the protrusion force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 is moving the lift unsprung member 385 upward, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 moves the lift unsprung member 385 upward. By stopping the upward movement of 385, further compression of the lifting spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 can be prevented.

In addition, as described above, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the projection force of the effect operation unit 350. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position, the contact detection body 352 detects the button main body. Detecting the contact or approach of an object to be detected (for example, a player's finger, etc.) to 351, the production operation unit unit 350 is projected by the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 and brought into contact with the object to be detected. Sometimes, the vertical position of the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 may be appropriately selected to vary the projecting force of the button body 351 . As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be varied, so that if the button body 351 strongly abuts, something good will happen to the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is not possible, and to increase the player's expectation for the game. Therefore, according to the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, according to the game state (for example, according to the lottery result of the special symbol that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2003 and the second start port 2004) By increasing or decreasing the projecting force of the button body 351, it is possible to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the biasing force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the biasing force by twisting the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to protrude the effect operation section unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the biasing force, it is impossible to use a force different from the original use. A large amount of stress will act on the compression coil spring, and there is a risk that the internal structure will deteriorate and break at an early stage. On the other hand, in the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the protrusion force ( Since the urging force) is adjusted, excessive stress does not act on the lifting spring 365, and early deterioration of the lifting spring 365 can be reduced. It can be made to protrude stably over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 and the like. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board, button outer decoration board, and button inner decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58(b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has a performance operation section 301 on the upper surface thereof which can be operated by the player. The effect operation section 301 is composed of a contact operation section 302 capable of being operated by contact or approach of the player's hand, etc., and a pressing operation section 303 capable of pressing operation. The contact operation portion 302 is provided above the pressing operation portion 303 (button main body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state in which the projecting direction of the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation part unit 350) that can project upward is inclined so that the upper part is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. In other words, the center of the effect operation section 301 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300 . As a result, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can easily see the effect operation section 301.例文帳に追加

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation part unit 350) in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button main body 351 of the effect operation part unit 350 is in the state of the effect. It matches the spherical surface of the operation section cover unit 310 . Further, in a normal state, even if the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation portion 303 (the effect operation portion unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical ornament to the player, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the production operation unit 300 has a production operation unit peripheral decoration board 320 arranged below a unit upper cover 312 surrounding the outer circumference of the pressing operation unit 303 (production operation unit unit 350). , an annular button external decoration substrate 355 and an inner button decoration substrate 364 are arranged inside near the outer edge of the pressing operation portion 303 . The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outside in the order of the button outer decoration board 355 and the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 centering on the inside button decoration board 364 . The LEDs 355a inside the button inner decoration substrate 364 and the button outer decoration substrate 355 are arranged below the contact detection body 352, but since the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, it is translucent. Therefore, the light from them can be transmitted upward (toward the player).

The effect operation unit 300 can light-embellish the annular unit upper cover 312 by means of the LEDs 320 a of the effect operation portion peripheral decoration board 320 . In addition, the LEDs 355a of the button external decoration substrate 355 can be used to decorate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button body 351 and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the central portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 can be decorated with light by means of the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364. FIG.

Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the effect operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decoration board 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 are arranged in rows on the circumference, By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the pressing operation portion 303 . In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are arranged concentrically, light is emitted from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, and light is emitted from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to show the player a lighting effect that converges.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a lowered position where the pressing operation part 303 (effect operation part unit 350) is aligned with the surface of the unit top cover 312, as shown in FIG. 58(a). state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is disabled. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable contact operations in accordance with the player-participation type production to be executed.

As an effect (player participatory effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs voice, sound effects, and the like. When the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button main body 351, the process proceeds to the next performance stage. When the contact is detected, the LED 355a of the outer button decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 emit light to decorate the button body 351, so that the player recognizes that the contact operation has been accepted. The touch operation unit 302 may be given an operational feeling. At this time, the degree of expectation for the game (for example, occurrence of an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot" game in which the player is advantageous) is given to the player by means of the emission color, emission brightness, emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351. You may suggest it.

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351 , the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351 . As a result, it is possible to impart an operational feeling to the contact operation section 302, and to make the player strongly recognize that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may give a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game. good.

In addition, as an effect in the normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to prompt the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300, or a voice, sound effect, etc. is output. After that, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact of the player (hand or finger) with the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350). The urging force of the spring 365 protrudes (pops up) upward. More specifically, in a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the cam portion 371a (first cam). 371b), the button base 354 and the effect operation unit 350 (the button main body 351 and the pressing operation unit 303) vigorously protrude upward due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365 to reach the raised position (Fig. 55(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. As the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button body 351 is pushed upward together with the button body 351, so that the player can be greatly surprised. It can attract a lot of attention.

After that, the game shifts to an effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303), and the player is entertained by the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303. FIG. More specifically, when the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is in the raised position and is pressed downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) is activated. When the button body 351 moves downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 , and the detection piece 354 d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373 . As a result, the pressing operation of the button main body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the presentation can be changed with the pressing operation as a trigger, and the player can be entertained by the player participation type presentation.

In addition, during the above effects, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is used to increase or decrease the protrusion force (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to protrude. may be suggested. Further, when the button body 351 is popped up or pressed, the vibration motor 356 may vibrate the button body 351 .

In the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like approaches within the moving range (within the projecting range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is activated. The main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) may be made to protrude upward. As a result, the button main body 351 abuts the player's finger or the like and gives an impact, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In this case as well, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the projection force of the button body 351, so that the player's expectations for the game may be suggested by the strength of the projection force.

In addition, in the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like is outside the projecting range of the upward projecting button body 351 and within a predetermined distance from the projecting button body 351. The button main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) may be projected upward when it is detected that the player approaches the . As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers or the like, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the projecting force of the button body 351 is strengthened or weakened by the projecting force adjusting mechanism 380, and the degree of expectation for the game is suggested to the player by the strength of the wind pressure applied to the player's fingers or the like. You can do it.

Furthermore, as an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, when the button body 351 is projected with a strong projection force by the projection force adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously and a sound (projection sound) is generated, so that the projection sound surprises the player. can be done. In addition, when the button body 351 is projected with a weak projection force by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 projects quietly, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the projection of the button body 351. , the player can be surprised by the fact that the button body 351 suddenly protrudes.

As an effect after projecting the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351), the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is weakened by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the button main body 351 (pressing operation part 303) is generally operated. It is also possible to execute an effect such that a pressing operation similar to that of a pressing button is performed. Alternatively, the pushing force of the lifting spring 365 may be strengthened by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the player presses the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as an effect after the effect operation section unit 350 (the button body 351) is projected, an effect such as contacting the projecting button body 351 may be executed. At this time, since the contact detector 352 has a downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button body 351 may be touched. Also, at this time, it is desirable to increase the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 by the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380. This makes it difficult to move the protruding button body 351, thereby preventing the button body 351 (contact operation) from moving. 302) can be easily operated.

In addition, as an effect for projecting the effect operation unit 350, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction so that the button base 354 The guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d to project the button base 354 (button main body 351) from the lowered position to the raised position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked by the locking portion 371c of the elevation cam member 371 and the button main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button is lifted and lowered. The drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in plan view, thereby moving the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and moving the elevation cam member 371 in the middle of the third cam 371e. may be stopped so that the upward projection of the button body 351 is stopped at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 .

Thus, even when the button body 351 is protruded halfway by the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed, and the button body 351 can function as the pressing operation portion 303. Thus, the player can enjoy the player-participation type production. In this case, since the amount of upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be varied according to the rotational position of the elevation cam member 371, the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , can entertain the player.

Furthermore, as an effect of pressing the projected effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), after projecting the effect operation unit 350, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the lifting spring 365. be minimized. As a result, since the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is in the weakest state, the effect operation section unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is improved. can entertain. In addition, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351), the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn. The biasing force may be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can be made to press the effect operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operation force of the effect operation unit 350, and more diverse An effect can be presented, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

In addition, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detection body is provided so that the contact of the player's finger or the like to the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at a plurality of contact stages (approach stage). A plurality of stages of threshold values corresponding to the capacitance of 352 may be provided, and the effect may be changed according to each stage. In other words, focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 increases as the player's finger or the like approaches the button body 351 (contact detection body 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. may be provided to detect in multiple stages and be utilized for production. Specifically, for example, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are away from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 and are not in contact with the button body 351, By dividing the stage into stages in which a player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351, etc., and changing the performance according to each stage, even one contact detection sensor body 358 presents a variety of performances to the player. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

In the above-described embodiment, as a normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 385 has been moved upward, but this is not a limitation, and as shown in FIG. It may be in a state of being moved downward. As a result, since the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed in a normal state, early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365 can be suppressed. Further, the urging force of the strongly compressed lift spring 365 can prevent early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lower lift spring holding member 385 .

As described above, according to the production operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for various patterns of player participation type production, the player can be entertained with various productions, and the player is bored. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult.

By the way, the effect operation unit 300 is provided with an annular (two circular arcs combined) effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 on the upper part of the spherical effect operation part cover unit 310, and the effect operation part outer periphery A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided in the effect operation section unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decoration board 320 . In addition, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operating unit 350, a button middle decoration substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode ) approaches the production operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board 364, and the proximity of the production operation section outer circumference decoration board 320 and the button inside decoration board 364 changes the capacitance of the sensor electrode, and the contact detection sensor There is a possibility that the main body 358 may make an erroneous detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) is provided between the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decoration board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 or the inside button decoration board 364 changes, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is moved by moving the production operation section unit 350 up and down. , and between the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board 364, a shield connected to a ground (GND) that does not change the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 allows the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board It is possible to reduce the influence of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, and to prevent erroneous detection in the main body 358 of the contact detection sensor.

[3-5 f. Another embodiment of the plate unit]
Next, a plate unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of an effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) shows the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a). and (c) is a representation in which the left plate decoration unit, the right plate decoration unit, and the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can move forward and backward. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of an operation unit or the like; FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative touch detector, and FIG. 61(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. In addition, in FIGS. 59 to 61, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right contact detection body 390L and right contact detection body 390R on the lower side of the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. A left contact detection sensor main body 391L and a right contact detection sensor main body 391R are connected to the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, on the top surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves his or her finger or the like from the left side to the right side, when the player's finger or the like is positioned on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L changes and the left contact detection sensor main body 391L becomes detection, while the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R does not change and the right contact detection sensor body 391R remains non-detection. becomes. Then, when the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button main body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R changes, causing the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the contact detection sensor body to change. Both right 391R are detected. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L returns to its original state, and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes non-detection, and the electrostatic capacity of the right contact detection body 390R The capacitance has changed and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R continues to detect.

In this way, the combination of detection and non-detection of the left contact detection sensor main body 391L and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R and the pattern of the change, the movement of the player's fingers etc. can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect contact operations with more diverse movements, and to present to the player a player-participation-type effect that allows the contact operation unit 302 to perform various contact operations. , the player-participation-type effect that operates the contact operation unit 302 can be more enjoyable. It should be noted that more complicated motions can be detected by increasing the number of contact detection bodies.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60( a ) is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor body 392 . According to this embodiment, a single contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact of a human body or the like at any one of the contact detection bodies 393 in a state in which the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of mutually different locations. can do.

For example, by distributing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 inside (lower side) of the button body 351, even if the player's finger or the like touches any part of the surface of the button body 351, the A contact can be detected by the contact detection body 393, and the accuracy of detecting contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

In addition, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 may be used as a part of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a part where the player may get injured, or where there is a risk of causing annoyance to other players). A certain part, a part where there is a risk of fraudulent conduct, etc.) may be provided so that when any of the contact detectors 393 detects a human body or the like, a caution or warning may be issued.

Further, the embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is a switching mechanism that connects only one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor body 392 between one contact detection sensor body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393. This is an example in which a portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact of a human body or the like only at a desired site (contact detection body 352). . The switching unit 394 may be "switched by a switching circuit using relays or transistors", "switched by other electronic circuits", or "a movable member (for example, a movable dish left decoration as shown in FIG. 60(c)"). The unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 are switched along with the movement".

For example, in the production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type production is executed such that the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Sometimes, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched in the order of touching by the switching part 394, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not the player's finger or the like touches. good. As a result, it is possible to present to the player a player-participation-type presentation with a high game quality by the plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(c), when the left plate decoration unit 270, the right plate decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 are configured to move forward and backward, the front side of the effect operation unit 300 is the first When the contact detection body 393a is provided and the second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation unit 300 and the like are projected forward, The first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, and when the effect operation unit 300 and the like are retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching part 394. You may make it switch so that it may carry out.

As a result, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is protruded (moved) forward, the contact or approach of the player is detected by the first contact detection body 393a, and the forward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped. to As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance operation unit 300 or the like from unnecessarily pressing the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, thereby avoiding the player from feeling uncomfortable. be able to.

On the other hand, if the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, a gap may be formed behind the effect operation unit 300 or the like. If the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, the second contact detection body 393b is switched to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching portion 394 when the effect operation unit 300 or the like moved forward is moved backward. Then, when the player's finger or the like is detected by the second contact detection body 393b, the rearward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped, and the finger or the like is released from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. is notified to the player, and only when the second contact detection body 393b is in a non-detection state, the effect operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward to return to the initial state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured due to the gap behind the effect operation unit 300 and the like, and the safety of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), the outer shape of the contact detection body 395 for detecting the contact of the player's fingers or the like is made star-shaped to have decorativeness (design). Note that the shape of the decorative contact detection body 395 is not limited to a star shape, but is circular, polygonal, geometrically patterned, a shape imitating a predetermined character, or a shape imitating a predetermined item. A shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, or the like may be used. Thereby, the contact detection body 395 that can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), so that the contact detection body 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and thus the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, but is not limited to this, and the contact detection body can be made of metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. It should be noted that the contact detection body is preferably provided on the back side of the transparent surface member so as not to be directly touched by the player's fingers or the like. can be smooth.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the button interior decoration board 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detection body 352, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. A contact detection body 397 may be provided under the transparent surface member 396, and a decoration body 398 may be provided therebelow. As a result, the decoration body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the performance operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. can.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61(b), the contact detection body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and in a normal state, the metallic luster of the contact detection body 397 prevents the decorative body 398 provided below from being visually recognized. Alternatively, the decoration 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397 by illuminating the decoration 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396 or the like. good.

Also, the contact detection body 352 may be formed so that it cannot be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detection body include "a body formed of a transparent member" and "a body formed so as to be seen integrally with the decoration of the surface member such as the button body". As a result, since the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, it does not detect the contact of the player's finger or the like or perform a contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player-participation type effect is executed and the player's finger or the like touches or approaches the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By causing the player to notice the existence of the contact detection body 352 (contact operation part 302) for the first time, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decline in interest. can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. Figure 62 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along line Wu-Wu in FIG. 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421. A door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422 a are mounted vertically and arranged at regular intervals on the front surface, and a door frame left side base 421 are attached to the lower front surface of the door frame left side base 421. The front side of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted vertically at regular intervals on the front surface are covered. A left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421, a left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and a door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425 .

In addition, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides forward the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and an upper and lower light guide member 427 in the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. From the left side middle light guide member 428 that guides forward the light from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction, and the first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction on the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame and a left-side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, like the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the inner layer 3a is partly outside. A circular or radial pattern is formed by penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 422b is mounted. A 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 12 full-color LEDs, ie, four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b, are mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. As shown in FIG. Moreover, the first LED 422a having the second LEDs 422b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 422b. Also, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets of two from the top, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit full-color light from the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups. Thus, one set is controlled by a total of 15 systems, ie, 3 systems.

Although not shown, this door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. are connected. Then, in the LED driver 422c of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), two sets of The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can be caused to emit light with appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and the right side thereof is formed unevenly. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 423b is mounted. A 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. As shown in FIG.

A total of 18 full-color LEDs, ie, 6 first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b, are mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. As shown in FIG. Moreover, the first LED 423a having the second LEDs 423b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two in order from the top. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to third from the top, three from the fourth to sixth from the top, and from the seventh to ninth from the top. , and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit 6 first LEDs 423a divided into 3 groups and 12 second LEDs 423b divided into 4 groups in full color. Thus, one set is controlled by a total of 21 systems, ie, 3 systems.

Although illustration is omitted, this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. are connected. Then, in the LED driver 423c of the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), three sets of The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be caused to emit light with appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 has a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 424b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts against the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the front side around the through hole 424a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

A cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of a left side upper light guide member 427 described later is inserted into the holding tube 424b of the left side upper reflector 424, thereby holding the light guide shaft portion 427a straight in the front-rear direction. is. This holding cylinder 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427 projecting forward through the holding cylinder 424b, the second light guide plate 422 of the door frame left upper decorative substrate 422 facing through the through holes 424a on both upper and lower sides thereof is formed. The light from the LED 422b irradiates the light guide shaft portion 427a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides, so that the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

Further, the left side upper reflector 424 is provided with a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame left side base 421 in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 .

The left side lower reflector 425 has a through hole 425a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the front side around the through hole 425a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

A columnar light guide shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guide member 428 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guide member 429, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Thus, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. This holding tube 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that protrude forward through the holding tube 425b, the through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof are formed. The light from the second LED 423b of the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, which faces the door frame more, irradiates the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decorative body 426. - 特許庁

Further, the left side lower reflector 425 is provided with an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 .

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating in the front-rear direction at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 426 a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding tube 424 b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding tube 425 b of the left side lower reflector 425 . In these openings 426a, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left lower light guide member 429, are inserted from behind. The door frame left side decoration 426 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421 . In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a certain shape recessed in an arc so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. are doing.

The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424. As shown in FIG. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft 427a passes through the holding cylinder 424b of the left upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . This left-side upper light guide member 427 guides forward the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left-side upper decorative substrate 422 by the light guide shaft portion 427a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left-side center light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft portions 428a that extend forward and backward in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 428b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 428a are vertically spaced at regular intervals so as to correspond to the upper three holding cylinders 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425. As shown in FIG. In addition, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . This left side middle light guide member 428 guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 428a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left-side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 429a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the left-side lower reflector 425. As shown in FIG. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a passes through the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . The left side lower light guide member 429 guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial patterned portion of the door frame left side base 421 is the same color as the circular or radial patterned portion of the handle cover 295 . In addition, the color of the portion of the door frame left side base 421 outside the circular or radial pattern is the same as the color of the portion of the handle cover 295 outside the circular or radial pattern.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction projects slightly forward than the portion below, and the vicinity of the lower end gently curves to the right. The upper end of the door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and the lower end thereof is below the door window 101a and is located on the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. is located above the speaker mouth 211b in the . The upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located outside the left side of the door frame top unit 450 . The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks like a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door-frame left-side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door-frame left-side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door-frame left-side lower decoration substrate 423 are placed at a certain distance rearward from the front surface of the door-frame left-side decoration 426 . is provided, the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread and is irradiated to the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the door frame The left side decoration body 426 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 rearward. is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the upper left light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the middle light guide member 428 on the left side, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the lower light guide member 429 on the left side. As a result, the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be illuminated more brightly than the other portions.

Also, the first LED 422 a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 , the first LED 423 a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 , the light guide shaft portion 427 a of the left side upper light guide member 427 , and the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided in the center between the adjacent two second LEDs 422b and 423b. As a result, the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a irradiate the light with an even amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decorative body 426 from behind, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 is evenly distributed. It can be decorated with light emission in a plane.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative portion 426b extending along the width center in the horizontal direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. As a result, even if the light from the second LED 422b or the second LED 423b projects the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a onto the door frame left side decorative body 426, , Since the decorative portion 426b is provided at the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be made difficult to understand, and the left side of the door frame The appearance of the luminous decoration of the side decorations 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. Figure 66 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the door-frame right side unit from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--E in FIG. 66(a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431. A door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface and arranged vertically at regular intervals, and a door frame right side base 431. A door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, a door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and a door frame right side lower A right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433, and a door frame right side attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. A side decoration 435 is provided.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides forward the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and a right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side lower decorative board. A right-side lower light guide member 437 that guides light from one LED 433a forward is provided.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is attached so as to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape. The left side decoration 438 is provided between the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438. A light-transmitting right side left lens 439 having a fitting decorative portion 439a, and a plurality of light-transmissive right side left lenses 439 and a right side base 431 of the door frame are mounted so as to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431, and penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape. A door frame right side right side decoration 440 having a decorative hole 440a is provided between the door frame right side right side decoration 440 and the door frame right side base 431. A translucent right-side right lens 441 having a decorative portion 441a fitted to close the decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440 is provided.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a substantially constant width on the left and right. Further, the door frame right side base 431 has a rear end side that extends vertically over the entire height, and a front end side that extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to near the center in the vertical direction, and then curves rearward. After extending diagonally rearward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens 439). A plurality of reflector portions 431a recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extending forward to the front end are provided at a portion of the height where the decorative portion 441a) of 441 is provided. These reflector portions 431a have rear end sides that are inside the decorative portions 439a and 441a and are inclined toward the side surfaces, and have curved bottom surfaces.

In addition, the door frame right side base 431 is provided with a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a which are provided behind the front-back direction center in the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. The reflector part 431a corresponding to (decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441) is a , penetrates in the left and right direction (they are recessed from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

These reflector portions 431a of the door-frame right-side base 431 reflect light emitted backward from a third LED 432c of a door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and a third LED 433c of a door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433, which will be described later. The light is reflected in the direction, and the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 are decorated with light (see FIG. 70, etc.).

The door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 432b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame with a gap in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light.

On this door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a total of 16 full-color LEDs are mounted, including four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. Moreover, the first LED 432a having the second LEDs 432b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 432b. Moreover, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two LEDs and the remaining two LEDs. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets of two from the top, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. divided. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the top two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c. and the third LED 432c to emit light in full color, respectively, there are 21 systems in total, 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems. He is trying to control a total of 24 systems|strains of 3 systems|strains for 1 group above the 3rd LED433c divided into 2 groups.

Although not shown, this door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and an LED Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires, one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. Then, in the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), two sets of 4 first LEDs 432a divided into 4, 8 second LEDs 432b divided into 3 groups, 4 third LEDs 432c divided into 2 groups, and 2 The two third LEDs 433c in the upper group out of the grouped groups can be caused to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 433b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light.

On this door frame right side lower decorative board 433, a total of 22 full-color LEDs are mounted: 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c. Moreover, 1st LED433a in which 2nd LED433b is provided in the upper-lower both sides is provided in the center (center between) of those 2nd LED433b. At least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two in order from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are 3 LEDs from 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 from 4th to 6th from the top, and 7th to 9th from the top. , and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is divided into three sets of first LEDs 433a, four sets of second LEDs 433b, and two sets of third LEDs 433c. and the third LED 433c to emit light in full color, respectively, there are 27 systems in total, 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 can control only up to 24 systems at the maximum. Among them, 3 systems for one set on the upper side are controlled by the LED driver 432d of the upper decoration board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side, and the third LED 433c on the rear side ) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame. This can suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although illustration is omitted, this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 has two LEDs for supplying electric power for driving a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, two lower third LEDs 433c, and an LED driver 433d. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A clock line and a distribution cable consisting of four electric wires are connected. Then, in the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), three sets of Six first LEDs 433a divided into four sets, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and two third LEDs 433c of the lower set of the two sets, each set It is possible to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity every time.

The right side reflector 434 is formed with through holes 434a penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. In addition, a cylindrical holding tube 434b extending back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 434a contacts the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. Around the sides it is shaped like a dish widening forward. Thereby, the light from 2nd LED432b and 2nd LED433b can be diffused widely ahead.

A columnar light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434. , the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. This holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a projecting forward through the holding cylinder 434b, the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 facing through the through holes 434a on both upper and lower sides thereof, The light from the second LED 433b of the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame irradiates the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from appearing on the back side of 435.

Further, the right side reflector 434 is provided with a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame right side base 431 at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 .

The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. This door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinders 434b of the right side reflector 434. As shown in FIG. The tip ends of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from behind. The door frame right side decoration 435 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 . The door frame right side decoration 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decoration 426 . In addition, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a constant shape recessed in an arc so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. are doing.

The right-side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft portions 436a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 436a. , made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals from above the right side reflector 434 so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The surface of the decorative body 435 is matched. This right side upper light guide member 436 guides the light from the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be brightly illuminated.

The right-side lower light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft portions 437a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a. , made of a transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are vertically spaced apart from the bottom of the right side reflector 434 so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The surface of the decorative body 435 is matched. This right side lower light guide member 437 guides the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be brightly illuminated.

The door frame right side left side decoration body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decoration holes 438a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side left side decoration 438 has a front end side formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration 435 . The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the door-frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 is two-color-molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, in the same manner as the handle cover 295 and the door-frame left-side base 421 described above. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side left side decoration body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decoration 438 . It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a, when fitted into the decorative hole 438a, matches the outer (left) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 . The decorative portion 439a of the right-side left lens 439 is positioned to the left of the reflector portion 431a in the door-frame right-side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decoration. Light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for decoration.

Also, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 . As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side left side decoration 438. It looks the same as the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 439a that is decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in the horizontal direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side right side decoration 440 has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 . The door frame right side right side decoration 440 is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the total height of the door frame 3 . In addition, the door frame right side right side decoration 440 is formed such that the front end side from the upper end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b follows the rear end of the door frame right side decoration 435 .

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decoration 440 includes the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b in the same manner as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decoration 438. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and protrudes rightward to the right side of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a matches the outer (right) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 when fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 . The decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 is located on the right side of the reflector portion 431a in the door-frame right-side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decoration Light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for decoration.

Also, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side right side decoration 440 . As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decoration 440 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side right side decoration 440. It looks the same as the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decoration part 441a that is decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the colors of the circular and radial pattern portions of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are the same as those of the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side. It is formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned portion of the side base 421, and is outside the circular or radial patterns of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. is formed to have the same color as the color of the portion outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward more than the same height portion of the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed to have substantially the same height as the door frame 3 from its upper end to its lower end. The door frame right side unit 430 has an upper portion located outside the right side of the door frame top unit 450 .

The door frame right side unit 430, in a state assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 protrudes greatly forward from the top to about half the height, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for a player seated in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacently on the right side of the island facility of the game hall to see the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed like a screen, it is possible to block the line of sight of players located nearby, making it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a. By making it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, the other players can play without hesitation.

According to the door-frame right-side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433 are provided at positions that are somewhat backward from the front surface of the door-frame right-side decorative body 435 . is provided, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is sufficiently spread and is irradiated to the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435, so that the door frame The right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration board 432 provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration body 435 rearward. The light from the first LED 433a of 433 is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and the door frame The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated more brightly than the other portions.

Furthermore, the door-frame right-side unit 430 emits light from the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433, so that the reflector portion of the door-frame right-side base 431 is illuminated. 431a, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 that is attached can be decorated with light emission. In addition, since a part of the left and right sides of the screen-like door frame right side unit 430 (portion of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) can be decorated with light, the pachinko machine 1 can be used by other players. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be conspicuous and which has a high appeal to the players.

Further, according to the door-frame right-side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the front-side LED 432b on the front side of the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433 The first LED 433a and the second LED 433b illuminate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side. Together with the third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration 435 are decorated with light. Therefore, due to the presence of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b is emitted from the rear door. The frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are illuminated to be decorated with light, and the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiates the door frame right side decoration 435 on the front side. luminous decoration or prevent it. As a result, the right-side door-frame decoration 435 and the right-side left-side door-frame decoration 438 and right-side right-side door-frame decoration 440 on the rear side can be made completely independent of each other to be decorated with light. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a player with a light emitting performance with a higher performance effect.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and a light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided in the center between the adjacent two second LEDs 432b and 433b. As a result, the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with a uniform amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from behind, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be evenly and planarly decorated with light.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame right side decorative body 435 has a decorative portion 435b extending along the width center in the horizontal direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. . As a result, even if the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b causes the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a to be projected onto the door frame right side decorative body 435, the shadow is not projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided at the portion where the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a are located, the shadow of the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a can be obscured. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) connecting the bottom end of the.

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration board 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; (see Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451, and a pair of top speakers provided on both left and right sides of the pair of top center speakers. Side speakers (not shown), a box-shaped speaker box with the top center speaker and top side speakers facing diagonally downward and forward, and a door frame top decoration covering the front of the top center speaker and top side speakers A top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the body 453, a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end of the front surface of the door frame top base 451, and above the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the door frame.

The door-frame top base 451 extends laterally by approximately the same length as the distance between the door-frame left-side unit 420 and the door-frame right-side unit 430 . The top cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely notched forward from the rear end. This opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decorative body 453 extends laterally in a semicircular arc along the front end of the top upper cover 452 in plan view. The front surface of the door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs 455a to emit light.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decoration substrate 456 can light-embellish the left portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs 456a to emit light.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 457a.

A pair of top center speakers are spaced left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as speech and music over a wide frequency band. The pair of top-side speakers are tweeters and output high-pitched sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker and top side speakers are radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 , a door frame top left decorative board 456 , a door frame top right decorative board 457 , a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a door frame secondary of the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are sunk from the front to the rear portion of the upper inner side of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 . It is Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side through a pair of top central speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame is made opaque, is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration 271 and the plate right decoration 276 of the plate unit 200, the unit upper cover 312 and the button main body 351 of the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate left decoration 271, a plate right decoration 276, a door frame left side decoration 426, a door frame right side decoration 435, and a door frame top decoration 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed into a semi-tubular shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, a plate left decoration 271, a plate right decoration 276, a unit upper cover 312, a door frame left side decoration 426, a door frame right side decoration 435, and a door frame surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decoration 453 are the left plate decoration board 273, the right plate decoration board 278, the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422, the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, and the door frame. Since the right side upper decoration board 432, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, these decoration boards are arranged. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light, and the player can be shown a light emitting performance such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical performance operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction is attached to the center in the horizontal direction. As a result, since the large spherical effect operation unit 300 is positioned in the center of the plate unit 200, the visual impact can be enhanced. The operation unit 303) can be conspicuous.

In addition, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button main body 351 as the effect operation section 301 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to be continuous, thereby forming a single sphere. , the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) can be made difficult to recognize that the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) can be operated, and the effect operation unit 300 consisting of a huge sphere allows the player to see other This pachinko machine can be made to recognize that it is a pachinko machine 1 different from a pachinko machine, can strongly attract the interest of the player, can enhance the appeal to the player, and can be used as a pachinko machine to play. It is possible to facilitate the selection of the machine 1.

In addition, in the plate unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation section 301 (the contact operation section 302 , and the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the gigantic sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the production operation section 301 can easily see the entire production operation section 301, and the production operation section 301 can be easily seen. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to make the player strongly want to operate the gigantic spherical performance operation section 301, and to heighten expectations for execution of the player-participation type performance by operating the performance operation section 301.例文帳に追加At the same time, when the player participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the performance operation unit 301, and the player participation type performance can be enjoyed by the operation of the performance operation unit 301 to increase interest. A decrease can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of this embodiment has a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface. FIG. 71 shows a door frame right side unit 430 as an example of a part of the exterior of the door frame 3 .

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, a plurality of circular and radial patterns applied to the outer surface are formed in two colors using two types of synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is two-color molded with two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. Circular and radial patterns are formed by appearing on the outer surface.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. The honeycomb pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the part other than the pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b. Radial patterns become difficult to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 molded in two colors as part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted into the decorative hole 440a is a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decoration body 440, even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the pattern of the decoration hole 440a (decoration portion 441a) does not change.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding. By appropriately selecting and combining the color of resin), light transmittance, etc., it is possible to greatly change the appearance even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, when minor changes are made, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed on the island equipment to give a colorful feeling to the players. It is possible to enhance the appeal to

Although two-color molding is shown in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the exterior is configured by combining the right side right lens 441 with the two-color molded door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a circular or radial pattern is formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side are provided outside the door window 101a facing forward from the game area 5a of the door frame 3. Decorative bodies such as the surface decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are two-color molded (multicolor molding) with two synthetic resins having different light transmittances, and a polka dot decoration is formed by the two-color molding. Since the decoration body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is applied to the decoration body at the same time. There is no need to apply a desired decoration by painting or the like after forming the substrate in a flat shape.

In addition, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when the polka dot decoration is formed by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a forming the inner side of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle are light-transmissive. When the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are formed in the same color with different ratios, since the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, the polka-dot circles are difficult to see, and the appearance looks as if the polka-dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inner side of the polka dot circle is colored white and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle is colored pink, the color difference between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b causes The polka-dot circles become clearly visible, giving the appearance of a pink background decorated with white polka-dots. Thus, when forming the decoration, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used, the appearance of the decoration can be easily changed. Cost can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, when forming the decoration, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decoration can be easily changed. When the combination of synthetic resins used is changed for each lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a line on the island equipment, the island equipment is made colorful. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of exerting a strong impact on the players who are playing in the game hall and attracting the players.

Further, a handle cover 295 having decorations molded in two colors from a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances on a portion of the door frame 3 outside the door window 101a where the game area 5a faces forward, and a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side decoration 438, and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are provided, so that the outside of the door window 101a is decorated with the decorations to improve the appearance. can be done.

Further, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color-molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. Thus, the boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) formed by the inner layer 3a can be clearly seen, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layers 3a, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. In order to prevent the inner layer 3a from being seen through from the outside, the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a synthetic resin having a high light transmittance for the outer layer 3b at the time of a model change. As a result, the way of looking at the decoration of the decoration can be greatly changed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decoration.

In addition, as described above, the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance makes it difficult to see the inner layer 3a, so that the surface of the inner layer 3a has a pattern (pattern by shape, painting, printing, attaching a sticker, etc.). In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b. By using such a synthetic resin, the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through, so the appearance (decoration) of the decoration can be greatly changed without changing the shape of the decoration. , it is possible to suppress the increase in cost for model change.

Furthermore, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate that can irradiate the inside of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. 433, and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the others, the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the door frame 440 emit light, the inner side of the decorations formed on the surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 The portion of the layer 3a (portion of polka dots) can be decorated with bright light, and the outer side of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light, thereby improving the appearance and allowing the player to see the right side of the door frame. The luminous decorations of the side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be enjoyed, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a can also illuminate the outer layer 3b. The entire side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 can be decorated with light emission, and the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 are displayed neatly and the game is played. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting the attention of players.

In addition, as described above, the decoration of the decorative bodies such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molding (multicolor molding) of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances. Since it is formed by molding), the LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface and the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that is visible when the LED is not lit can be made different from the decoration that is visible when the LED is illuminated, and the change in the decoration can strongly attract the player's interest. In detail, for example, taking two-color molding as an example of multi-color molding, when a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is caused to emit light. Without it, only the surface-exposed portions of the inner layer 3a are visible. On the other hand, when the LED emits light, the light from the LED directly irradiates the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion of the inner layer 3a where the hole is formed. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a becomes visible, and the part exposed to the surface and the part of the hole in the inner layer 3a can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not illuminated can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED emits yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green (or white) light, both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion of the surface are luminous decoration. The part to be illuminated can be varied, and the decoration to be illuminated can be changed. In this way, the decoration of the decorative body can be made different by the light emission of the LED, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by causing the LED to emit light according to the game state, the change in the decoration of the decorative body informs the player of the arrival of a chance or the change of the hitting operation (for example, "right hitting"). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of suggesting and capable of various performances.

In addition, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a) have different projection amounts in the front-rear direction, Since the pachinko machine 1 can give different impressions (appearances) when viewed from the left front and from the right front, the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player passes in front of the pachinko machine 1 once, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is different from that of the previous excursion, thereby attracting interest in the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be made to attract players who are wandering around the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 to select the pachinko machine 1 to play. .

[3-10. Arrangement and system of LEDs in the door frame]
Next, the arrangement of each LED provided on the door frame 3 and the control system will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73 and the like. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the portion of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner in the front view, for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player's rotating operation. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b from which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b, and has an appearance similar to that of an automobile steering wheel.

The handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a whose front side is covered with a handle front lens 185. Between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a, a handle decoration substrate 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided. is provided. A handle cover decorative substrate 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on its front surface is provided behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. As shown in FIG.

The number of handle decoration substrates 184 is 1 in the center, 3 in the middle circumference at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and 6 at regular intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10. LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by dashed lines in FIG. and two on the lower side of the outer circumference. The LEDs 184a divided into these five groups are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 184b, and each group of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, 12 LEDs 293a are arranged in a row on the handle cover decorative substrate 293 with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. It is divided into 6 groups, 2 on the bottom right and . The LEDs 293a divided into these six groups are controlled in 18 systems by an LED driver 293b, and the LEDs 293a in each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, so that the light is emitted to rotate around the handle 195, and the light is emitted toward the center of the handle 195. A player can be shown a light-emitting effect in which light is concentrated and a light-emitting effect in which light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195.例文帳に追加Also, the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 can be illuminated by the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293. FIG.

Further, the door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decorative body 276, the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The plate left decoration 271, the plate right decoration 276, the door frame left side decoration 426, the door frame right side decoration 435, and the door frame top decoration 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, a plate left decoration substrate 273 behind the plate left decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a plate right decoration substrate 278 behind the plate right decoration 276, Door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 behind door frame left side decoration 426, door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and door frame right behind door frame right side decoration 435 A side lower decorative board 433, a door frame top central decorative board 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided facing forward.

More specifically, four LEDs 273a are mounted on the front surface of the plate left decorative substrate 273 in a row in the horizontal direction, and an LED driver for causing the LEDs 273a and the LEDs 273a of the plate right decorative substrate 278 to be described later to emit light. (illustration is omitted). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The LEDs 273a divided into these two groups are controlled in six systems by an LED driver, and the LEDs 273a of each group can emit light in appropriate full colors.

The plate right decorative board 278 has four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The LEDs 278a divided into these two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the plate left decorative board 273, and the LEDs 278a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two of each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 422a. It has eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for driving a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72, the upper two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to eight It is divided into three sets of three pieces up to the first one. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 422c. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two of each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 423a. It has 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top, as indicated by the chain double-dashed lines in FIG. 72, the 12 second LEDs 423b are three LEDs from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top , 3 from the 7th to 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to 12th from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled in 21 systems by an LED driver 423c. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, four first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a on the front surface. It has eight mounted second LEDs 432b and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. In addition, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 emits light from a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, and two third LEDs 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. LED driver 432d. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The eight second LEDs 432b are connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72, the upper two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to eight from the top. It is divided into three sets of three pieces up to the first one. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The first LED 432a divided into two groups, the second LED 432b divided into three groups, the third LED 432c divided into two groups, and the third group divided into two groups in the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 A set of third LEDs 433c on the upper side of the LEDs 433c is controlled by 24 systems by an LED driver 432d. It can emit light in full color.

On the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, there are six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two LEDs arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a on the front surface. 12 mounted second LEDs 433b, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface with a gap in the vertical direction, the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the lower two third LEDs 433c. and an LED driver 433d for emitting light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top, as indicated by the chain double-dashed lines in FIG. 72, the 12 second LEDs 433b are three LEDs from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top. , 3 from the 7th to 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to 12th from the top. Further, the rear four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by broken lines in FIG. 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 groups, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 groups, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the 2 groups , LED driver 433d, and the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c of each set can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a and the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 423 provided on the right side of the door window 101a are used. The substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are formed in a shape asymmetrical with respect to the lateral center of the door window 101a. In addition, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 and the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 have different shapes in the front-rear direction. .

The door-frame left-side upper decorative board 422 and the door-frame left-side lower decorative board 423, and the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433 are mounted on the respective front surfaces. While the numbers of one LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b and first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b are the same, the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. 72 A system connected by a chain line or a two-dot chain line) is provided symmetrically. As a result, it is possible to easily create the data of the lighting pattern of the LEDs for performing the lighting effect.

On the door frame top center decorative board 455, there are six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the horizontal direction, the LEDs 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. and an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled in nine systems by an LED driver, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in full colors as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface with a left-right opening. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface with a left-right direction opening. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, And the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 passes through the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The light guide shaft portion 429 a of the light member 429 , the light guide shaft portion 436 a of the right side upper light guide member 436 , and the light guide shaft portion 437 a of the right side lower light guide member 437 form the opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426 . The light is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, in front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, the player can see a light emitting effect of emitting bright light in a dot shape, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. A player can be surprised by a light-emitting effect of flashing spot light.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the plate left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the plate right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the door frame left side lower Second LED 423b of decorative board 423, second LED 432b of door frame right side upper decorative board 432, second LED 433b of door frame right side lower decorative board 433, LED 455a of door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board The LED 456a of 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are appropriately illuminated to light-embellish the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to perform light emission so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. can be shown to or played by the player.

That is, in the door frame 3, the system of LEDs connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. In FIG. 72, the system of the LEDs connected by the dashed line allows the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to perform planar light emission (surface light emission). can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is transferred to the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a. By the shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is guided to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and forward from there. Therefore, compared with the general surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the parts of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be illuminated brightly with high brightness. . At this time, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 Even if the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is spot-lighted with high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a viewed from the door window 101a is not difficult to see due to the glare, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the performance image, the decorative body, etc. within the area 5a can be visually recognized in good condition.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are projected forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 projecting forward (connecting the front ends projecting forward in an arc shape in plan view). Since it is provided on a straight line in the vertical direction, the light of the spot emission is not irradiated to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected toward the player side by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and is emitted behind the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a is not difficult to see, and by emitting spot light with high brightness, other players can be attracted to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, according to the door frame 3, the parts for spot light emission are provided in the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 which protrude forward outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot light emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer circumference of the pachinko machine 1 . Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player does not block the light of the spot light emission because the spot light emitting portion is located outside the player. As a result, when the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are spot-lighted, even other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the high-intensity spot light. Therefore, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the interest of the players can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine in the game hall can be used to select the pachinko machine to play. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of attracting players who are wandering around to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, on both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422 a, first LED 423 a, first LED 432 a, first LED 433 a) for spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 The surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) preferably belong to the same system. As a result, both sides sandwiching the light guide pins (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED Since the surface LEDs have the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation portion 302 in the effect operation portion 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on the upper surface. It has a performance operation part peripheral decoration board 320. - 特許庁This performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 includes two LED drivers for causing the 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The effect operation part peripheral decoration board 320 is divided into two parts, a front decoration board 321 and a rear decoration board 322 .

18 LEDs 320a out of 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decoration board 321 in the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320. As shown in FIG. Of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321, 6 are spaced apart on the circumference near the inner periphery, and 3 are spaced apart on the circumference between the inner periphery and the outer periphery. , and the remaining nine are spaced on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration board 322 of the effect operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. As shown in FIG. Of the thirteen LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322, four are provided on the circumference near the inner circumference, two at intervals near both ends of the arc, and three are provided midway between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. They are spaced on the circumference, and the remaining six are spaced on the circumference near the outer circumference, three by three near the ends of the arc.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decoration substrate 321 are connected by a dashed line in FIG. are divided into three sets of one piece each, and three sets of three pieces each of the nine pieces on the outer circumference in the circumferential direction, a total of nine sets. The 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decoration board 322 are connected by a dashed line in FIG. There are 3 sets of 3 pieces each, and 2 sets of 9 pieces near each end of the outer circumference. In other words, on the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. These 16 groups of LEDs 320a are controlled in 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to this effect operation unit peripheral decoration board 320, by appropriately emitting light from the 31 LEDs 320a of 48 systems, the effect operation unit 301 emits light such that the light rotates, or emits light such that the light concentrates at the center. It is possible to show the player a performance or a light emission performance in which the light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame 3 extends vertically along the door window 101a to the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a on one side and the other in the left-right direction so that the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction differs from each other. A door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration are provided. Door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted and door frame left side lower decorations on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted behind each of 435 A substrate 423, a door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted. is provided, and the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 and forward Light guide shaft portion 427a of left side upper light guide member 427, light guide shaft portion 428a of left side middle light guide member 428, light guide shaft portion 429a of left side lower light guide member 429, right side upper light guide member. 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the right side of the door frame. The second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper decorative substrate 432 and the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame emit light, thereby the left side decoration 426 of the door frame and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame. It is possible to make planar light emitting decoration (surface light emission), and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward passes through the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is radiated forward from the front ends (front end surfaces) of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435. Corresponding to the tip of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a in the frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 You can make the part where you are in a point-like light-emitting decoration (spot light emission).

Therefore, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side upper decoration board 422, the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432, and the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 are The second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b are caused to emit light appropriately, so that the door frame left side decorative body provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 may be light-emitting decorated in a plane, or a part of the left-side door-frame decoration 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 may be light-emitting, or the left side of the door frame may be decorated. The entire side decoration body 426 and the right side decoration body 435 of the door frame can be illuminated in a planar manner and a part thereof can be decorated in a point manner, so that the player can see various lighting effects. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game and keeps the player entertained, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are divided, and the door frame right side A plurality of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b of the upper side decoration board 432 and the lower right side decoration board 433 of the door frame are symmetrical to each other. Since the plurality of first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the plurality of second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are different systems, the left side of the door frame Lighting patterns of the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b on the decorative body 426 side and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side. , for example, the data for the left side of the door frame decoration 426 may be diverted to the data for the right side of the door frame 435, or the left side of the door frame decoration 426 and the door frame Since it is possible to create data with the same flow on the right side decorative body 435 side, the labor involved in creating lighting pattern data can be simplified (with the same creation time ) It becomes easier to construct more complicated lighting pattern data, and it is possible to show the player various light emitting effects of the lighting pattern, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player various light emitting effects with high effects. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of exhibiting a sufficient performance effect for the lighting performance of the door frame left side decorations 426 and the door frame right side decorations 435 on both the left and right sides of 101a.

In addition, since the two second LEDs 422b, second LEDs 423b, second LEDs 432b, and second LEDs 433b provided between the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are the same system. , so as to sandwich the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, the first LED 433a (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, the light guide shaft portion 437a). Since the two second LEDs 422b, 2nd LEDs 423b, 2nd LEDs 432b, and 2nd LEDs 433b provided in the are always turned on at the same time, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light from the respective second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b light guide shaft portion 427a and guide shaft portion 427a. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a become thin so as to cancel out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see. The right side decorative body 435 can be evenly and planarly decorated with light.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, which are planarly decorated with light emission by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 433b. The first LED 432a and the first LED 433a light-embellish the portions corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portions 427a, 428a, 429a, 436a, and 437a in a dot-like manner. As a result, it is possible to show the player a lighting effect that could not be seen in previous pachinko machines, such as a planar light and a partial light in a dot shape, and the light is bright in a dot shape. The player's interest can be strongly attracted by the light emission effect, etc., and the player can be surprised by the light emission effect, in which spot light is emitted in a dot shape, which is not available in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the horizontal direction, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower side on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrates 433 are asymmetrical to each other, at first glance, the left side of the door frame upper decorative substrate 422, the lower left side of the door frame decorative substrate 423, the upper right side of the door frame decorative substrate 432, and the right side of the door frame. Since the side lower decorative board 433 can be identified, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to avoid mistaking the lower right side decorative substrate 433, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress an increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative substrate]
Next, using the door frame 3 as an example, identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the plate left decorative substrate 273, the plate right decorative substrate 278, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side are provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3. The upper side decoration board 432, the lower door frame right side decoration board 433, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white board is used as the decoration board on which the LEDs are mounted, and the LED drivers and connectors of colors other than white that are attached to the decoration board are attached to the rear side of the board. I'm trying As a result, the light from the LEDs mounted on the front surface of the decoration board is reflected forward, so that the decorations and the like in the front can be illuminated brighter, and the front (player side) is reflected. This makes the decorative substrate inconspicuous.

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has a large number of decoration boards, different identification portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decoration board so that each decoration board can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification portion 7 includes a character identification portion 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabets, symbols, numerals, model numbers, etc., and a color identification portion 7b using different colors (indicated by shades of different shades in FIG. 74). and have

More specifically, as the character identification part 7a, the character "bottom left" is displayed on the dish left decorative board 273, the character "bottom right" is displayed on the plate right decorative board 278, and the character "upper left" is displayed on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. , the letters "lower left" on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the letters "upper right" on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the letters "lower right" on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The characters are "upper middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "upper left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "upper right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , respectively.

Further, the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is applied substantially over the front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is not provided on the entire rear surface, but partially so as not to interfere with the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decorative substrate. .

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), pasting a seal, applying paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decoration board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 was explained as an example. The decorative substrate may also be provided with identification portions 7 such as the character identification portion 7a and the color identification portion 7b.

In the above-described embodiment, the identifying section 7 includes both the character identifying section 7a and the color identifying section 7b. Alternatively, only the color identification section 7b may be provided.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the identification part 7 (the character identification part 7a and the color identification part 7b) is provided on the decoration board on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to make a decoration board with a similar shape. This makes it possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembly work and to improve the workability of the assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification part 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decoration board, the front side of the decoration board can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decoration board The light is reflected forward on the front surface of the decoration board, so that the decorations in front can be decorated with brighter light emission, and the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), thereby improving the appearance. can do better.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification section 7b as the identification section 7 is provided over substantially the entire decoration board, the desired color can be obtained by just looking at a part of the decoration board. ) can be recognized as a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of types of decorative substrates are superimposed during assembly, if a part of the decorative substrate is visible, the desired decorative substrate can be easily found. can be simplified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification part 7b is different for each decoration board, when preparing the decoration boards required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly, the same color can be used. When there is a decorative board provided with the identification portion 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative board is prepared redundantly. Alternatively, when the colors are insufficient in the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a decorative board that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decoration substrates necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decoration substrate is prepared or the prepared decoration substrate is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to surely prepare the required number of decorative substrates, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up at the time of assembly. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled smoothly, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification portion 7a as the identification portion 7 for distinguishing from the other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decoration board, the operator can read the characters of the character identification portion 7a. By doing so, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front and rear surfaces of each decoration board are white and the identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface, the decoration provided in front of the decoration board is highly transparent. Also, the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), the appearance of the decoration can be improved, and the light from the LED is reflected forward by the white front surface of the decoration board. is possible, the decorative body can be decorated with brighter light emission, and the player can be entertained by the light emission performance with high performance effect, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional parts such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decoration board so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front (player side). It is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance due to being visible, and improve the appearance of the decoration (game machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden from view by being provided on the back surface of the decorative board, there is no need to color the functional parts white (or yellow) to make them inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. It is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the trouble of coloring the functional parts.

[3-12. Effects of door frame]
According to this embodiment, with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions in the pachinko machine 1, the contact detection body 393 provided at a desired portion to detect the player's approach or contact is detected. and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are switched by the switching unit 394, and when the player approaches or touches the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. Therefore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393 can detect a change in capacitance, it is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with a desired part, Control means such as the main control board 1310 , the peripheral control board 1510 , the peripheral control section 1511 , and the effect display control section 1512 can execute predetermined control according to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392 . On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching portion 394, the connection between the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 provided at the other parts is prevented. is cut, even if the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 provided in the other part changes due to the player approaching or touching the other part, the contact detection body 393 is Since the switching unit 394 has disconnected the connection, the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at the desired portion can be reliably detected. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection.

As described above, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 among the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions. It is possible to detect capacitance with one contact detection sensor body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. In the control means of (1), the number of channels involved in detection of the player's approach or contact can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for presentation can be relatively increased. Therefore, since it is possible to control more production means (for example, movable decorations, light-emitting decorations, production display devices, etc.) by the control means, the increase in production means allows the player to enjoy more diverse productions. It is possible to present the game, make it difficult for the player to get bored, sufficiently entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch, and the contact detection bodies 393 provided at the desired parts by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. Connects to the contact detection sensor main body 392, detects the player's approach or contact with a desired part, and controls the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. Since it is possible to leave a predetermined caution or alarm by the means, while monitoring a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor main body 392, the number of channels that can be used for production can be relatively reduced. The number can be increased, and the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

Further, since the capacitance of a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, the sensor main body having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhancing the appeal to the player. can be enhanced.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 has connection terminals for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection bodies 393 can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. The electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with connection terminals in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392 . can be connected, compared to the case where a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member, the number of parts can be reduced. can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393 can be eliminated, and the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body can be eliminated. 392 can be arranged more freely, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

Further, a switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided. are dispersedly arranged, and when a player-participation type performance is executed in which the plurality of dispersedly arranged contact detection bodies 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the contact detection sensor body 392 is operated by the switching unit 394 at the timing when the player touches in order. By switching the contact detection bodies 393 connected to the , it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detection bodies 393 in order. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players more can be provided.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that can be pressed by the player. Then, the player approaches the contact detection body 352 made of patching metal, the player side of which is covered with the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to 351 (the effect operation unit 350).

In this way, when the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit 350 is detected using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button external decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation unit lifting and lowering are performed. A predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button main body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, and the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380, so that the player is entertained by the effect. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output. It can be made to function as a contact operation part. Since the effect operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit, can be pressed by the player when it is projected, the effect operation unit 350 can perform non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation. Since various performance operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine having operation buttons that can be operated only by pressing, thereby making it easier to implement the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players by being differentiated from other machines.

In addition, according to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, a predetermined effect is output to the player side. Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity thresholds and output a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player to the button main body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) to the contact thereof in multiple steps, the effect corresponding to each step is output. By doing so, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection device having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be used. The sensor main body 358 can be provided at a portion of the effect operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved to enhance the appeal to the player.

In addition, as described above, the operation unit can perform a variety of effect operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of performance operations, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to make the player enjoy the player-participation type performance, and to reduce the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358 is made of a punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes, the player can easily touch the button main body 351 through the plurality of holes. It is possible to reduce the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in a state of approach or non-contact, and to avoid erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358 . Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detection body 352 while suppressing an increase in the capacitance. It is possible to widen the range for detecting the approach or contact of the player to the main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350). As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range. When the contact detection body 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player can approach or touch the performance operation section unit 350 (button body 351) by executing the player participation type performance. When requested, the contact detection body 352 covered with the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, so that the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, the operation timing in the player participation type performance can be made difficult to miss, and the player can surely participate in the player participation type performance. The effect can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 can be pressed. The light emitting effect from the LEDs 364a of the middle decoration board 364 can be output to the player side, and the player can surely enjoy the light emitting effect and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351) that can be pressed is provided with the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. 352 can reinforce the effect operation unit 350, and even if the player strongly presses or hits the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351) when performing a pressing operation, the effect operation unit unit 350 can be made difficult to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the effect operation part unit 350 can be made difficult to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, the player can press the effect operation part unit 350 without worrying, and the effect operation part unit 350 can be operated. It is possible to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable and suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, and the plate thickness of the contact detection body 352 can be made thinner compared to the case where the contact detection body 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same thickness. Therefore, the space for providing the contact detection body 352 can be easily secured, the contact detection body 352 can be easily provided, the degree of freedom in design can be increased, and the appeal to the player is higher. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant compared to expanded metal. The button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) can be easily made into an optimal shape for detecting the player's approach or contact, and the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed is covered by the button body 351. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the contact detection body 352 formed with a plurality of holes, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when the contact detection body 352 is formed with a plurality of holes. is used as an operation unit, the button main body 351 can be operated without a sense of incongruity, and the decline in interest can be suppressed by entertaining the performance.

Furthermore, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. Therefore, the cleaning work can be simplified, and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the pachinko machine 1 which is easy to clean can be reduced.

In addition, the effect means such as the external button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360, the internal button decoration board 364, and the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. A predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350). Then, a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect The performance output through (via) the operation section unit 350 can be surely enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the effect means such as the external button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the internal button decoration board 364, and the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since it is provided, the effect means is covered by the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection body 352 (the effect operation unit 350) and the effect means can be compactly put together. To provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of being easily provided with a performance operating unit 350 and performance means etc. having such functions and effects at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1 and being differentiated from other pachinko machines. can be made easier.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351) provided to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, so that the player approaches the effect operation unit 350. Or it can detect contact. When the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit 350, the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the effect operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, it contacts (collides) with the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the effect operation section unit 350 protrudes in , the player can be presented with an effect by a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by a performance not found in the conventional pachinko machine, to strongly attract the player's interest to the performance operation unit 350, and to the player. It is possible to reliably make the user notice the projection of the performance operation unit 350. - 特許庁

When the effect operation section unit 350 is projected, if the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved in the direction of the upper end portion of the lifting spring 365 (upward), the lifting spring 365 is strongly compressed. When the lift spring 365 is moved in a direction (downward) away from the upper end portion side of the lift spring 365, the compression of the lift spring 365 is weakened and the bias force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, it is possible to change the biasing force of the effect operation section unit 350 by the lifting spring 365 . In this way, since the effect operation section unit 350 can be protruded with various projecting forces, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by physical force, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and the effect operation can be performed. It is possible to entertain the performance by the protrusion of the part unit 350, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the projecting force of the effect operation unit 350 is changed in accordance with the game state, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 with a finger or the like, the effect operation unit 350 is moved with a strong force. When the 350 comes into contact with the player, a strong impact is given to the player, and the player can strongly feel that something good is happening (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous), and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by increasing the expectation for.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 is the pressing operation unit 303 capable of pressing operation, when the player participatory effect is executed, the player can press the effect operation unit 350 to perform the game. It is possible to make the player participate in the player-participation type performance, and to entertain the pressing operation of the performance operation section unit 350, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, it is possible to operate the effect operation unit 350 at any time. When the player participatory effect in which the effect operation part unit 350 is pressed is executed, the effect operation part unit 350 is protruded by the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, so that the player participatory effect is performed by effect images, sounds, etc. Even without guiding the execution start of the performance, the player can be made to quickly recognize the start of execution of the player participation type performance, and the motivation for the pressing operation of the performance operation part unit 350 can be increased to perform the player participation type performance. can entertain you even more.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 350 is protruded by the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, it is compared with the case where the effect operation unit 350 is projected using a drive motor. As a result, the effect operation section unit 350 can be protruded easily and vigorously, and the effects described above can be more easily achieved.

Further, by detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit 350 is detected, and the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity varies according to the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity thresholds and project the effect operation unit 350 with a different protrusion force for each threshold. becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the production operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages. By projecting with a projecting power, it is possible to present a more diverse performance to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of it and to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is popped up by execution of the player participation type effect, so that the player can enter the effect operation unit 350 which is provided so that the player can advance and retreat. approaches or touches, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided apart from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit 350 detects the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352, the contact due to the approach or contact of the player is detected. Since the change in the capacitance of the detection body 352 can be captured, it is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is detected by the capacitance. A player can be detected. Then, the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the movement (pressing) of the production operation unit 350 by the player causes the production operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320, the button outer decoration board 355, the production operation part lifting mechanism 360, and the inside button decoration board. 364, the projection force adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600 and other effect means execute a predetermined effect. In other words, when the player advances or retreats the effect operation unit 350 or approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed. can function as On the other hand, when the player advances and retreats (presses) the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed, so the effect operation unit 350 can be made to function like a effect operation unit (pressing operation unit). For this reason, since it is possible for the player to perform a variety of performance operations, the player can enjoy various performance operations by executing a player participation type performance that enables the player to perform the performance operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player can enjoy the player-participation type presentation, thereby suppressing the decline of the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the player is detected by the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 provided near the portion of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches (under the upper surface portion 351a). , the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detection body 352 (the button body 351) and the player. It is possible to execute a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the production operation unit 350 to the contact thereof in multiple stages, the production can be presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present more diverse performances to the player, to prevent the player from getting tired of the game, and to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, since a predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the effect operation (non-contact operation, A sense of operation can be given to the contact operation), and the player can enjoy the performance operation more.

Furthermore, the player is provided with a production operation unit 350 that can be advanced and retreated (pressable), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350. Therefore, in the player-participation type production, the player has an operation (pressing operation) to advance and retreat the production operation unit 350, an operation to approach or touch the production operation unit 350 with a finger or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), etc., and the various operations can increase the player's desire to participate in the player participation type performance and make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type performance. can be done. When the player participates in the player-participation type production, various operations using the production operation section unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can prevent the player from getting bored. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production, and to suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

In addition, by locking the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operating unit 350 to the locking part 371c of the elevation cam member 371 of the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360, the effect operating unit 350 is locked so as not to advance or retreat. Therefore, until the effect of moving the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is prevented from advancing and retreating by the guide pin 354c and the elevation cam member 371. 350 can be prevented from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the arbitrarily moving or swinging of the performance operating unit 350, thereby making the performance by the performance operating unit 350 more enjoyable. can be made available.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 350, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit The main body 358 can be provided in a part that is hard to be seen by a player, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, an output circuit, etc. are separated, Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be matched with the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. , and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player can attach the outer button decoration substrate 355, the inner button decoration substrate 364, or the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the decoration 398. When a finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button outer decoration substrate 355, the button inner decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398. changes, and according to the change, a predetermined effect is executed in which light is emitted to the player side by the external button decorative board 355, the internal button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398. Therefore, the player side The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the outside button decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 by the light emitted to the button, and the executed performance can entertain the player. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the outer button decoration substrate 355, the inner button decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 is detected by the button body 351 or the contact detection body 397. Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is a part of the decoration portion. It is possible to make it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is for detecting the player.

In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is made unrecognizable from the player side, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be compared with the button external decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (effect) is blocked, the player will not be bothered by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effects of the outside button decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 in a good state, so that the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the button outside covered by the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is detected. Since the decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decorative body 398 is designed to irradiate the player with light, the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 can be attached to the effect operation section 301 (contact operation section). 302), and the player can be provided with a feeling of light operation. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type production is executed, the player's fingers or the like are made to approach or contact the button main body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 approaches or contacts the finger or the like. Upon detection of contact, an effect is executed by the external button decorative board 355, the internal button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398, thereby allowing the player to participate in the player participation type effect, and allowing the player to participate in the player participation type effect. You can enjoy the type production.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's finger or the like are detected. Since it is possible to change the effects of the outer button decoration board 355, the inner button decoration board 364, or the decoration 398 according to the distance from the button outer decoration board 355, the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc. It is possible to change the performance by the decorative board 364 inside the button or the decorative body 398, so that the player can see a more colorful performance, and the colorful performance makes it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

In addition, it is designed to detect a change in capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the external decoration board 355, the button interior decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 changes, the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 is not affected by the game. The pachinko machine 1 that can easily detect the approach or contact of a person's fingers or the like and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is adapted to detect a change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be made of a conductive member. When the contact detection body 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, the vapor deposition film can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and the vapor deposition film can be thickened to have a metallic luster so that it looks like a part of the decoration. can be done. Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made of punching metal having a design like a star or a heart, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 look like a part of decoration. be able to. For this reason, the contact detectors 352, 395, and 397 can be made unrecognizable by the player, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the electrostatic capacity is increased by the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (surface side). Depending on the change, the button external decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect presentation means such as the effect display device 1600 produce a predetermined effect. Contact detection body 395 etc. (including contact detection body 352, left contact detection body 390L, right contact detection body 390R, contact detection body 393, and contact detection body 397, etc.) for presenting the , the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the contact detection body 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and high appeal to players. In addition, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with a transparent button body 351, and an effect is presented according to the change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 and the like due to the approach of the player's finger or the like to the contact detection body 395. Since a predetermined effect is presented via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351. As a result, the button main body 351 can be made to function as the effect operation section 301 . Since the contact detection body 395 or the like that can be seen through the button body 351 has a design property, the effect operation unit 301 looks like it has a design property, and a performance not found in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 having the operation part 301 can give a strong impact to a player and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of being differentiated from other pachinko machines. In addition, as described above, the contact detection body 395 and the like having a design can give a strong impact to the player, so that the contact detection body 395 and the like (the button main body 351) can strongly arouse interest in the player. It is possible to heighten the expectation for the operation of the button body 351 (performance operation part 301) and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participatory performance for operating the button body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

In addition, since the contact detection body 395 or the like for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button main body 351 is formed in an outer peripheral shape with a design, at first glance, depending on the player, the effect presentation It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the presence of the effect operation unit 301 (the button main body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player-participation-type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is activated by the contact detection body 395 or the like for the first time by urging the player to approach or touch the button body 351. It is possible to make the player notice that it is the operation unit 301, and to give the player unexpectedness to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when the player participatory effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing the effect operation unit 301, the contact detection body 395 or the like is stopped. Since the performance is presented by the performance presenting means by changing the electric capacity, the player can be surprised, and the presented performance can amuse the player and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Furthermore, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means in accordance with the change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like to the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like is presented. Approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized. In addition, since an effect is presented in accordance with a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like approaches the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like and touches the button body 351 . Since it is possible to detect the interval (distance) in multiple stages, by presenting an effect according to each stage, it is possible to present a more colorful effect to the player. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult to get tired of.

In addition, since the outer periphery of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punching metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh is used as the conductive contact detection body 395 or the like, Designability can be imparted to the contact detection body 395 and the like, deterioration in appearance due to the contact detection body 395 and the like can be prevented, and the contact detection body 395 and the like can be made conspicuous, and the above effects can be achieved. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a device having designability without forming the contact detection body 395 and the like into a three-dimensional shape. can. Therefore, the contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed in a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the manufacturing cost of the contact detection body 395 and the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button main body 351, the contact detection body 395 and the like are prevented from being contaminated with dust and dirt such as food and drink, which makes cleaning easier. can be More specifically, since the contact detection member 395 or the like is made of a material having unevenness, such as punching metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the unevenness, and it is troublesome to clean the dirt. However, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the button main body 351, even if the contact detection body 395 and the like is made of a punching metal having unevenness, the button body 351 This makes it possible to prevent dirt from adhering, and to reduce the burden on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as it is easy to clean.

In addition, since the surface side of the contact detection bodies 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351 so that the player does not touch the contact detection bodies 395 and the like, the contact detection bodies 395 and the like are made of a metal vapor deposition film or the like. When a material such as foil stamping that enhances the design is used, it is possible to prevent early wear due to touch by the player, and to increase the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as described above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detection body 395 and the like. Since it is possible to use an object that does not feel good to the touch or an object that gives discomfort to the player as the sensing element 395 or the like, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the material used for the contact sensing element 395 or the like, and to meet the needs. The contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed from suitable materials.

In addition, when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like to change the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395 are changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the player brings his/her finger or the like closer to or touches the button body 351. can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the actions of fingers and the like.

In addition, an effect is presented to the player through the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., and when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395, etc. , the button main body 351, the contact detection body 395, and the like are executed, the effect presented to the player is executed. can be provided, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type performance) can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation section unit 350 capable of performing a plurality of operations, the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with a finger or the like, and touches the contact detection body 352. When the entry of a finger or the like into the detection area is detected by (contact detection sensor main body 358), a plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 and a plurality of LEDs 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 emit light to play through the button main body 351. A light emission effect in which light is emitted to the player, a effect in which the player's finger or the like that is in contact with the button body 351 is vibrated by the vibration motor 356, and a projection upward of the button body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. , the button body 351 can be made to function as the contact operation unit 302, and the player can enjoy the game. can let Also, at this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the player can be surprised and amused by the effects. , and the willingness to operate the button body 351 can be enhanced. Then, when the player's finger or the like touches the button body 351 and moves the finger or the like appropriately to press the button body 351 downward, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation portion 303, so that the contact detection body The player can be entertained with a variety of performance operations by the contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351, and the player is less likely to get bored and is interesting. can be suppressed.

Also, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 detects the button main body 351. The approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like on the upper surface portion 351a can be detected, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit can be arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351, so that the contact detection sensor body 358 can be arranged in an inconspicuous portion, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look better.

In addition, on the back side (lower side) of the button body 351, the outer button decoration board 355, the inner button decoration board 364, and the effect operation section lifting mechanism 360 are provided, so that the player can receive light and light through the button body 351. Effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. can be easily imparted, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is positioned within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base unit 500 in front view, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. a rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable; and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570, based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 protruding rearward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The body frame base unit 500 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the horizontal direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 in the left, right, and rearward directions.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placing portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front. A circular speaker opening 501g that faces the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate-like shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

Further, the body frame base 501 has a door for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch is depressurized and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame open switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . Further, the body frame base 501 has a body frame open switch for detecting opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame open switch is attached. there is When the body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch is depressing and can detect the opening of the body frame 4. As shown in FIG. A detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 .

On the main body frame base 501, a game board locking member 505 is rotatably attached to a longitudinally extending axis at a position below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably attached about an axis that extends vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 has an attachment shaft 502c rotatably attached near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h around an axis that extends vertically. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 consists of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the opposite end of which connects the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame secondary board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the body frame base 501 at an end (right end) on the side opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are behind. (see FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably α/3≧β). (see FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have it.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. A lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. a hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3; , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear side portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that opens to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is in a meandering state in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and FIG. 84(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. In this state, when the handle 195 is rotated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that if the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-rear width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a; and a rear side of the top plate portion 551a. and a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a rear plate portion 551b extending from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width to the right. A back plate left portion 551e, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front portion of the lower side of the left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f are provided. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the first rail cover 554 side is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 in front view on the top surface of the portion extending left and right of the payout base 551 . The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. FIG. 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the side of the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. A ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of is provided (see FIG. 91).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while being repeatedly folded between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, and the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction. FIG. 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispenser main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with the second transmission gear 587. and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 88, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after bending slightly obliquely downward to the right from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and directly above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The body-side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in a rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the dispensing device front lid 583. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a extends from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotating shaft and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part thereof can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 89).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down faster.

In this way, in a state in which the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable ball removal piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removal piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball removal piece 592, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not fly out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be surely circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper disbursed ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (discharged) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of the Also, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth, and A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full-tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are connected to the upper full ball passage. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 contacts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and are in communication with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of Game Ball B in Payout Unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in the state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state and are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full by voice (for example, ``Please remove the ball! stop temporarily until

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 92(b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a speaker cover 621 facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. and a container-like speaker box 623 that is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and that opens forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction, obliquely downward and rearward. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient space can be secured on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, so that the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the lower outer frame assembly 40 side is communicated through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through-cylinder 623a extending in a tubular shape communicating with the through-hole 621d and penetrating back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guide portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball ejection port 629 for ejecting downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and .

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (Fig. 96) and The payout control board 633 activates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like. It is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraud.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward to the rear of the body-frame speaker 622 . The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The back cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 97(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 97(b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lock units protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward. 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the perspective view of the body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from the front and above, and FIG. 100(b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and bottom. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100(a) exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing an area in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by means of the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body that is attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 501 in a front view on the rear side. A payout base 551, a sphere tank 552 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) that extends left and right and opens upward, and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opens upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 leftward in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 and for paying out game balls B to the player side, It has

The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. It is The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right side wall 552e) with a length of about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. It is formed over

The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In a plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end parallel to the axis extending in the leftward and rightward direction from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the leftward and rightward directions, and then leftward. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and extending from there to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. . The main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) at which only one can be circulated.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main guide portion 553a is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guide portion 553a and that changes in width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. there is By means of this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Moreover, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guide portion 553a downward. Thus, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing in the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight bulge at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved swelling portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the swelling portion 553b acts depends on the position of the contacting swelling portion 553b. Since the direction changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spheroids in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and ball clogging (ball jam) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed are dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball jam) can be made difficult to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the place where the ball is jammed can be specified quickly. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be enhanced. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen through the tank rail 553 from the rear. When a problem occurs in the movement of the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the effects of

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552 d of the ball tank 552 . In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined so that the height is higher. and an overflow surface portion 501m extending rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. , and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the horizontal direction is inclined to be lower, and a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g that guides the

In addition, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g. and a discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge portion 551j. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is overflowed. and a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the body frame base 501 . The overflow surface portion 501m is a flat plate extending backward from a low position two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It extends in a shape. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the horizontal direction is about 1/3 of the length in the horizontal direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view extends from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the horizontal direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap with a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and includes a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The upper end of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right outer sides, and extends in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right stepped portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is raised. The gap between is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view. The right end of the right stepped portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. Note that the container-shaped area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 below. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h whose front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and whose rear end is lower. and a dam portion extending upward from the opposite side of the passage surface 552h to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side when viewed from the front. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g is arranged so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is aligned with the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank-like shape and that extends obliquely in the left-right direction. extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its circulation direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, since the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g A game ball B from can be received. In addition, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552g Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball slugs in the tank rail 553 by discharging the fuel to a wide area.

In the tank rail 553, the part where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the front view left part of the rear wall 552c. A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The tank rail 553 can surely receive the game ball B guided backward by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not fall backward from the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side extending from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the position about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to about 1/2 of the full length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the full length, it extends in parallel with the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. and has an opening 552k penetrating in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l is equal to the upper edge of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501). upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end of the tank rail 553 (right end in front view) is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 . In addition, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . )are doing. The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is positioned at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge part 551j is arranged in the ball tank 552 so that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the height lower than the bypass passage 552g is lowered rearward in a stepwise manner to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). position in the vicinity), and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the lateral direction on the rear surface thereof. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551 . The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lowered as indicated by white arrows in FIG. The left stepped portion 501n has a rear right corner, and the right stepped portion 501o has a rear left corner. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery, is crossed. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jam) due to engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 .

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be avoided. can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B circulating from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is on the left side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball is released. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is positioned from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) with respect to the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is prevented from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and getting caught due to the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, thereby aligning in the horizontal direction. Since they are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, the game ball released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since they are changed so as to coincide with each other, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B circulates decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) By circulating a plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction to the downstream side through the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the capacity inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552 .

In addition, on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is placed in the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552. can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, these inclinations can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, and the game ball B spills outside the main body frame 4, causing a problem. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls are piled up on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured. , the game ball B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B can be prevented from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Next, a second embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine provided with the tank rails and the like of the second embodiment, viewed from the back and showing an enlarged portion of the tank rails. Fig. 107(a) is a plan view showing the assembled state of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 106 together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 107 as seen from the front, and (c). 2 is a rear perspective view of the tank rail and the like in (a). FIG. FIG. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 108(b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the carka line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in cross section. The tank rail 553A of the second embodiment, which is different from the above, includes a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball straightening member 556A in addition to the tank rail 553A. , the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, and the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of this embodiment rectifies the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560 . The tank rail 553A extends leftward in a groove shape that opens upward. The tank rail 553A has a first rail cover 554A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A in front view, and a A ball straightening member 556A provided is attached, and a ball stop member 557 capable of blocking the circulation of game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction downstream of the bulging portion 553b. The circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. The first rail cover 554A is attached upstream (on the ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction so as to cover the open upper end of the tank rail 553A from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A; and an opening 555c penetrating through the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c of the tank rail 553A at the portion where the meandering portion 553c is provided. Straightening pieces 556a of a ball straightening member 556A, which will be described later, are inserted through the openings 555c from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A extends back and forth at its upstream end side and is attached rotatably around an axis. The ball straightening member 556A is provided above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A and between the pair of protective walls 555b, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. It has flat plate-like rectifying pieces 556a. This ball rectifying member 556A abuts on the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby breaking down the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a row. The game ball B is restrained from moving rapidly to the downstream side, thereby preventing the occurrence of ball biting on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A and the like of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball straightening member 556A is positioned below the upper end of the protective wall 555b between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A. ing. As a result, the electric wire (indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached is It is possible to prevent contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the wire connected to the wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball rectifying member 556A from above, the weight of the wire causes the game ball B to contact the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A. may not be able to rotate upward, and there is a risk that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be sufficiently exhibited. In contrast, in this embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from contacting the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can be rotated upward, and the rectifying action is sufficiently exerted to prevent ball biting and ball bite in the tank rail 553A. The occurrence of clogging can be prevented.

Further, since the meandering portion 553c is provided on the tank rail 553A, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages moves first to the downstream side, ball jamming is likely to occur. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, thereby preventing the upper game ball B from moving downstream first. can be suppressed, and the occurrence of ball jamming can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, the protection wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wire from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556A, thereby preventing ball clogging. Arranging the terminal board (for example, the external terminal board 558) to which the electric wire is connected or near the control board, or arranging the terminal board or the control board to which many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in arranging the tank rail 553A (the ball tank 552), the terminal plate, and the like.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rail etc.]
Next, a third embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 118 and the like. FIG. 111 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as seen from the rear right. FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as viewed from the rear left. FIG. 113(a) is a rear view of the body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal plate, and FIG. 113(b) is a left side view of the body frame showing an enlarged upper portion. 114(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and FIG. 114(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in FIG. 114(b). Fig. 116(a) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of (a) from the lower right back. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 116 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 116 and viewed from the rear.

The tank rail and the like of the third embodiment are similar to the tank rail and the like of the first embodiment (the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, and the ball stop member 557), a protective cover 559 for covering the ball rectifying member 556 from above is added, and the same reference numerals are assigned to the same structures as those described above.

The tank rails and the like of this embodiment are attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extend left and right in a box-shaped tank 552 that is open upward. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 above the portion where it is located, is open upward, and extends leftward in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a.

The tank rail 553 has an opening on the bottom surface of a portion that extends straight to the left (a portion that decreases in height toward the downstream side) so that dirt and dust in the tank rail 553 can drop. A plurality of portions 553d are formed. These openings 553d are provided at portions below a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball straightening member 556, which will be described later. The opening 553d is opened downward and rearward of the tank rail 553, extends to the left and right, and is formed in a size that the game ball B cannot pass through. When the game ball B exists on the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly visually recognized from behind through the opening 553d. Also, the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be touched by the operator's finger, a thin stick, or the like through the opening 553d. As a result, ball clogging occurring at that portion can be eliminated through the opening 553d. In addition, through the opening 553d, the ball straightening member 556 can be lifted through the game ball B of the relevant portion, and the operation of the ball straightening member 556 can be confirmed.

Further, the tank rail or the like is located to the left of the ball tank 552 and closes a predetermined range above the right end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends leftward with a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction. A second rail cover 555 that closes the upper part from the part spaced between the first rail cover 554 and the first rail cover 554 of the tank rail 553 to the left end, and the first rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 A ball straightening member 556 provided between the rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stop member 557 provided near the left end of the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. and a protective cover 559 covering the second rail cover 555 from the middle in the left-right direction to the middle in the left-right direction across the ball rectifying member 556 .

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. .

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the first rail cover 554 side is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(a), etc.).

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked up and down are arranged in one row. When trying to overtake the game balls B in the lower stage, the game balls B may mesh with each other and become stuck (so-called ball clogging). On the other hand, in the ball rectifying member 556 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is circulated in the tank rail 553 in two stages, the game ball B on the upper stage comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a, By slowing down the flow of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent the player from overtaking the game ball B on the lower side. As a result, the game balls B on the lower side first move to the downstream side, and the game balls B on the upper side move after that, so that the game balls B can be aligned in one row. At this time, since the game ball B on the upper side presses the straightening piece 556a from below, the ball straightening member 556 moves so that the straightening piece 556a moves upward, and the game ball on the upper side due to its own weight The ball B can be pushed downward, and the vertical swing of the ball straightening member 556 (straightening piece 556a) can promote the movement of the game ball B on the upper side to the lower side, as well as the tank rail. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the relevant portion of 553 (the portion whose height decreases toward the downstream).

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

The protective cover 559 includes a strip-like top plate portion 559a extending left and right, a flat plate-like rear plate portion 559b extending downward from a part of the rear side of the top plate portion 559a, and a top plate portion 559a. It has a flat plate-like front plate portion 559c extending downward from the front side and the left side thereof, and a flat plate-like guide plate portion 559d extending forward from the front plate portion 559c. The top plate portion 559a and the guide plate portion 559d are inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The guide plate portion 559d is formed such that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left, and the rear end of this portion coincides with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-rear direction.

The protective cover 559 is positioned so that the top plate portion 559a covers the upper portion from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction when assembled to the main body frame 4. A space is formed between the spherical straightening member 556 and the spherical straightening member 556 so that the spherical straightening member 556 can swing up and down. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position below the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG.

The front plate portion 559 c extends rightward from the top plate portion 559 a at its right end, and extends to the ball tank 552 along the tank rail 553 . The guiding plate portion 559d projects forward from the front plate portion 559c at a portion on the front side of the top plate portion 559a with a length larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and is formed to be able to guide the game ball B leftward. It is The guide plate portion 559d is inclined more gently than the upper end of the tank rail 553 is inclined. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a slight gap between the rear surface of the payout base 551 and the game ball B, which cannot enter.

The protective cover 559 can prevent contact with the ball straightening member 556 from the outside in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The operation of the ball straightening member 556 can be checked by inserting a thin stick into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 and contacting it from below, or by inserting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 through the opening 553d. It can be confirmed by pushing it upward by lifting the game ball B, for example.

In addition, the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B, which has entered behind the external terminal plate 558 for some reason, to the left by the guide plate portion 559 d so that it can be discharged to the outside from the left side surface of the body frame 4 . .

In this embodiment, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, the protective cover 559, etc. are made of a transparent material. The game ball B can be visually recognized from the outside.

In addition, since the upper side of the tank rail 553 is covered with the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, it is possible to prevent dirt, dust, etc. from entering the tank rail 553 from above. be able to.

In addition, since the top of the tank rail 553 is covered by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, the ball straightening member 556 and the game ball B cannot be touched from above. Therefore, when dirt or dust adheres to the game ball B or the like, it is necessary to remove the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the protective cover 559, etc., but in this embodiment, the tank rail 553 It is significant that a plurality of openings 553d are provided at the bottom of the . More specifically, when the ball rectifying member 556 or the game ball B in the tank rail 553 is covered with dirt, dust, etc., the game ball B inside is touched through the opening 553d, and the game ball B or the game ball B is touched through the opening 553d. Since the ball rectifying member 556 can be shaken by pressing, the dirt, dust, etc. adhering to the game ball B or the like can be dropped. Garbage, dust, etc. dropped from the game ball B or the like can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

By the way, in the body frame 4 , the portion where the tank rail 553 extends leftward at a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction is provided behind the external terminal plate 558 , so that the wire connection terminal 558 a of the external terminal plate 558 is provided. When the electric wire connected to the ball contacts the ball straightening member 556 from above, the ball straightening member 556 rotates upward due to the weight of the wire even if the game ball B contacts the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556. There is a possibility that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the sphere rectifying member 556 cannot be exhibited sufficiently.

In addition, since the wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 is connected to a wire whose tip is stripped of the coating, if the game ball B remains behind the external terminal plate 558 for some reason, the wire connection terminal If the connection (insertion) of the electric wire to 558a is insufficient, there is a possibility that the remaining game ball B may cause a short circuit.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball straightening member 556, the protective cover 559 prevents the electric wire connected to the wire connection terminal 558a from contacting the ball straightening member 556. can do. As a result, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556, the ball rectifying member 556 can be rotated upward, and the rectifying action is sufficiently exerted to allow the ball to move within the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging.

By the way, if for some reason an electric wire is pulled out of the external terminal plate 558 and the tip of the wire comes into contact with the game ball B existing behind the external terminal plate 558, a short circuit will occur and necessary information will be sent to the game hall computer. It becomes impossible to receive it, and an error occurs in the counting at the game hall. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the protective cover 559 is provided with the guide plate portion 559d, the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal plate 558 for some reason is guided to the left and It can be discharged outside from the left side of the frame 4 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal plate 558, thereby preventing the occurrence of a short due to the remaining game ball B. Therefore, by avoiding short-circuiting of electric wires, it is possible to ensure that the computer (hall computer) in the game hall receives the necessary information, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of counting errors in the game hall. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the game ball B is discharged to the left side of the body frame 4 by the guide plate portion 559 d of the protective cover 559 , the game ball B can be discharged behind the body frame 4 . It is possible to avoid the occurrence of troubles such as disconnection or short-circuit due to contact with various electric wires and wiring provided on the side.

[4-13. Another Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Subsequently, a board unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. FIG. 119(a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a board unit of (a). It is the perspective view seen from the left front. 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the lower right rear. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the rear. FIG. 123(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the squiggly line in FIG. 119(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku-ku line in (a), and (c) is a ) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line. FIG. 124 is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in the pachinko machine having the board unit of FIG. 119(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 described above. In the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the board unit 620 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame covering a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface of the front base 661 attached to the rear side. A rear base 662, and an out ball passage 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, through which game balls B ejected downward from the game board 5 flow, and a game through which the out ball passage 663 is distributed. An out sensor 664 that detects balls B one by one, a ball extraction guide part 627 that receives and guides the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 to the right in front view, The game ball B guided by the ball removal guide part 627 is circulated, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball removal discharge passage 665 are closed. and a passageway wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662 as shown.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a box that is open forward and elongated in the left and right direction. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction. A ball extraction discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a.

In the base unit 660, a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 are made of transparent members. Accordingly, the ball removal guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guiding portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be visually recognized well from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660, making it easy to check ball clogging or the like. there is

The out-ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of a flat plate-like partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, and is open to the front. The front end is closed by front base 661 .

The out-ball passage 663 is open upward at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and has a ball discharge receiving portion 663a extending left and right, and a game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. Out-ball rectifying portion 663b that rectifies in a row while making it meander in the left-right direction, a downward guiding portion 663c that guides downward the game balls B rectified in a row by the out-ball rectifying portion 663b, and the lower end of the downward guiding portion 663c. It has an out ball discharge port 663d which is open downward and discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. - 特許庁An out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lowered.

The out-ball straightening portion 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the discharged ball receiving portion 663a toward the lower side of the discharged ball receiving portion 663a so that the left end side is lower. In addition, the out-ball straightening portion 663b has a depth in the front-rear direction that narrows toward the downstream side (leftward), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the vicinity of the downstream end below the ball ejection receiving portion 663a. It has depth. In addition, the portion of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b that is left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a has a lower vertical height as it goes downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the game ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. As a result, the game balls B can be aligned in a row in the out-ball straightening section 663b.

The downward guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out ball straightening portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall and the rear wall (partition wall portion) are on the same plane in the middle of the vertical direction. It is bent backward in a small crank shape so that it becomes like this. Thereby, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663 d ) of the downward guiding portion 663 c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662 a of the rear base 662 . An out-sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the downward guiding portion 663c. Since the downward guide portion 663c is bent in a crank shape and is formed in a curved shape so as not to have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, it passes through the out sensor 664 and bends in a crank shape. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the part where the game ball B is located, it does not jump upward to the out sensor 664 side, and the out sensor 664 can prevent one game ball B from being detected twice.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch with high durability and long life because the game ball B passes frequently.

The ball discharge guide portion 627 is provided to the left of the ball discharge receiving portion 663 a in the out ball passage 663 . The ball removal guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream side that bends rearward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , is connected to the upstream end of the ball discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 123(a), etc.).

The ball extraction discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. As shown in FIG. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 while being open rearward, and the rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666 . The rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 is located forward of the rear end of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. In other words, between the ball discharge path 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap corresponding to one game ball B or more is formed.

The upstream end (left end) of the ball discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball discharge guide portion 627, and has the same inclination as the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and is inclined more than the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. A lateral guide portion 665a extending to the right, a vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the lateral guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) has a ball discharge port 665c that opens downward. The ball discharge port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 124).

The ball removal passage 665 has a plurality of projections 665d alternately protruding inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guiding portion 665b. In the ball discharge passage 665, a game ball B flowing through a vertical guiding portion 665b extending vertically downward contacts with a plurality of projections 665d alternately, thereby causing the game ball B to flow down in a zigzag manner and flow. An increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B ejected downward from the ball ejection port 665c can be suppressed.

Since this ball discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage formed by the horizontal guiding portion 665a and the vertical guiding portion 665b, when the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is discharged by operating the ball removing lever 593, , a large number of game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that has been struck into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664 is detected and discharged to the island facility side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (remove) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball discharge lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to move the game ball B discharged to the ball discharge passage 580b side to the out ball passage 663. The ball is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball removal guide part 627 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 which are separated and independent. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. can be counted. Therefore, based on the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664, the number of game balls B can be accurately counted. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of calculating a payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B counted by the out sensor 664 (the number of out balls) is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, It is accepted by the winning openings such as the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006 (the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008, the losing opening 2009, the first winning opening 2532), and is discharged from the game board 5. and the number of game balls B discharged from the game board 5 after being hit into the game area 5a and then accepted by the out port 2020 or the sub-out port 2021 without being received by any prize winning port. , and is the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a (the number of shot balls).

In addition, since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the game state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is defined as "payout within a predetermined period. number/number of out-balls in a predetermined period=payout rate in a predetermined period".

Further, according to the present embodiment, the substrate unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with the out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 flow. The game ball B flowing through the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected, so the "out ball" on the game board 5 is detected. There is no need to provide an out-ball detection unit, the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified, and the cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, between the rear end of the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is provided. , the out-ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are kept away from the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., and the out-ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are used by many game balls B The pachinko machine 1 can reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. due to the static electricity, the induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of the game balls B, and the malfunction caused by the circulation of the game balls B is reduced. can be

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B whose circulation speed is suppressed by the out ball straightening portion 663b of the out ball passage 663, Since the impact applied to the out-sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the out-sensor 664 is quickly worn out and damaged.

Furthermore, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, Since the player desires to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, the player can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be easily selected. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually recognized from the player side, the displayed payout rate will be larger than usual if a large amount of game balls B are paid out. The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against the fraudulent act can be made to hesitate to execute the fraudulent act because other players and staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent act. can be

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position where the player cannot see it, the staff of the game hall can see it for the same reason as above. can detect fraudulent activity. Also, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different than the normal value, it is possible to change the displayed payout rate inside the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay Boards, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.) can be considered, so it is possible to deal with problems early, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Furthermore, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, To reduce the cost of a game board 5 without providing an out-ball detection unit, and to secure a space in the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the discharged game balls B.例文帳に追加By installing a performance device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can entertain the players more.

In addition, since the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d protrude alternately, the game ball B circulates through the vertical guide portion 665b. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage in the ball discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game ball B, damage to the island facility side of the game hall that receives the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge passage 665, etc. can be prevented.

In addition, the out-ball passage 663 is provided with a meandering out-ball rectifying portion 663b, and the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 is provided with a vertical guiding portion 665b having a plurality of projecting projections 665d. Since it is possible to suppress the circulation speed of the ball, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game ball B that circulates in the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game balls B.

Further, since the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage Since the game ball B is discharged downward from 665, the game ball B is less likely to collide with other pachinko machines or walls provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines. It is possible to avoid damage to the machine, walls, etc. In addition, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665, the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter, and from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 on the island facility side Collection of discharged game balls B can be facilitated.

Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 can be Only by discharging the game ball B hit into the area 5a downward, it becomes possible to deliver it to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660, so the configuration for discharging the game ball B on the game board 5 is , the configuration can be simple (simple), and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B vigorously flowing through the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged and to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is hard to be damaged.

In addition, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the part for collecting the game balls B on the island facility side ( An out receiving part, a bucket, etc.) need not be advanced to a position superimposed on the outer frame 2, and labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 and labor for moving the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126 and the like. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. FIG. 126(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out-sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, a guiding piece 667 for guiding the game ball B rearward is provided at the portion of the out-ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out-ball passage 663 in the base unit 660 . More specifically, in this embodiment, in the vicinity of the downstream end of the out ball passage 663, there is a confluence portion 663e that joins the ball removal discharge passage 665. As shown in FIG. The confluence portion 663e opens downward, and the opening end serves as an out-ball discharge port 663d (a ball discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes slightly rearward from the front wall of the out-ball outlet 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d abuts against the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely backward and downward. . As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.), and the game balls B can be reliably collected on the island facility side.

In addition, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. Even if it is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side in the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island facility. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged as far forward as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, by moving the out-ball passage 663 away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., a large number of game balls B circulate through the out-ball passage 663. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633 and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game balls B can be provided.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, an out-ball sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from below at a portion of the out-ball discharge port 663d in the out-ball passage 663. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f that is formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and opens downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor that is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. and a sensor cover 668 that restricts the downward movement of 664 .

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end portion of the downward guiding portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball straightening portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. As shown in FIG. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from above or below the base unit 660 .

The sensor cover 668 has a body portion 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660 at the base end side, and detects the out sensor 664 that is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the body portion 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion corresponding to the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c provided on the opposite side of the base end side of the main body portion 668a. have.

The base end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the outside of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b. An engaging claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is engaged with an engaging portion 663g provided outside the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the out-ball straightening portion 663b side.

The sensor cover 668 accommodates the out-sensor 664 in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out-sensor 664 coincides with the out-ball passage 663, and the locking claw portion 668c moves upward. By rotating the locking claw portion 668c to lock and close the locking portion 663g, the main body portion 668a contacts the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricts the downward movement of the out sensor 664, A sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 126(a)). In this state, the through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out-sensor 664, and after the game ball B circulating through the out-ball passage 663 is detected by the out-sensor 664, the through-hole 668b is detected. discharged downwards. The through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as an out-ball outlet 663d of the out-ball passage 663. As shown in FIG.

When replacing (removing) the out-sensor 664, by operating the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668, the locking claw portion 668c is elastically deformed to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, the sensor cover 668 is rotated about the base end side of the body portion 668a to open so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward. , and the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126(b)).

As shown in FIG. 126(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the contact-hazardous object indicated by the two-dot chain line (for example, the outer frame 2) , the upper end surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.), or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with the contact-threatening object, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, so many game balls B circulate. However, as described above, the out-sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out-sensor 664 can be easily replaced. can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with the outer frame 2 or other objects that may come into contact. Therefore, damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out-sensor 664 from below. There is a possibility that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668 and the sensor cover 668 may open. When the sensor cover 668 opens and the out-sensor 664 drops downward during the game, the out-sensor 664 detects the game ball B even though the game ball B is hit in the game area 5a. Therefore, the main control board 1310 or the like notifies the occurrence of the abnormality. Upon notification of the occurrence of this abnormality, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 so that the staff of the game hall can confirm the abnormality. Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the contact risky substance, the body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact risky substance, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment of FIG. 126, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outside portion opposite to the out-ball straightening portion 663b in the sensor attachment recess 663f. In addition, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out-sensor 664 . Therefore, when the game balls B are jammed in the out-ball passage 663, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game balls B are jammed can be specified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game balls B at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned over to stand upright in an upside-down state, and the replacement of the out-sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668 and the out-ball passage 663 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660 can be performed. It is possible to easily perform the confirmation work of the inside and the inside of the ball removal discharge passage 665, and the like.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out-sensor 664 is damaged, the out-sensor 664 can be easily replaced. Thus, it is possible to alleviate the player's frustration due to the interruption of the game, suppress the decline in interest, suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, and reduce the burden on the game hall side. can.

Furthermore, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out-sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 will not be removed from the base unit 660. Since the sensor cover 668 is in a suspended state and does not fall off, loss of the sensor cover 668 can be avoided.

In addition, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, at the outer portion near the out ball passage 663 in which many game balls B in the base unit 660 circulate, around the axis in the front-back direction (horizontal direction) Since it is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the downward force distribution applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side). ), and relatively small on the locking claw portion 668c side (the other end side) locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force is applied to the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 by many game balls B passing through the out sensor 664, one end side rotatably attached to the sensor cover 668 Since the sensor cover 668 is opened, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 is dropped. .

[4-14. Third Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Next, a board unit 700 of a third embodiment, which is different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 138 and the like. FIG. 127(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, omitting the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit, as seen from the front right, and (b) is the board unit of (a) 1 is a perspective view seen from . 128(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the lower right rear. 129(a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the corrugated line in (a), and (c) is cut along the Sacer line in (a). FIG. 130 is a cross-sectional view taken along the sea line in FIG. 129(a).

131 is an exploded front perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, and FIG. 132 is an exploded rear perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 133(a) is a front perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127, and FIG. 133(b) is a back perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. FIG. 134 is an explanatory view showing elimination of ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 135 is an explanatory view showing prevention of entry of a linear unauthorized tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG.

The substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the substrate unit 620 and the substrate unit 620A described above only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and the other configurations are the same. Components similar to those of the board unit 620A are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. 127 to 136, illustration of the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e is omitted.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 or the board unit 620A. The substrate unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame covering a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 710 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

This board unit 700 includes a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, and a first ball path 701 provided behind the first ball path 701 and released downward from the game board 5. A second ball path 702 through which the game ball B can circulate, a first ball sensor 703 for detecting the game ball B circulating in the first ball path 701, and a game ball circulating in the second ball path 702. A second ball sensor 704 for detecting B and a ball extraction passage 705 through which the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 flows. The entrances of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are open upward, respectively. Eject downwards.

In this embodiment, on the game board 5, the game ball B received in the out port 2020 or the sub-out port 2021 circulates through the first ball path 701, and in the game board 5, the general winning port 2001, the normal winning port 2002, It is accepted in the first starting gate 2003, the second starting gate 2004, the big winning gate 2005, the prize winning gate 2006 (the first V winning gate 2007, the second V winning gate 2008, the losing gate 2009, and the first winning gate 2532). The game ball B that has been played is configured to circulate through the second ball path 702 . In other words, out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, and the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704 . As a result, for the winning openings (winning opening sensor) such as the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the accessory winning opening 2006, etc. If a fraudulent act is committed in the game board 5 side, the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 will be different from the number of safe balls. can.

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 includes a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the front base 711. A rear base 712 having a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface and having a ball extraction passage 705, and a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712. and a front base 711 and a rear base 712 to eliminate clogging of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and prevent unauthorized tools from entering. a crime prevention cover 714 provided openable and closable on the rear base 712; and a frame relay board 716 . In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparent.

The front base 711 is formed in the shape of a box that is elongated in the left and right direction and is open rearwardly and upwardly. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from behind. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving opening 711a that is long in the left-right direction in the upper peripheral wall, and a release opening 711b that is open in the lower peripheral wall at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction. ing. The front base 711 accommodates the ball path member 713 therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball socket 711a. Further, the front base 711 supports the crime prevention cover 714 rotatably about an axis extending in the left-right direction at the front end side of the elimination opening 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward and elongated in the left and right directions. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The rear base 712 receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides it to the right in the front view, and then guides it downward to discharge the ball extraction passage 705. have. The ball removal passage 705 is provided in a box-shaped rear base 712 and is entirely open rearward. The ball removal passage 705 is closed on the rear end side by a passage wall member 715 . A portion of the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712 located above the speaker box 623 (a portion on the left end side in front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. , the rear side of which is closed by a passage wall member 715 .

In addition, the rear base 712 includes a first ejection guide portion 712a that receives the game ball B that has circulated through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then ejects it downward, and a second ball path member 713. It has a second discharge guiding part 712b that receives the game ball B that has circulated through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The entrance sides of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b protrude forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the entrance of the first ejection guide portion 712a opens forward. , the inlet of the second discharge guide portion 712b is open upward. The outlets of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The first ejection guide portion 712 a and the second ejection guide portion 712 b are open rearward from the front wall, and are closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715 .

In the rear base 712, the exits of the ball extraction passage 705, the first ejection guide portion 712a, and the second ejection guide portion 712b are located to the left of the dissolving port 711b of the front base 711 in front view. are arranged in order from the right to the left. The exit of the ball removal passage 705 widens greatly forward at the front end and slightly widens rearward at the rear end with respect to the exits of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b (Fig. 128(b) )). That is, the exit of the ball removal passage 705 is formed larger (broader) in the front-rear direction than the exits of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted into the box-shaped front base 711 from behind and accommodated therein. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 . The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, and an upper left shelf portion 713b inclined downward from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right. , a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, an upper right shelf portion 713d inclined downward from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c toward the right, The straightening wall portion 713e extends obliquely downward to the left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the upper right shelf portion rises rightward from a position separated rightward from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e. A lower shelf portion 713f that extends to the right from the portion 713d, a right wall portion 713g that extends vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to substantially the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and a right wall portion 713g. An upper wall portion 713h that extends leftward from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a U-shaped opening that is connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and opens upward. and a groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is positioned on the right side of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

The ball path member 713 includes a lower wall portion upper portion 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e, and an upper portion extending vertically upward from the left end of the lower wall portion upper portion 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b. The protruding middle wall portion 713k, the eaves portion 713l extending downward from the middle of the left side surface of the middle wall portion 713k, and the lower shelf portion 713f near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f extend vertically and vertically. It has an extending hanging wall portion 713m and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n extending leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m in parallel with the lower wall portion upper portion 713j. A portion of the lower wall portion lower 713n located below between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is notched vertically to a size through which the game ball B can pass.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surface of each of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, and has a plurality of obstacles spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. The ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, a groove wall portion 713i, It has a flat partition wall portion 713p that divides the space surrounded by the lower wall portion upper portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower portion 713n into front and rear.

In addition, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of cutouts that are recessed from the front and rear ends of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f toward the partition wall portion 713p. has a notch 713q. Each of the cutouts 713q is provided so that a gap smaller in the front-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 when assembled on the board unit 700. Dirt, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of laterally extending guide ribs 713r. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by a lower wall portion upper portion 713j, a hanging wall portion 713m, and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p. It is surrounded by a lower wall portion upper portion 713j, a hanging wall portion 713m, and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n on the rear side of the front portion 713s and the partition wall portion 713p. 713t and.

In the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion, the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are positioned below the portion between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. In other words, the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 are accommodated with the detection hole on the right side. Although not shown, the wiring cables extending from the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 extend leftward from the inner wall portion 713k from the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. .

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion forward of the partition wall portion 713p on the lower surface of the lower wall portion 713n. have. When the first ball guiding portion 713u is assembled to the board unit 700, the right half of the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is the entrance side of the first ejection guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712. is coming. In front of the partition wall portion 713p, the first ball guide portion 713u guides the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f to the right and then to the rear, It can be delivered to the first ejection guiding portion 712 a of the rear base 712 .

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, a portion of the lower wall portion lower portion 713n that is open downward (the portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t) ) is located below the second discharge guide portion 712 b of the rear base 712 . As a result, the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f behind the partition wall portion 713p can be transferred to the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the dissolution opening 711b in the front base 711. As shown in FIG. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713 d is positioned to the right of the right end of the dissolution opening 711 b of the front base 711 . The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is positioned to the left of the left end of the dissolution opening 711b in the front base 711. As shown in FIG. Accordingly, the portion of the front base 711 immediately above the clearance opening 711b is covered with the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the straightening wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and the left end side is curved downward vertically. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined so as to become narrower toward the left so that the left end side has a height through which one game ball B can pass. . The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can straighten a plurality of game balls B in a line and guide them downward.

Between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, as described above, the vertical dimension is formed to narrow toward the left (downstream direction in which the game ball B circulates). Depending on the amount of balls B distributed, a plurality of game balls B may get caught between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, resulting in ball clogging (see FIG. 134). Since the straightening wall portion 713e is located above the clearing port 711b, when ball clogging occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to clear the clearing port 711b. In the open state, a bar-shaped tool is inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f from below through the dissolution port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f, and the game ball B is bitten by the tool. You can clear the clogged ball by hitting the .

By the way, since the lower shelf 713f is provided with a notch 713q for eliminating ball clogging and for dropping dirt and dust downward, a wire-shaped unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a catheter may be used. from below through the notch 713q and into the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702). There is a risk of cheating on the game board 5 provided above by extending upward from the ball path 702). Insertion of such an unauthorized tool is not limited to the lower shelf portion 713f, and there is a similar concern in the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d in which the notch portion 713q is provided.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat plate-like obstruction ribs 713o extending downward and separated in the left-right direction are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h. is provided, even if the tip of the linear unauthorized tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the hindrance rib 713o and the tip ends. Movement can be blocked and further unauthorized tool insertion can be blocked (see FIG. 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrence against fraud can be provided.

In addition, in the portion of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the upper left shelf portion 713b on the right side of the middle wall portion 713k, the lower part and the left and right sides thereof are the rectifying wall portion 713e in which the notch portion 713q is not provided, and the lower wall. Since it is closed by the upper part 713j and the middle wall part 713k, an unauthorized tool cannot be inserted from below through the corresponding cutout part 713q of the upper right shelf part 713d and the upper left shelf part 713b. No fraudulent act is performed through the notch 713q.

As described above, the ball path member 713 is provided with a plurality of notches 713q in the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f. (see Figure 136). Dust discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t in the upper left shelf 713b is discharged through the rectifying wall 713e, the lower wall upper 713j, and the middle wall 713j. It is housed in the space surrounded by the wall portion 713k. As a result, dust or the like does not adhere to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t.

In addition, wiring cables are connected by connectors to the left end sides of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t. It protrudes leftward from the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude leftward from the inner wall portion 713k. In the middle wall portion 713k, since the eaves portion 713l extends leftward from the left side above the sensor housing portion front 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t, it is formed on the upper left shelf portion 713b. Dirt and dust that have fallen downward through the cutout portion 713q are guided leftward by the inclination of the eaves portion 713l, and the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 protruding leftward from the inner wall portion 713k. It is possible to prevent the product from falling on the wiring cable and the connector, thereby avoiding the occurrence of problems caused by dust or the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a stepped wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a straightening wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, The right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guide portion 713u, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712 form the first ball path 701, and the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 rear left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i, and rear base 712 A second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge guide portion 712b.

The crime prevention cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached near the front end of the release opening 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side can rotate about an axis in the left-right direction. Moreover, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 130, the crime prevention cover 714 closes the release port 711b when the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and placed horizontally. is released and rotated so that the rear end side is positioned downward to be vertical, the disengagement port 711b is open. That is, the security cover 714 can open and close the dissolution opening 711b.

By closing the crime prevention cover 714, the removal opening 711b of the front base 711 can be closed. It can be prevented from being inserted into the two ball path 702). In addition, the security cover 714 opens the clearing port 711b of the front base 711 by opening the clogged ball between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713. Therefore, a bar-shaped tool can be inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the clearing port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below to clear the clogging of the game balls B. can be done. This ball clogging elimination work is carried out in a state where the body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 .

The security cover 714 has a lower end (an end on the side of the elastic locking portion 714a) in a state in which the release port 711b is opened (in a vertical state). It is positioned below the height of the connection tube portion 43a) of the member 43 (the height indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 130). Therefore, in order to eliminate the clogging of game balls B in the ball path member 713, after opening the body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame 4 is opened with the security cover 714 open. is to be closed against the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 comes into contact with the contact-threatening object (the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43), and the main body frame 4 cannot be closed. As a result, it is possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and to securely close the security cover 714 so that the security cover 714 exhibits its crime prevention function.

Further, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason while the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, even if the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as it is. , the open crime prevention cover 714 comes into contact with the object that may come into contact with from the front. Since the crime prevention cover 714 rotates in the direction to close when it abuts, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the crime prevention cover 714 being caught by the contact-threatening object, and damage to the crime-prevention cover 714 and the contact-threatening object can be avoided. .

It should be noted that the security cover 714 of the present embodiment rarely causes clogging of the game balls B between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and is basically kept closed. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to make it difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball removal passage 705 that is open rearward. In addition, the passage wall member 715 closes the portion of the rear base 712 that is open rearward on the exit side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b, and closes the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b. The game ball B that has flowed through the secondary ejection guide portion 712b can be ejected downward. Furthermore, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 with the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716 .

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715 . The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192 of the door frame 3, the single button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 and the main control board 1310. .

As shown in FIG. 129(a), the base unit 710 of this embodiment has an upper left shelf portion 713b and a part of an upper right shelf portion 713d of the ball path member 713 extending from the ball socket 711a of the front base 711. It faces upward and can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5.例文帳に追加The game ball B dropped to the upper left shelf portion 713b or the upper right shelf portion 713d through the ball socket 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d to the lower shelf portion 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls leftward on the lower shelf portion 713f. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are piled up and down on the lower shelf 713f, they are collapsed by the upper rectifying wall 713e so as to form a line toward the left.

The game ball B rolling to the left on the lower shelf portion 713f falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall portion 713p, it is stored in the sensor housing portion front 713s. After being detected by the first ball sensor 703 and passing through the first ball guiding portion 713u, the ball passes through the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712 and is discharged downward. On the other hand, in the case behind the partition wall portion 713p, after being detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t, the ball is discharged downward through the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. be done.

As described above, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game balls B flow through paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and are discharged downward. A first spherical path 701 is located on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p, and a second spherical path 702 is located on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p. Therefore, the game ball B dropped forward from the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 from the game board 5 flows through the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

In addition, the base unit 710 moves the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in order to extract the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like into the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712. can be discharged downward through the The game ball B ejected downward from the first ejection guide portion 712a (first ball path 701), the second ejection guide portion 712b (second ball path 702), and the ball extraction passage 705 of the base unit 710 is It is delivered to the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B on the side.

According to the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 of this embodiment, since the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are provided with a plurality of cutouts 713q, dust can be collected through the cutouts 713q. Since dust can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, it is possible to avoid obstruction of the circulation of the game balls B by dust etc., and suppress the occurrence of clogging etc. can be made

Further, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are formed transparently, the door frame 3 can be opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board can be opened from the main body frame 4. 5 is removed, from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700), presence or absence of clogging of game balls B in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). can be easily verified. In addition, since the notch portion 713q is provided in the lower shelf portion 713f at the portion where the game balls B are aligned in a row by the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in the ball path member 713, the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2, and the crime prevention cover 714 is opened to remove a rod-shaped tool from below through the clearing port 711b and the notch 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and ball clogging can be eliminated by the tool.

Furthermore, a dissolution opening 711b that opens downward is provided in a portion below the rectifying wall portion 713e in the lower shelf portion 713f, and a security cover 714 that closes the dissolution opening 711b is provided. In addition to being able to eliminate ball clogging as described above, in a normal state, by closing the elimination opening 711b with the security cover 714, a linear illegal tool can be passed from the elimination opening 711b to the first ball path 701 or the like. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being inserted into the second ball path 702 and has a high deterrent effect against fraud.

In addition, since the crime prevention cover 714 for opening and closing the release port 711b is opened and closed by rotating it about the axis in the left-right direction at the front end side, the body frame 4 can be opened and closed while the crime prevention cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. If you try to close the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 will come into contact with the potentially dangerous object (connection cylinder 43a of the rear panel member 43), and the body frame 4 will not be able to be closed. The security cover 714 can be made to notice that it has been forgotten to be closed, and the crime prevention cover 714 can be reliably closed so that the crime prevention function of the crime prevention cover 714 can be exhibited.

Furthermore, since a plurality of flat plate-like obstruction ribs 713o are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h and are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward, linear Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool attempts to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the inhibition rib 713o to prevent the tip from moving. Further insertion of unauthorized tools can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrence against fraud can be provided.

Further, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank due to the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713 as described above. Therefore, even if an illegal linear tool is inserted from the exit side of the first ejection guide part 712a or the second ejection guide part 712b, the entry can be prevented by the complicated path. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 .

Further, since all the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected (counted) by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected (counted). There is no need to provide a configuration (for example, an out-ball detection unit) for detecting the game ball B, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced. A space corresponding to the structure can be secured, and by installing a performance device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can entertain the players more.

In addition, out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, respectively. By comparing with the count number of , it is possible to determine whether or not cheating is being performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against cheating.

Furthermore, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, Since the player desires to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, the player can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be easily selected. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually recognized from the player side, the displayed payout rate will be larger than usual if a large amount of game balls B are paid out. The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against the fraudulent act can be made to hesitate to execute the fraudulent act because other players and staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent act. can be

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position where the player cannot see it, the staff of the game hall can see it for the same reason as above. can detect fraudulent activity. Also, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different than the normal value, it is possible to change the displayed payout rate inside the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay Boards, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.) can be considered, so it is possible to deal with problems early, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Also, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball extraction path 705 for discharging the game ball B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 The game ball B without the ball is not counted. Therefore, only the game balls B released from the game board 5 can be accurately counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 .

In the above embodiment, the first ball path 701 is the out ball and the second ball path 702 is the safe ball. Alternatively, the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 may pass through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 701 regardless of the safe ball or the out ball. Any one of the sphere paths 702 may be flowed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the security cover 714 is rotated to open and close the dissolution opening 711b. However, the security cover 714 is not limited to this. It is good as a thing.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, by partitioning with one partition wall portion 713p, the game ball B released downward from the game board 5 is separated into two paths before and after the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. Although it is shown that the ball is discharged through one of the three ball paths, it is not limited to this, and the ball path is divided into three or more in the front and back by a plurality of partition walls, and any ball path is provided. The game ball B released from the game board 5 passing through may be ejected downward.

[4-14a. Ground fitting for ball path]
Next, the ground fittings 706 of the ball paths (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702) in the board unit 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. FIG. FIG. 137(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second sphere path in the substrate unit cut at the second sphere sensor and viewed from behind, and (b) is the first sphere path and the second sphere path in (a). 1 is an enlarged view of a main part showing an enlarged vicinity of an exit of the . FIG. 138(a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the ball path and the grounding metal fitting in the board unit, and (b) is the ball sensor and the ball path when the exit of the ball path extends vertically from the ball sensor. FIG. 4C is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the outlet and the grounding fitting, and (c) is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the ball sensor, the outlet, and the grounding fitting when the grounding fitting is provided on the bottom wall of the ball passage; is.

The board unit 700 of the present embodiment detects the game ball B that is distributed in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 as the ball paths through which the game ball B released downward from the game board 5 circulates. A ground metal fitting 706 grounded on the game hall side is provided at a portion downstream of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 (see FIG. 137). The ground fitting 706 is provided at a site where the game ball B can come into contact. The ground fitting 706 is provided on at least one of the bottom wall and the two side walls of the passages forming the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 as ball paths.

This ground metal fitting 706 has a length L3 in the ball path (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702) with respect to the circulation direction of the game ball B, and at least one of the game balls B accumulated in the ball path in a meandering manner comes into contact. formed to the length possible. For example, when provided on one surface (one side wall) of the ball path, if the diameter of the game ball B is D, the length of L3 is preferably "2D ≤ L3" (see FIG. 138(a) reference). Alternatively, the ground metal fittings 706 may be provided on two opposing surfaces (two side walls) of the ball path or on the bottom wall, and in that case, the length of L3 should be "D ≤ L3". is desirable (see FIG. 138(c)). Also, instead of attaching the ground metal fitting 706, the resin parts (for example, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, etc.) may be made of a conductive resin.

By the way, if the game balls B are not discharged from the collecting section (for example, bucket, out receiving section, etc.) for collecting the game balls B in the island facility due to some trouble, the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 are successively discharged. As the game balls B are sent, the game balls B begin to accumulate more and more, and the game balls B also accumulate in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 from the recovery unit, and the first ball sensor 703 as the out sensor 664 and the second ball sensor 703 A sphere sensor 704 may be reached. In this state, when static electricity flows from the island equipment side along the accumulated game balls B into the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are connected. The main control board 1310 (for example, the IC connected to the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704) may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the ground metal fitting 706 is provided at a portion downstream of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, By contacting the ground metal fitting 706 with the game ball B accumulated from the island equipment side, static electricity can be released, preventing the inflow of static electricity from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, and the main control board 1310 damage can be avoided.

By the way, when the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 are provided near the exit 707 of the first sphere path 701 and the second sphere path 702 as the sphere path, the exit of the first sphere path 701 and the second sphere path 702 Depending on the distance from 707 to the first ball sensor 703 or the second ball sensor 704, even if the ground metal fitting 706 is provided downstream of the first ball sensor 703 or the second ball sensor 704, a series of series of accumulated water from the island equipment may be detected. The game ball B may contact the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 without contacting the ground metal fitting 706 .

Therefore, in this embodiment, the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 are provided upstream of the distance L4 from the exit 707 (see FIGS. 138(b) and (c)). A distance L4 is the shortest distance from the exit 707 to the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 . Assuming that the diameter of the game ball B is D, the distance L4 is preferably "L4>D". Furthermore, in the first sphere path 701 and the second sphere path 702, when the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 to the exit 707 are vertical, it is desirable that "L4>2.5×D". , and the length L3 of the ground metal fitting 706 is also preferably set to "L3>2.5×D". As a result, the game balls B accumulated from the island facility side can be brought into contact with the ground metal fitting 706 before contacting the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball can be Inflow of static electricity from the sensor 704 can be blocked.

Note that the ground metal fitting 706 may be provided so as to extend from the outlet 707 of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 to the bottom surface side of the board unit 700 . Alternatively, the ground fitting 706 may be provided on the bottom surface of the board unit 700 .

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 139 to 145. FIG. FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board showing the transparent center accessory etc. in an opaque manner. 140 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 139 as seen from the front right, FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 139 as seen from the front left, and FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 139 as seen from the rear. It is a diagram. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning port 2001, a normal prize winning port 2002, and a first starting prize winning port 2001 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B to be paid out) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. An opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, a prize winning opening 2006, and a second V winning opening 2008 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening 2002, a first starting opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, a prize winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. Secondly, it is intended to allow the user to enjoy the hitting operation of the handle 195 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 159) for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a, and vibrations for detecting vibrations acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1). A sensor 1040 (see FIG. 159, etc.) is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 169) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is performed by hitting game balls B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 159, etc.) for controlling contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 to be mounted.

A production display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the production display device 1600. - 特許庁

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, and a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 which are always open and are capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a. A normal prize winning opening 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B, and a second opening which is provided in the center in the horizontal direction below the center accessory 2500 and is always open to accept the game ball B. A first starting port 2003, a second starting port 2004 which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning prize port 2002, and a first starting port. The game ball B can be accepted according to the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B to 2003 and the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B to the second start port 2004. and a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 that can receive the game ball B received in the winning opening 2006. . The game board 5 is also provided with a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 159) for detecting magnetism acting illegally within the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided at the most downstream in the game area 5a, is always open to receive the game ball B, and discharges the received game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a without returning it. An out port 2020 is provided upstream of the out port 2020 in the game area 5a, and is always open to receive the game ball B, and the received game ball B is not returned to the outside of the game area 5a. and two sub-out ports 2021 for discharging. Two out ports 2020 are provided on the left and right with the first starting port 2003 therebetween. Also, the two sub-out ports 2021 are provided at a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a and a portion on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, respectively.

Furthermore, the table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 when viewed from the front and having three general prize-winning ports 2001 and one sub-out port 2021, and the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A side upper left unit 2300 provided slightly above, and an attacker unit provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 and having a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and one sub-out opening 2021 2400, and a frame-shaped center role having a role winning opening 2006, a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008, which are provided slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. 2500, and a normal winning opening unit 2600 provided above the right end of the attacker unit 2400 and having a normal winning opening 2002. - 特許庁

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped main unit 2510 having a role winning opening 2006 and a first V winning opening 2007, and a second V winning opening 2008 provided in the lower part of the frame of the main unit 2510. and a lottery accessory 2550 having

The back unit 3000 includes a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a, a vibration sensor 1040 for detecting vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1), and a panel in the game panel 1100. A back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of a holder 1120 and having a box shape with an open front and having a square opening 3010a on the back wall, and a performance display device 1600 are detachably attached to the back wall of the back box 3010. and a back board unit 3040 arranged behind the effect display device 1600 and attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. - 特許庁

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guidance unit 3100 through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates, and the back ball in the back box 3010. A back decoration unit 3200 provided behind the induction unit 3100, a back front effect unit 3300 provided to the left and above the back ball induction unit 3100 near the front end in the back box 3010, and and a rear back effect unit 3400 provided behind the back front effect unit 3300. - 特許庁

[5-1. Front component]
The front constituent member 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in the front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely to the upper right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. This out port 1008 is closed from the front by the starting port unit 2100 .

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1010 is aligned with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 pass through the lower full ball path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 formed in the lower right corner. there is

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 .

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. ). In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in the form of round holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge thereof are separated in the horizontal direction. and a plurality of engaging stepped portions formed with a thin plate thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting projecting pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging stepped portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . be.

The panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset above the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is the left side and the left side except for the upper side from the center. The right side and the lower side have a wide width in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding stepped portion (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side and having approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110, and the holding stepped portion has a size approximately equal to that of the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion are penetrated to penetrate the lower portion. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full ball path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 extending upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and recessed forward from the rear surface. Out recessed portion 1123 communicates with out port 1008 at its upper portion.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins protruding forward from the holding stepped portion and inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and arranged outside the holding stepped portion. The panel plate 1110 has three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging stepped portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 that protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding stepped portion. and a pair of engaging pieces respectively engaged with the two engaging stepped portions on the lower side of the . The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging stepped portion on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper side and the lower left side. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding stepped portion by elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is held with the engaging claw. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110 at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

Since this game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front structural member 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the boundary of the game area 5a from being clearly visible. It is possible to give a sense of openness to the player, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front structural member 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). By doing so, it can be made to appear to emit light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the state assembled to the game board 5 from the lower side and the rear side, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . Thereby, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are received. can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharged ball receiving portion 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123) below. The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664 .

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 150 and the like. Figure 146 (a) is a rear view of the first specification main control unit, which is one of the main control units, (b) is a front perspective view of the first specification main control unit, and (c) is a front view of the first specification main control unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st specification main control unit from the back. FIG. 147(a) is an exploded perspective view of the first specification main control unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 147(b) is an exploded perspective view of the first specification main control unit viewed from the rear. Figure 148(a) is a rear view of a second specification main control unit, which is one of the main control units, and (b) is a perspective view of the second specification main control unit as seen from behind. 149(a) is an exploded perspective view of the second specification main control unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 149(b) is an exploded perspective view of the second specification main control unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 150(a1) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of the setting key switch mounted in the rear view of the first specification main control unit, and (a2) is a cross section of the setting key switch portion in (a1). , (b1) is an enlarged explanatory view showing the same part as (a1) in the rear view of the second specification main control unit, and (b2) is the same as (a2) in (b1) It is explanatory drawing which shows a site|part with a cross section.

The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 159) for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. and have.

The main control board box 1320 includes a board base 1330 attached to the board holder 1200 and having the main control board 1310 attached to its rear surface, and a board cover 1340 attached to the board base 1330 so as to cover the main control board 1310 from behind. , consists of Substrate base 1330 and substrate cover 1340 are made of transparent polycarbonate. A main control board 1310 is accommodated in the internal space formed by the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340 . Since the substrate base 1330 and the substrate cover 1340 are made of transparent polycarbonate, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be checked. ) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320 .

In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms 1350 corresponding to the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism 1350, Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism 1350, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, out sensor 664, peripheral control board 1510, and the like. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002, a first starting opening sensor 2101, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2402, and a prize winning opening sensor. 2501, first V winning opening sensor 2502, second V winning opening sensor 2503, losing opening sensor 2504, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2516, first distribution solenoid 2534, second distribution It is connected to a solenoid 2544, a lottery loop solenoid 2558, a striking piece drive motor 2561, a gutter swing drive motor 2564, a swing piece solenoid 2565, a magnetic sensor 1030, a vibration sensor 1040, and the like.

The main control board 1310 also has a base monitor 1311 consisting of four 7-segment LEDs. Base monitor 1311 is visible from the rear through transparent substrate cover 1340 . The base monitor 1311 is provided on the base unit 660 of the main body frame 4 after the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540 is ejected downward from the game board 5 after being hit into the game area 5a. The number of game balls B counted by being detected by the out sensor 664 is displayed. The base monitor 1311 of this embodiment displays the number of balls counted by the out sensor 664 after firing 100 balls (the number of balls returned to the game hall side) as a percentage.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control unit 1300 is a first specification main control unit 1300A capable of changing settings such as game content, and a second specification main control unit 1300A capable of changing settings such as game content. A main control unit 1300B with different specifications is prepared in advance, and one of them can be attached to the game board 5 according to the request of the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

First, the first specification main control unit 1300A as the main control unit 1300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 146, 147 and 150. FIG. The first specification main control unit 1300A accommodates a first specification main control board 1310A for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., and a first specification main control board 1310A, and is attached to the board holder 1200. Specification main control board box 1320A.

The first specification main control board box 1320A has a board base 1330 which is attached to the board holder 1200 and to which the first specification main control board 1310A is attached on the rear surface, and a board base 1330 which covers the first specification main control board 1310A from the rear. and a plurality of sealing mechanisms 1350 capable of sealing the substrate base 1330 and the first specification substrate cover 1340A so as to leave traces of opening and closing. The first specification main control board box 1320A is made of a transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate, and the first specification main control board 1310A housed inside can be visually recognized from the outside. Since the substrate base 1330 and the sealing mechanism 1350 of the first specification main control substrate box 1320A have the same configuration as the main control substrate box 1320 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first specification main control board 1310A is connected to the interface board 635, the out sensor 664, the peripheral control board 1510, etc., in the same manner as the main control board 1310 described above. In addition, the first specification main control board 1310A includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002, a first starting opening sensor 2101, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2402, and accessories. winning opening sensor 2501, first V winning opening sensor 2502, second V winning opening sensor 2503, losing opening sensor 2504, start opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2516, first distribution solenoid 2534, second Bi-dividing solenoid 2544, lottery loop solenoid 2558, striking piece drive motor 2561, gutter swing drive motor 2564, swing piece solenoid 2565, magnetic sensor 1030, vibration sensor 1040, etc. are also connected.

Also, the first specification main control board 1310A is provided with a base monitor 1311 consisting of four 7-segment LEDs near the upper right corner when viewed from the back. The base monitor 1311 can be viewed from behind through the transparent first specification substrate cover 1340A. The base monitor 1311 of this embodiment displays, for example, the ratio (so-called base) of how many game balls B are discharged as prize balls with respect to the launched game balls B. FIG.

Also, the first specification main control board 1310A is provided with a setting key switch 1312 in the upper right corner when viewed from the rear. The setting key switch 1312 is provided on the right side at the same height as the base monitor 1311 in rear view. This setting key switch 1312 is a unique specific part provided only on the first specification main control board 1310A. This setting key switch 1312 is for switching the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the setting value. In the setting key switch 1312, an insertion opening 1312a for a setting key (not shown) faces outward from the setting key window 1341 of the first specification board cover 1340A.

The setting key switch 1312 has an attachment leg 1312b and a connection terminal 1312c protruding from the bottom. When the setting key switch 1312 is mounted on the first specification main control board 1310A as shown in FIG. protruding from the back side of the board. Mounting holes and through holes into which the legs 1312b and terminals 1312c of the setting key switch 1312 are inserted are provided in advance in the first specification main control board 1310A.

The setting key switch 1312 has a cylindrical portion 1312d forming a part where the insertion port 1312a is provided, and a square having one side longer than the diameter of the circle of the cylindrical portion 1312d. and a prismatic portion 1312e extending forward in a prismatic shape. The cylindrical portion 1312d of the setting key switch 1312 is inserted into the tubular portion 1342 of the first specification board cover 1340A. The setting key switch 1312 has a step formed between a cylindrical portion 1312d and a prismatic portion 1312e. A leg 1312b and a terminal 1312c extend forward from the front end of the prism portion 1312e.

The initial position of the setting key switch 1312 is such that the longitudinal direction of the setting key insertion opening 1312a is in the vertical direction as shown in the drawing. A setting key can be inserted into the insertion port 1312a, and the inserted setting key can be removed from the insertion port 1312a. When the setting key switch 1312 is inserted into the insertion slot 1312a and rotated clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position, the setting key switch 1312 is set to the first position and the setting key is turned ON. is input to On the other hand, when the inserted setting key is rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position, the decision key is turned ON as the second position, and the signal is input to the main control MPU (not shown). In this way, the setting key switch 1312 of this embodiment can operate two functions, that is, the setting key ON function and the decision key ON function, depending on the direction in which the setting key is rotated. By doing so, the operation of any function can be turned off.

As a method of changing the setting value by the setting key switch 1312, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1312, and turned clockwise (to the right). When the power switch 630a is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (not shown) in this state, the settings are displayed on the base monitor 1311. FIG. When the setting is displayed, press the setting change switch (also used as the RAM clear switch here) to change the displayed setting value. Display the desired setting value and turn the setting key to the left. When it returns to the original initial position, the setting is confirmed.

On the other hand, if the currently set value is to be checked, the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1312 with the pachinko machine 1 powered off and turned clockwise (to the right). . In this state, when the power switch 630a of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the set value currently set on the base monitor 1311 is displayed. After confirming the setting value, turn the setting key to the left to return to the original initial position to return to the normal state.

Here, the set value will be briefly explained. The “set value” means the probability for lottery determination of whether or not it is a big hit, or the probability that it is advantageous for the player (that is, the game ball that the player can acquire). The probability (advantage degree) that the number of balls of B can be increased is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance.

Then, the main control MPU of the first specification main control board 1310A has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that defines the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won). table).

Various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values differ from each other, and various tables used for various sorting rates are set so that at least some values differ from each other. The value may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to In addition, as the set values described above, six set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 6 were used, but a smaller range may be used, or a larger range may be used. It can be anything. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integer) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

The first specification board cover 1340A of the first specification main control board box 1320A in the first specification main control unit 1300A includes a setting key window 1341 that allows the rear end (insertion opening 1312a) of the setting key switch 1312 to face backward, and a setting key and a cylindrical portion 1342 projecting rearward from the peripheral edge of the window 1341 . In addition, the first specification board cover 1340A has a guide portion 1343 on the rear surface of a portion above the cylindrical portion 1342, and characters of "setting key" are engraved in a convex shape (see FIG. 150(a1)). Since the first specification board cover 1340A is made of a transparent synthetic resin, even if the guide part 1343 is provided on the back side, it can be visually recognized from the front side.

When the first specification main control unit 1300A is assembled, the cylindrical portion 1312d of the setting key switch 1312 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 1342 of the first specification board cover 1340A. As a result, the rear end surface of the setting key switch 1312 faces rearward from the setting key window 1341 without protruding rearward from the rear surface of the first specification board cover 1340A. Also, the front end of the cylindrical portion 1342 of the first specification board cover 1340A is in contact with the step between the columnar portion 1312d and the square columnar portion 1312e of the setting key switch 1312. As shown in FIG. As a result, the front end side of the setting key window 1341 overlaps with the prism portion 1312e and becomes closed, preventing an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from entering the first specification main control board box 1320A through the setting key window 1341. can be prevented.

In addition, when the first specification main control unit 1300A is assembled, the insertion opening 1312a provided on the rear end surface of the setting key switch 1312 is exposed rearward from the setting key window 1341, and is provided above it. Since the character of "set key" of the guiding portion 1343 can be visually recognized, the insertion opening 1312a facing the setting key window 1341 is for inserting the setting key. can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the first specification main control unit 1300A is capable of changing the set values.

Next, the second specification main control unit 1300B as the main control unit 1300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 148 to 150. FIG. The second specification main control unit 1300B accommodates a second specification main control board 1310B for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., and a second specification main control board 1310B, which is attached to the board holder 1200. Specification main control board box 1320B.

The second specification main control board box 1320B includes a board base 1330 attached to the board holder 1200 and having the second specification main control board 1310B attached to its rear surface, and a board base 1330 covering the second specification main control board 1310B from the rear. and a plurality of sealing mechanisms 1350 capable of sealing the substrate base 1330 and the second specification substrate cover 1340B so as to leave traces of opening and closing. The second specification main control board box 1320B is made of a transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate, and the second specification main control board 1310B housed inside can be visually recognized from the outside. The board base 1330 and the sealing mechanism 1350 of the second specification main control board box 1320B have the same configurations as those of the main control board box 1320 described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The second specification main control board 1310B is connected to the interface board 635, the out sensor 664, the peripheral control board 1510, etc., in the same manner as the main control board 1310 described above. In addition, the second specification main control board 1310B includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002, a first starting opening sensor 2101, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2402, and accessories. winning opening sensor 2501, first V winning opening sensor 2502, second V winning opening sensor 2503, losing opening sensor 2504, start opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2516, first distribution solenoid 2534, second Bi-dividing solenoid 2544, lottery loop solenoid 2558, striking piece drive motor 2561, gutter swing drive motor 2564, swing piece solenoid 2565, magnetic sensor 1030, vibration sensor 1040, etc. are also connected.

Also, the second specification main control board 1310B is provided with a base monitor 1311 consisting of four 7-segment LEDs near the upper right corner in rear view. The base monitor 1311 can be viewed from behind through the transparent second specification substrate cover 1340B. The base monitor 1311 is provided on the base unit 660 of the main body frame 4 after the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540 is ejected downward from the game board 5 after being hit into the game area 5a. The number of game balls B counted by being detected by the out sensor 664 is displayed. The base monitor 1311 of this embodiment displays the number of balls counted by the out sensor 664 after firing 100 balls (the number of balls returned to the game hall side) as a percentage.

Unlike the first specification main control board 1310A, this second specification main control board 1310B is not provided with the setting key switch 1312 . In other words, the second specification main control board 1310B has an unmounted area 1313 in which no electronic components are mounted in the upper right corner (the portion to the right of the base monitor 1311) in rear view (Fig. 150). The area surrounded by the two-dot chain line in (b1)). The unmounted area 1313 of the second specification main control board 1310B is not provided with mounting holes for mounting electronic components, through holes for electrically connecting electronic components, or the like.

In this way, since the second specification main control board 1310B is not provided with the setting key switch 1312 as a specific part, it is impossible to change the setting value, and the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) The set values related to the game contents, etc. are fixed so that they cannot be changed.

Although illustration is omitted, characters, symbols, etc., which make it possible to recognize that electronic components (specific components) are not mounted, are applied by silk printing or the like to the non-mounted area 1313 of the second specification main control board 1310B. can be

The second specification board cover 1340B in the second specification main control board box 1320B has a second It has an unmounted identifying portion 1345 cylindrically extending toward the specification main control board 1310B. The non-mounting identification portion 1345 of the second specification board cover 1340B has the same configuration as the cylindrical portion 1342 of the first specification board cover 1340A.

Unlike the first specification board cover 1340A, the second specification board cover 1340B does not have the setting key window 1341 and the guiding part 1343, and the part of the setting key window 1341, that is, the cylinder of the unmounted identification part 1345 The rear end opening of the shape is closed by the surface portion 1344 . Therefore, the second specification board cover 1340B has a flat surface without irregularities at the rear surface of the rear surface of the non-mounting area 1313 . Further, since the second specification board cover 1340B is made of a transparent synthetic resin, the non-mounting identification portion 1345 can be visually recognized from the outside.

In addition to the cylindrical portion, characters, symbols, etc. indicating that the specific component is not mounted may be provided as the unmounted identification portion 1345 in the portion facing the unmounted area 1313 of the second specification board cover 1340B. Alternatively, characters, symbols, or the like indicating that the specific component is not mounted may be provided in place of the cylindrical portion.

As described above, according to the second specification main control unit 1300B, the setting key switch as a specific part is provided on the surface portion 1344 of the transparent second specification board cover 1340B facing the unmounted area 1313 of the second specification main control board 1310B. Since the tubular unmounted identification portion 1345 corresponding to the 1312 is provided, the unmounted identification portion 1345 can be seen and the operator's line of sight can be guided to the unmounted identification portion 1345 . By guiding the operator's line of sight to the unmounted identifying section 1345, the part (unmounted area 1313) of the second specification main control board 1310B facing the unmounted identifying section 1345 can be seen. It can be made to recognize that no electronic component is mounted on the site.

At this time, since the unmounted area 1313 of the second specification main control board 1310B is not provided with mounting holes, through holes, etc. for mounting electronic components, the operator is asked to The unit 1300B can be immediately recognized as having game specifications in which no electronic component (setting key switch 1312 as a specific component) is mounted in the unmounted area 1313, and the game specifications in the second specification main control unit 1300B can be immediately recognized. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which makes it easy to understand the difference.

In the above embodiment, the setting key switch 1312 is shown as a specific part mounted on the first specification main control board 1310A and not mounted on the second specification main control board 1310B, but it is not limited to this. Instead, other switches, connectors, ROMs, ICs, etc. may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the unmounted identifying portion 1345 of the second specification board cover 1340B is shown as a cylindrical shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the surface portion 1344 facing the unmounted area 1313 is used. , it may be protruding from the front or back surface, may be recessed on the front or back surface, or may be linear (including a parting line) provided on the front or back surface. However, the surface portion 1344 may be one step lower than the other surface portions.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the non-mounted identification section 1345 is formed integrally with the second specification board cover 1340B. The non-mounted identifying portion may be configured by a sticker to be pasted, ink by printing or painting applied to the second specification substrate cover 1340B, or the like.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 139 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the lottery result of normal symbols, the lottery result of special symbols, and the like. .

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a state indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and a lottery result of a normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2002. A normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs to be displayed and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to acceptance of the game balls B to the normal winning opening 2002 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2003, and a first starting A first special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the opening 2003, and a second special design drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start opening 2004. A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery result, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 and have.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "win". A round indicator consisting of an LED.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 142 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the performance display device 1600 provided behind the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . More specifically, the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 which attaches the performance display device 1600 to the rear surface of the back box 3010 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 159) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIG. 159). The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600, although the details will be described later.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the front surface of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010 . Since the liquid crystal spacer 1610 is detachable from the back box 3010 , the effect display device 1600 can be detached from the back box 3010 via the liquid crystal spacer 1610 . The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-like center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 .

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and is mounted on the front surface of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 in a horizontally long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 is offset (decentered) so that the center of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 is positioned lower right than the center of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 so that spaces are formed above and to the left of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 . installed.

The liquid crystal spacer 1610 has the same size as the 19-inch liquid crystal display device and is formed in the shape of a transparent flat plate. The liquid crystal spacer 1610 has two upper fixing pieces 1611 protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1612 protruding downward from the lower end surface. This liquid crystal spacer 1610 is placed in two fixed grooves 3010c that are open to the upper inner peripheral surface of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen of the effect display device 1600 facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixed pieces 1611 obliquely from the rear, the lower fixed piece 1612 side is moved forward to insert the lower fixed piece 1612 into the opening of the lock slider 3020, and the lock slider 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the left.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear end partially projects into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. there is

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, and a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball B hit into the game area 5a. A normal winning opening 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B, and a first start opening 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open to accept the game ball B. , A second start port 2004 that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning port 2002, and the game ball to the first start port 2003. A large winning opening 2005 and a role that can accept the game ball B according to the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B or the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 A product winning opening 2006, and a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 for receiving the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 are provided.

In addition, the front unit 2000 further includes an out port 2020 and a sub-out port 2021 for discharging the game ball B hit into the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 are always open so that the game ball B can be received. In addition, the out port 2020 is provided at the downstream end of the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a first start opening sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2003, and a second start opening sensor that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. 2401, a big winning hole sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005, a first V winning hole sensor 2502 that detects the game ball B received in the first V winning hole 2007, A second V winning opening sensor 2503 for detecting the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 and a loss opening sensor 2504 for detecting the game ball B received in the losing opening 2009 act within the game area 5a. and a magnetic sensor 1030 for detecting illegal magnetism.

A plurality of (here, three) general winning holes 2001 are arranged on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in the lower part of the game area 5a. The normal winning opening 2002 is arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the right end in the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2003 is arranged between the two out ports 2020 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged below the normal winning opening 2002 near the right end in the game area 5a. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged on the right side of the first starting opening 2003 in the game area 5a. The accessory winning opening 2006 is arranged above the normal winning opening 2002 in the vicinity of the right end in the game area 5a.

The out port 2020 is arranged below the left and right sides of the first start port 2003 at the downstream end of the game area 5a. One of the sub-out openings 2021 is arranged to the left of the three general winning openings 2001 and the remaining one is arranged below the second starting opening 2004 .

The table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2003 and an out opening 2020. A start opening unit 2100 and a start opening unit 2100 A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view and has three general prize-winning ports 2001 and one sub-out port 2021, and a slightly upper side unit 2200 on the left side of the front view. and a side upper left unit 2300 provided in the .

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 and has a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and an attacker unit 2400 having one sub-out opening 2021. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is provided slightly above the center of the front view, and has an accessory winning opening 2006, a first V winning opening 2007, a second V winning opening 2008, and a losing opening 2009. and a normal winning opening unit 2600 provided above the attacker unit 2400 and having a normal winning opening 2002. - 特許庁

[5-8a. starting unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 includes a first starting port 2003 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received, and a game ball that is always open to receive the game ball B. It has two out ports 2020 that discharge outside the game area 5a without returning B. In addition, the starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening sensor 2101 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2003 (see FIG. 159).

Out port 2020 is provided at a position lower than first start port 2003 . The two out ports 2020 of the starting port unit 2100 are provided at symmetrical positions with the first starting port 2003 therebetween. The first starting port 2003 is open upward with a width through which one game ball B can pass. The out port 2020 is opened upward with a width of two game balls B, and is provided at the lowest position in the game area 5a.

The starting port unit 2100 is provided such that the height difference between the first starting port 2003 and the out port 2020 is smaller (lower) than the height difference between the first starting port and the out port (out port 1008) in the conventional pachinko machine. ing. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that the first starting port 2003 is provided below the conventional first starting port, and the inside of the game area 5a can be made to appear relatively wide. .

The starting port unit 2100 is provided below the first starting port 2003 and has a starting port display section 2110 capable of displaying a predetermined pattern. The starting opening display section 2110 is composed of one 7-segment LED. This starting point display section 2110 can display a predetermined pattern (including numbers) according to the progress of the game. When the starter unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, the starter display part 2110 closes the outlet 1008 from the front, making the outlet 1008 invisible to the player. This allows the player to recognize that the out port 2020 is the lowest end of the game area 5a.

In the starting port unit 2100 assembled on the game board 5, the first starting port 2003 is located directly below the central release portion 2513a on the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500, and the game released from the central release portion 2513a. Ball B can be accepted with high probability. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2101, guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. and discharged downward.

The game ball B received in the out port 2020 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. - 特許庁

[5-8b. side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141, 145 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 which are always open to receive the game balls B, and one sub-out opening 2021 which is always open to receive the game balls B.

The three general winning holes 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002, and are provided at higher positions toward the left. Each general prize winning opening 2001 is opened with a size (width) corresponding to one game ball B. One sub-out port 2021 is provided to the left of the leftmost general winning port 2001 . The sub-out port 2021 is opened with a size (width) of one game ball B.

Also, the side unit 2200 has a shelf 2201 on the right side of the rightmost general prize winning opening 2001, which slopes down toward the right. The shelf 2201 extends rightward to the vicinity of the right end of the left outlet 2020 in the starting outlet unit 2100 . That is, when the game ball B rolls on the shelf 2201, it is received by the out port 2020 on the left side.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, three general prize winning openings 2001 and one sub-out opening 2021 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 and discharged downward.

Also, the side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is ejected downward.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes downward to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf part 2301 .

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starter unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. This attacker unit 2400 has a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and one sub-out opening 2021 (see FIG. 145, etc.).

The attacker unit 2400 has a second start opening 2004 provided in the upper right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a big winning opening 2005 is provided in a position lower than the second start opening 2004 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. One sub-out port 2021 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the big prize winning port 2005 .

In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a big winning opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005. , and a magnetic sensor 1030 for detecting illegal magnetism (see FIG. 159). Two big winning opening sensors 2402 are provided side by side on the left and right.

Also, the attacker unit 2400 has a dummy sensor 2403 at a position visible from the front behind the sub-out port 2021 . Although this dummy sensor 2403 cannot detect the game ball B, it is formed in the same manner as a through sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball B like the big winning hole sensor 2402 . According to this configuration, the dummy sensor 2403 can be replaced with a sensor that can actually detect the game ball B. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be changed to count out-balls or not. is. Although the dummy sensor 2403 is of the same type as the through sensor, it may be a spacer that eliminates a step that causes clogging of the ball at that portion.

The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second starting opening door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second starting opening 2004, and the second starting opening door 2411 according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the ordinary winning opening 2002. A starting opening solenoid 2412, a large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and a large winning opening door 2413 are drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004. and an attacker solenoid 2414 opened and closed according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

The second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 opens upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the horizontal direction. The large winning opening 2005 has a width of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B and opens upward. A second starting opening door 2411 that can open and close the second starting opening 2004 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. A large prize winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by rotating around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the left end side is lower. are doing.

The second starting door 2411 is provided so as to move in the front-rear direction. When the start solenoid 2412 is not energized, the second start door 2411 moves forward due to the spring biasing force of the plunger of the start solenoid 2412, closing the second start door 2004. there is In addition, when the starting solenoid 2412 is energized, the second starting door 2411 moves backward by retracting the plunger of the starting solenoid 2412 against the biasing force of the spring. The mouth 2004 is opened.

The big prize gate door 2413 has a flat plate shape that is elongated in the left and right direction, and is provided so as to move forward and backward by rotating around an axis extending in the left and right direction provided below the big prize gate sensor 2402 . ing. The large winning opening door 2413 can open and close the large winning opening 2005 by moving the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 back and forth. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the large winning opening door 2413 is moved forward by the spring biasing force of the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 to close the large winning opening 2005 . In addition, when the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized, the large winning opening door 2413 moves rearward by retracting the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 against the urging force of the spring, thereby opening the large winning opening 2005. do.

The attacker unit 2400 forms a space in which the game ball B can flow between the second starting port 2004 and the big winning port 2005 at its upper end, and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left. It has an upper shelf portion 2421 provided to cover the top thereof. The upper shelf portion 2421 extends in the left-right direction from the upper right end of the second starting opening 2004 to the upper left end of the big winning opening 2005 .

The attacker unit 2400 is located above the second start opening 2004 and is located leftward from the right end (right rail 1005) of the attacker unit 2400 with a gap that allows one game ball B to pass therethrough. 2004, a second shelf 2423 that slopes downward from the left end of the second starting port 2004, and a second shelf 2423 that slopes downward to the left. The third shelf part that is inclined so as to be lower toward the left large winning opening 2005 from the part where the game ball B can pass between the second shelf part 2423 on the left and lower side of the 2424, and a fourth shelf portion 2425 which is inclined downward from the left end of the big prize opening 2005 toward the left.

In this attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B enters the clearance to the right of the first shelf 2422 and the clearance between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424, it is received by the sub-out port 2021. , the game ball B is discharged outside the game area 5a.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the attacker unit 2400 has a front wall and a rear wall that form a space in which the game ball B can circulate leftward between the upper shelf portion 2421 and the big winning opening 2005. A plurality of triangular contact portions in a plan view protrude into the space so as to alternate in the left-right direction from the wall. These a plurality of abutting portions can circulate the game ball B rolling on the large winning opening door 2413 in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction when the large winning opening 2005 is closed. The circulation time of the game ball B which circulates on the entrance door 2413 is lengthened.

In the normal state of the attacker unit 2400, the starter solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are in a de-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starter solenoid 2412 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the second starter door 2411 protrudes forward. In this state, the second starting opening door 2411 is positioned above the second starting opening 2004, and the second starting opening door 2411 makes it impossible to accept the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004. ing. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411 .

Also, in a normal state, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the big winning opening door 2413 protrudes forward. In this state, the large winning opening door 2413 is located above the large winning opening 2005, and the receiving of the game ball B into the large winning opening 2005 is disabled. In other words, the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the big winning opening door 2413 .

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down on the first shelf 2422, the game ball B rolls leftward due to the inclination of the first shelf 2422, the upper surface of the second start door 2411, and the second After rolling on the second shelf portion 2423 , it is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf portion 2423 . The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2423 falls on the third shelf 2424 or the big winning entrance door 2413 according to its momentum, and rolls leftward due to their inclination. In addition, when the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2423 contacts the lower surface of the upper shelf 2421 and rebounds to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424 may enter the

Then, the game ball B rolling on the big winning gate door 2413 closing the big winning gate 2005 hits a plurality of contact points provided in the space between the upper shelf 2421 and the big winning gate 2005. It alternately abuts against the parts, and rolls to the left while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that rolls leftward on the big winning opening door 2413 rolls on the fourth shelf 2425, and is released to the outside of the attacker unit 2400 from the left end thereof. Since the left end of the fourth shelf 2425 is positioned lower than the first starting port 2003 , the game ball B released leftward from the fourth shelf 2425 is received by the out port 2020 .

The attacker unit 2400 is guided to the left by the inclination when the game ball B falls on the upper shelf part 2421, and the attacker unit 2400 is not given an opportunity to be accepted by the second start hole 2004 or the big winning hole 2005. Released to the left. Since the left end of the upper shelf 2421 is provided at a position higher than the first starting port 2003, the game ball B released leftward from the upper shelf 2421 may be received by the first starting port 2003. .

In this attacker unit 2400 , when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf 2422 , it enters the sub-out port 2021 . Also, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2423 and the third shelf portion 2424 , it enters the sub-out port 2021 . The game ball B that has entered the sub-out port 2021 passes through the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 below without being returned to the game area 5a. In this attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that circulated on the right side of the first shelf 2422 and the game ball B that passed through the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424 are both substantially two sub-out ports 2021 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting opening solenoid 2412 is energized (ON) according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the ordinary winning opening 2002, it resists the biasing force of the spring. The plunger retreats and the second starter door 2411 moves rearward. Then, by moving the second starting port door 2411 backward, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the receiving of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 becomes possible. That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the second start opening 2004 is in the open state, when the game ball B is received in the second start opening 2004, it is detected by the second start opening sensor 2401 and then released backward from the attacker unit 2400. - 特許庁The game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 and released backward from the attacker unit 2400 is transferred to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004, When the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized (ON), the plunger moves backward against the biasing force of the spring, and the big winning opening door 2413 moves backward. By moving the large winning opening door 2413 backward, the large winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the game ball B can be received into the large winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加In other words, the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state.

When the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is in an open state, it is detected by one of the two large winning opening sensors 2402 provided below, and then the attacker unit. 2400 is emitted backwards. The game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 and released backward from the attacker unit 2400 is transferred to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

As described above, according to the attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is detected by either of the two large winning opening sensors 2402 and then released backward. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball B from being stuck between the big winning hole 2005 and the big winning hole sensor 2402, and to accept many game balls B in a short time.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role item 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 151(a) is a front view of the lottery accessory in the center accessory, and FIG. 151(b) is a perspective view of the lottery accessory viewed from the front and above. FIG. 152 is a side cross-sectional view of the lottery accessory in the center accessory cut at the center in the left-right direction. FIG. 153(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a state in which a game ball cannot loop in a lottery accessory, and (b) is a cross section showing a state in which a game ball can loop in a lottery accessory. FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the lottery accessories.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame.

Although the details will be described later, the center accessory 2500 is the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2003 and the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second start port 2004. A role prize winning port 2006 that opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of two special symbols, and a second V prize winning port 2008 that can accept only the game ball B accepted in the role prize winning port 2006. , and a loss opening 2009 for receiving the game ball B which was not received in the second V winning opening 2008 after being received in the accessory winning opening 2006.例文帳に追加

The center accessory 2500 includes an accessory winning opening sensor 2501 that detects the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006, and a first V winning opening that detects the game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007. A sensor 2502, a second V winning opening sensor 2503 for detecting the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008, and a loss opening sensor 2504 for detecting the game ball B received in the losing opening 2009. ing.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped body unit 2510 and a lottery accessory 2550 provided in the lower part of the frame of the body unit 2510 . The main unit 2510 has a prize winning port 2006 and a first V prize winning port 2007 . The lottery accessory 2550 has a second V winning opening 2008 and a losing opening 2009 .

[5-8e-1. main unit]
The main unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 will be described in detail. The main unit 2510 has a prize winning opening 2006 . The main unit 2510 includes a transparent frame-shaped center base 2511 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), a warp passage 2512 capable of guiding game balls B from the outside of the center base 2511 to the inside of the frame, A stage 2513 is provided on the lower side of the frame of the center base 2511 and releases the game ball B, which has flowed through the warp passage 2512, into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction.

The center base 2511 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2511a extending in the front-rear direction, a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2511b protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2511a and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the peripheral wall portion. and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2511c protruding from the inner periphery of 2511a. The peripheral wall portion 2511a extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5 . In addition, the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2511a, excluding the frame-shaped (annular) lower side portion, protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5 . That is, the center base 2511 has the flange portion 2511b extending outward from the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2511a at the frame-shaped lower side portion. As a result, when assembled on the game board 5, the peripheral wall portion 2511a can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame.

The thickness of the flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511c is formed thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511c protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2511a at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2511 c (flange portion 2511 b ) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2511 a is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 .

A plurality of support portions 2511c are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2511a. The support portion 2511c is also provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2511a where the flange portion 2511b does not protrude, thereby reinforcing the peripheral wall portion 2511a. In addition, the support portion 2511c has an end side protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2511a formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2511a or in a straight line so that the support portion 2511c is not conspicuous. The support portion 2511c has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2511a within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2511c to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm). It is made to be inconspicuous from.

The warp passage 2512 is located on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2511a in front view and is located in front of the front surface (flange portion 2511b) of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). there is The warp passage 2512 can guide the entering game ball B to the stage 2513 .

The stage 2513 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and is positioned directly above the first start-up port 2003 of the start-up unit 2100, that is, the state in which the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. , is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2513 has a portion (central release portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portions 2513b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the stage 2513 is assembled on the game board 5 , the raised portion (central release portion 2513 a ) at the center in the left-right direction is located directly above the first starting port 2003 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2003 with a very high probability.

Further, the main unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is provided at the upper right corner of the center base 2511, and has a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two passages through which the game balls B can flow. The guide path group 2520 guides the game ball B above the normal winning opening 2002 and the attacker unit 2400 .

As shown in FIG. 145, the group of guide passages 2520 is provided outside the frame of the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center base 2511, and includes a first guide passage 2521 whose upper entrance is provided at the location of the blocking portion 1006; and a second guide passage 2522 whose upper entrance is provided adjacent to the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 . The guide path group 2520 (the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522) are both made of a colorless and transparent member, and the game balls B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front.

The first guide passage 2521 vertically extends downward from the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000 and then bends rightward at right angles. Extends to the left, bends to the left near the height of 3/4 from the bottom of the height of the game area 5a, extends to the left so as to be lower at a loose angle, and the game ball than the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 After bending downward at the position on the left side by one B and extending to the height of the center of the game area 5a, it bends to the right and extends to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bends downward to open the exit downward. It is formed in an open shape.

The first guide passage 2521 is not bent in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the game panel 1100 . A prize winning opening 2006 is provided at an upper left portion of the first guide passage 2521 . Further, below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, a normal prize winning opening 2002 opens upward.

On the other hand, the second guide passage 2522 is spaced leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521, and the entrance opens upward. The second guide passage 2522 extends substantially straight downward from the entrance at the upper end, and bends backward at a position lower than the height of the portion where the first guide passage 2521 first bends to the right. The leftmost portion of the first guide passage 2521 extending downward in the state of being aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction by bending downward behind the front surface of the panel 1100 and the left-right direction. extends downward so as to generally match, bends downward in a crank shape at the height of the center of the game area 5a, and then bends downward, and to the right of the lower side in the first guide passage 2521 After bending forward at a portion below the extending portion, the portion extending to the lower right side of the first guide passage 2521 in a state in which the front-rear direction is flush with the first guide passage 2521. It bends rightward so as to extend along the lower side, then bends downward so as to be adjacent to the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521, and the outlet is formed into a shape that opens downward. .

In addition, the main unit 2510 is provided in the middle of one passage (here, the first guide passage 2521) of the guide passage group 2520, and the game ball B is provided at the first start port 2003 and the second start port 2004. A role winning opening 2006 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance, and the game ball B accepted in the role winning opening 2006 A first distribution device 2530 that distributes to the chance opening 2531, a second distribution device 2540 that distributes the game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 by the first distribution device 2530 to the first V winning opening 2007, A lottery guide passage 2545 for guiding the game ball B not allocated to the first V winning opening 2007 by the two distribution device 2540 (the game ball B distributed to the second prize opening 2541) to the lottery accessory 2550. ing.

The accessory prize winning opening 2006 in the main unit 2510 (center accessory 2500) is provided in a portion extending leftward on the upper side of the first guide passage 2521. It extends upward and opens upward. The accessory prize-winning door 2515 is formed in a plate-like shape extending to the left and right so that the left end is lowered while extending forward and backward. can be opened and closed. The accessory winning opening door 2515 can close the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving forward. can be formed to guide the game ball B flowing from the upstream side to the exit side of the first guide passage 2521.

The accessory winning opening door 2515 is retracted by the driving of the accessory winning opening solenoid 2516 to open the accessory winning opening 2006, and the game ball B that has flowed through the first guide passage 2521 is pushed through the accessory winning opening 2006. can be accepted by This prize winning port door 2515 closes the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning solenoid 2516 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning solenoid 2516 is ON (when energized). The prize winning opening 2006 is opened.

The first sorting device 2530 is a chance opening 2531 and a first scarf opening 2532 into which the game ball B received by the role winning opening 2006 and detected by the role winning opening sensor 2501 can enter, and the game ball B A dividing rotator 2533 that has an accommodating portion 2533a that can accommodate only one piece on the outer peripheral surface and is rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a state in which the accommodating portion 2533a of the distributing rotator 2533 faces rightward. and a first distribution solenoid 2534 (see FIG. 159) for rotating the distribution rotator 2533 between an upward facing state and a state. The distribution rotator 2533 is formed in a truncated cone shape with an outer peripheral surface tapering toward the rear.

The chance opening 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 is provided downstream of the sorting rotor 2533 with respect to the flow of the game balls B, and the game ball accommodated in the accommodation portion 2533a of the sorting rotor 2533. B can enter, and is provided on the right side of the distribution rotor 2533 . The chance opening 2531 is connected to the second sorting device 2540 . The first slot 2532 is provided on the upstream side of the distribution rotor 2533 with respect to the flow of the game ball B, and the game ball B that has not been accommodated in the housing portion 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533 enters. , is provided above the distribution rotor 2533 . The first opening 2532 is open forward and guides the entered game ball B to the rear of the game panel 1100 .

In the first sorting device 2530, when the first sorting solenoid 2534 is OFF (non-energized), the accommodating portion 2533a of the sorting rotor 2533 faces rightward. In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2501 and then flows down to the distribution rotor 2533 from above, it hits the outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotor 2533. touch. Since the outer peripheral surface of this distribution rotating body 2533 is formed in a truncated cone shape that narrows backward, the game ball B is guided backward by the inclination of the outer peripheral surface, and enters the first opening 2532. Become.

On the other hand, when the first sorting solenoid 2534 is ON (energized), the sorting rotator 2533 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees, and the accommodating portion 2533a faces upward. In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2501 and then flows downward to the distribution rotator 2533, only one is received in the receiving portion 2533a. . In a state where the game ball B is housed in the housing part 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533, when the game ball B further flows down from above to the distribution rotor 2533 from the accessory winning opening 2006 side, the game ball B is received. After coming into contact with the game ball B housed in the portion 2533a, it enters the first opening 2532 in the rear. The game ball B that has entered the first opening 2532 is detected by the sensor, transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged from the back ball guiding unit 3100 onto the substrate holder 1200.

When the game ball B is housed in the housing portion 2533a, the first distribution solenoid 2534 rotates the distribution rotating body 2533 clockwise by 90 degrees, and the housing portion 2533a turns to the right. The game ball B housed in the housing portion 2533 a rolls rightward from the housing portion 2533 a and is received by the chance opening 2531 . The game ball B received in the chance opening 2531 is sent to the next second sorting device 2540 .

Thus, in the first distribution device 2530, the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006 is placed on either the chance port 2531 side (second distribution device 2540 side) or the first prize port 2532 side. can be divided into

The second distribution device 2540 distributes the game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 to either the second scoring opening 2541 or the first V winning opening 2007 . The second sorting device 2540 is provided at a height between the first sorting device 2530 and the exit of the guide passage group 2520 in a front view. The second sorting device 2540 is provided behind the sorting rotor 2533 of the first sorting device 2530 .

The second sorting device 2540 has a second slot which is provided so that the game balls B housed in the storage part 2533a of the sorting rotor 2533 in the first sorting device 2530 and sorted to the chance slots 2531 can enter. 2541 and the first V winning opening 2007, a distribution piece 2543 that can open and close the second opening 2541 by moving forward and backward, and a second distribution solenoid 2544 (Fig. 159) and

The second opening 2541 is open upward at a position on the right side of the distribution rotor 2533, and the game balls B distributed to the chance opening 2531 are supplied from above. The first V winning opening 2007 is provided adjacent to the right side of the second winning opening 2541 and opens upward. The distribution piece 2543 has a flat plate shape that is inclined downward to the right, and protrudes forward to close the upper end opening of the second opening 2541, thereby distributing the game ball B to the second opening 2541. Acceptance can be disabled, and the game ball B in contact with the upper surface can be guided to the right and accepted into the first V winning opening 2007 .

In the second sorting device 2540 , the sorting piece 2543 moves forward to close the second opening 2541 when the second sorting solenoid 2544 is OFF (non-energized). In this state, when the game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 flows down, it contacts the upper surface of the distribution piece 2543 and is guided to the right by the inclination of the distribution piece 2543. It is accepted (divided) into the first V winning port 2007. The game ball B distributed to the first V winning hole 2007 is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2502, and then transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 passes the board. It is ejected onto holder 1200 .

On the other hand, when the second distribution solenoid 2544 is ON (energized), the distribution piece 2543 retreats, the second opening 2541 is opened upward, and the game ball B to the second opening 2541 can be accepted. In this state, when the game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 flows down, the game ball B passes in front of the retreating distribution piece 2543 and passes through the second opening. 2541 will be accepted (distributed). The game ball B distributed to the second slot 2541 is guided to the left lottery accessory 2550 by the lottery guide passage 2545 .

Thus, in the second sorting device 2540, the game balls B housed in the housing portion 2533a of the sorting rotor 2533 in the first sorting device 2530, that is, the game balls B sorted into the chance openings 2531 are It can be distributed to either the second ska mouth 2541 (lottery accessory 2550) side or the first V winning mouth 2007 side.

A lottery entrance ball sensor 2546 for detecting the circulation of game balls B is provided in the lottery guide passage 2545 . When the game ball B is detected by the lottery accessory ball sensor 2546, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the effect display device 1600, the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the game board 5. , LEDs provided on the door frame 3, etc. are controlled, and an effect is executed to excite the lottery (distribution) of the game balls B in the lottery accessory 2550.例文帳に追加As a result, the game ball B is distributed to the second slot 2541 in the second distribution device 2540, thereby eliminating the player's disappointment and heightening expectations for the lottery accessory 2550.例文帳に追加

[5-8e-2. Lottery accessories]
The lottery prize 2550 in the center prize 2500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 154 and the like. The lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is provided in the lower part of the frame of the main unit 2510 formed in a frame shape, and has a second V winning opening 2008 and a losing opening 2009 . This lottery accessory 2550 is supplied with the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 . Specifically, the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 and distributed to the chance opening 2531 by the first distribution device 2530 is further distributed to the second scoring opening 2541 by the second distribution device 2540. is supplied. In addition, the lottery accessories 2550 include a second V winning opening sensor 2503 that detects the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008, and a losing opening sensor 2504 that detects the gaming ball B received in the losing opening 2009. and has.

The lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied with the game ball B distributed to the second slot 2541 by the second sorting device 2540 and circulated through the lottery guide passage 2545 so that it becomes lower toward the left. An inclined guideway 2551, a distribution unit 2552 that distributes the game ball B that has circulated through the guideway 2551 to either the loop side or the non-loop side (loss port 2009 side), and the distribution unit 2552 to the loop side A hitting unit 2553 capable of hitting the game balls B distributed to the rear, and the game balls B hit backward by the hitting unit 2553 are supplied, and are inclined to be lower forward and upward and downward. A swing gutter 2554 that can reciprocate so as to swing about the axis of the game ball B guided by the swing gutter 2554 rolls and is lowered toward the front guideway 2551 Between the table 2555, which is wide in the front, rear, left, and right directions and is provided with the second V-winning opening 2008 near the downstream end, and the second V-winning opening 2008 and the rocking gutter 2554 on the table 2555 , and has a pair of swinging pieces 2556 that can swing around the axis in the vertical direction.

This lottery accessory 2550 will be described in detail later, but as long as the game ball B is distributed to the loop side by the distribution unit 2552, the game ball B released from the table 2555 provided with the second V winning port 2008 is The game ball B is supplied to the hitting part 2553 and can loop between the hitting part 2553 and the table 2555 .

The guiding part 2551 of the lottery accessory 2550 extends along the right edge side of the lottery accessory 2550 from near the rear end to the front end so that the front is lower, and then along the front edge side of the lottery accessory 2550 to near the left end. It extends so that the left side becomes lower, and is formed in an L shape in a plan view. This guiding part 2551 extends with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. A game ball B is supplied from a lottery guide passage 2545 to a portion extending in the front-rear direction along the right end side of the guide portion 2551 .

The distribution part 2552 of the lottery accessory 2550 is provided at a part near the downstream end (left end) of the part of the guiding part 2551 extending in the left-right direction. The distributing portion 2552 is provided so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction near the left end of the loss opening 2009 that passes through the guide portion 2551 and is open upward. It is provided with a swing bridge-like distribution bridge 2557 that can open and close the cage loss port 2009 and a lottery loop solenoid 2558 (see FIG. 159) for rotating the distribution bridge 2557 . The guideway 2551 is divided into an upstream side and a downstream side with the failure opening 2009 as a boundary.

The distribution bridge 2557 is formed in a flat plate shape elongated in the left and right direction in a plan view, the left side is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and the right side is a free end. The distribution bridge 2557 has a loop position in which the right side approaches the right side of the failure opening 2009 and extends in the horizontal direction and collapses (see FIG. 153(a)), and a right side is positioned above the left side and vertically. and a non-looped position (see FIG. 153(b)) in an upright position.

The distribution bridge 2557 is in a state of a loop position, so that it is in a state of bridging the taxiway 2551 divided into two upstream and downstream sides by the loss port 2009, and passes over the distribution bridge 2557. The game ball B can roll from the upstream side to the downstream side. That is, the distribution bridge 2557 can close the loss opening 2009 and make it impossible to receive the game ball B by being in the state of the loop position. On the other hand, the distributing bridge 2557 is in a non-looping position, so that the loss opening 2009 is opened upward, and the game ball B rolling from the upstream is not passed to the downstream side. can be accepted into Thus, in the distribution section 2552, the distribution bridge 2557 can distribute the game ball B to either the loop side or the non-loop side.

This distribution bridge 2557 is provided with a distribution display portion 2557a formed in a flag shape with an X mark on the side opposite to the rolling surface of the game ball B. As shown in FIG. The distribution display portion 2557a becomes visible from the player side when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the non-loop position in which the loss opening 2009 is opened. This allows the player to recognize that the game ball B cannot go to the hitting portion 2553 on the downstream side (cannot loop).

In addition, the distribution bridge 2557 is provided so that the left end side rotatably supported is to the left of the left end of the downstream end (front end side) of the table 2555 . Therefore, since the game ball B released from the table 2555 to the guideway 2551 side is released to the right side of the distribution bridge 2557 in the non-loop position, the game ball B is released from the table 2555 in the non-loop position. , and does not go to the downstream side of the guideway 2551 that is divided into two (downstream side of the distribution bridge 2557), and is accepted in the open loss port 2009.

The hitting part 2553 of the lottery accessory 2550 is inclined such that the front end is lower than the downstream end of the guide path 2551 and higher toward the rear, and the game balls B distributed to the loop side by the distribution part 2552 are supplied. and a fan-shaped hitting piece 2560 that is provided at the downstream end of the climbing portion 2559 and can hit the game ball B, and the hitting piece 2560 is rotated around the axis perpendicular to the climbing portion 2559. and a single drive motor 2561 (see FIG. 159).

The fan-shaped striking piece 2560 is rotated at a relatively high speed by a striking piece drive motor 2561 . Therefore, the strength with which the game ball B is hit varies depending on the timing when the game ball B reaches the site where the hitting piece 2560 is provided and the timing of the rotational position of the hitting piece 2560 . Therefore, when the game ball B is hit to some extent strongly, it can get over the climbing part 2559 and go to the swing gutter 2554 side behind, and when the hitting is weak, it can not get over the climbing part 2559 and moves forward. will come back. Thereby, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not the game ball B is strongly hit and goes to the rocking gutter 2554 (table 2555) side, and the player can be entertained. In addition, since the game ball B returns when the hitting by the hitting piece 2560 is weak, it is possible to lengthen the time until the game with the game ball B is confirmed, and to make the player feel that he/she has won. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In this lottery accessory 2550, the game ball B that has climbed over the climbing part 2559 is supplied between the striking part 2553 and the swing gutter 2554, and the swing path is curved so that the left and right ends are high and the center is low. 2562 and a discharge port 2563 provided in the center of the swing passage 2562 for discharging the game ball B to the swing gutter 2554 . A plurality of unevennesses are provided in the vicinity of both left and right ends of the swing path 2562, and the rolling speed of the game ball B can be damped. The swing path 2562 is provided along the rear edge of the lottery accessory 2550 and behind the table 2555 . The game ball B supplied from the hitting part 2553 to the swing passage 2562 rolls in the left-right direction, and is then discharged from the center discharge port 2563 to the swing gutter 2554 in the same manner as the stage 2513 .

The swinging gutter 2554 of the lottery accessory 2550 is formed in a disc shape and has a gutter-like recessed gutter portion 2554a extending from the center toward the outer periphery. The disk-shaped rocking gutter 2554 has its rotation axis inclined so that the rear side is higher. The lottery accessory 2550 has a gutter rocking drive motor 2564 (see FIG. 159) for reciprocatingly rotating the rocking gutter 2554 within a predetermined angle range. This swinging gutter 2554 is driven by a gutter swinging driving motor 2564 so that the tip of the gutter part 2554a is directed to the second V prize opening 2008 in front, and the tip of the gutter part 2554a is moved in the horizontal direction within a predetermined angle range. Rotate back and forth to face.

The rocking gutter 2554 is provided at the rear end (upper end) of the center in the left-right direction of the table 2555, and the game ball B released from the ejection port 2563 is delivered to the gutter portion 2554a. Since the swinging gutter 2554 reciprocates, the game ball B delivered to the gutter part 2554a is played within a fan-shaped range corresponding to the rotation direction in which the tip of the gutter part 2554a on the table 2555 is facing. Sphere B can be released. At this time, since the swinging gutter 2554 is rotating until the received game ball B rolls on the gutter part 2554a and is released from the tip, the game ball B is given an inertial force by the rotation. will work. Therefore, the game ball B released from the tip of the gutter portion 2554a does not roll straight on the table 2555 in the direction in which the gutter portion 2554a faces, making it difficult to predict the rolling direction.

The table 2555 of the lottery accessory 2550 is inclined so that the front end side is lower, and the length of the front end side, which is the downstream end, in the horizontal direction is shorter than the length of the rear end in the horizontal direction. In addition, the table 2555 is provided with a rocking gutter 2554 at the upper end of the center in the left-right direction, and a second V winning opening 2008 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction. The table 2555 has a central groove 2555a extending from the rocking gutter 2554 to the second V prize opening 2008 at the center in the left-right direction, and has a recess 2555b that is recessed from the surroundings near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction. are doing. The recessed portion 2555b is recessed in the shape of a pentagonal home base, and the second V winning opening 2008 is provided at the bottom thereof.

Since this table 2555 has a central groove 2555a leading to the second V winning opening 2008 and a concave portion 2555b provided with the second V winning opening 2008 at the bottom, the player can When B enters, it can be made to appear to be accepted in the second V winning opening 2008, and the movement of the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 can be entertained.

The front end side, which is the downstream end of the table 2555, is provided at a position higher than the guideway 2551 in front. Therefore, the game ball B flowing through the guide path 2551 is not supplied onto the table 2555 without going through the striking part 2553 and the rocking gutter 2554 .

The swing pieces 2556 of the lottery accessory 2550 are arranged in a pair symmetrically with respect to the center of the table 2555 in the left-right direction between the swing gutter 2554 and the second V prize opening 2008 on the table 2555. is provided. The rocking piece 2556 is formed in the shape of a drop, and has a circular base end facing forward and a sharp tip facing backward, and is rotatable about the circular base end side. It is

The lottery accessory 2550 has a swinging piece solenoid 2565 for swinging by reciprocally rotating a pair of swinging pieces 2556 about a vertical axis within a predetermined angle range. A pair of swinging pieces 2556 are provided so as to rotate in opposite directions by one swinging piece solenoid 2565 .

Since the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are rotated by the swinging piece solenoid 2565, the rotation speed is faster than when they are rotated by the drive motor. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the swing piece 2556 while the swing piece 2556 is swinging and moving, the game ball B can be strongly bounced. Therefore, depending on the rotating direction of the swinging piece 2556, the game ball B in contact with the table 2555 can be sent to the center side in the left-right direction or sent to both sides in the left-right direction, thereby changing the flow of the game ball B. can be granted.

When the sharp tips of the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are close to each other, the distance between the swinging pieces 2556 becomes narrower, and the rearward-facing surface portions of the swinging pieces 2556 move forward. , and the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are narrowed rearward. As a result, when the game ball B flowing down from the back of the rocking gutter 2554 or the table 2555 passes between the pair of rocking pieces 2556, the possibility of being accepted into the second V winning opening 2008 increases, and the pair of When the rocking piece 2556 comes into contact with the rear facing surface, the inclination of the rocking piece 2556 guides the ball away from the center in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, when the sharp ends of the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are moving away from each other (the state indicated by the dashed lines in FIG. 154), the rearward-facing surface portions of the swinging pieces 2556 move left and right toward the front. It is inclined so as to approach the center of the direction, and the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are spread rearward. As a result, when the game ball B flowing down from the back of the rocking gutter 2554 or the table 2555 comes into contact with the surface portion of the pair of rocking pieces 2556 facing backward, it is guided to the center in the left-right direction by the inclination of the pair of rocking pieces 2556. There is a possibility of being accepted in the 2V winning slot 2008.

Therefore, in a state in which the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are widened rearward, the game ball B in contact with the swinging pieces 2556 is guided to the center in the left-right direction, so that the pair of swinging pieces 2556 move backward. Compared to the narrowed state, the possibility that the game ball B flowing down from the rear will be accepted by the second V winning opening 2008 is high. In other words, depending on the state of the pair of swinging pieces 2556, the acceptance probability of the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008 can be changed.

The lottery accessory 2550 of this embodiment has a transparent cover 2566 that covers the whole from above (see FIGS. 139 to 141, etc.). With this cover 2566, the game ball B supplied through the lottery guide passage 2545 can be prevented from jumping out of the lottery accessory 2550, and the game ball B from outside other than the lottery guide passage 2545 can be prevented. can be prevented from being supplied (intruded).

Next, the flow of the game ball B in the lottery accessory 2550 will be explained. In the lottery accessory 2550, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result (for example, "per role") drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004. Accordingly, one of the game balls B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern is supplied near the upstream of the guide path 2551 through the lottery guide passage 2545 . The game ball B supplied near the upstream of the guideway 2551 rolls toward the distribution part 2552 on the left side according to the inclination of the guideway 2551 .

In the distribution section 2552, the distribution bridge 2557 collapses for a predetermined time and is in a state of a loop position, and the game ball B rolling from the upstream side passes through the distribution bridge 2557 to the downstream side. It rolls to the striking part 2553 . Then, the game ball B supplied to the hitting portion 2553 is hit backward by the rotating hitting piece 2560, and rolls so as to climb the climbing portion 2559 extending backward.

At this time, since the striking piece 2560 is fan-shaped and rotates at a relatively high speed, depending on the timing at which the game ball B abuts against the rotational position of the striking piece 2560, the game ball B may be hit strongly. The game ball B comes into contact with the game ball B in a graze-like manner, and the force of the game ball B hit backward varies. Therefore, if the hitting by the hitting piece 2560 is weak, it cannot climb the uphill part 2559 which is higher in the rear, and it returns up the uphill part 2559, and the game ball B goes back and forth on the uphill part 2559. Sometimes.

When the game ball B hit by the hitting piece 2560 climbs over the climbing part 2559, it enters the swing passage 2562 provided in the rear, and moves in the left-right direction through the swing passage 2562 whose center in the left-right direction is low. It will roll. At this time, since a plurality of irregularities are provided near the left and right ends of the swing path 2562, the game ball B passing through the irregularities causes the impact of the irregularities to attenuate the rolling speed. As a result, the momentum of the game ball B that has been hit by the hitting piece 2560 and climbs over the climbing portion 2559 can be reduced.

The game ball B that rolls in the swing path 2562 so as to swing in the horizontal direction is finally discharged onto the table 2555 through the swing gutter 2554 from the outlet 2563 provided in the center. At this time, the swing gutter 2554 is swung and rotated by the gutter swing drive motor 2564 so as to reciprocate within a predetermined angle range, so that the game ball B is released from the outlet 2563 to the swing gutter 2554. The game ball B is released in various directions from the swing gutter 2554 depending on the timing of the movement and the timing of the rotation position of the swing gutter 2554 .

The game ball B released from the rocking gutter 2554 to the table 2555 rolls forward according to the inclination of the table 2555 and is released to the guideway 2551 from the front edge. At this time, since a pair of rocking pieces 2556 are rocked in the vicinity of the center of the table 2555 in the front-rear direction, the game ball B in contact with the rocking pieces 2556 is moved. It can be flipped to change the rolling direction. In addition, since the second V winning opening 2008 is provided near the front end of the table 2555 at the center in the left-right direction, the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 can be received in the second V winning opening 2008. be.

The game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2503, and after being delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the lower substrate holder 1200 is discharged to When the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008, a "jackpot game" is executed as an advantageous game state in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the game ball B is supplied to the lottery accessory 2550, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the game ball B is accepted into the second V winning port 2008, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

The game ball B released from the front edge of the table 2555 to the guideway 2551 is within the predetermined time, and the distribution bridge 2557 of the distribution section 2552 is in the state of the loop position. to the striking portion 2553. Therefore, when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the loop position, the game ball B can loop between the striking part 2553 and the table 2555 any number of times unless the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008. can. In other words, when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the loop position, the opportunity to receive the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008 will come again and again. Thereby, even if the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 is not accepted in the second V winning opening 2008, it can be received in the second V winning opening 2008 by passing through the distribution bridge 2557 at the loop position. Since the opportunity to become will come again, the player can continue to be entertained.

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution bridge 2557 of the distribution section 2552 changes from the loop position to the raised non-loop position, and the failure opening 2009 closed by the distribution bridge 2557 is opened upward. be. In this state, the game ball B released from the front end side of the table 2555 or the game ball B rolling on the guide path 2551 is accepted in the loss opening 2009, and the game ball B does not loop and the lottery is performed. The lottery at object 2550 ends. At this time, an upright distribution bridge 2557 raises a distribution display section 2557a imitating a flag with an X mark to make it visible. It can be made to recognize that it does not loop.

The game ball B received in the loss opening 2009 is detected by the loss opening sensor 2504, delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below.

As described above, according to the lottery accessory 2550 of the present embodiment, the game ball B supplied from the accessory winning opening 2006 is received in the second V winning opening 2008, making the player nervous and excited. can be used to entertain players. Also, even if the game ball B is not accepted in the second V winning port 2008, when the distribution bridge 2557 of the distribution section 2552 is in the loop position, the game ball B is again sent through the hitting section 2553 to the second V Since it is sent to the swing gutter 2554 located upstream of the prize winning opening 2008 and looped, it is given an opportunity to be accepted into the second V prize winning opening 2008 again, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation again. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest.

[5-8f. Ordinary winning entrance unit]
Next, the normal winning slot unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The normal winning opening unit 2600 has a normal winning opening 2002, and is provided near the left end in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. This normal prize winning port unit 2600 is provided between the attacker unit 2400 and the guide passage group 2520 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided so that the normal prize winning port 2002 is positioned directly below the exit of the first guide passage 2521. It is

The normal winning opening 2002 of the normal winning opening unit 2600 is always open upward to receive the game ball B. The game ball B received in the normal winning hole 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the normal winning hole sensor 3002, and downward. is discharged to the substrate holder 1200 of .

[5-9. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. In the state assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. Although not shown, in the game area 5a, in the left and right outer parts and lower parts of the center role 2500, and in the part between the attacker unit 2400 and the guide passage group 2520 in the center role 2500, A plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. In addition, a windmill W (see FIG. 169) that rotates when the game ball B contacts is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300 .

On the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are installed between the inner rail 1002 and the inner rail 1002 in a predetermined gauge arrangement. On the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, the entrance of the warp passage 2512 opens slightly upward from the left at a portion below the center in the vertical direction of the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center base 2511. . A windmill W is provided between the warp passage 2512 and the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 .

A game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp passage 2512 with a certain probability. The game ball B that has entered the warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2513 provided within the frame of the center accessory 2500, rolls on the stage 2513 in the left-right direction, and is ejected from the central release portion 2513a or the side release portion 2513b. It is discharged so as to flow back into the game area 5a from either. Since the center release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting port 2003 in the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the center release portion 2513a has a high probability of reaching the first It is received in the starting port 2003 . The game ball B released from the side release portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a is received in the first starting port 2003 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the first starting port sensor 2101 of the starting port unit 2100, and is guided to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is delivered and discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100 . When the game ball B is detected by the first starting hole sensor 2101, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given, and a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the first special symbol is held In a state where the number is less than 4), a lottery for the first special symbol that enables the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is executed. In addition, the lottery 1st special design is also called a 1st special lottery result.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2003 is received in the out port 2020 and discharged out of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 2020 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. - 特許庁

A game ball B that is hit to the left outside of the center role 2500 and does not enter the warp passage 2512 is highly probable along the lower side of the center role 2500 when it circulates on the right side of the center of the windmill W. It flows down to the right so as to follow a plurality of obstructing nails N arranged obliquely. A game ball B that circulates on the right side of the center of the windmill W may be received by the first starting opening 2003 or the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 . Also, the game ball B that circulates on the right side of the center of the windmill W may be received by the sub-out port 2021 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B that has not been received by the first starting port 2003, the general prize winning port 2001, and the sub-out port 2021 is received by the out port 2020 and discharged out of the game area 5a.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, passed to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and downward. is discharged to When the game ball B is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is provided.

On the other hand, when the water flows leftward from the center of the windmill W, it flows down onto the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down the shelf 2301 to the right. A game ball B that circulates on the left side of the center of the windmill W may be received by the general prize winning opening 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then transferred to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward from the back ball guide unit 3100. - 特許庁The game ball B that has not been received by the general winning opening 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021 is received by the out opening 2020 and discharged out of the game area 5a.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a guide passage group 2520, a role winning opening 2006, a normal winning opening 2002, a second start opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and a sub-out opening 2021 are provided in this order from the top. It is A plurality of obstructing nails N are implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the second starting port 2004, respectively.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed above the portion of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center accessory 2500 that is lowered toward the right from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction with the strength that the game ball B enters. When hit, the game ball B circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 .

More specifically, the game ball B is struck with a strength that makes contact with the impinging portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that constitutes a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B in contact with the impingement portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 . The game ball B that has entered the first guide path 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the prize winning opening door 2515 that closes the prize winning opening 2006 in the middle of the first guiding path 2521, and then the guide path group. 2520 is discharged from the right exit of the lower end to the lower normal winning a prize unit 2600 side.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit above the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates, it is twisted backward and aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction, and then forward. It is twisted and released from the exit on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 to the normal winning opening unit 2600 side below.

Since the normal winning opening 2002 of the normal winning opening unit 2600 is provided directly under the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B that has circulated through the first guidance passage 2521 circulates through the second guidance passage 2522. There is a higher possibility of being accepted into the normal winning opening 2002 than the game ball B that has been played.

The game ball B received in the normal winning hole 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the normal winning hole sensor 3002, and downwardly. is discharged to When the game ball B is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 3002, the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given, and a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the number of reserved symbols in the normal pattern is 4 In the state of less than), a normal symbol lottery that enables acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 is executed. In addition, the normally drawn pattern is also called a normal lottery result.

The game ball B which is not accepted in the normal winning opening 2002 after being struck to the right into the game area 5a and circulated through the guide passage group 2520 flows down onto the attacker unit 2400 while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. Then, when the game ball B flows down to the upper shelf portion 2421 of the attacker unit 2400, it is guided leftward and downward according to the inclination of the upper shelf portion 2421, and there is no opportunity to be accepted by the second start opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005, and the attacker unit 2400 is discharged to the left. In addition, since the downstream end (left end) of the upper shelf portion 2421 of the attacker unit 2400 is positioned above the first starting port 2003, the game ball B that has flowed through the upper shelf portion 2421 is received by the first starting port 2003. there is a possibility.

On the other hand, when the game ball B flows down to the first shelf portion 2422 of the attacker unit 2400, it rolls leftward due to its inclination, and rolls on the upper surface of the second starting door 2411 and the second shelf portion 2423. , and is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf portion 2423 . Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2423 falls on the third shelf 2424 or the big winning entrance door 2413 according to its momentum, and rolls leftward due to their inclination. Then, after rolling on the fourth shelf portion 2425 from the big winning opening door 2413 , it is discharged to the left outside the attacker unit 2400 from the fourth shelf portion 2425 . The game ball B released from the fourth shelf portion 2425 is received by the out port 2020 and ejected.

Furthermore, if the game ball B does not flow down to either the upper shelf 2421 or the first shelf 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 and falls to the right of the first shelf 2422 , it is received in the sub-out port 2021 . Also, even when the game ball B falls onto the first shelf 2422, it is received by the sub-out port 2021 when it enters the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424.例文帳に追加The game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 is delivered to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a, and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B flows down to the first shelf portion 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 , the game ball B rolls on the second starting door 2411 . Therefore, by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2002, "ordinary winning" is drawn as a normal pattern (normal lottery result), and the second starting opening door 2411 is retreated by the starting opening solenoid 2412 and the second starting opening. When the game ball B flows (rolls) from the side of the first shelf 2422 at the timing when 2004 is open, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 .

After being detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. is discharged to When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, the privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given, and a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the second special symbol is held In a state where the number is less than 4), a lottery for the second special symbol that enables the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is executed. In addition, the drawn second special pattern is also referred to as a second special drawing result.

In addition, the game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 and rolled on the second starting door 2411 and the second shelf 2423 rolls on the big winning door 2413 . Therefore, the first special symbol (first special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2003, the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 (Second special lottery result), depending on (for example, when the lottery special symbol (special lottery result) is "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", etc.), the attacker solenoid 2414 When the game ball B circulates (rolls) from the second shelf part 2423 side at the timing when the winning opening door 2413 is retreated and the big winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball B moves to the big winning opening 2005. accepted by

The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by one of the two big winning hole sensors 2402 provided below, and is then guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 to be the back ball of the back unit 3000. After being delivered to the guiding unit 3100, it is discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2402, the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is provided.

By the way, when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004 and "per character" is drawn as the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 The provided accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the distribution rotator 2533 of the first distribution device 2530 and the distribution piece 2543 of the second distribution device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the "accessory win" is drawn, the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes. "Right shot" can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the first guide passage 2521 provided with the winning opening 2006.例文帳に追加

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the lottery is higher than that of the "jackpot". Three patterns of winning a prize are set, and in each of the patterns, the prize winning opening 2006 is roughly divided and opens and closes twice.

First, the opening and closing of the prize winning opening 2006 for each "winning prize" will be described in detail. After a certain period of time (3000 ms) has passed from the start of execution of the "first prize winning", the prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short period of time (80 ms) and then closed for a short period of time (1252 ms). After that, it is opened again for a short period of time (80 ms) and then closed to complete the operation. After a certain period of time (3000 ms) has passed from the start of the execution of the "second prize winning", the prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then closed. After a longer time (5420 ms) has passed, the switch is opened for a long time (9414 ms) and then closed to complete the operation. After a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution of the "third prize winning", the prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short period of time (80 ms), and then closed. After a longer time (19366 ms) has passed, the switch is opened for a long time (9404 ms) and then closed to complete the operation.

The second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "first winning prize" is started after the time when the "first winning prize" is completed from the start of execution. In addition, the second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "third prize winning" is started after the time when the "second prize winning" is completed from the start of execution.

It should be noted that, in the second long-time open state in the "second winning prize" and the "third winning prize", eight open states (80 ms) are repeated at regular intervals (1252 ms). In other words, the prize winning port 2006 opens and closes (opens) twice for the "first winning prize" and nine times for the "second winning prize" and the "third winning prize".

Next, the operation of the sorting rotator 2533 of the first sorting device 2530 in the "handle hit" is rotated counterclockwise at the same time as the start of execution, and the accommodating part 2533a is turned upward for a predetermined time (3020 ms). After entering the first storable state, and then turning clockwise to turn the storable part 2533a to the right and becoming the non-storable state, after a predetermined time (4560 ms) has passed, a time longer than the first time (13446 ms) 2 . After entering the unaccommodable state for a short period of time (500 ms), it enters the unaccommodable state for the third time (13446 ms) for the same time as the second time, and then enters the unaccommodable state.

The distribution rotator 2533 is in a non-accommodable state when the first storable state ends in the middle of the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the ``winning prize''. Also, the distribution rotator 2533 will be in the second accommodable state after the time from the start of the execution to the completion of the "first award winning". Therefore, at the time of the "first award", the control of the distribution rotator 2533 ends before the second accommodative state is reached, and the second and third accommodative states are not executed. This distribution rotating body 2533 starts the second accommodating state before the second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "second prize win", and the second open state is closed. After entering the state, it becomes uncontainable.

Also, the distribution rotator 2533 will be in the third accommodable state after the time from the start of the execution to the completion of the "second award winning". Therefore, at the time of the "second award winning", the control of the distribution rotator 2533 ends before the third accommodable state is reached, and the third accommodable state is not executed. In other words, the distribution rotator 2533 is put into a state of being able to be accommodated once in the case of "winning the first prize", twice in the case of winning the "second prize", and three times in the case of "winning the third prize". Become. This distribution rotor 2533 starts the third accommodating state before the second open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "third prize win", and the second open state ends. After being in a closed state, it will be in an unaccommodable state.

Next, the action of the sorting piece 2543 of the second sorting device 2540 in the "handle hit" is the first closed state in which the second slot 2541 is closed for a predetermined time (3020 ms) by protruding forward at the same time as the start of execution. (a state that can be distributed to the first V winning opening 2007), and then retreats and the second ska mouth 2541 is in an open state (a state that can be distributed to the lottery accessory 2550) for a predetermined time ( 23006 ms), the second closed state is set for a longer time (13446 ms) than the first open state, and then the open state is established.

The first closed state of the sorting piece 2543 ends in the middle of the first open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "winning prize" and becomes an open state. Further, in the second sorting device 2540, the second closed state of the sorting piece 2543 is started in the middle of the second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "third prize winning". After the second open state of the port 2006 becomes the closed state, the distribution piece 2543 changes from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, in the second sorting device 2540, the second closed state of the sorting piece 2543 is executed only when "winning the third prize" and "winning the first prize" or "winning the second prize". , the second closing state of the distributing piece 2543 is not executed.

For this reason, in the "first winning prize", the opening and closing of the prize winning port 2006 is executed twice in a short period of time. The possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 is low. In addition, since the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "second winning prize" and the "third winning prize" is also for a short time, the game ball B is accepted by the prize winning opening 2006. Unlikely. In addition, the time when the first accommodating state of the distribution rotating body 2533 in the first distribution device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "winning prize" is the prize winning. Since it is shorter than the opening time of the opening 2006 for the first time, the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006 is stored in the distribution rotator 2533 when the prize winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time. It is even less likely to be accommodated in portion 2533a. Since the time at which the first storable state of the sorting rotor 2533 and the first closed state of the sorting piece 2543 in the second sorting device 2540 are completed is the same, the sorting rotator 2533 The game ball B housed in the housing portion 2533a is not sorted to the first V winning opening 2007 side at the time of the first housing possible state.

On the other hand, the second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "second prize win" and the "third prize win" takes a long time. There is a high possibility that it will be accepted in the prize winning slot 2006 . At this time, after the distribution rotating body 2533 of the first distribution device 2530 is in a state that can be accommodated before the prize winning port 2006 is opened, the prize winning port 2006 is changed from the open state to the closed state. Since it will be in an unacceptable state after it becomes, there is a high possibility that the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 in the second open state will be accommodated in the accommodation portion 2533a of the distribution rotator 2533. .

Thus, in this example, the possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the prize winning opening 2006 in the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "second winning prize" and the "third winning prize" is In addition to being low, when the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time, the possibility that the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2533a of the distribution rotator 2533 is low. In spite of the fact that it is lower, at the same time as the performance of the per-accessory game state is started, the distribution rotating body 2533 is rotated counterclockwise to make the accommodating portion 2533a upwardly storable, and is accommodated for a predetermined period (3020 ms). After the portion 2533a is directed upward, it is rotated clockwise to turn the accommodating portion 2533a rightward, thereby making it impossible to accommodate. That is, immediately after the start of the per-accessory game state, the distribution rotor 2533 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side, but the distribution rotor 2533 distributes the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side. The sorting operation is executed to show the sorting operation by the sorting rotator 2533 in advance.

Similarly, although it is unlikely that the distribution rotator 2533 distributes the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side immediately after the start of the per-accessory game state, the second distribution is performed simultaneously with the start of execution of the per-accessory game state. By protruding forward the sorting piece 2543 of the device 2540 to close the second opening 2541, it is possible to distribute to the first V winning opening 2007, and after a predetermined time (3020 ms) has passed, it retreats to the second opening. By opening 2541, it is set to a state in which it is distributed to the lottery accessory 2550.例文帳に追加That is, immediately after the start of the per-accessory game state, the distribution piece 2543 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the first V winning port 2007 side, but the distribution piece 2543 causes the game ball B to win the first V prize. The sorting operation by the sorting piece 2543 is shown in advance by executing the sorting operation to the port 2007 side.

In this example, the distribution rotator 2533 and the distribution piece 2543 are operated at the same time as the execution of the role-winning game state is started, that is, the performance at the start of the role-winning game state (the opening performance of the role-winning game state, for example, " Aim for the prize winning opening 2006”, etc.), and after the action of the distribution rotator 2533 and the distribution piece 2543, the prize is won. The mouth 2006 is opened for the first time. This reduces the possibility of allocating the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side by the allocation rotator 2533 and allocating the game ball B to the second chance opening 2541 side by the allocation piece 2543. . In addition, there is no or unlimited possibility of allocating the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side by the allocation rotator 2533 and allocating the game ball B to the second chance opening 2541 side by the allocation piece 2543. If it is low, the prize winning port 2006 may be opened for the first time at the same time when the distribution rotator 2533 and the distribution piece 2543 are operated.

Alternatively, only one of the distribution rotor 2533 and the distribution piece 2543 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. That is, some of the movable parts (distribution rotator 2533, distribution piece 2543) for distributing the game ball B that has won the prize winning opening 2006 are operated in advance to show the distribution operation. , other movable parts may be disabled in advance. For example, the sorting piece 2543 that is highly likely to cause the game ball B to enter the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007) by operating (high V winning expectation) is not operated in advance. Only about the distribution rotator 2533 which is less likely to enter the game ball B into the V winning opening (in this example, the second V winning opening 2008) than the distribution piece 2543 (V winning expectation is low) You can make it work. As a result, although some of the distribution destinations of the game balls B that have won the prize winning opening 2006 can be known in advance, the other distribution destinations can be kept unknown, and the other distribution destinations are clear. When the ball becomes , the number of destinations to be distributed increases, thereby surprising the player and increasing the expectation, and making the player pay attention to the game ball B to be distributed to enjoy its movement, thereby preventing the decline in the interest in the game.例文帳に追加can be suppressed.

In addition, the existence of the movable part (sorting piece 2543), which is highly expected to win the V prize, is hidden by not operating in advance. When the "third winning prize" is executed, the movable part (distribution piece 2543) having a high degree of expectation of V winning is operated to enter the game ball B into the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007). The game ball B enters an unexpected allocation destination, thereby improving the game amusement. In addition, the distribution to the first V winning prize opening 2007 side is hidden as a distribution destination, and it is possible to make the player think that there are only two, the first prize opening 2532 side and the lottery prize winning prize 2550 side, and the "third prize winning prize". A player is not discouraged even if a ``second prize win'' with a lower V winning expectation is executed and a game ball B is distributed to the side of the lottery prize 2550.例文帳に追加

In addition, in this example, the distribution rotator 2533 is arranged in a manner that the player can easily see it, while the distribution piece 2543 is formed in a flat plate shape that moves forward and backward on the game board 5, and the area on the front side is is narrow, it is difficult to notice the movement even if it is moving. As a result, it is difficult for the player to notice the passage on the side of the first V prize winning opening 2007 that can be entered by the sorting piece 2543 protruding forward. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the first V prize opening 2007 by operating the sorting piece 2543 when the "third prize hit" occurs, it becomes difficult to notice the behavior of the game ball B. It is possible to give the player a feeling as if a V prize had suddenly occurred and a 15R jackpot had been executed without making him aware that B had entered the first V prize opening 2007.例文帳に追加

In addition, by operating the distribution rotor 2533 in advance during the opening performance of the game state with the prize, the contents of the instruction in the opening performance, for example, "Aim for the prize winning opening 2006" can be added to the distribution rotor. The action of 2533 also makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the target to be hit, that is, the position to be aimed at during the state of the winning game.

As described above, when the "accessory prize winning" is drawn, the game ball B flowing down the first guide passage 2521 is accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 when the accessory winning opening 2006 is in an open state. When it is detected, it is sent to the first sorting device 2530 after being detected by the prize winning slot sensor 2501 . When the game ball B is detected by the accessory winning prize opening sensor 2501, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

In the "second winning prize" among the "winning winning prizes", when the prize winning opening 2006 is opened for the second time, the sorting piece 2543 of the second sorting device 2540 is open. When the minute rotating body 2533 rotates from the storable state to the unstorable state, the game ball B stored in the storage portion 2533a flows down to the second sorting device 2540 side through the chance opening 2531, and the second skating. After passing through the lottery guide passage 2545 from the mouth 2541 and being detected by the lottery accessory ball entry sensor 2546 , it is sent to the lottery accessory 2550 .

In the lottery accessory 2550, the distribution bridge 2557 in the non-loop position is in the loop position. For example, the distribution bridge 2557 is placed in the loop position in response to the opening of the second opening 2541 due to the retraction of the distribution piece 2543 in the second distribution device 2540 . Then, the game ball B sent from the second distribution device 2540 to the lottery accessory 2550 rolls leftward on the guide path 2551 and is sent to the hitting part 2553 through the distribution bridge 2557 at the loop position. Then, the game ball B sent to the hitting part 2553 is hit by the hitting piece 2560 rotating at high speed, and is supplied to the swing gutter 2554 provided at the rear end of the center of the table 2555. It will be released onto the table 2555 .

The game ball B released onto the table 2555 rolls forward due to its inclination, and is received in the second V winning opening 2008 provided at the center front end of the table 2555, or from the front end side of the table 2555. Either it is released forward (guideway 2551) or it moves. When the game ball B is released forward from the front end side of the table 2555, if the distribution bridge 2557 is still in the loop position, the game ball B is supplied to the hitting part 2553 through the distribution bridge 2557. It will happen. Therefore, when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the loop position, until the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008, the game ball B is placed on the hitting part 2553, the swing gutter 2554, the table 2555, and the guide path 2551. loop so as to circulate in the order of

Then, the acceptance of the game ball B to the second V winning opening 2008, or the acceptance of the game ball B to the loss opening 2009 which is opened when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the non-loop position after the lapse of a predetermined time. , the lottery for the V prize in the lottery accessory 2550 ends.

The game ball B received in the second V winning hole 2008 is detected by the second V winning hole sensor 2503 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . On the other hand, the game ball B received in the loss opening 2009 is detected by the loss opening sensor 2504 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2503, the privilege of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

By the way, in the "third prize win", when the prize winning port 2006 is opened for the second time, the distribution piece 2543 of the second distribution device 2540 is closed, so the distribution rotor 2533 is accommodated. When it rotates from the possible state to the unacceptable state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2533a passes through the chance opening 2531 and contacts the upper surface of the closed distribution piece 2543 of the second distribution device 2540. It is guided to the right and enters (accepted) the first V winning opening 2007 . The game ball B entering the first V winning hole 2007 is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2502 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . When the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2502, a privilege of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

In this embodiment, in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, in which the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in which the advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous is generated by opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006, the first start While the opening 2003 is always open to accept the game ball B, the second starting opening 2004 is selected by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2002, and the ordinary lottery is "ordinary winning". Only the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined pattern. As a result, the first starting port 2003 is more likely to accept the game ball B than the second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加

For this reason, in a normal state, the game ball B flows down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received by the first start port 2003. The driving operation of B can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 with the game ball B can be enjoyed. It is possible to heighten expectations for acceptance of the game ball B into the starting port 2003.例文帳に追加

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2003, the lottery result of the first special symbol is "hit" (for example, "small hit", "middle hit", "big hit", "special hit"). , etc.) is drawn, the large winning opening 2005 or the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. It is possible to enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B aimed at the right side of the object 2500 (so-called "right hitting"), and the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the big winning opening 2005 or the accessory winning opening 2006. can be raised.

A guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided on the right side of the center role 2500 when hitting the game ball B to the right side of the center role 2500. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B so that the game ball B circulates in a desired flow path. You can enjoy the operation.

In addition, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a normal winning opening 2002 is provided, and when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004 can receive the normal lottery lottery. Therefore, the player can be entertained by whether or not the game ball B hit on the right side passes through the normal winning opening 2002, and when the second starting opening 2004 becomes acceptable, the second starting opening The player can also be entertained by whether or not game ball B is accepted at 2004 . At this time, since the normal prize winning port 2002 is provided directly below the exit of the first guide path 2521 in the guide path group 2520, the user can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the first guide path 2521.例文帳に追加can be done.

Furthermore, in the accessory winning opening 2006, one game ball B accepted and sorted by the first distribution device 2530 is sent to either the first V winning opening 2007 or the second scoring opening 2541 in the second distribution device 2540 Since the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning port 2007 or not, the player can feel nervous and excited. And even if the game ball B is distributed to the second slot 2541 in the second distribution device 2540, the game ball B is a lottery accessory provided conspicuously in the lower center of the center accessory 2500. 2550 , the lottery accessory 2550 can make the player expect to receive the game ball B into the second V winning hole 2008 . After that, depending on whether or not the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 of the lottery accessory 2550 is accepted by the second V winning port 2008, the player can be excited again, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, or when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004, the first special When a "jackpot" is drawn as the pattern and the second special pattern, the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, thereby providing an opportunity to pay out a large number of game balls B. In order to receive the game ball B in the large prize winning opening 2005, the game ball B can be hit toward the right side of the center accessory 2500 to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. can be made

[5-10. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The back unit 3000 includes a vibration sensor 1040 (see FIG. 159) for detecting vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1), and a game ball received in the general prize winning opening 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. A normal winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting B and a normal winning hole sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received by the normal winning hole 2002 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 are provided. The general winning hole sensor 3001 and the normal winning hole sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball induction unit 3100 .

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is open at the front. It has a lock slider 3020 which is slidable in the left-right direction for attaching and detaching the performance display device 1600, and a back substrate unit 3040 attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010 so as to be hinge-rotatable.

The back board unit 3040 includes a box-shaped board box 3041 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front and is thin in the front and back, and a panel relay board and effect drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. I have. The board box 3041 has two shafts 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer sides of the vertically extending L-shaped portion. Further, the circuit board box 3041 has locking claws 3041b that are locked to the locking portions 3010g of the back box 3010 at the ends of the L-shaped portions extending to the left and right.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 flows, and the back ball in the back box 3010. A back decoration unit 3200 provided behind the induction unit 3100, a back front effect unit 3300 provided to the left and above the back ball induction unit 3100 near the front end in the back box 3010, and and a rear back effect unit 3400 provided behind the back front effect unit 3300. - 特許庁

The back ball guide unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the back decoration unit 3200 . The back decoration unit 3200 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 via an attachment supporter (not shown). The back front effect unit 3300 has its left end attached near the front end of the back box 3010 and its right end attached to the right front surface of the back rear effect unit 3400 . The rear rear effect unit 3400 has its upper portion attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the rear box 3010 via an attachment supporter (not shown), and its lower portion attached to the rear decoration unit 3200 .

The back decoration unit 3200, the back front effect unit 3300, and the back back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 can show predetermined movable effects and light emitting effects to the player according to the progress of the game.

[5-10a. back box]
Next, the back case 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120), and the effect unit is attached to the inside of the box shape, and the effect display device 1600 and the back board unit 3040 are attached to the rear surface. is. The back box 3010 is formed transparent. As a result, the inside can be visually recognized from the outside even when assembled on the game board 5.例文帳に追加

The back box 3010 has a box-like shape with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, and a mounting surface 3010b provided at the lower side of the opening 3010a on which the effect display device 1600 is mounted. , two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a, and a lock slider 3020 provided below the center of the mounting surface 3010b in the left-right direction. and a lock mechanism portion 3010d slidably attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a quadrangular shape with an aspect ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size in the left-right direction as the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. In addition, the opening 3010a is provided at a position that is vertically offset (eccentric) with respect to the center of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as the liquid crystal spacer 1610 (19-inch liquid crystal display device).

Upper fixing pieces 1611 of a liquid crystal spacer 1610 to which the effect display device 1600 is attached are inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010 from below. In addition, the lower fixing piece 1612 of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 to which the effect display device 1600 is attached can be inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010 from behind while the lock slider 3020 is slid leftward in a rear view. can be done. With the lower fixing piece 1612 of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 inserted into the locking mechanism portion 3010d, when the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in rear view, the lock slider 3020 prevents the lower fixing piece 1612 from moving rearward. The liquid crystal spacer 1610 (effect display device 1600) can be attached by

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG.

Further, the back box 3010 has a pair of shaft support portions 3010f capable of supporting the shaft portion 3041a of the back substrate unit 3040 rotatably around the axis extending in the vertical direction on the rear surface, and a pair of shaft support portions 3010f. is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and has an engaging portion 3010g to which the engaging claw 3041b of the rear substrate unit 3040 is engaged.

The back box 3010 can mount the back substrate unit 3040 on the rear side across the opening 3010a (liquid crystal spacer 1610 and effect display device 1600) by means of a pair of shaft support portions 3010f and locking portions 3010g. When assembled to the game board 5, the vertically extending L-shaped portion of the back board unit 3040 is positioned to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 in rear view. In addition, the L-shaped portion of the rear substrate unit 3040 extending to the left and right is located below the peripheral control unit 1500 .

In the state where the back box 3010 is assembled to the game board 5, the locking claws 3041b of the back board unit 3040 locked to the locking portion 3010g are released, and the locking claws 3041b are moved backward around the shaft portion 3041a. By rotating so as to move to the rear side, the rear of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 attached to the back box 3010 can be opened, and the liquid crystal spacer 1610, that is, the effect display can be opened without removing the back substrate unit 3040 from the back box 3010. Device 1600 can be removable.

In addition, the back box 3010 is provided on the surface facing the front-rear direction except for the fixing piece portion 3010e, and has a plurality of functional holes in which two through-holes are arranged vertically or horizontally. and a functional surface facing in the front-rear direction that can be used when assembling the machine 1 (game board 5). The two through holes of the functional hole have the same diameter. The functional hole is for attaching the performance unit to the back box 3010 directly or via an attachment supporter.

[5-10b. back ball induction unit]
Next, the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back ball guide unit 3100 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010 and attached to the back box 3010 via the back decoration unit 3200 . The back ball induction unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2002, and a game and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 capable of detecting illicit magnetism acting within the region 5a.

The back ball induction unit 3100 includes the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first V winning opening 2007, and the second V winning opening in the front unit 2000. 2008, the game ball B received in the loss opening 2009, the out opening 2020, the sub-out opening 2021, and the first opening opening 2532 is received behind the game panel 1100, guided to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, and then downward ( It can be discharged to the substrate holder 1200).

[5-10c. Back decoration unit]
Next, the back decoration unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The back decoration unit 3200 is provided after the back ball guide unit 3100 in the back box 3010, and is attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 via an attachment supporter. A vibration sensor 1040 is attached to the back decoration unit 3200 . A back ball guidance unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the back decoration unit 3200 .

The back decoration unit 3200 includes a bottom left decoration 3210 and a bottom right decoration 3220 for decorating the left and right outer rear portions of the lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 in a state assembled to the game board 5, and a bottom bottom right decoration. It is provided with a lower back left decoration substrate and a lower back right decoration substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted for lighting the left decoration body 3210 and the back lower right decoration body 3220, respectively.

The lower back left decoration body 3210 and the lower back right decoration body 3220 have translucency, and a plurality of unevennesses resembling a miniature town are formed on the upper surface of each. The lower back left decoration board and the lower back right decoration board are provided below the lower back left decoration body 3210 and the lower back right decoration body 3220, respectively, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs) are mounted on the upper surface. . By appropriately lighting the LEDs mounted on the lower back left decorative substrate and the lower back right decorative substrate, the lower back left decoration 3210 and the lower back right decoration 3220 can be decorated with light.

[5-10d. Back front production unit]
Next, the back front effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The back front effect unit 3300 is provided on the left side and above the back ball induction unit 3100 near the front end in the back box 3010. It is attached to the right end side of production unit 3400 .

The back front effect unit 3300 includes a flat plate-shaped back front left decorative body 3301 provided on the left end side and elongated in the vertical direction, and a back front elevating decorative body provided on the right side of the back front left decorative body 3301 so as to be vertically movable. A unit 3310 and a back front elevating mechanism 3350 for elevating the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 are provided.

A back-front left decorative body 3301 of the back-front effect unit 3300 is provided with a magnetic sensor 1030 provided at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction. The back front left decorative body 3301 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the total height inside the back box 3010 and has translucency. Behind the back front left decorative body 3301, a back front left decorative substrate (not shown) having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is provided. By appropriately lighting the LED of the back front left decorative substrate, the back front left decoration can be decorated with light.

The back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is elongated in the left-right direction. The back front elevating decoration unit 3310 includes a back front elevating base 3311 in the form of a transparent plate elongated in the left and right direction, and a back front central decoration 3320 attached to the front center of the back front elevating base 3311 and having an effect count display section 3005. , the back front center left decoration 3330 attached to the left of the back front center decoration 3320 on the front surface of the back front lifting base 3311, and the back front center decoration 3330 attached to the front of the back front lifting base 3311 to the right of the back front center decoration 3320 and a back front center right decorative body 3340 attached.

The back front center decoration body 3320 includes a back front center decoration part 3321 formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape, and a back front center decoration provided behind the back front center decoration part 3321 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon. It has a substrate (not shown) and a back front central base 3323 that supports the back front central decorative substrate and the back front central decorative portion 3321 from the rear and is attached to the back front elevating base 3311 . The back front central decorative portion 3321 has a portion that stereoscopically imitates a pine pattern, and is provided with an effect count display portion 3005 consisting of four 7-segment displays. The effect count display section 3005 uses some of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front central decoration board.

The back-front center-left decorative body 3330 is formed of a back-front-center-left decorative portion 3331 and a back-front-center-left decorative portion 3331 which are formed in a relief shape imitating the head of a predetermined character and have translucency. The back front center left decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is supported from the rear and the back front center left decorative board and the back front center left decorative part 3331 are supported from the rear and can be lifted up and down in the back front. and a back front center left base 3333 attached to the base 3311 . The back front center left decorative body 3330 can cause the back front center left decoration part 3331 to emit light by appropriately lighting the LED of the back front center left decoration substrate.

The back-front-middle-right decorative body 3340 includes a back-front-middle-right decorative portion 3341 and a back-front-center-right decorative portion 3341 which are formed in a relief shape imitating the head of a predetermined character and have translucency. A back front-middle-right decorative substrate 3342 provided behind and on which a plurality of first LEDs 3342a and second LEDs 3342b are mounted, a back front-middle-right decoration substrate 3342, and a back front-middle-right decorative portion 3341 are supported from behind. and a back front center right base 3343 attached to the back front lift base 3311 (see FIG. 160). The back-front-middle-right decorative body 3340 can light-embellish the back-front-middle-right decorative portion 3341 by appropriately causing the first LED 3342a and the second LED 3342b of the back-front-middle-right decorative substrate 3342 to emit light.

The back front elevating mechanism 3350 includes a back front left elevating rail (not shown) that is provided behind the back front left decoration 3301 and supports the left end side of the back front elevating decoration unit 3310 so that it can be lifted and lowered. A back front right elevating rail 3352 supporting the right end side of the front elevating decoration unit 3310 so as to be able to ascend and descend, and a back side provided behind the back front left decoration 3301 for elevating the back front elevating decoration unit 3310. and a front elevation drive unit (not shown). In addition, although illustration is omitted, the back front elevating mechanism 3350 includes a drop solenoid for dropping the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 from the state of the raised standby position, and the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 downward. and a back-front elevation driving motor for raising from the dropped performance position to the upper standby position.

A back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 of the back front effect unit 3300 is provided so as to be visible from the front through the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a state assembled on the game board 5.例文帳に追加In the normal state, the back front effect unit 3300 is positioned at the standby position where the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is the upper moving end, and is prevented from falling downward by engagement of the lock claw. In a normal state, the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is positioned near the upper end of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 139 and the like.

In addition, in the state of the standby position, which is the normal state, the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 of the back front effect unit 3300 is behind the back elevating decorative body unit at the retracted position of the back rear effect unit 3400. , and the back rear elevation decorative body 3410 is in a state that cannot be visually recognized from the front.

The back front effect unit 3300 moves the lifting slider to the lower end side by the back front lifting drive motor from the normal state, so that the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 can fall from the standby position to the lower effect position. Become. Then, from this state, when the locking by the lock claw is released by the drop solenoid, the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 freely falls toward the standby position. In the state where the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 has fallen to the performance position, the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is above the lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 and slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. located near.

When the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 drops and enters the state of the performance position, the back rear elevating decorative body 3410 at the retracted position of the back rear performance unit 3400 provided at the rear becomes visible from the front. As a result, it is possible to surprise the player and make the player think that something good will happen (the arrival of a chance).

A damper for absorbing or mitigating the impact of the falling front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is provided at the lower part of the front lifting mechanism 3350 .

The back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 that has fallen to the performance position is raised to the upper standby position by the upward movement of the elevating slider by the back front elevating drive motor, and the lock claw is automatically locked to the standby position. state.

Since this back front effect unit 3300 has a effect count display section 3005 consisting of four 7-segment displays in the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 (back front central decorative body 3320), the effect count display section 3005 By executing the countdown display in which the displayed numbers decrease, it is possible to show the player the countdown effect in which the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 falls. In the countdown effect, the rear elevating decorative body 3410 may be moved to the lower appearance position without dropping the front elevating decorative body unit 3310. You may make it move the rear raising/lowering decoration body 3410 to the downward appearance position.

[5-10e. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The back rear effect unit 3400 is provided after the back front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010, and the upper part is attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter, and the lower part is the back decoration unit 3200. installed in the The back-side effect unit 3400 includes a back-side elevating decorative body 3410 that is long in the left-right direction, and a back-side elevating mechanism 3450 for elevating the back-side elevating decorative body 3410. - 特許庁

The rear elevation decoration body 3410 in the rear production unit 3400 is provided behind the rear elevation elevation decoration part 3411 which is long in the left and right and has translucency, and behind the rear elevation elevation decoration part 3411, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted. a rear lift decorative substrate (not shown); a rear lift base (not shown) that supports the rear lift decorative substrate and the rear lift decorative portion from the rear and is lifted and lowered by a rear lift mechanism 3450; It has The back rear elevating decorative part 3411 includes a logo part 3411a formed of a predetermined logo that is applied over the entire length in the left-right direction, and a back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 that is provided in relief above the logo part 3411a. has a character portion 3411b in which a plurality of different characters are arranged in rows on the left and right. The back elevation decoration part 3411 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED of the back elevation decoration substrate.

The rear lifting mechanism 3450 in the rear rear effect unit 3400 includes a U-shaped rear rear base 3451 that opens downward, and a translucent flat plate-shaped rear that is provided in front of the upper side of the rear rear base 3451. A rear fixed decoration part 3452 and a rear fixed decoration substrate 3453 provided between the rear fixed decoration part 3452 and the rear base 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon are provided. The rear fixed decorative portion 3452 is formed to have substantially the same length in the horizontal direction as the rear lifting decorative body 3410, and has a predetermined pattern on the front surface. The rear fixed decorative portion 3452 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately causing the LED of the rear fixed decorative substrate 3453 to emit light.

In addition, although not shown, the rear lifting mechanism 3450 is provided on the left side of the rear rear base 3451 and supports the left end side of the rear lifting decorative body 3410 so that it can be lifted and lowered. A rear rear right rail provided on the right side of the rear base 3451 and supporting the right end side of the rear lifting decorative body 3410 so as to be liftable, and a rear lifting decorative body 3410 provided on the left side of the rear rear base. and a rear elevation drive unit for raising and lowering the rear side.

The rear elevation drive unit has a rear elevation drive motor. By driving the rear elevation drive motor, the rear elevation decorative body 3410 is moved to the retracted position, which is the upper movement end, and the appearance position, which is the lower movement end. , and can be stopped at any position between the retracted position and the appearing position.

In a normal state, the back-side effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position where the back-side elevating decorative body 3410 is at the upper movement end. In this state, the rear lifting decorative body 3410 is positioned in front of the rear fixed decorative portion 3452 of the rear lifting mechanism 3450 . Therefore, the rear fixed decorative portion 3452 is hidden from the front by the rear lifting decorative body 3410 at the retracted position.

Since the rear back effect unit 3400 is provided behind the back front effect unit 3300 in the state assembled on the game board 5, the back front effect unit 3300 is placed in front of the rear rear elevation decorative body 3410 in a normal state. The back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is located at the standby position, and is hidden by the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

In the back-side effect unit 3400, when the back-side elevating decoration body 3410 is moved from the normal state to the appearance position, which is the lower movement end, by driving the back-side elevating drive motor of the back-side elevating mechanism 3450, the back side elevation decoration body 3410 is moved from the normal state to the back side of the standby position. It is located below the front lifting decorative body unit 3310 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. As a result, the back rear elevation decorative body 3410 becomes visible from the player side.

Even when the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved downward from the retracted position, the back elevating decorative body unit 3310 is positioned in front of the fixed decorative portion 3452 when the back elevating decorative body unit 3310 is in the standby position. is positioned, the back fixed decorative portion 3452 cannot be visually recognized from the front. Therefore, when the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved downward (appearing position) from the retracted position and the back elevating decorative body unit 3310 is dropped from the standby position to the performance position below, the fixed decorative part 3452 in the back is the first time. becomes visible from the front. Thereby, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the fact that the rear fixed decorative portion 3452 can be seen.

When the back elevating decorative body unit 3310 is dropped to the production position while the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved to the lower appearing position, the rear elevating decorative body 3410 in the back elevating decorative part 3411 of the back elevating decorative body 3410 The back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is positioned in front of the logo part 3411a, and the logo part 3411a is hidden, and the character part 3411b in which a plurality of characters are arranged is positioned in front of the back front elevating decorative body unit. It is in a state where it faces forward from above 3310 (see FIG. 163).

In a state in which the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved to the appearing position, the back elevating driving motor of the back elevating mechanism 3450 is reversed to raise the back elevating decorative body 3410 and return it to the retracted position. can.

[5-11. Production with a game board]
Next, the effects of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158. FIG. FIG. 155 is a front view of the game board shown in a normal state. FIG. 156 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front elevation decoration body unit of the back front effect unit is dropped from the standby position to the effect position from the normal state. FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-back elevating decorative body of the back-back effect unit is moved from the normal state to the appearing position from the retracted position. Fig. 158 shows that the back front elevating decorative body unit of the back front effect unit is dropped from the standby position to the effect position from the normal state, and the back elevating decorative body of the back rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a folded state.

As shown in FIG. 155 and the like, the game board 5 of the present embodiment is such that the back unit 3000 provided behind and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized mainly through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It's becoming This game board 5 passes through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and in the vicinity of the lower side thereof, the lottery accessory 2550 and the lower back left decoration 3210 and the lower right decoration 3220 of the back decoration unit 3200 provided on the left and right of it. A back front left decorative body 3301 of the back front effect unit 3300 is provided in the vicinity of the left side in the frame of the center accessory 2500 so as to be always visible.

In the normal state of the game board 5, the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 of the back front effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is moved to the standby position which is the upper movement end, and the back of the back back effect unit 3400 is moved. The rear elevating decorative body 3410 has moved to the retracted position, which is the upper movement end. The back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 moving to the standby position is visibly facing forward in the vicinity of the upper side in the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The back elevating decorative body 3410 that has moved to the retracted position is located behind the front elevating decorative body unit 3310 and at the same height as the back elevating decorative body unit 3310 at the standby position. It is hidden by the unit 3310 and cannot be seen from the front.

In addition, in a normal state, the back rear elevating decorative body 3410 at the retracted position is positioned in front of the back rear fixed decorative portion 3452 of the back rear effect unit 3400, and the back front elevating decorative body 3410 at the standby position is further in front of it. The decoration unit 3310 is located, and is hidden by them and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

In this normal state, since the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is moved to the upper standby position, the production count display section 3005 provided in the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 (back front center decorative body 3320) is turned off. , is positioned above the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and looks conspicuous from the player's side without obstructing the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game board 5 of this embodiment can use the back front effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 to execute the effect shown in FIG. In this effect, in the normal state in which the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is moved to the upper standby position, in the back front lifting mechanism 3350, after the lifting slider is moved to the lower end side by the back front lifting drive motor, The drop solenoid releases the engagement by the lock claw, and the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is allowed to freely fall to the production position. In the state where the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 has fallen to the performance position, the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is above the lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 and slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. It is positioned closer to the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction is hidden. Also, when the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 falls to the production position, the back rear elevating decorative body 3410 at the retracted position of the back rear production unit 3400 becomes visible in the vicinity of the upper side in the frame of the center accessory 2500 . As a result, the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 freely falls, so that it is possible to surprise the player and to think that something good will happen to the player (the arrival of a chance). can let

Next, the game board 5 can execute an effect as shown in FIG. 157 using the back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 . In this effect, the rear lifting decorative body 3410 is moved to the lower moving end by the rear lifting driving motor of the rear lifting mechanism 3450 in a normal state in which the rear lifting decorative body 3410 is moved to the upper retracted position. to the appearance position. As a result, the rear rear elevation decoration body 3410, which has been invisible due to the back front elevation decoration body unit 3310, becomes visible, so that the player can be surprised, and the player is made to think that a chance has arrived, and expects the game. It can make you feel better. In addition, when the rear lifting decorative body 3410 moves to the appearance position, it is positioned substantially at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the vertical direction. , the player can see an effect in which the effect image is physically divided into upper and lower parts.

In addition, as an effect using the back side effect unit 3400, the back side lifting decorative body 3410 can be moved to an arbitrary height between the retracted position and the appearing position by the back side lifting drive motor. As an effect, the rear lifting decorative body 3410 may be moved slightly downward from the retracted position or vibrated up and down.

Subsequently, the game board 5 can use both the back front effect unit 3300 and the back back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 to execute the effect shown in FIG. In this performance, the back front elevation decoration body unit 3310 is dropped from the standby position to be in the performance position, and the back rear elevation decoration body 3410 is moved downward from the retracted position to be in the appearance position. As a result, the display screen of the production display device 1600 is covered with the front front lifting decorative body unit 3310 and the rear lifting decorative body unit 3410, so that a strong impact can be given to the player. Since the rear fixed decorative part 3452 provided above the display screen, which has not been visually recognized until now, can be visually recognized, it is possible to impart a feeling of premium to the player, and an advantageous game in which the player is advantageous. It is possible to heighten expectations for the occurrence of a state (for example, a jackpot game).

In this effect, the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 and the back elevating decorative body 3410 may be moved downward at the same time, or the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is first dropped and then the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved downward. may be moved downward, or the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 may be dropped after the back elevating decorative body 3410 is first moved downward.

In addition, since the game board 5 has the production count display section 3005 which is always visible from the front on the back unit 3000, the production using the production count display section 3005 can be executed. For example, the countdown display that decreases the number displayed in the effect count display section 3005 every moment counts down the timing of the falling of the back front elevation decoration body unit 3310 or the movement of the back rear elevation decoration body 3410 downward. You can let them do it. Alternatively, for example, the detection of the game ball B by the lottery accessory ball sensor 2546 may count down until the game ball B becomes unable to loop in the lottery accessory 2550 .

Further, in the effect count display section 3005, the degree of expectation for the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004 may be displayed (suggested) as a number. Alternatively, since the effect count display unit 3005 has four 7-segment displays, the effect pattern is configured by combining the light emission of each segment, and after the effect pattern is variably displayed, the stop display is performed. The degree of expectation may be suggested by the stop-displayed production pattern.

[6. control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 159 and the like. FIG. 159 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). A peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during a game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout of the game ball B and a launch control unit 633b that controls launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195 .

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU, a setting display for displaying set values and errors, and partitioning on the game board 5 and a base monitor for displaying the number of game balls B collected by an out port 2020 and a sub-out port 2021 provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU to identify the individual (there is only one code in the world) for individual identification. Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU can retrieve the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU, and if the contents of the register change to inconsistent contents, the main control MPU is forcibly affected by electrical noise. This is the reset circuit. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and disabled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power failure processing described later, and the main control side power ON processing described later is performed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing has not been executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( cleared). In addition, even if the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in a started state.

In addition, the main control MPU is a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in hardware Random number circuit”) is built in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and the clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed. When all the values of are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU selects the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a jackpot judgment random number. is set as

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start opening sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2003, and a second start opening that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. An opening sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2002, and received in the big winning opening 2005. A big prize winning slot sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received, a prize winning slot sensor 2501 for detecting the game ball B accepted in the role prize winning slot 2006, and a game ball B accepted in the first V winning slot 2007. First V winning opening sensor 2502 to detect, Second V winning opening sensor 2503 to detect game ball B received in second V winning opening 2008, Loss opening sensor to detect game ball B received in losing opening 2009 2504, out sensor 664 for detecting game ball B ejected from game board 5, magnetic sensor 1030 for detecting illegal magnetism in game area 5a, vibration sensor 1040 for detecting vibration acting on game board 5, etc. A detection signal from is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

Detection signals from the setting key switch 1312 and the setting change switch (RAM clear switch) provided on the setting change board are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit. there is

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame open switch and the detection signal from the main body frame open switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (i.e., through the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When input to the main control board 1310 as they are), they are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

In addition, each detection signal from the out sensor 664, the first start sensor 2101, and the second start sensor 2401 is input directly to the main control board 1310 without going through another board, and the main control It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via an input circuit. On the other hand, general winning opening sensor 3001, normal winning opening sensor 3002, big winning opening sensor 2402, accessory winning opening sensor 2501, first V winning opening sensor 2502, second V winning opening sensor 2503, loss opening sensor 2504 , the magnetic sensor 1030, and the vibration sensor 1040 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, and are supplied to the main control MPU via the main control input circuit. Input to the input terminal of the input port.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the main control solenoid drive circuit to detect the starting solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414. , Accessory prize winning solenoid 2516, first distribution solenoid 2534, second distribution solenoid 2544, lottery loop solenoid 2558, hitting piece drive motor 2561, gutter swing drive motor 2564, swing piece solenoid 2565, each drive Signals are output via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, and are output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the status indicator, normal pattern display, normal hold display, and first special display of the function display unit 1400. Each drive signal to the symbol display, the first special reserved number display, the second special symbol display, the second special reserved number display, and the round display, without going through another board, that is, directly, output or do Further, the main control MPU outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp of the setting change board by outputting the drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU outputs various information (game information) about the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633 . The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to the launch permission logic when launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (fire non-permission logic) inverts the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. is set to As for the logic of the firing permission signal, as an initial value (default), after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after the power is restored), firing permission signal setting processing in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is started. Until then, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is set by inverting the firing permission logic.

In this embodiment, the first start sensor 2101, the second start sensor 2401, the normal winning sensor 3002, the big winning sensor 2402, the accessory winning sensor 2501, the first V winning sensor 2502, the second Non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the V winning opening sensor 2503, the losing opening sensor 2504, and the out sensor 664, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF operation. A mechanical switch of the type is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, and the normal winning hole 2002, so the first starting hole sensor 2101, the second starting hole sensor 2401, and the normal winning hole Detection of game ball B by mouth sensor 3002 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2401, and the normal winning opening sensor 3002. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous game state (such as a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball B enters frequently, resulting in a big winning. The detection of the game ball B by the mouth sensor 2402 and the prize winning mouth sensor 2501 also frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the big winning slot sensor 2402 and the accessory winning slot sensor 2501 as well. In addition, the game balls B launched into the game area 5a are recovered in large quantities by the out-port 2020 and the sub-out-port 2021 provided in the game area 5a sectioned and formed on the game board 5. detection also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the out sensor 664 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001 . A proximity switch with high durability and long life may be used regardless of whether the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently or not.

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. In addition, the main control MPU, which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This blackout warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED indicator that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a pressing operation unit for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball A ball extracting switch for discharging the game balls B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starting the ball extracting operation. , is equipped with

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cut detection sensor 574, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, and a power failure of the main control board 1310. A power failure warning signal from the monitoring circuit and an error cancellation signal from the error cancellation switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the residual of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a residual display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display section 226 of the operation unit 220 .

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 195, and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the will of the player. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 for permitting launch of the game ball B is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, the firing timing control circuit satisfies the firing condition 1 that the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and based on the CR connection signal, connects the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate. is electrically connected to the game ball B. , for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 195. Triggered by the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In the present embodiment, the discharge control board 633 is provided with a discharge control section 633b that controls the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 145 as well as the firing control by the firing solenoid 542. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
Peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance in the peripheral control board 1510 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on one semiconductor chip. Integrated peripheral control ICs, peripheral control ROMs for storing various processing programs and various commands, sound source ICs for high-quality performances, and sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source ICs. and a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip. The CPU of the control IC transmits game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 through the serial I/O for the lamp drive board. Game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decoration board of the game board 5 and for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for actuating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is provided for the game board decoration drive board. It is transmitted from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or the drive signal to the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, the projection force adjustment drive motor 381, etc. and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door side drive light emission data to be transmitted to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 are sent to the display control unit serial In addition to transmitting from the I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, and the projecting force detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the effect display control unit 1512 to inform that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 activity is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the sound information to the top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. , the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played in accordance with various presentations. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume control switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, By transmitting a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is running out of control.

A display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port. Kilo (k) bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side, are multiple serial input/output signals different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Effect display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect display device 1600 . are controlling. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, the control data (display commands) and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs them to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer system. The "line buffer method" is to hold one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 in a line buffer, and transfer the one line of drawing data held in this line buffer to the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 . Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front and the main scanning in the direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially scans one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. are output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, respectively.

[7. Game content]
The game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are played. is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more the handle 195 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail N, the game ball The flowing speed of B is suppressed, and various motions are imparted to the game ball B so that the motion can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, the left side of the center role 2500, that is, the inner side. It flows between the rail 1002 and the center accessory 2500 while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. On the left side of the center accessory 2500, the entrance of the warp passage 2512 is always open so that the game ball B can be received.

The game ball B that has entered the warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2513 provided within the frame of the center accessory 2500, rolls on the stage 2513 in the left-right direction, and is ejected from the central release portion 2513a or the side release portion 2513b. It is discharged so as to flow back into the game area 5a from either. Since the center release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting port 2003 in the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the center release portion 2513a has a high probability of reaching the first It is received in the starting port 2003 . The game ball B released from the side release portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a may be received in the first start port 2003 with a certain degree of probability.

When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2003, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. In addition, in the main control board 1310, the first special symbol (for example, "loss", "small hit", "character hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability Change) hit”, “Time reduction (time reduction) hit”, “Probable variable time short hit”, “Probable variable time short hit”, “Second big hit”, etc.) lottery will be held. If the lottery result of the lottered first special symbol is other than "losing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time).

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2003 until the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested (special fluctuation time), the first start When the game ball B is received in the mouth 2003, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol. The start of suggesting the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of retained lottery results of the first special symbols to be retained is up to 4 for each of the first starting ports 2003, and for more than that, the game balls B are accepted by the first starting ports 2003. However, the lottery result of the first special symbol is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp passage 2512, it will be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200 general prize winning opening 2001, sub-out opening 2021, or the first starting opening 2003 of the starting opening unit 2100. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit above the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall 2511a of the center role 2500, the center role 2500 is guided. It passes through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 . The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening door 2515 that closes the accessory winning opening 2006 on the way, and then moves upward (directly above) the normal winning opening unit 2600. released to On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the second guide path 2522 is released upward to the left of the normal winning opening 2002 . Therefore, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, there is a possibility that it will be received in the accessory winning opening 2006.

The prize winning port 2006 is opened when the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004 is "small win" or "win a prize". , and opens and closes in a predetermined pattern so that the game ball B can be received. When the game ball B is received in the accessory winning opening 2006, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the game ball B is sent from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the upper tray 201. is paid out to

The game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is sent to the first distribution device 2530 and distributed to either the chance opening 2531 or the first prize opening 2532 by the distribution rotating body 2533 . The game ball B distributed to the first slot 2532 is discharged. The game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 is sent to the second distribution device 2540 . The game ball B sent to the second sorting device 2540 is sorted to either the first V winning opening 2007 or the second scoring opening 2541 . When the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 by the distribution of the second distribution device 2540, a "jackpot" game is executed in which the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern.

When the game ball B is distributed to the second slot 2541 in the second distribution device 2540 , it is sent to the lottery accessory 2550 . The game ball B sent to the lottery accessory 2550 moves between the table 2555 provided with the second V winning port 2008 and the It loops with the hitting part 2553 that supplies the ball B to the table 2555 . Then, when the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008, a "jackpot" game is executed in which the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern.

On the other hand, when a predetermined time passes and the distribution bridge 2557 moves from the loop position to the non-loop position and the loss opening 2009 is opened, the game ball that has not been received in the second V winning opening 2008 of the table 2555 B is accepted in the loss opening 2009 . The game ball B received in the loss opening 2009 is discharged.

Since the normal winning opening 2002 provided downstream of the guide path group 2520 is provided directly below the exit of the first guide path 2521, the game ball B that has circulated through the first guide path 2521 is the second There is a higher possibility that the game ball B that has circulated through the guide passage 2522 will be accepted into the normal winning opening 2002 . A game ball B that has not been received by the normal winning hole 2002 flows down to the attacker unit 2400. - 特許庁

When the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2002 and detected by the normal winning opening sensor 3002, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and the lottery result of the drawn normal symbol is "normal hit". , The second starting port 2004 closed by the second starting port door 2411 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is It becomes possible.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning opening 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the lottery result of the normal symbol ( For example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also commonly referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this normal symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2002 during the period from when the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2002 until the normal symbol drawing result is suggested, the normal symbol drawing result is suggested. Since it cannot be started, the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous normal symbol ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of reserved lottery results of normal symbols is up to 4, and even if the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2002, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

The game ball B that has flowed down without being received in the normal winning opening 2002 flows down to either the upper shelf 2421 , the first shelf 2422 , or the right side of the first shelf 2422 in the attacker unit 2400 . The game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf 2421 is guided to the left and released to the left of the big winning opening 2005 . Therefore, the game ball B that has flowed down onto the upper shelf portion 2421 is not received by the second starting opening 2004 and the big winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 rolls leftward due to its inclination, and the second starting door 2411 closing the second starting port 2004, the second shelf portion 2423, After rolling over the big winning gate door 2413 closing the big winning gate 2005 and the fourth shelf 2425, it is released to the left. The game ball B released from the fourth shelf portion 2425 is received by the out port 2020 and ejected. Therefore, when the game ball B flows down to the first shelf portion 2422, there is a possibility that it will be received by the second starting opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加

The game ball B that has flowed down to the right from the first shelf 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 is received by the sub-out port 2021 and discharged. Although rare, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2422 enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2423 and the third shelf portion 2424, it is received by the sub-out port 2021 and discharged. .

When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400, a predetermined number (for example, one) of the game ball B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the upper tray 201, and in the main control board 1310, the second special symbols (for example, "loss", "small hit", "accessory hit", "2R big win", "5R big win", "15R big win", "Probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "second big hit", etc.) lottery is performed. If the lottery result of the lottered second special symbol is other than "losing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the drawn second special symbol takes a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special variation time) longer than the special variation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol. suggested.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 until the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is suggested (special fluctuation time), the second start When the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the second special symbol. The start of suggesting the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of retained lottery results of the second special symbols to be retained is up to four for each of the second start ports 2004, and for more than that, the game balls B are accepted by the second start ports 2004. However, the lottery result of the second special symbol is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

The special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the second start port 2004 is the time of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2003. It is set longer than the special fluctuation time of the lottery result. As a result, the second special symbol lottery result takes more time to consume the number of reservations, so the number of accepted game balls B per unit time for the first start port 2003 and the second start port 2004 is the same. Also, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol to be executed in the second starting port 2004 is smaller. Therefore, in the normal state, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a possibility that only the second starting port 2004 will be accepted, and the frequency with which the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed is low. , the player can be made to positively perform a hitting operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

As described above, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004, the big winning port 2005 or The accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and enters a state in which the game ball B can be received.

Then, in the attacker unit 2400, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, or acceptance of the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, etc. When the game ball B flows down at the timing when the big winning hole 2005 can be received, the game ball B is received in the big winning hole 2005.例文帳に追加When the game ball B is received in the big winning opening 2005, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the game balls B from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are placed on the upper tray 201. paid out.

After the large winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, a predetermined time (eg, 20 seconds to 40 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (eg, 10) of the large winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of acceptance of the game ball B is satisfied, the opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is called one round) in which the game ball B is in a closed state unacceptable is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). . For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, the probability that the first special symbol such as "big hit" and the second special symbol will be drawn is changed ("probability hit"), or the lottery result of the first special symbol And there is a "hit" that changes the display time of the effect image that suggests the lottery result of the second special pattern ("time saving hit").

If the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol) is the "second big hit", the big winning opening 2005 or the accessory winning opening 2006 is a predetermined pattern After making it possible to accept the game ball B, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST maintains the state of probability variation and time saving during a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this way, when the game ball B can be received by the large winning opening 2005 or the accessory winning opening 2006, the large winning opening 2005 or the accessory winning opening 2006 is made to accept the game ball B, so that a large number of the game balls B can be received. Since the money can be paid out, the player can be entertained and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special symbol lottery results (the first special symbol lottery result and the second special symbol lottery result). Suggestion of the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs and blinking for a predetermined time, and thereafter suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern by the combination of the lit LEDs. .

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the result of the lottery for the special symbol is suggested as the effect image. The performance image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern in the performance display device 1600 is displayed by changing each pattern row in a state in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and displayed. The pattern rows are successively stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern. When the lottery result of the special pattern is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁, an advantageous game state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the lottery result of the drawn special symbols.

It should be noted that the time to suggest the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (special fluctuation time)) and the time to suggest the lottery result of the special pattern in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the time until the finalized image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the effect display device 1600, according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn, the effect operation unit in the door frame 3 A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the contact operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation part 301 in 300 are operated. In the player-participation type performance, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player-participation type performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation section 301 .

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, an effect display device 1600, a start opening display section 2110, an effect count display section 3005, By appropriately using the back decoration unit 3200, the back front effect unit 3300, the back rear effect unit 3400, etc., it is possible to perform lighting effect, display effect, movable effect, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type performance of operating the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. to notify the player to that effect.

[8. Decorative body having effect board]
Next, the decorative body 3500 having the effect board 3520 provided in a game machine such as the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 164 and the like. FIG. 160(a) is a front view of the decoration having the effect board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the decoration of (a). Fig. 161 shows that in the production of the effect board of Fig. 160, after forming the outer periphery of the effect board by leaving a connection part for the standard size board, after mounting electronic parts such as LEDs, the effect board and the waste board are formed. is an explanatory diagram showing a state before separating the . Figure 162 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state before forming the outer periphery of the production board leaving the connection part and separating it from the waste board, (b) is the production board and the waste board by cutting the part of the connection part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which made the board|substrate isolate|separate, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which finished the site|part of the connection part in the production|presentation board|substrate.

Figure 163 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the effect board in a state in which the effect board and the waste board are separated from the state of Fig. 161, and (b) is a state in which the outer periphery of the effect board is finished from the state of (a). It is an explanatory view showing . FIG. 164(a) is an explanatory view showing a form of a connecting portion different from that of FIG. 161, and (b1) to (b3) show a still different form of the connecting portion and also show the process of separating from the waste substrate and finishing. It is an explanatory diagram. Note that the decoration 3500 described here is the first embodiment among a plurality of embodiments, and may be described as a decoration 3501 in order to distinguish it from other embodiments.

As shown in FIG. 160, the decorative body 3500 (the decorative body 3501 of the first embodiment) has a decorative portion 3510 formed in a predetermined shape and a plurality of LEDs 3530 mounted behind the decorative portion 3510. and a decoration base 3540 provided after the production board 3520. - 特許庁This decoration body 3500 can light-embellish the decoration part 3510 and the lens part 3545 of the decoration base 3540 by appropriately causing the LEDs 3530 mounted on the effect board 3520 to emit light. The decoration 3500 shown in FIG. 160 is the same as the back front center right decoration 3340 in the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 of the back front effect unit 3300 .

The decoration part 3510 has translucency, and is three-dimensionally formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. This decorative portion 3510 imitates the head of a predetermined character and is formed in a relief shape. The decorative portion 3510 includes a side wall portion 3511 extending in the front-rear direction (in a direction intersecting the central portion) near the outer peripheral edge, and a rear end face that is the thick end face of the side wall portion 3511 and faces rearward. 3512 and . In the decorative portion 3510 of the present embodiment, the central portion (front wall portion 3513) and the side wall portion 3511 are continuous with a smooth curved surface, and there is no clear boundary with the central portion (front wall portion 3513). not

The effect board 3520 is provided behind the decorative portion 3510 (rear end surface 3512). The effect board 3520 has a shape that follows (along) the outer peripheral shape of the decorative portion 3510 and is formed smaller than the outer periphery of the decorative portion 3510 . Approximately the entire outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520 is formed behind the rear end surface 3512 of the decorative portion 3510 . In other words, the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520 is formed so as to be located between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the rear end face 3512 when overlapping the decoration part 3510 (when assembled into the decoration body 3500).

The effect board 3520 has, as shown in FIG. 162, a copper foil 3522 forming an electronic circuit on the surface of a board base material 3521 and a coating film 3523 coating the copper foil 3522. .

The copper foil 3522 is provided at a predetermined distance L1 (for example, 0.5 mm to 3 mm, 1 mm in this embodiment) from the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520. The backup of the copper foil 3522 is provided regardless of whether the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520 is linear or curved. For example, as shown in FIG. 162, when there is an arc-shaped dent in the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520, a restraint of copper foil 3522 is provided concentrically with the dent. In addition, when the effect board 3520 is provided with a through hole, the copper foil 3522 is also provided at a predetermined distance L1 from the peripheral edge of the through hole. With the provision of the copper foil 3522, it is possible to improve insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit, and to suppress damage due to discharge or the like.

The coating film 3523 has a bright color and is provided so as to reliably cover the side surfaces of the copper foil 3522 as well. The coating film 3523 of this embodiment is a white solder resist. This coating film 3523 is applied by screen printing, dry film, or the like. Since this coating film 3523 has a bright color, it can reflect the light from the LEDs 3530 mounted on the effect board 3520, and the decorative portion 3510 can be decorated with brighter light emission. In addition, even when the LEDs 3530 are not emitting light, it is possible to reflect the light emitted to the effect board 3520 through the decoration part 3510, so that the decoration part 3510 can be prevented from appearing dark. The performance board 3520 can be made difficult to recognize, and the appearance of the decoration 3500 can be improved.

In this embodiment, white is shown as the bright color of the coating film 3523, but it is not limited to this, and any bright color such as yellow, gray, blue, green, or red may be used. For example, when the brightness of black is 0 and the brightness of white is 10, it is desirable that the brightness be in the range of 5 to 10.

The coating film 3523 is provided at a predetermined distance L2 (for example, 0.4 mm to 0.8 mm, 0.5 mm in this embodiment) from the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520, and the peripheral edge is the peripheral edge of the copper foil 3522. and the peripheral edge of the effect board 3520 . The backup of the coating film 3523 is provided regardless of whether the outer peripheral edge of the effect substrate 3520 is linear or curved. For example, as shown in FIG. 162, when there is an arc-shaped dent in the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520, a stub of the coating film 3523 is provided concentrically with the dent. In addition, when the effect substrate 3520 is provided with a through hole, the coating film 3523 is also provided at a predetermined distance L2 from the peripheral edge of the through hole. A shaded portion in FIG. 162 indicates a region where the coating film 3523 is provided.

The multiple LEDs 3530 mounted on the effect board 3520 are composed of multiple first LEDs 3531 mounted on the front surface and multiple second LEDs 3532 mounted on the rear surface. The first LED 3531 is a top-view type that irradiates light in a direction perpendicular to the board surface of the effect board 3520, and the second LED 3532 is a side-view type that irradiates light in a direction parallel to the board surface of the effect board 3520. is. Both the first LED 3531 and the second LED 3532 are full-color LEDs.

The decoration base 3540 is entirely colorless and transparent, and includes a flat plate-shaped body portion 3541 located behind the effect board 3520 and a peripheral wall portion extending forward from the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 3541. 3542, an opening 3543 in which the second LED 3532 that penetrates the main body portion 3541 and is mounted on the rear surface of the effect board 3520 is inserted, and the peripheral edge of the main body portion 3541 are provided and directed to the peripheral edge outward A chamfered portion 3544 is obliquely formed so as to be positioned forward according to the direction, and a lens portion 3545 is provided on the front end face of the peripheral wall portion 3542 and is composed of a plurality of uneven portions.

A peripheral wall portion 3542 of the decoration base 3540 is provided over the entire circumference of the main body portion 3541 and is formed in a cylindrical shape that is short in the front-rear direction. The size of the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 3542 is slightly larger than the size of the outer periphery of the decorative portion 3510 . As a result, the decorative portion 3510 can be inserted from the front inside the cylindrical peripheral wall portion 3542 . Moreover, the peripheral wall portion 3542 is formed so that the front end (lens portion 3545 ) protrudes forward from the rear end surface 3512 of the decoration portion 3510 when assembled to the decoration body 3500 .

When this decoration base 3540 is assembled to the decoration body 3500, the side-view type second LED 3532 mounted on the rear surface of the effect board 3520 is inserted into the opening 3543. Therefore, when the second LED 3532 is made to emit light, The light is applied to the inner peripheral surface of the opening 3543 and enters the main body 3541 from the inner peripheral surface. The light incident on the main body portion 3541 is reflected forward toward the peripheral wall portion 3542 by the chamfered portion 3544 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3541, and is reflected forward from the lens portion 3545 at the front end of the peripheral wall portion 3542. will be radiated to Thereby, the light emission of the second LED 3532 can cause the lens portion 3545 to emit light, and the outer circumference of the decoration portion 3510 can be decorated with light emission.

In the decoration body 3500 of this embodiment, when the first LED 3531 mounted on the front surface of the production board 3520 is made to emit light, the decoration part 3510 can be decorated with light emission, and the second LED 3531 mounted on the rear surface of the production board 3520 can emit light. When the LED 3532 emits light, the lens portion 3545 of the decoration base 3540 provided on the outer circumference of the decoration portion 3510 can be decorated with light. At this time, the surface (front and rear surfaces) of the effect board 3520 is provided with a bright (here, white) coating film 3523, so that the light from the first LED 3531 and the second LED 3532 can be reflected. Thus, the decorative portion 3510 and the lens portion 3545 can be decorated with brighter light emission.

In addition, since the surface of the effect board 3520 has a bright color due to the coating film 3523, even if the effect board 3520 can be seen through the decoration part 3510, the effect board 3520 is hardly conspicuous, and the deterioration of the appearance of the decoration body 3500 is prevented. can be suppressed. In addition, when the decorative part 3510 has a colored part, the color of the decorative part 3510 looks different or dark because the back effect board 3520 has a bright color due to the coating film 3523. It is possible to avoid tucking away, and the decorative effect of the decorative portion 3510 can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, in the decorative body 3500, since the peripheral end surface of the decorative portion 3510 is located in front of the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520, even if the decorative portion 3510 is transparent, the curved side wall portion provided in front The lens effect of 3511 makes it difficult to see the outer edge of the effect board 3520 clearly. In addition, the outside of the outer peripheral edge (peripheral side surface) of the effect board 3520 is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 3542 of the decoration base 3540, and the lens portion 3545 consisting of a plurality of unevenness is provided at the front end of the peripheral wall portion 3542. , the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520 can be made difficult to see through the peripheral wall portion 3542 . In this way, in the decorative body 3500, the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520 is difficult to see, so even if the outer peripheral edge (peripheral side surface) is not provided with the bright-colored coating film 3523, the appearance is not deteriorated. Therefore, the appearance of the decorative body 3500 can be improved.

In addition, in the decoration body 3500, since the outer side of the effect board 3520 is surrounded by the peripheral wall part 3542 of the decoration base 3540, the operator does not touch the outer peripheral side surface of the effect board 3520 when the game board 5 is assembled. As a result, even if the outer peripheral side surface of the effect board 3520 has a jagged portion (for example, a specific trace portion 3561 described later) due to the difference in the finish of the outer peripheral side surface, the worker will be injured by the portion. can be avoided. In addition, since the coating film 3523 is not provided on the outer peripheral side surface and the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the effect board 3520, it is possible to prevent the worker's lipid from adhering to the site, and suppress the occurrence of problems due to lipid. can be made

[8-1. Details of production board]
Next, details of the effect board 3520 provided on the decorative body 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163 and the like. First, as in the decoration body 3500 (decoration portion 3510) of the present embodiment, when the outer peripheral shape is not a simple rectangular shape but an indefinite complicated shape by simulating a predetermined character, light is emitted. If the effect board on which the LED for decoration is mounted is made in a simple rectangular shape, there is likely to be a part where the effect board (LED) is not provided behind the decoration part 3510. The entire portion 3510 cannot be illuminated with uniform brightness, and there is a risk that a sufficient presentation effect cannot be obtained. Therefore, by making the outer peripheral shape of the effect board 3520 correspond to the outer peripheral shape of the decorative portion 3510, it is possible to solve the above problems.

As a method of forming the outer peripheral shape of the effect board 3520 into an irregular and complicated shape, there is a method of cutting (cutting) a rectangular fixed-length board 3550 using a processing machine such as an NC machine. In this case, a large amount of chips are generated from the substrate base material 3521 that constitutes the effect board 3520. Therefore, before mounting electronic components such as LEDs, sensors, and connectors on the effect board 3520, the effect board 3520 is cut out ( separated). However, if the outer peripheral shape of the cut effect board 3520 is irregular, there arises a problem that it becomes difficult to set the effect board 3520 in an insert machine for mounting electronic components.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, production of the effect board 3520 is performed by the following method. First, a rectangular substrate 3550 (substrate base material 3521) is provided with a copper foil 3522 forming a circuit, mounting holes and through holes for mounting electronic components such as LEDs 3530, and a light-colored coating film 3523 (solder). resist) is applied. At this time, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3522 is positioned at a predetermined distance L1 from the outer peripheral edge of the cut effect board 3520, and the outer peripheral edge of the coating film 3523 is set shorter than the predetermined distance L1 of the cut effect board 3520. It is located at a predetermined distance L2 from the outer edge (see FIG. 162).

By the way, since the coating film 3523 contains a pigment (for example, titanium oxide) for making it bright, it becomes hard (a hard material) compared to a film not containing the pigment, which will be described later. When cutting is performed, fine chips (powder) are likely to be generated, and the powder of the light-colored coating film 3523 is difficult to clean. Then, when the electronic component such as the LED 3530 is mounted, if the powder of the coating film 3523 remains, there is a possibility that a problem may occur. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the outer peripheral edge of the coating film 3523 is provided with a predetermined distance L2 from the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520, when cutting the outer peripheral shape of the effect board 3520, The coating film 3523 is not cut, and powder of the coating film 3523 is not generated.

Then, before mounting electronic components on the fixed-length board 3550 using an insert machine, a cutting machine such as an NC machine is used to cut out the effect board 3520 from the fixed-length board 3550, such as an end mill. is used to perform cutting to form a slit 3551 along the outer peripheral shape of the effect board 3520 . At this time, the effect board 3520 is not completely separated, but is partially connected by the connecting portion 3552 . As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 161, this connecting portion 3552 has a form in which one through hole 3553 is provided between two slits 3551 .

As shown in FIG. 161, the connecting portion 3552 is provided at a linear or convex portion on the outer peripheral shape of the effect board 3520 . As a result, in the finishing process, which will be described later, it becomes easy to cleanly finish the connecting portion 3552 using a file or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 161, some slits 3551 are provided up to a V-cut 3554 away from the outer periphery of the effect board 3520 to the outside. This V-cut 3554 is for facilitating separation of the waste board 3555 and the effect board 3520 by folding and cutting before the effect board 3520 is separated from the standard board 3550 . In addition, the fixed length substrate 3550 is provided with mounting and positioning holes 3556 at the four corners.

When the cutting of the slit 3551 is completed on the standard-sized substrate 3550, the chips are sucked up by a dust collector or the like and cleaned. At this time, since the light-colored coating film 3523 is provided away from the outer peripheral edge of the effect substrate 3520, the coating film 3523 is not cut, and powder of the coating film 3523 is not generated. do not have. Therefore, it can be cleaned cleanly without leaving fine shavings. Incidentally, prior to the cutting of the effect substrate 3520, only the coating film 3523 may be scraped off with an end mill or the like. By previously removing the coating film 3523 near the end face (designed outline) of the effect board 3520 in this way, there is an effect of preventing powder scattering of the coating film 3523 due to vibration or the like in the subsequent process.

After that, the fixed-length board 3550 with the slit 3551 formed thereon is set in an insert machine, and electronic components such as LEDs 3530 are mounted on the portion of the effect board 3520 . At this time, the effect board 3520 is not separated from the fixed-size board 3550, and the outer circumference remains rectangular. can be implemented. FIG. 161 shows the state immediately before the electronic components such as the LEDs 3530 are mounted on the effect board 3520 and separated.

After the electronic parts such as the LED 3530 are mounted, the V-cut 3554 is bent and cut. As a result, the four waste boards 3555 are connected to the outside of the effect board 3520 by the connecting parts 3552 . Then, the waste board 3555 and the effect board 3520 are separated by cutting at the connecting portion 3552 (see FIGS. 162(b) and 163(a)). In addition, since the hole 3556 is provided between the two slits 3551 in the connecting portion 3552, the strength and rigidity are lowered, and the connecting portion 3552 can be easily broken and separated by bending.

After the effect board 3520 is separated, the remaining part of the connecting part 3552 protruding from the outer peripheral shape is scraped down to the virtual line of the outer peripheral shape (indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 163(a)) using a file or the like. By finishing, the effect board 3520 is completed (see FIGS. 162(c) and 163(b)). Chips are generated when finishing this connecting portion 3552, but since the amount of finishing (cutting) is extremely short (small) with respect to the entire circumference of the effect board 3520, the amount of generated chips is small, and a dust collector etc. can be sufficiently absorbed, and electronic components such as the LEDs 3530 mounted on the effect board 3520 are not affected. At this time, since the light-colored coating film 3523 is provided at a predetermined distance L2, even if the connecting portion 3552 is cut or finished, powder of the coating film 3523 is not generated.

By the way, the finished state of the outer peripheral side surface of the effect board 3520 is formed using an end mill or the like at the portion of the slit 3551. , and the connection portion 3552 is finished with a file or the like, so that the cutting trace (specific trace portion 3561) is different from the general trace portion 3560. As shown in FIG. That is, the effect board 3520 is provided with a specific trace portion 3561 in which a trace different from other portions (general trace portion 3560) is generated when the outer periphery is formed. Therefore, only by looking at the side surface of the effect board 3520, the specific trace portion 3561 can be recognized, and the portion where the connection portion 3552 was provided can be determined.

It should be noted that the difference in finish (eg, surface roughness) between the general trace portion 3560 and the specific trace portion 3561 is that the specific trace portion 3561 has a finer roughness (eg, smooth, slippery) than the general trace portion 3560. , etc.), or the roughness of the general trace portion 3560 may be finer than that of the specific trace portion 3561 . Further, the specific trace portion 3561 may be mirror-finished.

Although one hole 3556 provided between two slits 3551 is shown as the connecting portion 3552 in the above description, the connecting portion 3552 shown in FIG. 164 may be used without being limited to this. More specifically, FIG. 164(a) provides two or more holes 3556 between two slits 3551. FIG. 164(b1) to (b3) show two slits 3551 as close as the width of the slit 3551, and the thickness of the portion between them is reduced. In this case, as shown in FIG. 164(b3), the specific trace portion 3561 does not cover the entire thickness direction but only a part of it. 164 indicates the area where the coating film 3523 is provided.

Thus, according to the effect board 3520 of the present embodiment, the connection part 3552 (specific trace part 3561) with the fixed-size board 3550 (discard board 3555) is linear or convex in the outer peripheral shape of the effect board 3520. To facilitate the finishing work of the connection part 3552 because it is provided in the part, to suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and to easily finish the specific trace part 3561 neatly. It is possible to provide a presentation board 3520 with a good appearance.

In addition, since the specific trace portion 3561 is provided on the outer periphery of the effect board 3520, the effect board 3520 with a complicated outer peripheral shape, that is, a highly decorative shape can be easily manufactured, and the effect board 3520 with a good appearance. can be obtained. Therefore, even if the effect board 3520 is visible, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the specific trace portion 3561 is provided on the outer periphery of the effect board 3520, the specific trace portion 3561 can be used as a mark for specifying the mounting direction of the effect board 3520, etc., when the worker assembles. .

By the way, the light-colored coating film 3523 (solder resist) is made of a harder material than other solder resists, so it easily turns into powder. Therefore, when cutting is performed to cut out the effect board 3520 from the fixed-size board 3550 with the light-colored coating film 3523 on the surface, in addition to a large amount of chips of the board base material 3521, the light-colored coating film A large amount of 3523 powder is generated. Since the powder of the light-colored coating film 3523 is fine, cleaning (removal) of the coating film 3523 is troublesome, and there is a risk of an increase in cost. There is fear. In addition, even after the effect board 3520 is cut out from the standard board 3550, if the light-colored coating film 3523 is applied up to the cut edge of the effect board 3520, other members may be attached to the cut edge of the effect board 3520. When it comes into contact, the light-colored coating film 3523, which is a hard material, may become powder and scatter, adhering to or depositing on the effect substrate 3520 or other members (decorative body 3500).

Then, when the powder of the bright-colored coating film 3523 adheres and accumulates on the effect substrate 3520, the decorative body 3500, and the like, the following problems may occur. For example, if the powder adheres/accumulates on the LED 3530 as an electronic component mounted on the effect board 3520, the shadow of the LED 3530 is projected when the LED 3530 emits light, and the appearance of the light emission effect may deteriorate. Also, if it adheres or accumulates on a connector as an electronic component mounted on the effect board 3520, there is a risk of poor contact occurring. Furthermore, if the powder adheres or accumulates on the surface of the effect board 3520, the decorative body 3500 (decorative part 3510), etc., the appearance of the effect board 3520, the decorative body 3500, etc. may deteriorate (decrease) due to the powder. Due to such a problem, the player may feel discomfort or distrust, and may lose interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the coating film 3523 made of a bright solder resist applied to the surface of the effect board 3520 is applied to the cut edge of the effect board 3520 and the edge of the copper foil 3522. In between, from the cut edge of the production board 3520 including the edge of the specific trace portion 3561 (here, a predetermined distance L2) is provided inside, so the production board 3520 is cut from the standard board 3550 Even if it is cut out, the light-colored coating film 3523 is not cut, and powder of the coating film 3523 is not generated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost for cleaning after cutting, and powder of the bright-colored coating film 3523 does not remain on the effect substrate 3520 . In addition, since the light-colored coating film 3523 is provided so as to avoid the cut edge of the production substrate 3520, other members (such as the decorative portion 3510 of the decoration body 3500) hit the cut edge of the production substrate 3520. Even if it comes into contact, it does not contact the coating film 3523, so the powder of the coating film 3523 is not generated, and the powder of the coating film 3523 scatters and adheres to the production substrate 3520, the decorative body 3500, and the like. No sedimentation. For this reason, since the powder of the bright-colored coating film 3523 is not generated, the powder casts a shadow during the light emission performance by the light emission of the LED 3530, resulting in poor appearance or poor contact in the connector or the like. The pachinko machine is capable of preventing the appearance of the surface of the performance board 3520, the decorative body 3500, etc. from becoming bad, and entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest. 1 can be provided.

In addition, since the light-colored coating film 3523 is also provided away from the specific trace portion 3561 (predetermined distance L2), even if the specific trace portion 3561 is finished with a file or the like, the powder of the bright-colored coating film 3523 is removed. does not occur, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

In the above, as a method of cutting out the irregular-shaped effect board 3520 from the fixed-length board 3550 and handling it integrally in the insert machine, the effect board 3520 and the fixed-length board 3550 are separated by using a processing machine such as an NC machine. Although the method of handling integrally by cutting the substrates so that they are connected by the connecting portion 3552 has been shown, as another method, after punching out the effect substrate from the standard size substrate using a stamping die, There is a method (push-back method) in which the performance board is re-inserted into the punched hole of the scale board and handled integrally.

To explain this push-back method in detail, when a performance board is punched out from a standard-sized board using a stamping die, the gap between the performance board punched out and the hole punched out of the standard-sized board is small. When the performance board is fitted into the punched hole of the standard size board, the performance board is positioned on the standard size board, and the performance board can be handled integrally with the standard size board. Therefore, in the push-back method, unlike the above-described cutting method, there is no need to provide the connection portion 3552, so that the production board does not have a specific trace portion. Since the push-back method uses a punching die, it is possible to punch out a large number of effect boards in a short period of time. Even with this push-back method, there is a risk that powder will be generated if the light-colored coating film (solder resist) is punched out. is desirable. In the push-back method, the punching die is relatively expensive, so the method of cutting using processing machines such as NC machines is better in terms of variety, small lot, cost, delivery time, etc. is advantageous.

[8-2. Effect board of the second embodiment]
Next, an effect board 3520A of an embodiment different from the effect board 3520 described above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. FIG. FIG. 165(a1) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of the connecting portion with the waste board in the effect board of the second embodiment, and (a2) separates the waste board and the effect board from the state of (a1). (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the connecting portion is finished from the state of (a2), and (c) is a coating film having a different form from (a2) and the like. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the production|presentation board|substrate provided. FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing a decorative effect board of the second embodiment in which the configuration of FIG. 165 is applied to the decorative body effect board of the first embodiment such as FIG. 163 . A shaded portion in FIG. 165 indicates a region where the coating film 3523 is provided.

In the effect board 3520A of the second embodiment, the parts having the same configuration as the effect board 3520 provided in the decoration 3500 (the decoration 3501 of the first embodiment) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be given. omitted. As shown in FIG. 165, the effect board 3520A is provided with a recess 3557 recessed in a trapezoidal shape from the outer periphery, and a connecting portion 3552 is provided at the bottom 3557a of the recess 3557. As shown in FIG. In other words, the effect board 3520A is provided with a specific trace portion 3561 in which a trace different from other portions (general trace portion 3560) is generated when the outer periphery is formed on the bottom portion 3557a of the recess 3557. For example, as shown in FIG. 166, the concave portion 3557 in the effect board 3520A is provided at a linear or convex portion on the outer periphery. Therefore, the bottom portion 3557a of the recessed portion 3557 has a linear shape or a convex shape following the outer peripheral shape of the effect board 3520A.

As shown in FIG. 165, this effect board 3520A is provided so that the outer periphery of the light-colored coating film 3523 is located at a predetermined distance L2 from the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A in the general portion (the portion excluding the concave portion 3557). At the site of the recess 3557, it is provided at a predetermined distance L2 from the periphery of the recess 3557. As shown in FIG. Therefore, even if the slit 3551 and the hole 3556 are cut, the light-colored coating film 3523 is not cut, and the coating film 3523 does not generate fine chips.

By the way, in the effect board 3520 of the first embodiment, since the connecting part 3552 is provided at the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520, after separating from the waste board 3555, the part of the connecting part 3552 protruding from the outer periphery is When finishing by shaving, if the finishing of the connecting portion 3552 (specific trace portion 3561) is insufficient, the specific trace portion 3561 protrudes outward from the design outline of the effect board 3520, and the decoration The protruding specific trace portion 3561 may hit the peripheral wall portion 3542 of the decoration base 3540 surrounding the outer periphery of the effect board 3520 in the body 3500, and the effect board 3520 may not be attached to the decoration base 3540. be.

On the other hand, since the effect board 3520A of the present embodiment is provided with the connection part 3552 at the bottom part 3557a of the recess 3557, when the effect board 3520A is separated from the waste board 3555 by cutting the connection part 3552, the connection part The portion (specific trace portion 3561) remaining on the effect board 3520A in 3552 projects outward from the design outline of the effect board 3520A (the line indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIGS. 165(a2) and 166) never. Therefore, even if the portion of the connecting portion 3552 (specific trace portion 3561) protruding from the bottom portion 3557a is not scraped off (even if the specific trace portion 3561 protrudes from the bottom portion 3557a), the effect board 3520A can be placed in the cylinder of the decoration base 3540. It is possible to insert and attach the decorative body 3500 (the decorative body 3502 of the second embodiment) to the inner side of the peripheral wall portion 3542 of the shape.

Further, according to the effect board 3520A, the finishing of the specific trace portion 3561 protruding from the bottom portion 3557a can be omitted, so the cost of the effect board 3520A and the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the specific trace portion 3561 (part of the connecting portion 3552) protruding from the bottom portion 3557a of the concave portion 3557 is not finished. ), the specific trace portion 3561 may be finished. In this case, since the recess 3557 is provided in a linear or convex portion of the outer peripheral shape of the effect board 3520A, the bottom 3557a of the recess 3557 is also linear or convex following the outer peripheral shape. A part of the connecting part 3552 (specific trace part 3561) protruding from the bottom part 3557a can be easily finished using a tool such as a file, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. At the same time, the specific trace portion 3561 can be finely finished, and the effect board 3520A with a good appearance can be provided.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the part of the recess 3557 on the outer peripheral edge of the coating film 3523 is shown to be away from the peripheral edge of the recess 3557, but the present invention is not limited to this, as shown in FIG. 165(c). You can do it. In the example of FIG. 165(c), when the effect board 3520A is separated from the waste board 3555 by cutting the connecting part 3552 provided at the bottom 3557a of the recess 3557, the effect board It is arranged to keep a predetermined distance L2 from the peripheral edge of the portion (specific trace portion 3561) remaining on the 3520A side. In this case, the portion protruding from the bottom portion 3557a (specific trace portion 3561) is not finished. This embodiment can also provide the same effects as those described above.

[8-3. Decorative body of another embodiment having a production board]
Next, a decorative body of another embodiment having a rendering board will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168. FIG. FIG. 167(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the main part of the decoration of the third embodiment, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the main part of the decoration of the fourth embodiment in cross section, and (c ) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a main part of the decoration of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 168(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the main part of the decoration of the sixth embodiment, (b) is an explanatory view showing the main part of the decoration of the seventh embodiment in cross section, and (c ) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a main part of the decoration of the eighth embodiment. In the following description, the vertical direction of the paper surface of FIGS. 167 and 168 is described as the front-back direction. Also, hereinafter, portions having the same configurations as those of the decoration 3500 (decoration 3501 and decoration 3502) will be described with the same reference numerals.

[8-3a. Decorative body of the third embodiment]
The decorative body 3503 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 167(a), is formed in a predetermined shape and has a transparent decorative portion 3510 and an effect board 3520A on which a plurality of LEDs 3530 are mounted on the surface. and have The decorative portion 3510 includes a front wall portion 3513 facing forward, a peripheral wall portion 3514 projecting rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the front wall portion 3513, and a part of the front wall portion 3513 and the peripheral wall portion 3514. and a plated portion 3515 having metallic luster provided. The decorative portion 3510 is formed in a container shape (box shape) opened rearward by a front wall portion 3513 and a peripheral wall portion 3514 .

In this decorative portion 3510 , a portion of the front wall portion 3513 inside the plated portion 3515 has a higher light transmittance than the portion of the plated portion 3515 . That is, the plated portion 3515 provides an opening 3516 with high light transmittance. 167( a ) is the plated portion 3515 .

The effect board 3520A is provided behind the front wall portion 3513 in the decorative portion 3510 and is provided forward of the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 3514 . That is, the effect board 3520A is provided inside the decorative portion 3510 having a container shape. The effect board 3520A has an outer peripheral shape that follows (follows) the outer peripheral shape of the decoration portion 3510 and is smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the peripheral wall portion 3514 . The effect board 3520A has a recessed portion 3557 formed on the outer periphery, and a part (remainder) of the connecting portion 3552 protrudes from the bottom portion 3557a of the recessed portion 3557. As shown in FIG. That is, the bottom portion 3557a is provided with a specific trace portion 3561 in which a trace different from other portions (general trace portion 3560) is generated when the outer circumference is formed.

Although not shown, the surface of the effect board 3520A is also coated with a light-colored coating film 3523, and the outer peripheral edge of the coating film 3523 is a predetermined distance from the outer peripheral edge of the effect substrate 3520A. It is provided ahead of L2.

In this decorative body 3503, in the assembled state, the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A overlaps with the plated part 3515 of the decorative part 3510 in a front view. and the specific trace portion 3561 are difficult to see from the front. In addition, since the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 3542 of the decorative portion 3510, and the peripheral wall portion 3514 is also provided with the plating portion 3515, the recessed portion 3557 and the specific trace portion 3561 are visible from the side. it's getting harder.

Thus, according to the decorative body 3503 of the present embodiment, the effect board 3520A has a specific trace portion 3561 in which a part of the connection part 3552 remains, and the appearance of the effect board 3520A is degraded. However, since the bad-looking portion can be hidden by the plating portion 3515, deterioration of the appearance can be avoided, and the appearance of the decorative body 3503 can be improved.

In addition, since the specific trace portion 3561 can be hidden by the plating portion 3515, there is no need to finish the specific trace portion 3561 (connection portion 3552), so the cost of the effect board 3520A can be reduced, and the pachinko machine can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of gaming machines such as 1.

Further, since the specific trace portion 3561 is provided in the bottom portion 3557a of the concave portion 3557 recessed in a trapezoidal shape from the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A, even if the specific trace portion 3561 protrudes outward from the bottom portion 3557a, the effect board 3520A , the effect board 3520A can be reliably attached to the interior of the decorative portion 3510 without protruding beyond the designed outline.

Furthermore, since the effect board 3520A is provided inside the container-like decoration part 3510, and the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A is surrounded by the peripheral wall part 3514, a part of the connecting part 3552 remains on the outer peripheral side surface of the effect board 3520A. Even if there is a jagged specific trace portion 3561 like a broken surface, the peripheral wall portion 3514 can make it difficult to touch the specific trace portion 3561, thereby avoiding injury to the operator. In addition, it is possible to prevent the worker's lipid from adhering to the outer peripheral side surface and the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to the lipid.

In addition, the specific trace portion 3561 provided on the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A can be hidden by the plating portion 3515, and the light color (white) of the surface can make the effect board 3520A inconspicuous. Even if the distance between the front wall portion 3513 and the effect board 3520A is shortened (narrowed), the appearance of the decorative part 3510 does not deteriorate, and the thickness of the decorative body 3503 having the decorative part 3510 and the effect board 3520A thickness can be reduced. Therefore, since the degree of freedom in arranging the decoration 3503 can be increased, the decoration 3503 can be provided at a more effective position, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the decorative body 3503 becomes thin, it is possible to relatively easily secure a space for installing other decorative bodies, etc., so that the pachinko machine 1 having more decorative bodies and the like can be provided. It is possible to provide the highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

In addition, since the light-colored coating film 3523 is provided on the surface of the effect board 3520A, the light from the LED 3530 or the like can be reflected, and the decorative body 3503 (inside the opening 3516 in the decorative portion 3510) is brightly luminous decoration. can be made

In the above embodiment, the decorative portion 3510 is provided with the plated portion 3515. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to provide a lens portion that diffusely reflects the light, or to provide a grained portion in the form of a ground glass.

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect board 3520A provided with the specific trace portion 3561 on the bottom 3557a of the recess 3557 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the outer peripheral edge does not have the recess 3557. It is good also as a production|presentation board|substrate with which 3561 is provided. In this case, the specific trace portion 3561 (part of the connecting portion 3552) may or may not be finished.

[8-3b. Decorative body of the fourth embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 167(b), the decoration body 3504 of the fourth embodiment is provided so as to surround a decoration portion 3510 which is formed in a predetermined shape and has translucency and the outer periphery of the decoration portion 3510. It has a frame-shaped frame portion 3570 and an effect board 3520A provided inside the frame of the frame portion 3570 after the decorative portion 3510 and having a plurality of LEDs 3530 mounted on the surface thereof. The decorative portion 3510 includes a front wall portion 3513 facing forward, a side wall portion 3511 protruding rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the front wall portion 3513, and extending outward from the rear end of the side wall portion 3511. and a flange portion 3517 that

The frame portion 3570 includes a flat plate portion 3571 having an outer circumference larger than that of the decorative portion 3510, an opening 3572 penetrating through the flat plate portion 3571 and through which the front wall portion 3513 of the decorative portion 3510 can pass, and an opening 3572 extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the flat plate portion 3571. and a peripheral wall portion 3573 extending like a wall. The frame portion 3570 has an outer peripheral shape that follows (along) the outer peripheral shape of the decorative portion 3510 . The frame portion 3570 is formed such that the inner peripheral shape of the peripheral wall portion 3573 is slightly larger than the outer peripheral shape of the decorative portion 3510 . The frame portion 3570 has a lower light transmittance than the decoration portion 3510 and is formed to be opaque.

The effect board 3520A has an outer peripheral shape that follows (follows) the outer peripheral shape of the frame portion 3570 and is formed smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the peripheral wall portion 3573 . The effect board 3520A has a recessed portion 3557 formed on the outer periphery, and a part (remainder) of the connecting portion 3552 protrudes from the bottom portion 3557a of the recessed portion 3557. As shown in FIG. That is, the bottom portion 3557a is provided with a specific trace portion 3561 in which a trace different from other portions (general trace portion 3560) is generated when the outer periphery is formed.

Although not shown, the surface of the effect board 3520A is also coated with a light-colored coating film 3523, and the outer peripheral edge of the coating film 3523 is a predetermined distance from the outer peripheral edge of the effect substrate 3520A. It is provided ahead of L2.

In the assembled decorative body 3504, the decorative portion 3510 is inserted into the frame portion 3570 from the rear. The flange portion 3517 is in contact with the flat plate portion 3571 of the portion 3570 . In addition, in the decoration body 3504, the effect board 3520A is positioned within the frame of the frame part 3570, that is, in front of the rear end of the peripheral wall part 3573 of the frame part 3570, and the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A is surrounded by the peripheral wall part 3573. is

In addition, as shown in the drawing, the decorative body 3504 overlaps the flat plate portion 3571 of the opaque frame portion 3570 in front view, so that the outer peripheral edge of the production substrate 3520A is overlapped with the flat plate portion 3571, that is, the outer peripheral edge of the production substrate 3520A , the concave portion 3557 and the specific trace portion 3561 are difficult to see from the front. In addition, since the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 3573 of the opaque frame portion 3570, it is difficult to visually recognize the recessed portion 3557 and the specific trace portion 3561 from the side.

Thus, according to the decorative body 3504 of the present embodiment, the effect board 3520A has a specific trace portion 3561 in which a part of the connection part 3552 remains, and the appearance of the effect board 3520A is degraded. However, since the poor-looking portion can be hidden by the opaque frame portion 3570, deterioration of the appearance can be avoided, and the appearance of the decorative body 3504 can be improved.

In addition, since the specific trace portion 3561 can be hidden by the opaque frame portion 3570, there is no need to finish the specific trace portion 3561 (connection portion 3552), so the cost of the effect board 3520A can be reduced, and in turn, An increase in the cost of a game machine such as the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the specific trace portion 3561 is provided in the bottom portion 3557a of the concave portion 3557 recessed in a trapezoidal shape from the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A, even if the specific trace portion 3561 protrudes outward from the bottom portion 3557a, the effect board 3520A The effect board 3520A can be securely attached to the inside of the frame portion 3570 without protruding beyond the designed outline in .

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 3573 of the frame portion 3570, the outer peripheral side surface of the effect board 3520A has a jagged specific trace portion 3561 like a broken surface where a part of the connecting portion 3552 remains. However, the peripheral wall portion 3573 can make it difficult to touch the specific trace portion 3561, and the worker can be prevented from being injured. In addition, it is possible to prevent the worker's lipid from adhering to the outer peripheral side surface and the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to the lipid.

In addition, the specific trace portion 3561 provided on the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A can be hidden by the frame portion 3570, and the light color (white) of the surface can make the effect board 3520A inconspicuous. Even if the distance between the front wall part 3513 and the effect board 3520A is shortened (narrowed), the appearance of the decorative part 3510 does not deteriorate, and the decoration having the decorative part 3510, the effect board 3520A and the frame part 3570 The thickness of body 3504 can be reduced. Therefore, since the degree of freedom in arranging the decorations 3504 can be increased, the decorations 3504 can be provided at more effective positions, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, by making the decorative body 3504 thin, it is possible to relatively easily secure a space for installing other decorative bodies, etc., so that the pachinko machine 1 having more decorative bodies and the like can be provided. It is possible to provide the highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

In addition, since the light-colored coating film 3523 is provided on the surface of the effect board 3520A, the light from the LED 3530 or the like can be reflected, and the decorative body 3504 (inside the opening 3572 in the frame portion 3570, that is, the decorative portion The front wall portion 3513) of 3510 can be decorated with bright light.

In the above embodiment, the opaque frame portion 3570 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The member may be provided with a colored portion of a predetermined color, the surface of the transparent member may be provided with a lens portion for diffusely reflecting light, or the surface of the transparent member may be embossed in the form of rubbed glass. A part may be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect board 3520A provided with the specific trace portion 3561 on the bottom 3557a of the recess 3557 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the outer peripheral edge does not have the recess 3557. It is good also as a production|presentation board|substrate with which 3561 is provided. In this case, the specific trace portion 3561 (part of the connecting portion 3552) may or may not be finished.

[8-3c. Decoration body of the fifth embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 167(c), the decorative body 3505 of the fifth embodiment includes a decorative portion 3510 formed in a predetermined shape and having translucency, and a plurality of LEDs 3530 provided behind the decorative portion 3510. It is provided with a mounted effect board 3520A and a transparent decoration base 3540 provided after the effect board 3520A. This ornamental body 3505 uses an effect board 3520A in which a specific trace part 3561 is provided in the bottom part 3557a of the concave part 3557 in contrast to the structure of the ornamental body 3501 of the first embodiment. The configuration is the same except for

The decoration part 3510 is three-dimensionally formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. The decorative portion 3510 includes a side wall portion 3511 extending in the front-rear direction (a direction intersecting the front wall portion 3513 of the central portion) near the outer peripheral edge, and an end surface of the plate thickness of the side wall portion 3511 extending rearward. and a facing rear end surface 3512 . In the decorative portion 3510 of the present embodiment, the central portion (front wall portion 3513) and the side wall portion 3511 are continuous with a smooth curved surface, and there is no clear boundary with the central portion (front wall portion 3513). not

The effect board 3520A is provided behind the decorative portion 3510 (rear end surface 3512). The effect board 3520A has a shape that follows (along) the outer peripheral shape of the decorative portion 3510 and is formed smaller than the outer periphery of the decorative portion 3510 . Approximately the entire outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A is formed behind the rear end surface 3512 of the decorative portion 3510 . In other words, the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A is positioned between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the rear end surface 3512 (in the enlarged view of FIG. 167(c) It is formed so as to be positioned at the shaded portion).

The effect board 3520A has a recessed portion 3557 formed on the outer periphery, and a part (remainder) of the connection portion 3552 protrudes from the bottom portion 3557a of the recessed portion 3557 . That is, the bottom portion 3557a is provided with a specific trace portion 3561 in which a trace different from other portions (general trace portion 3560) is generated when the outer periphery is formed.

The plurality of LEDs 3530 mounted on the effect board 3520 is composed of a plurality of top-view type first LEDs 3531 mounted on the front surface and a plurality of side-view type second LEDs 3532 mounted on the rear surface. ing.

Although not shown, the surface of the effect board 3520A is also coated with a light-colored coating film 3523, and the outer peripheral edge of the coating film 3523 is a predetermined distance from the outer peripheral edge of the effect substrate 3520A. It is provided ahead of L2.

The decoration base 3540 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 3541 located behind the effect board 3520A, a peripheral wall portion 3542 extending forward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3541 in a wall shape, and a main body portion 3541 extending through the main body portion 3541. An opening 3543 into which the second LED 3532 mounted on the rear surface of the effect board 3520A is inserted inside the cage, and an opening 3543 provided at the periphery of the main body 3541 and formed diagonally so as to be positioned forward as it goes outward from the periphery. and a lens portion 3545 formed of a plurality of unevenness provided on the front end face of the peripheral wall portion 3542 .

A peripheral wall portion 3542 of the decoration base 3540 is provided over the entire circumference of the main body portion 3541 and is formed in a cylindrical shape that is short in the front-rear direction. The size of the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 3542 is slightly larger than the size of the outer periphery of the decorative portion 3510 . As a result, the decorative portion 3510 can be inserted from the front inside the cylindrical peripheral wall portion 3542 . Moreover, the peripheral wall portion 3542 is formed so that the lens portion 3545 at the front end protrudes forward from the rear end surface 3512 of the decoration portion 3510 when the decoration body 3500 is assembled.

The outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A is located behind the rear end surface 3512 of the decoration part 3510 in the assembled state. As a result, in a front view, the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A overlaps the rear end face 3512 of the decorative portion 3510 (shaded portion in the enlarged view of FIG. 167(c)). In addition, the decoration body 3505 is surrounded by the rear end surface 3512 of the decoration part 3510 and the main body part 3541 of the decoration base 3540 at the front and back near the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A, and the outside of the outer peripheral side of the effect board 3520A It is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 3542 of the decorative base 3540 .

Thus, according to the decorative body 3505 of the present embodiment, the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A is provided behind the rear end surface 3512 of the side wall portion 3511 in the decorative portion 3510 formed in a curved surface shape. Due to the lens effect of the shaped side wall 3511, the rear can be distorted, and the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520 (the concave portion 3557 and the specific trace portion 3561) can be made difficult to see clearly from the front. In addition, since the outer peripheral side surface of the effect board 3520 is surrounded by the peripheral wall part 3542 of the decoration base 3540, and the lens part 3545 consisting of a plurality of irregularities is provided at the front end of the peripheral wall part 3542, the effect board 3520A can also be viewed from the side. It is possible to make the outer peripheral edge (the concave portion 3557 and the specific trace portion 3561) difficult to visually recognize.

Therefore, even if the effect board 3520A has a specific trace part 3561 in which a part of the connecting part 3552 remains, even if the effect board 3520A looks bad, the bad-looking part can be replaced by the opaque frame part 3570. Therefore, deterioration in appearance can be avoided, and the appearance of the decorative body 3505 can be improved.

In addition, since the specific trace portion 3561 can be hidden by the side wall portion 3511 of the decoration portion 3510 and the peripheral wall portion 3542 of the decoration base 3540, there is no need to finish the specific trace portion 3561 (connecting portion 3552), so the effect substrate 3520A is applied. Cost can be reduced, and in turn, an increase in cost for a game machine such as the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A is surrounded by the peripheral wall part 3542 of the decoration base 3540, the outer peripheral side surface of the effect board 3520A has a jagged specific trace part 3561 like a broken surface where a part of the connection part 3552 remains. However, the peripheral wall portion 3542 can make it difficult to touch the specific trace portion 3561, and the operator can be prevented from being injured. In addition, it is possible to prevent the worker's lipid from adhering to the outer peripheral side surface and the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to the lipid.

In addition, since the light-colored coating film 3523 is provided on the surface of the effect board 3520A, the light from the LED 3530 or the like can be reflected, and the decoration body 3505 (the decoration part 3510 and the lens part 3545 of the decoration base 3540) The bright and luminous decoration can be made.

In the above-described embodiment, a portion of the connecting portion 3552 protruding from the bottom portion 3557a of the recess 3557 is shown as the unfinished specific trace portion 3561, but the specific trace portion is not limited to this. 3561 (part of connecting portion 3552) may be finished.

[8-3d. Decoration body of the sixth embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 168(a), the decoration body 3506 of the sixth embodiment has a transparent decoration part 3510 formed in a predetermined shape, and a plurality of light-transmitting decoration parts 3510 provided behind the decoration part 3510 on the front surface. It has an effect board 3520A on which the LED 3530 is mounted. It has a decorative portion 3510, a front wall portion 3513 formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape, and a peripheral wall portion 3514 protruding rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the front wall portion 3513 in a wall shape. A peripheral wall portion 3514 of the decorative portion 3510 has a rear end surface 3512 facing rearward.

The effect board 3520A is provided so as to come into contact with the rear end surface 3512 of the decorative portion 3510. As shown in FIG. The effect board 3520A has an outer peripheral shape following (along) the outer peripheral shape of the decoration part 3510, and the outer peripheral edge is formed so as to overlap the rear end surface 3512 of the decoration part 3510. More specifically, the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A is a virtual viewpoint modeled on a player (a general player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1) in contact with the outer peripheral edge of the rear end surface 3512 of the decorative portion 3510. ) (indicated by a dashed line in the figure) from the center side of the decorative portion 3510 (inner peripheral edge side of the rear end face 3512).

In addition, the effect board 3520A has a recess 3557 formed on the outer periphery, and a part (remainder) of the linking part 3552 protrudes from the bottom 3557a of the recess 3557. As shown in FIG. That is, the bottom portion 3557a is provided with a specific trace portion 3561 in which a trace different from other portions (general trace portion 3560) is generated when the outer periphery is formed.

Although not shown, the surface of the effect board 3520A is also coated with a light-colored coating film 3523, and the outer peripheral edge of the coating film 3523 is a predetermined distance from the outer peripheral edge of the effect substrate 3520A. It is provided ahead of L2.

This decorative body 3506, in the assembled state, the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A is in contact with the rear end surface 3512 of the decorative portion 3510, and the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A is in contact with the outer peripheral edge of the rear end surface 3512. Since it is located on the inner peripheral side of the rear end surface 3512 from the line of sight, the player cannot directly see the outer peripheral side surface of the effect board 3520A, and the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A (recess 3557 and specific trace part 3561 ) is hard to see.

Thus, according to the decorative body 3506 of the present embodiment, the effect board 3520A has a specific trace portion 3561 in which a part of the connection part 3552 remains, and the appearance of the effect board 3520A is degraded. However, since the poor-looking portion can be hidden by the peripheral wall portion 3514 of the decorative portion 3510, deterioration of the appearance can be avoided, and the appearance of the decorative body 3506 can be improved.

In addition, since the specific trace portion 3561 can be hidden by the peripheral wall portion 3514, it is not necessary to finish the specific trace portion 3561 (connection portion 3552), so the cost of the effect board 3520A can be reduced, and the pachinko machine can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of gaming machines such as 1.

In addition, since the bright-colored coating film 3523 is provided on the surface of the effect board 3520A, the light from the LED 3530 or the like can be reflected, and the decorative body 3506 (decorating portion 3510) can be decorated with bright light. .

In the above embodiment, the peripheral wall portion 3514 of the decorative portion 3510 may be provided with a lens portion that disturbs (diffuses) light, making it more difficult to see the effect board 3520A through the peripheral wall portion 3514.

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect board 3520A provided with the specific trace portion 3561 on the bottom 3557a of the recess 3557 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the outer peripheral edge does not have the recess 3557. It is good also as a production|presentation board|substrate with which 3561 is provided. In this case, the specific trace portion 3561 (part of the connecting portion 3552) may or may not be finished.

[8-3e. Decoration body of the seventh embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 168(b), the decoration body 3507 of the seventh embodiment has a light-transmitting decoration part 3510 formed in a predetermined shape, and a plurality of light-transmitting decoration parts 3510 provided behind the decoration part 3510 on the front surface. It has an effect board 3520A on which the LED 3530 is mounted. Also, although illustration is omitted, the decorative body 3507 has a rear member (for example, a decorative base, a reflector, etc.) that is provided behind the decorative portion 3510 and supports the effect board 3520A. With this rear member, the effect board 3520A is provided at a portion behind the decorative portion 3510. - 特許庁

The decorative portion 3510 has a front wall portion 3513 formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape, and a peripheral wall portion 3514 protruding rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the front wall portion 3513 in a wall shape. A peripheral wall portion 3514 of the decorative portion 3510 has a rear end surface 3512 facing rearward.

The effect board 3520A is provided behind the rear end of the decoration part 3510. - 特許庁The effect board 3520A is formed so that the outer peripheral shape follows (along) the outer peripheral shape of the decorative portion 3510 . More specifically, the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A is a virtual viewpoint modeled on a player (a general player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1) in contact with the outer peripheral edge of the rear end surface 3512 of the decorative portion 3510. ) (indicated by a dashed line in the drawing), the decorative portion 3510 (front wall portion 3513) is located closer to the center.

In addition, the effect board 3520A has a recess 3557 formed on the outer periphery, and a part (remainder) of the linking part 3552 protrudes from the bottom 3557a of the recess 3557. As shown in FIG. That is, the bottom portion 3557a is provided with a specific trace portion 3561 in which a trace different from other portions (general trace portion 3560) is generated when the outer circumference is formed.

Although not shown, the surface of the effect board 3520A is also coated with a light-colored coating film 3523, and the outer peripheral edge of the coating film 3523 is a predetermined distance from the outer peripheral edge of the effect substrate 3520A. It is provided ahead of L2.

In the assembled state of the decorative body 3507, the effect board 3520A is located behind the decorative part 3510, and the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A is behind the player's line of sight in contact with the outer peripheral edge of the rear end surface 3512. Since it is located on the inner peripheral edge side of the end surface 3512, the player cannot directly see the outer peripheral side surface of the effect board 3520A, and it is difficult to visually recognize the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A (recess 3557 and specific trace part 3561). .

Thus, according to the decorative body 3507 of the present embodiment, the effect board 3520A has a specific trace portion 3561 in which a part of the connecting part 3552 remains, and the appearance of the effect board 3520A is degraded. However, since the poor-looking portion can be hidden by the peripheral wall portion 3514 of the decoration portion 3510, deterioration of the appearance can be avoided, and the appearance of the decoration body 3507 can be improved.

In addition, since the specific trace portion 3561 can be hidden by the peripheral wall portion 3514, it is not necessary to finish the specific trace portion 3561 (connection portion 3552), so the cost of the effect board 3520A can be reduced, and the pachinko machine can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of gaming machines such as 1.

In addition, since the bright-colored coating film 3523 is provided on the surface of the effect board 3520A, the light from the LED 3530 or the like can be reflected, and the decorative body 3506 (decorating portion 3510) can be decorated with bright light. .

In the above embodiment, the peripheral wall portion 3514 of the decorative portion 3510 may be provided with a lens portion that disturbs (diffuses) light, making it more difficult to see the effect board 3520A through the peripheral wall portion 3514.

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect board 3520A provided with the specific trace portion 3561 on the bottom 3557a of the recess 3557 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the outer peripheral edge does not have the recess 3557. It is good also as a production|presentation board|substrate with which 3561 is provided. In this case, the specific trace portion 3561 (part of the connecting portion 3552) may or may not be finished.

[8-3f. Decoration body of the eighth embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 168(c), the decorative body 3508 of the eighth embodiment is formed in a predetermined shape and has a transparent decorative portion 3510 and a plurality of LEDs 3530 mounted on the front surface of the effect board 3520A. and have The decorative portion 3510 includes a front wall portion 3513 formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape, a peripheral wall portion 3514 protruding rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the front wall portion 3513 in a wall shape, and the front wall portion 3513 and the peripheral wall portion 3514. It has a decorative portion 3518 which is provided in a part thereof and has a color. In the decorative portion 3510, a front wall portion 3513 and a peripheral wall portion 3514 are formed to be colorless and transparent, and a decorative portion 3518 is formed to be colored and opaque. The decorative portion 3518 is not provided to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 3514, and has a portion (blank portion) where the decorative portion 3518 is not provided between the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 3514 and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 3514. . The decorative portion 3518 is formed by screen printing, inkjet printing, or the like, and has patterns such as characters and logos.

The effect board 3520A is provided behind the front wall portion 3513 in the decorative portion 3510 and is provided forward of the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 3514 . That is, the effect board 3520A is provided inside the decorative portion 3510 having a container shape. The effect board 3520A has an outer peripheral shape that follows (follows) the outer peripheral shape of the decoration portion 3510 and is smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the peripheral wall portion 3514 . More specifically, the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A is a virtual player modeled on a player (a general player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1) in contact with the outer peripheral edge of the decorative portion 3518 of the decorative portion 3510. It is provided so as to be positioned closer to the center of the decorative portion 3510 (the front wall portion 3513) than the line of sight (indicated by the dashed line in the figure) from the point of view).

In addition, the effect board 3520A has a recess 3557 formed on the outer periphery, and a part (remainder) of the linking part 3552 protrudes from the bottom 3557a of the recess 3557. As shown in FIG. That is, the bottom portion 3557a is provided with a specific trace portion 3561 in which a trace different from other portions (general trace portion 3560) is generated when the outer circumference is formed.

Although not shown, the surface of the effect board 3520A is also coated with a light-colored coating film 3523, and the outer peripheral edge of the coating film 3523 is a predetermined distance from the outer peripheral edge of the effect substrate 3520A. It is provided ahead of L2.

With this decorative body 3508 assembled, the performance board 3520A is positioned inside the container-shaped decoration part 3510, and the outer peripheral edge of the performance board 3520A is in contact with the outer peripheral edge of the decoration part 3518. A line of sight from the player. Since it is located on the central side of the front wall portion 3513, the effect board 3520A overlaps the decoration part 3518 when viewed from the player, and the effect board 3520A is blocked by the decoration part 3518, so that the effect board 3520A can be visually recognized. It is difficult to visually recognize the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A (recessed portion 3557 and specific trace portion 3561). In addition, since the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A is surrounded by the peripheral wall part 3542 of the decorative part 3510, the presence of the peripheral wall part 3514 makes it difficult to visually recognize the recess 3557 and the specific trace part 3561 of the effect board 3520A from the side. .

Thus, according to the decorative body 3508 of the present embodiment, the effect board 3520A has a specific trace portion 3561 in which a part of the connection part 3552 remains, and the appearance of the effect board 3520A is degraded. However, since the unattractive portion can be hidden by the decorative portion 3518 and the peripheral wall portion 3514 of the decorative portion 3510, deterioration in appearance can be avoided, and the appearance of the decorative body 3508 can be improved.

In addition, since the specific trace portion 3561 can be hidden by the decorative portion 3518, it is not necessary to finish the specific trace portion 3561 (connection portion 3552), so the cost of the effect board 3520A can be reduced, and in turn, the pachinko It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of a game machine such as the machine 1.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, since the effect board 3520A is provided inside the container-like decoration part 3510, and the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A is surrounded by the peripheral wall part 3514, a part of the connecting part 3552 remains on the outer peripheral side surface of the effect board 3520A. Even if there is a jagged specific trace portion 3561 like a broken surface, the peripheral wall portion 3514 can make it difficult to touch the specific trace portion 3561, thereby avoiding injury to the operator. In addition, it is possible to prevent the worker's lipid from adhering to the outer peripheral side surface and the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to the lipid.

In addition, since the light-colored coating film 3523 is provided on the surface of the effect board 3520A, the light from the LEDs 3530 and the like can be reflected, and the decorative body 3508 (decorative portion 3510) can be decorated with bright light emission. .

In the above embodiment, the peripheral wall portion 3514 of the decorative portion 3510 may be provided with a lens portion that disturbs (diffuses) light, making it more difficult to see the effect board 3520A through the peripheral wall portion 3514.

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect board 3520A provided with the specific trace portion 3561 on the bottom 3557a of the recess 3557 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the outer peripheral edge does not have the recess 3557. It is good also as a production|presentation board|substrate with which 3561 is provided. In this case, the specific trace portion 3561 (part of the connecting portion 3552) may or may not be finished.

In the above embodiment, the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A provided with the light-colored coating film 3523 are mounted with the LEDs 3530 as electronic components, but are not limited to this. Instead, as electronic parts, an organic EL, LCD, sensor, connector, diode, resistor, IC, etc. may be mounted, or the LED 3530 may not be mounted. In addition, as the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A, those provided in front of the effect display device 1600, those provided in the back box 3010 (back unit 3000), and those provided in front of the game panel 1100 ( Examples include those provided in the front unit 2000), those provided in the front structural member 1000, those provided in the door frame 3, and the like.

In the above embodiment, the coating film 3523 is a solder resist. covered).

Further, in the above embodiment, the coating film 3523 is provided at a predetermined distance L2 from the outer peripheral edge of the effect substrate 3520. However, the coating film 3523 is not limited to this, and the coating film 3523 extends to the waste substrate 3555. It is good even if it is provided. In this case, the coating film 3523 is desirably made of a material that does not easily generate powder when it is cut or when another member comes into contact with the cutting edge.

[8-4. Function and effect of the decorative body having a production substrate]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the outer peripheral shape of the effect board 3520A on which the LED 3530 as an electronic component related to the effect is mounted corresponds to the outer peripheral shape of the decorative portion 3510 provided in front. A specific trace portion 3561 having a different roughness from other portions (general trace portion 3560) is provided on the bottom portion 3557a of the concave portion 3557, which is recessed in a trapezoidal shape at a linear or convex portion on the outer periphery. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the effect board 3520A by the specific trace portion 3561, and it is possible to reduce the unpleasant feeling given to the player by the effect board 3520A. can be suppressed.

More specifically, when manufacturing the effect board 3520A (or the effect board 3520), when cutting out the effect board 3520A from the standard board 3550 using a processing machine such as an NC machine, the effect board 3520A is completely separated. However, if the portion (connecting portion 3552) of the specific trace portion 3561 is connected to the fixed-size substrate 3550 (the waste substrate 3555 or another substrate), the outer peripheral shape of the effect substrate 3520A is a complicated shape. However, since it is connected to the rectangular fixed-size board 3550 at the specific trace portion 3561, the effect board 3520A before separation can be easily set in the insert machine via the fixed-size board 3550. Electronic components (LED 3530, etc.) can be mounted on the effect board 3520A. Then, after the electronic components are mounted on the pre-separation production board 3520A, the connecting part 3552 (the part of the specific trace part 3561) connected to the standard board 3550 is cut, and the production board 3520A is separated from the standard board 3550. , By finishing the connecting portion 3552 connected to the fixed-length board 3550 in the effect board 3520A, a specific trace portion 3561 different from other parts is generated in the connecting portion 3552, and the outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape. 3520A is completed. At this time, the connecting portion 3552 (part of the specific trace portion 3561) connected to the fixed-size board 3550 is short (small) with respect to the entire circumference of the effect board 3520A, so even if the connecting portion 3552 is cut and finished , the amount of generated shavings is small and can be sufficiently sucked up by a dust collector, and does not affect the electronic components mounted on the effect board 3520A.

In addition, the specific trace portion 3561 is provided on the bottom portion 3557a of the recessed portion 3557 recessed in a trapezoidal shape from the outer periphery, but the bottom portion 3557a is trapezoidal at a linear or convex portion on the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A. Since it is the bottom 3557a of the concave portion 3557 that is recessed inward, the shape of the bottom 3557a follows (parallel to) the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A, and has a linear or convex shape. Therefore, when manufacturing the effect board 3520A, when finishing the connection part 3552 connected to the standard board 3550 protruding from the bottom part 3557a, the finishing work can be easily performed using a tool such as a flat file. In addition, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, to finish the specific trace part 3561 neatly, and to provide a good-looking effect board 3520A.

In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the effect board 3520A corresponds to the outer peripheral shape of the decorative portion 3510, the outer peripheral shape of the effect board 3520A can exhibit decorativeness. At this time, as described above, since the specific trace portion 3561 is provided on the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A, even the highly decorative effect board 3520A having a complicated outer peripheral shape can be made to look good. The decorative effect of the board 3520A can be fully exhibited, and the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In this way, since the specific trace portion 3561 is provided on the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A, even the effect board 3520A with a complicated outer peripheral shape, that is, a highly decorative effect board 3520A can be easily manufactured, and the effect board 3520A has a good appearance. can be obtained, and even if the metaphorical effect board 3520A can be seen, the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the specific trace portion 3561 is provided on the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A, the specific trace portion 3561 can be used as a mark for specifying the installation direction of the effect board 3520A, etc., when the worker assembles. .

In addition, since the surface of the effect board 3520A is made bright, the light from the LED 3530 mounted as an electronic component and the light from other LEDs, lighting, etc. can be easily reflected forward. As a result, the decoration part 3510 provided in front of the effect board 3520A can be decorated with brighter light emission, so that the light emission effect of the decoration part 3510 can be made more conspicuous, and a strong impact can be given to the player. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of making a player think that something good will happen to the player, heightening expectations for the game, and suppressing a decline in interest in the game. can.

In addition, since the roughness of the surface of the specific trace portion 3561 is different from that of the other portions (general trace portion 3560), the position of the specific trace portion 3561 can be specified at a glance of the peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A. can be done. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the manufactured production board 3520A, the position of the specific trace portion 3561 can be quickly grasped, and the quality of the product (production board 3520A) can be easily confirmed. It is possible to shorten the time required for the pachinko machine 1 and reduce the cost required for the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, since the roughness of the specific trace portion 3561 is made different, for example, if the roughness is made finer (smaller numerical value) to form a mirror surface, the light can be reflected at the specific trace portion 3561. Therefore, it is possible to present the player with an unprecedented light emitting effect such that a part of the peripheral surface of the effect board 3520A is illuminated, thereby surprising the player and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the specific trace portion 3561 is provided on the bottom 3557a of the recess 3557 recessed in a trapezoidal shape from the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A, even if the specific trace portion 3561 protrudes outward from the bottom 3557a, the effect board 3520A The effect board 3520A can be reliably attached to the object to be attached (decorative portion 3510 and decorative base 3540) without protruding beyond the designed outline.

In addition, since the specific trace portion 3561 is provided in the bottom portion 3557a of the concave portion 3557 recessed in a trapezoidal shape from the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A, even if the specific trace portion 3561 is cut, the specific trace portion 3561 is the effect board. Since it does not protrude from the outline of 3520A, finishing of the specific trace portion 3561 can be omitted, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a by the player, and the game ball to the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004 is satisfied as the predetermined condition. The prize winning port 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern according to the lottery result of the special pattern drawn by the acceptance of B, and the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006 is distributed to the first sorting device 2530 and the second sorting device. The game ball B that has passed through 2540 is supplied to the guide path 2551 of the lottery accessory 2550 in the center accessory 2500, and the game ball B circulates toward the distribution section 2552 downstream. In this distribution section 2552, in a state in which the loss port 2009 opened in the guideway 2551 is closed by the distribution bridge 2557, the game ball B is distributed to the hitting section 2553 as the first side, and the distribution bridge 2557 is rotated by the lottery loop solenoid 2558 to open the loss port 2009, the game ball B is distributed to the loss port 2009 (second side), and the distribution state of the game ball B is the distribution bridge. 2557 is indicated by a distribution display portion 2557a. Then, when the game ball B is distributed to the first side in the distribution section 2552 , it is supplied to the hitting section 2553 . On the other hand, when the game ball B is distributed to the second side (losing port 2009 ) in the distribution section 2552 , it is discharged from the lottery accessory 2550 without being supplied to the hitting section 2553 .

The game ball B supplied from the distribution part 2552 to the hitting part 2553 is hit backward by the rotating hitting piece 2560 of the hitting part 2553, and climbs the climbing part 2559 that rises toward the rear. It will be circulated (rolled) to. Depending on the timing at which the game ball B is supplied and the timing at which the striking piece 2560 hits the game ball B, the hitting portion 2553 hits the game ball B strongly or barely hits it. Since the momentum of the game ball B to be hit varies, if the momentum of the game ball B hit is weak, the game ball B cannot climb the climbing part 2559 and returns to the hitting part 2553. The uphill section 2559 is traversed back and forth. Then, when the game ball B is strongly hit by the hitting part 2553 and climbs over the climbing part 2559, it is supplied to the swing gutter 2554 provided in the center in the left-right direction at the rear end of the table 2555, and from the swing gutter 2554 to the table. Released at 2555. At this time, since the rocking gutter 2554 is reciprocally rotated so as to rock around the axis in the vertical direction, the timing of supplying the game ball B and the timing of the rotation position of the rocking gutter 2554 As a result, the game ball B is released to the table 2555 from the gutter portion 2554a of the swing gutter 2554 in various directions.

The game ball B released from the rocking gutter 2554 to the table 2555 rolls forward according to its inclination and is released from the front end of the table 2555 to the guide path 2551 . At this time, there is a possibility that the game ball B is received in the second V winning port 2008 provided on the central axis in the front-back direction passing through the center of the swing gutter 2554 near the front end of the table 2555, and the swing By contacting the game ball B with the swing piece 2556 provided symmetrically with respect to the central axis between the gutter 2554 and the second V winning port 2008, the distribution direction of the game ball B changes to the second direction. It moves toward the V winning opening 2008 or moves away from the second V winning opening 2008. - 特許庁When the game ball B is received in the second V winning hole 2008 of the table 2555, an advantageous game state (for example, a jackpot game) occurs. On the other hand, after the game ball B is released from the front end of the table 2555 to the guide path 2551 without being accepted by the second V winning port 2008, when the game ball B is distributed to one side by the distribution unit 2552, the game ball B is hit by the hitting unit. 2553 to swing trough 2554 . Therefore, as long as the game ball B is distributed to one side (striking portion 2553) by the distributing portion 2552, the guide path 2551, the distributing portion 2552, the hitting portion 2553, rocking gutter 2554, and table 2555 are looped in this order.

For this reason, when the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern and the game ball B can be supplied to the lottery accessory 2550, by looking at the distribution display section 2557a of the distribution section 2552, The player can confirm whether or not the game ball B is distributed to the first side (striking portion 2553) in the dividing portion 2552.例文帳に追加As a result, when the distribution unit 2552 is in a state of distributing to the first side (hitting unit 2553 and, by extension, the second V winning opening 2008) by looking at the distribution display unit 2557a, it is received in the prize winning opening 2006. (Here, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2533a of the sorting rotating body 2533 in the first sorting device 2530) is supplied to the lottery accessory 2550 (guide path 2551) can excite the player. After that, when the game ball B received in the role winning opening 2006 is supplied to the lottery role 2550 (guideway 2551), whether or not it is distributed to the first side (hitting part 2553 side) in the distribution section 2552 It is possible to make the player nervous and excited. Then, when the game ball B is distributed to the first side and supplied to the hitting portion 2553, the game ball B moves back and forth in the climbing portion 2559 depending on the timing at which the game ball B is hit. The player can be entertained by whether or not B is struck with enough strength to overcome the climbing section 2559 . In addition, since the game ball B that has climbed over the climbing part 2559 is supplied to the swing gutter 2554 that reciprocates, the timing at which the swing gutter 2554 can release the game ball B toward the second V winning opening 2008 As the game ball B is supplied to the rocking gutter 2554, whether the game ball B is hit with enough strength to overcome the climbing section 2559 can also make the player feel nervous and excited. can.

When the game ball B hit by the hitting part 2553 climbs over the climbing part 2559 and is supplied to the swinging gutter 2554, the game ball B moves toward the second V winning opening 2008 from the swinging gutter 2554 which is reciprocally rotating. It is possible to excite and throb the player depending on whether or not they are released. Even if the game ball B is released from this swinging gutter 2554 in a direction away from the central axis (second V winning port 2008), a pair of swinging pieces 2556 provided symmetrically with respect to the central axis is swinging. Depending on the motion situation, there is a possibility that the game ball B in contact with the swinging piece 2556 is drawn toward the central axis side and headed toward the second V winning opening 2008, so that the player will not be disappointed. can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed. Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the second V winning opening 2008 provided near the downstream end of the table 2555, the player can be made nervous and excited, and is accepted in the second V winning opening 2008. Then, an advantageous game state (a big win game in which the big winning port 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern) occurs, so that the player can be greatly entertained.

On the other hand, even if the game ball B is not accepted in the second V winning port 2008, it is released from the downstream end of the table 2555 to the guideway 2551, so Depending on whether or not the game ball B is distributed to the first side (hitting section 2553) again, the player's expectation can be heightened. Since the ball is supplied to the rocking gutter 2554 upstream of the table 2555 via the climbing section 2559, the player will not be disappointed when the chance of being accepted into the second V prize opening 2008 arrives again. At this time, when the distribution display portion 2557a of the distribution bridge 2557 is seen and the distribution portion 2552 is in a state of being distributed to the first side (hitting portion 2553), the game ball B is guided from the front end of the table 2555. It is also possible to excite the player by whether or not they are released onto the path 2551 . Therefore, various scenes of the lottery accessory 2550 can make the player nervous and throbbing, making it difficult for the player to get bored, making the player amused and suppressing a decline in interest. , a pachinko machine equipped with a lottery accessory 2550 that entertains the players can be provided.

In addition, since the lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 has a planar table 2555 that is wide in the front, rear, left, and right directions, and is provided with a guideway 2551 in front of the front end of the table 2555, the lottery Since the accessory 2550 is large, the lottery accessory 2550 can make the pachinko machine 1 stand out and strongly attract the player's interest, and the game using the lottery accessory 2550. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player by making the player more likely to expect the pachinko machine 1 and making it easier for the player to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Furthermore, since the second V winning opening 2008 is provided on the central axis in the left-right direction of the table 2555 which is inclined so that the rear end becomes higher, the second V winning opening 2008 can be conspicuous, and the player can This can make it easier to direct the line of sight of the player to the second V winning hole 2008, and to make it easier to have a sense of expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the second V winning hole 2008. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected.

A rocking gutter 2554 is provided in the vicinity of the rear end on the central axis of the table 2555 whose rear end is raised, and a pair of rocking pieces 2556 are provided symmetrically with respect to the central axis. The swinging piece 2556 does not hinder the visibility of the rear swinging gutter 2554, and the player can see the second V winning port 2008 provided on the table 2555, the pair of swinging pieces 2556, and the swinging gutter. 2554 can be visually recognized well. Therefore, since it becomes easy to recognize the rotation state and the swing state of the pair of swing pieces 2556 and the swing gutter 2554, it becomes easy to predict the rolling path of the game ball B due to those movements, and the game can be played as predicted. The movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed depending on whether the ball B rolls or not.

In addition, in the distribution part 2552, since the guideway 2551 is provided with the loss port 2009 communicating with the second side, the distribution bridge 2557 is rotated by the lottery loop solenoid 2558 from the closed state by the distribution bridge 2557. 2009 is opened, the loss port 2009 is opened upward in the guideway 2551, so that the loss port 2009 can be conspicuous from the player, and the guideway 2551 is circulated. A state in which the playing game ball B is distributed to the second side (losing port 2009), that is, a state in which it is not distributed to the first side (hitting part 2553, and by extension, the second V winning port 2008) is recognized. can be made easier. Therefore, when the conspicuous failure opening 2009 is closed by the distribution bridge 2557, it is possible to easily recognize that it is in a state of being distributed to the first side (striking portion 2553), and just by looking at the guideway 2551, it is possible to recognize Therefore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in a state of being sorted to .

Furthermore, depending on the timing of hitting the game ball B by the hitting part 2553, etc., the game ball B moves up and down the climbing part 2559, so that the staying time of the game ball B in the lottery accessory 2550 can be earned (extended). It is possible to avoid the disappointment of the player due to the completion of the game in the lottery accessory 2550 in a short time, and the time earned by the climbing part 2559 is used to produce an effect image or the like on the effect display device 1600. can be sufficiently shown to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the player more can be provided.

In addition, since the climbing part 2559 is provided between the hitting part 2553 and the swinging gutter 2554 (swinging passage 2562), even if the game ball B is strongly hit in the hitting part 2553, the climbing part 2559 cannot be climbed. In addition, the momentum can be further reduced by swinging in the horizontal direction in the swing passage 2562, so that the game ball B is vigorously supplied to the swing gutter 2554. As a result, although the swing gutter 2554 reciprocates to change the direction of release, the momentum of the game ball B causes the swing gutter 2554 to move in a direction different from the direction in which the swing gutter 2554 is released. If the game ball B is released, the player may feel uncomfortable, or if the game ball B is vigorously released from the swing gutter 2554 to the table 2555, the staying time of the game ball B on the table 2555 (rolling time) can be shortened or avoided. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the release of the game ball B from the rocking gutter 2554 without making the player feel uncomfortable, and to easily enjoy the movement of the game ball B rolling on the table 2555.例文帳に追加be able to.

Further, in the case where the player can select the timing at which the game ball B is supplied to the lottery accessory 2550 by the hitting operation of the game ball B, the game ball B is distributed to the first side in the distribution display section 2557a. At the timing of displaying that the state is displayed, it is possible to perform the driving operation so that the game ball B is supplied. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the player's driving operation and can suppress the decline of the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the loss opening 2009 is opened, the tip of the distribution bridge 2557 is positioned above the base end and becomes a state in which it stands upright from the guideway 2551. Even if the ball circulates and tries to jump over the loss opening 2009, it can be prevented from jumping over and entering the first side (striking part 2553) by the upright distribution bridge 2557, and the game ball B can be reliably thrown. It can be sorted to the loss opening 2009 (second side).

In addition, when the loss port 2009 is opened, the distribution bridge 2557 is placed in a state in which the tip thereof is positioned above the base end and stands upright from the taxiway 2551, so that the distribution bridge 2557 stands out from the player. In addition to being visible, the distribution display portion 2557a provided on the distribution bridge 2557 is visible, so the game ball B is also distributed to the second side by the distribution bridge 2557 (distribution display portion 2557a). state can be determined.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a worker such as a game hall attendant looks at the main control unit 1300 (second specification main control unit 1300B) during maintenance or the like, the transparent main control board box 1320 (second specification main control board box 1320B) board cover 1340 (second specification board cover 1340B) flat surface portion 1344 can be seen unmounted identification section 1345, the line of sight of the operator, unmounted identification section 1345 It can be guided to the unmounted area 1313 of the main control board 1310 (the second specification main control board 1310B) facing the surface portion 1344 via. At this time, since the unmounted identification portion 1345 is provided on the flat surface portion 1344, the unmounted identification portion 1345 can be made easier to see than when the unmounted identification portion 1345 is provided on an uneven portion. , the unmounted identifying portion 1345 can easily guide the operator's line of sight to the unmounted area 1313 of the second specification main control board 1310B, and the unmounted area of the second specification main control board 1310B can be easily guided through the surface portion 1344. The unmounted area 1313 can be visually recognized in good condition without the 1313 appearing distorted. By looking at the non-mounted area 1313 of the second specification main control board 1310B, the operator can recognize that no electronic component such as the setting key switch 1312 is mounted on the non-mounted area 1313. Therefore, the operator can immediately recognize that the second specification main control unit 1300B has a game specification in which the specific part (setting key switch 1312) is not mounted in the unmounted area 1313. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the difference in the game specifications in the second specification main control unit 1300B is easy to understand.

Further, as described above, the operator's line of sight is guided to the unmounted area 1313 of the second specification main control board 1310B by the unmounted identification section 1345 of the second specification board cover 1340B of the second specification main control board box 1320B. Since the second specification main control unit 1300B can immediately recognize that the setting key switch 1312 is not mounted in the non-mounted area 1313, there are new and old pachinko machine models of multiple manufacturers. To perform maintenance on a large number of pachinko machines 1 in a short time by accurately discriminating the difference in game specifications not only from the design on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 but also from the back side when a worker such as a staff member performs maintenance or the like in a game hall.例文帳に追加It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of performing maintenance, smoothly performing maintenance, etc., and reducing the burden on the game hall side.

By the way, when the specific part is the setting key switch 1312 or the connector, the game specification first specification main control unit 1300A in which the specific part is mounted is part of the specific part (setting key switch 1312). A setting key window 1341 is provided in the first specification board cover 1340A so that the is exposed to the outside. On the other hand, in the game specification second specification main control unit 1300B that does not have a specific part (setting key switch 1312), if the second specification board cover 1340B is left with the setting key window 1341, an illegal operation can be performed through the setting key window 1341. Since there is a risk that the action will be performed, the setting key window 1341 is closed. However, in the second specification board cover 1340B, if the setting key window 1341 is left as if it were originally empty, the part of the setting key window 1341, that is, the unmounted area 1313 in the second specification main control unit 1300B However, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to know where the main control unit 1300 is, and it takes time to determine which game specification the main control unit 1300 has. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the flat surface portion 1344 allows the unmounted identification portion 1345 to be provided in the second specification board cover 1340B even if the setting key window 1341 is originally absent. Therefore, the operator's line of sight can be easily guided to the unmounted area 1313 of the second specification main control board 1310B by the unmounted identifying section 1345, and the main control unit 1300 is the second specification main control unit 1300B. can be determined immediately.

Further, the non-mounted identification portion 1345 of the second specification board cover 1340B is mounted from the surface portion 1344 of the second specification board cover 1340B so as to surround the columnar portion 1312d of the setting key switch 1312 as a specific component. Since the second specification board cover 1340B (the second specification main control unit 1300B) is projected toward the second specification main control board 1310B, when the operator looks at the second specification board cover 1340B (the second specification main control unit 1300B) Since the cylindrical part (unmounted identification part 1345) that is mounted can be seen, it is possible to draw attention to the unmounted identification part 1345 (to guide the line of sight), and the unmounted area 1313 facing the part due to its shape can be seen. The main control unit 1300 can recognize that the setting key switch 1312 is mounted, and the cylindrical unmounted identifying portion 1345 is covered with the surface portion 1344, so that the main control unit 1300 can detect the setting key switch 1312 (specific It is possible to immediately recognize that the main control unit 1300B is the second specification main control unit 1300B that does not mount any parts), and it is possible to make it easy to understand the difference in game specifications.

Furthermore, in the case where the setting key switch 1312 (specific component) can be mounted in the non-mounted area 1313 of the second specification main control board 1310B, if a mounting hole or through hole for mounting the setting key switch 1312 is provided in the non-mounted area 1313 Even if a hole, a circuit made of copper foil, or the like is provided, a non-mounted identification portion 1345 is provided on a flat surface portion 1344 facing the non-mounted area 1313 of the second specification board cover 1340B, and a tubular shape is provided. Since the unmounted identifying portion 1345 of the main control unit 1300B is blocked by the surface portion 1344, the operator can immediately recognize that the setting key switch 1312 is not mounted in the unmounted area 1313 of the main control unit 1300B. , the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

In addition, in the non-mounted area 1313 of the second specification main control board 1310B, specific parts (setting key switch 1312) can be attached according to the game specifications, so the main control board 1310 (first specification main control board 1310A and second In the manufacturing process of the two-specification main control board 1310B), even if the game specifications are different, it is possible to manufacture in the same process until the middle, so the cost required for manufacturing can be reduced, and the increase in cost can be prevented. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the bottom 3557a of the recess 3557 recessed in a trapezoidal shape at the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A on which the LED 3530 that emits light according to the progress of the game is mounted is formed with an outline. Even if there is a specific trace portion 3561 in which a trace different from the other portions (general trace portion 3560) is generated when pressed, the peripheral wall portion 3514 and the frame portion 3570 of the decoration portion 3510 in the decoration body 3500 are viewed from the side. The specific trace portion 3561 is located in the area where the line of sight of the player is shadowed by the peripheral wall portion 3573 (area overlapping the peripheral wall portion 3514), and the peripheral wall portion 3514 makes it difficult to see. Even if the peripheral wall portion 3514 is formed of a transparent material, the specific trace portion 3561 can be obscured by the lens effect by providing the lens portion to the peripheral wall portion 3514, making it difficult to see. It is possible to reduce deterioration in appearance of the effect board 3520A due to the recess 3557 being clearly visible. This effect is the same for the effect board 3520 as well. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decoration part 3510 from looking bad due to the effect board 3520A (the effect board 3520), so that the appearance of the decoration part 3510 (decoration body 3500) can be relatively improved. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing the deterioration of the player's interest by surely exhibiting the decoration effect of the decoration part 3510.例文帳に追加

Further, by providing a lens portion on the peripheral wall portion 3514 of the decoration portion 3510 or providing a lens portion 3545 on the peripheral wall portion 3542 of the decoration base 3540, the LED 3530 mounted on the effect board 3520A (the effect board 3520) emits light. When this is done, the lens portion can be illuminated by the light, so it is difficult to visually recognize the specific trace portion 3561 (the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A (the effect board 3520)) through the peripheral wall portion 3514 (peripheral wall portion 3542) by the light of the lens portion. It is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above. In addition, since the peripheral wall portion 3514 (peripheral wall portion 3542) is illuminated by the light emission of the LEDs 3530 of the effect board 3520A (the effect board 3520), the outer periphery of the decorative portion 3510 is decorated with light emission, making the decorative portion 3510 more conspicuous. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player by entertaining the light emitting effect of the decoration part 3510 (decoration body 3500) front body.

In addition, the specific trace portion 3561 is provided in the bottom portion 3557a of the recess 3557, and the appearance of the outer peripheral shape of the effect board 3520A is deteriorated by providing the recess 3557 in the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A. Since it is difficult to be visually recognized by being positioned in a region where the player's line of sight is shadowed by the part 3514 (surrounding wall part 3542, surrounding wall part 3573) and the lens part, the recessed part 3557 is also visually recognized together with the specific trace part 3561 Therefore, it is possible to reduce deterioration in the appearance of the effect board 3520A due to the recessed portion 3557 and the specific trace portion 3561 being clearly visible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decoration part 3510 from looking bad due to the effect board 3520A, so that the appearance of the decoration part 3510 (decoration body 3500) can be relatively improved, and the decoration by the decoration body 3500 can be avoided. It is possible to surely exhibit the effect and suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the coating film 3523 made of a bright solder resist applied to the surfaces of the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A is removed from the cut ends of the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A. Between the edge and the edge of the copper foil 3522, the cut edge of the effect board 3520 including the edge of the specific trace portion 3561 or the cut edge of the effect board 3520A (here, a predetermined distance L2) is provided. Even if the effect board 3520 or the effect board 3520A is cut out from the fixed-size board 3550 by cutting, the light-colored coating film 3523 is not cut, and powder of the coating film 3523 is not generated. do not have. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost required for cleaning after cutting, and powder of the bright coating film 3523 does not remain on the effect board 3520 or the effect board 3520A. In addition, since the light-colored coating film 3523 is provided away from the cut edge of the production board 3520 or the production board 3520A, another member (decoration body) etc. is attached to the cut edge of the production board 3520 or the production board 3520A Even if it abuts, it does not contact the coating film 3523, so the powder of the coating film 3523 is not generated, and the powder of the coating film 3523 scatters and the production board 3520 (production board 3520A) or It does not adhere or accumulate on the decorative body 3500 or the like. For this reason, since the powder of the light-colored coating film 3523 is not generated, the powder casts a shadow during the light emission effect, making the appearance worse, or causing a poor contact in the connector or the like, or causing the effect board. A pachinko machine capable of preventing the appearance of the surface of a 3520 (a performance board 3520A), a decorative body 3500, and the like from becoming poor or causing such a problem, and entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest. Machine 1 can be provided.

More specifically, when manufacturing the effect board 3520 or the effect board 3520A, when cutting the effect board 3520 or the effect board 3520A from the standard board 3550 by cutting using a processing machine such as an NC machine, the effect board 3520 If the production board 3520A is not completely separated and is connected to the fixed-size board 3550 (the waste board 3555 or another board) at the specific trace portion 3561 (connecting portion 3552), the production board 3520 Even if the outer peripheral shape of the effect board 3520A is a complicated shape, since it is connected to the rectangular fixed-size board 3550 at the specific trace portion 3561, the effect board 3520 before separation or The effect board 3520A can be easily set in the insert machine. In other words, before mounting electronic components such as the LEDs 3530 on the effect board 3520 or the effect board 3520A to which the coating film 3523 is applied, the effect board 3520 or the effect board 3520 with the specific trace portion 3561 (connecting portion 3552) left. Most of the periphery of substrate 3520A is formed by cutting. As a result, since electronic components such as the LED 3530 are not mounted, it is possible to easily clean a large amount of chips generated, and the coating film 3523 is the cut edge of the effect board 3520 or the effect board 3520A Since it is located inwardly from the designed outline), powder of the coating film 3523 is not generated. Subsequently, after cleaning the standard board 3550 and the performance board 3520 and the performance board 3520A, electronic components such as LEDs 3530 are mounted on the performance board 3520 and the performance board 3520A. At this time, since the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A are connected to the fixed-size board 3550 by the part of the specific trace portion 3561 (connecting part 3552), the effect board 3520 before separation and the effect The board 3520A can be easily set in the insert machine, and electronic components such as the LEDs 3530 can be mounted on the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A. After mounting the electronic components such as the LEDs 3530 on the performance board 3520 and the performance board 3520A before separation, the connecting part 3552 connected to the fixed-length board 3550 is cut (or broken) so that another A trace (specific trace portion 3561) different from the portion is generated, and the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A having the outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape are completed. At this time, the connecting portion 3552 connected to the fixed-length board 3550 is short (small) with respect to the entire circumference of the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A. The amount of the coating film 3523 is small and can be sufficiently absorbed by the dust collector, and the coating film 3523 is held inward from the edge of the specific trace portion 3561 (the cut edge of the connecting portion 3552). No powder is generated, and electronic components such as the LED 3530 mounted on the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A are not affected. Therefore, as described above, the powder of the bright-colored coating film 3523 casts shadows during the light-emitting performance by the light emission of the LEDs 3530, resulting in poor appearance, poor contact in the connector, etc., and the performance board 3520 ( The Pachinko machine 1 is capable of preventing the appearance of the surfaces of the performance board 3520A) and the decorative bodies 3500 from becoming poor or causing such troubles, and entertaining the players and suppressing the decrease in interest. can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the peripheries of the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A are formed by cutting, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring due to the powder of the light-colored coating film 3523 applied to the surface. Therefore, the outer peripheral shape of the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A can be formed by a processing machine with a high degree of processing freedom such as an NC machine, and the outer shape is complicated, that is, the highly decorative effect board 3520 and effect board 3520A. can be easily manufactured.

In addition, the edge of the coating film 3523 is positioned between the cut edge of the effect board 3520 or the effect board 3520A (the cut edge of the board base material 3521) and the edge of the copper foil 3522. Therefore, the entire surface of the copper foil 3522 is covered with the coating film 3523, and the copper foil 3522 is not exposed on the surface. can do. As a result, since the surface of the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A is made bright by the coating film 3523, the light from the LED 3530 mounted as an electronic component, the light from other LEDs, lighting, etc. can be made easier to reflect. As a result, it is possible to show the player a brighter light emission effect, to entertain the player and to suppress the decline in the interest of the player. Furthermore, since the surfaces of the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A are made light by the coating film 3523, the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A can be made inconspicuous, and the color of the surface is provided in front. It is possible to reduce the influence on the members (for example, the decoration part 3510, the decoration body, etc.), and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a good appearance by surely exhibiting the decoration effect of the members.

In addition, since the specific trace portion 3561 is provided on the outer periphery of the effect board 3520 or the effect board 3520A, the specific trace portion 3561 is shorter than the entire circumference of the effect board 3520 or the effect board 3520A as described above, and the fixed length board It is possible to shorten the finishing time of the part (connecting part 3552) connected to 3550, suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and cleanly finish the specific trace part 3561 to produce the effect board 3520. The appearance of the performance board 3520A can be improved, and even if the performance board 3520 and the performance board 3520A are visible, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the bottom 3557a of the recess 3557 recessed in a trapezoidal shape at the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A on which the LED 3530 that emits light according to the progress of the game is mounted is formed with an outline. Even if there is a specific trace portion 3561 in which a trace different from other portions (general trace portion 3560) is generated when the The peripheral wall portion 3514 of the decorative portion 3510, the peripheral wall portion 3542 of the decorative base 3540, and the peripheral wall portion 3573 of the frame portion 3570 prevent other members from contacting the outer peripheral surface including the specific trace portion 3561 of the effect board 3520A. Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage due to contact with the specific trace portion 3561, and the lack of damage improves the appearance of other members, making it possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player. Machine 1 can be provided. Also, the effect board 3520 that does not have the recess 3557 can achieve the same effect.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 3514 of the decorative portion 3510, the peripheral wall portion 3542 of the decorative base 3540, and the peripheral wall portion 3573 of the frame portion 3570 can avoid contact with the outer peripheral surface including the specific trace portion 3561 of the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator's fingers from touching the effect board 3520 or the specific trace portion 3561 of the effect board 3520A during operations such as manufacturing, transportation, installation, and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1. You can avoid getting hurt by sticking to it. In addition, the peripheral wall portion 3514 of the decorative portion 3510, the peripheral wall portion 3542 of the decorative base 3540, and the peripheral wall portion 3573 of the frame portion 3570 can avoid contact with the outer peripheral surface of the effect board 3520 including the specific trace portion 3561 and the effect board 3520A. Since it is possible, it is possible to make it difficult for the operator's fingers and the like to come into contact with the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems caused by lipids.

Furthermore, the peripheral wall portion 3514 of the decorative portion 3510, the peripheral wall portion 3542 of the decorative base 3540, and the peripheral wall portion 3573 of the frame portion 3570 can avoid contact with the specific trace portion 3561 of the effect board 3520 or the effect board 3520A. When manufacturing the board 3520 and the performance board 3520A, the specific trace part 3561 can be cut without being finished, and the cost of the performance board 3520, the performance board 3520A and the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. be able to.

In addition, since it is difficult to visually recognize the outer peripheral surface including the specific trace portion 3561 of the effect board 3520 and the effect board 3520A through the peripheral wall portion 3514 of the decorative portion 3510, the peripheral wall portion 3542 of the decorative base 3540, and the peripheral wall portion 3573 of the frame portion 3570, the specific It is possible to suppress deterioration in the appearance of the effect board 3520, the effect board 3520A, and the front decoration part 3510 due to the appearance of the trace part 3561 and the outer peripheral surface, and to improve the appearance of the decoration part 3510. It is possible to reduce the player's discomfort caused by seeing the specific trace portion 3561 and the outer peripheral surface of the board 3520 and the effect board 3520A, and suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

Further, since the specific trace portion 3561 is provided in the bottom portion 3557a of the concave portion 3557 recessed in a trapezoidal shape from the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A, even if the specific trace portion 3561 protrudes outward from the bottom portion 3557a, the effect board 3520A 3514 of the decorative portion 3510, the peripheral wall portion 3542 of the decorative base 3540, and the peripheral wall portion 3573 of the frame portion 3570, and the effect board 3520A is projected from the design outline of the decorative portion 3510 and the decorative base 3540. and the frame portion 3570 or the like.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the bottom 3557a of the recess 3557 recessed in a trapezoidal shape at the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A on which the LED 3530 that emits light according to the progress of the game is mounted is formed with an outline. Even if there is a specific trace portion 3561 in which a trace different from other portions (general trace portion 3560) is generated when the plated portion of the decorative portion 3510 is provided so as to overlap the specific trace portion 3561 from the front. 3515, the frame portion 3570, and the side wall portion 3511 (rear end surface 3512) of the decoration portion 3510 make it difficult to see. can be improved, it is possible to reduce the unpleasantness given to the player, and to suppress the decline in interest.

More specifically, when manufacturing the effect board 3520A, when cutting out the effect board 3520A from the standard board 3550 using a processing machine such as an NC machine, the effect board 3520A is not completely separated, and is cut from the outer periphery. If the bottom 3557a of the recessed portion 3557, which is recessed in shape, is connected to the fixed-size substrate 3550 (the discarded substrate 3555 or another substrate), even if the outer peripheral shape of the effect substrate 3520A is a complicated shape, the recessed portion Since the base 3557a (connecting portion 3552) of 3557 is connected to the rectangular fixed-size board 3550, the production board 3520A before separation can be easily set in the insert machine through the fixed-size board 3550, and the effect board 3520A can be easily set to the insert machine through the fixed-size board 3550. Electronic components such as the LED 3530 can be mounted on the effect board 3520A. Then, after mounting the electronic components on the pre-separation production board 3520A, the connecting part 3552 connected to the standard board 3550 is cut (or broken) so that the connecting part 3552 connected at the bottom 3557a of the recessed part 3557 can be replaced with another. A specific trace portion 3561 different from the portion (general trace portion 3560) is generated, and an effect board 3520A having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape is completed. At this time, the connecting portion 3552 (part of the specific trace portion 3561) connected to the fixed-size board 3550 is short (small) with respect to the entire circumference of the effect board 3520A, so even if the connecting portion 3552 is cut, The amount of shavings generated is small and can be sufficiently sucked by a dust collector, and does not affect electronic components such as LEDs 3530 mounted on the effect board 3520A.

In this way, the specific trace portion 3561 provided on the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A is a trace different from other portions of the outer periphery (general trace portion 3560), and the specific trace portion 3561 is moved from the outer peripheral edge to the base. Since it is provided at the bottom 3557a of the concave portion 3557 which is recessed in shape and is more conspicuous than the other portions, the presence of the specific trace portion 3561 and the concave portion 3557 may deteriorate the appearance of the effect board 3520A, but it overlaps from the front. The plated portion 3515 and the frame portion 3570 of the decorative portion 3510 and the side wall portion 3511 (rear end surface 3512) of the decorative portion 3510 provided as described above make the specific trace portion 3561 difficult to see together with the concave portion 3557, so that the effect board 3520A The specific trace portion 3561 and the recessed portion 3557 are not conspicuous, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the appearance of the decorative portion 3510 due to the effect board 3520A, and the appearance of the decorative portion 3510 can be improved. The trace portion 3561 and the recessed portion 3557 do not make the player feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, since it has a specific trace portion 3561 on the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A, and the outer shape of the effect board 3520A is formed by a processing machine with a high degree of processing freedom such as an NC machine, the outer peripheral shape is complicated, that is, A pachinko machine 1 capable of easily manufacturing a performance board 3520A corresponding to a highly decorative decoration part 3510 and surely exhibiting the decorative effect of the decoration part 3510 illuminated by LEDs 3530 of the performance board 3520A. can be provided.

Further, since the specific trace portion 3561 is provided in the bottom portion 3557a of the concave portion 3557 recessed in a trapezoidal shape from the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A, even if the specific trace portion 3561 protrudes outward from the bottom portion 3557a, the effect board 3520A Therefore, the effect board 3520A can be reliably attached to the attachment object such as the decorative portion 3510 and the frame portion 3570.

Furthermore, the specific trace portion 3561 and the recessed portion 3557 provided on the outer periphery of the effect board 3520A are provided so as to overlap from the front, the plating portion 3515 and the frame portion 3570 of the decorative portion 3510, and the side wall portion 3511 of the decorative portion 3510 ( The effect board 3520A can be hidden by the rear end surface 3512), and the bright color (white) of the surface can make the effect board 3520A inconspicuous. Therefore, the appearance of the decorative portion 3510 is not deteriorated, and the decorative effect of the decorative portion 3510 can be reliably exhibited. In addition, as described above, the effect board 3520A can be made inconspicuous. The appearance does not deteriorate, and the thickness of the decorative body 3503 and the decorative body 3504 having the decorative portion 3510 and the effect board 3520A can be reduced. Therefore, since the degree of freedom in arranging the decorative portion 3510 (the decorative body 3503 and the decorative body 3504) can be increased, the decorative body 3503 and the decorative body 3504 can be provided at more effective positions, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. can do better. In addition, by making the decorative body 3503 and the decorative body 3504 thin, it is possible to relatively easily secure a space for installing other decorative bodies and the like, so that the pachinko machine 1 having more decorative bodies and the like can be provided. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

In addition, since the specific trace portion 3561 of the effect board 3520A is made invisible by the plating portion 3515 and the frame portion 3570 of the decorative portion 3510 and the side wall portion 3511 (rear end surface 3512) of the decorative portion 3510, when manufacturing the effect board 3520A , the specific trace portion 3561 can be cut without being finished, and the cost of the performance board 3520A and the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the plated portion 3515 and the frame portion 3570 of the decorative portion 3510 and the side wall portion 3511 (rear end surface 3512) of the decorative portion 3510 are provided so as to overlap the outer peripheral edge of the effect board 3520A, the plated portion of the decorative portion 3510 3515, the frame portion 3570, and the side wall portion 3511 (rear end surface 3512) of the decorative portion 3510 are provided over the entire outer peripheral edge of the decorative portion 3510. The side wall portion 3511 (rear end surface 3512) of the decoration portion 3510 can decorate the outer peripheral edge of the decoration portion 3510, and the appearance of the decoration portion 3510 can be improved. The player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be entertained by the light emission decoration of the decoration part 3510 by the light emission of the LED 3530 of the effect board 3520A, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the surface of the effect board 3520A is bright (white), the light from the mounted LED 3530 and the light from other LEDs, lighting, etc. can be easily reflected to the decorative portion 3510. . As a result, the player can be shown a brighter light emitting effect of the decorative portion 3510, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the surface of the effect board 3520A is light-colored (white), the effect board 3520A can be made inconspicuous, and the effect of the color of the surface on the decorative portion 3510 can be reduced. The pachinko machine 1 with a good appearance can be provided by surely exhibiting the decorative effect of the 3510. - 特許庁

[9. Game board of the second embodiment]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 169 to 179 and the like. In the following description, the same components as those of the game board 5 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. 169 is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment, and FIG. 170 is a rear view of the game board of the second embodiment. 171 is a front view showing only the front unit of the game board of the second embodiment, and FIG. 172 is a front view showing only the rear unit of the game board of the second embodiment.

The game board 5A is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4, and is placed on the game board placing portion 501c. It is detachably attached (see FIG. 183). The game board 5A includes a front unit 6A that can be removed forward while attached to the main body frame 4, and a rear unit 6B that supports the front unit 6A from the rear and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4. , is equipped with The front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B are detachably fixed at unit fixing portions 1020 at a plurality of positions (here, three positions). Further, the rear unit 6B and the body frame 4 are detachably fixed at a board fixing portion 1133. As shown in FIG.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment has a mounting unit 1130 newly provided between the game panel 1100A and the back unit 3000 in comparison with the game board 5 of the first embodiment, although the details will be described later. There is a game panel 1100A in separable contact with the front surface of the mounting unit 1130, and the back unit 3000 and the substrate holder 1200 are attached to the rear surface of the mounting unit 1130. FIG. Therefore, when the exploded perspective view of the game board 5A of the second embodiment is shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, which are the exploded perspective views of the game board 5 of the first embodiment, the front structural member 1000A and the game panel 1100A are shown. and the back unit 3000, the mounting unit 1130 is drawn.

The front unit 6A of the game board 5A includes a front component 1000A that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front component 1000A that is attached to the rear side of the game area 5a. It has a plate-like game panel 1100A that partitions the ends, and a front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100A. A plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game balls B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100A.

The rear unit 6B of the game board 5A includes a mounting unit 1130 which can support the front unit 6A on the front surface and is detachably mounted on the main body frame 4, and a substrate mounted on the lower rear side of the mounting unit 1130. It has a holder 1200 and a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 159, etc.) which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and controls the contents of the game performed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 and a function display unit 1400 for displaying the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 are provided.

In addition, the rear unit 6B of the game board 5A includes a peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the mounting unit 1130, and an effect capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, which is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. A display device 1600, a panel relay board (not shown) disposed on the rear side of the mounting unit 1130 and relaying connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and attached to the rear surface of the mounting unit 1130 and a back unit 3000 to be mounted.

The rear unit 3000 in the rear unit 6B of the game board 5A has a box-like shape which is attached to the rear surface of the mounting unit 1130 and which is attached to the rear surface of the inter-unit connector 1150 connected to the front inter-unit connector 1060 of the front unit 6A. A back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, a back ball guide unit 3100 provided at the lower front end inside the back box 3010, and a back ball guide unit 3100 provided inside the back box 3010. a back lower effect unit 3600 provided in the back box 3010, a back upper effect unit 3620 provided in the upper corner in the back box 3010, a back left effect unit 3640 provided in the left corner in the back box 3010, and the back box 3010 and a back right effect unit 3660 provided at the right corner inside.

The inter-unit connector rear 1150 is attached to the front surface of the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 . In addition, an effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000 (back box 3010), and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The game board 5A of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, like the game board 5 described above. In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning opening 2001, a gate 2010, and a first starting opening 2003 that give a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B to be paid out) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. , a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2012 are provided. In this game board 5A, the game ball B is placed in the general winning opening 2001, the gate 2010, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2012, etc. in the game area 5a. , to perform a game that entertains the hitting operation of the handle 195 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a so as to be accepted or passed.

In addition, the game board 5A includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2011 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate 2010, and a first starting opening. A first start opening sensor 2101 for detecting the game ball B received in 2003, a second start opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. A big winning hole sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball B and a second big winning hole sensor 2452 for detecting a game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2012 are provided.

In the game board 5A, a general winning opening sensor 3001 and a first starting opening sensor 2101 are provided in the rear unit 6B, a gate sensor 2011, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2402, and a second large winning opening. A sensor 2452 is provided in the front unit 6A.

By the way, when the big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2012 are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern according to the lottery result of the drawn special symbols, when the game ball B is entered, many game balls B are thrown. Since the money is paid out, by making the big winning mouth sensor 2402 and the second big winning mouth sensor 2452 that trigger the payout visible to the player, it is possible to give the player a sense of security, can be more enjoyable. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 2101 and the second starting opening sensor 2401 for detecting the entering game ball B are used for the game. Even if it is made visible to the person, the effect is not as great as that of the large winning slot sensor 2402 and the second large winning slot sensor 2452 being visible. In other words, even if the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 2101 and the second starting opening sensor 2401 are invisible to the player, the interest of the player does not decrease. For this reason, in this embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening sensor 2101 are provided in the rear unit 6B (back ball induction unit 3100 of the back unit 3000) instead of the front unit 6A.

As a result, the number of electric parts provided in the front unit 6A can be reduced, and the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening sensor 2101 are provided in the front unit 6A, so that the inter-unit connector front There is no need to provide a structure for hiding the distribution cable extending up to 1060, and the cost of the front unit 6A can be reduced. In this embodiment, the second starting point sensor 2401 is provided in the front unit 6A, but the second starting point sensor 2004 is provided in the attacker unit 2400. The configuration of the second starting port 2004 can be simplified by providing it in the attacker unit 2400 rather than removing it from the unit 6A) and providing it in the rear unit 6B. Also, all the sensors for detecting the game ball B may be provided in the rear unit 6B (see [9-7. Other modifications of the game board of the second embodiment] described later).

In addition, although the positions provided are omitted, the game board 5A has a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a, and vibration acting on the game board 5A (pachinko machine 1). and a vibration sensor 1040 for detecting. An appropriate number of magnetic sensors 1030 are provided in the front unit 2000 of the front unit 6A and the rear unit 3000 of the rear unit 6B, respectively, and vibration sensors 1040 are provided in the rear unit 3000 of the rear unit 6B.

In addition, the game board 5A is arranged inside the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 and through the transparent game panel 1100A (panel plate 1110). The display screens of the unit 3640, the back-right effect unit 3660, and the effect display device 1600 are configured to be visible from the front.

[9-1. Front unit of game board]
Next, the front unit 6A of the game board 5A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 171, 173 to 177 and the like. FIG. 173(a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the game board of the second embodiment is locked to the main body frame by the game board lock member, and (b) shows a state in which the lock by the game board lock member is released. It is an explanatory diagram. FIG. 174(a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a state in which the front unit is locked to the rear unit by locking with the front unit lock member in the unit fixing portion of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is an illustration. FIG. 4C is an explanatory view showing a state in which the lock by the front unit lock member is released from the state of (a), and FIG. 4C is an explanatory view showing a state in which the front unit is removed from the rear unit in the state of (b).

FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing the positioning of the front unit and the rear unit on the game board of the second embodiment. FIG. 176 is an explanatory diagram showing the ground path on the game board of the second embodiment. FIG. 177(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning opening of the front unit and the ball receiving opening of the rear unit on the game board of the second embodiment, and It is an explanatory view showing a state in which the unit is separated.

In this embodiment, as the front unit 6A paired with the rear unit 6B, there are a first front unit 6A1 and a second front unit 6A2 that differ from the front unit 2000 in the arrangement of the obstacle nail N, and they will be distinguished below. The front unit 6A will be described except for cases.

The front unit 6A of the game board 5A is, as shown in FIG. A game panel 1100A provided with 5a, an out port 1008 that discharges the game ball B hit into the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a (behind the game panel 1100A) without returning it, and the game panel 1100A. and a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . The out port 1008 is formed by cooperation between the front structural member 1000A and the game panel 1100A. The front unit 2000 is provided within the frame of the front structural member 1000A. In the game board 5A, the positional relationship of the front component 1000A, the game panel 1100A, and the front unit 2000 is the same as in the game board 5 of the first embodiment.

Further, the front unit 6A has a plurality of unit fixing portions 1020 for fixing to the rear unit 6B, a unit fixing member 1021 provided in each unit fixing portion 1020, and a function display unit 1400 of the rear unit 6B. a function display unit insertion portion 1050, a board fixing portion insertion groove 1051 into which the board fixing portion 1133 of the rear unit 6B is inserted, a positioning hole 1055 into which the positioning boss 1136 of the rear unit 6B is inserted, and a ground path. a first fitting 1056 and a second fitting 1057 for forming.

Furthermore, the front unit 6A, as shown in FIG. and a mounting notch 1059 for mounting. The game board lock groove 1058 is provided in a portion on the left side of the outer rail 1001 on the front surface of the lower end. More specifically, the game board lock groove 1058 is provided at a portion between the outer rail 1001 and the notch 1010 on the front surface of the front structural member 1000A, and is recessed from the front and opened downward. formed. By inserting the game board lock member 505 into the game board lock groove 1058, forward movement of the front unit 6A (game board 5A) is restricted and the lower side of the game board 5A is pushed backward. The mounting notch 1059 is recessed rightward from the left side, and is vertically spaced apart so as to correspond to the left position regulating member 531 of the body frame 4 .

Although details will be described later, the front unit 2000 of the front unit 6A includes a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2003, a side unit 2200 having three general winning openings 2001, and a game ball B , an attacker unit 2400 having a second starting port 2004, a big winning port 2005, one sub-out port 2021, and a second big winning port 2012. An attacker unit 2450, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500, a side right middle unit 2610 having one general prize winning opening 2001 and one sub-out opening 2021, a gate member 2630 having a gate 2010, It has

The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 includes a second starting hole sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B, a big winning hole sensor 2402, an attacker solenoid 2414 for opening and closing the second starting hole 2004, and a second starting hole 2004. , and an electric component such as an LED for decorating the big prize opening 2005 with light. The second attacker unit 2450 includes a second large winning opening sensor 2452 for detecting the game ball B, a second attacker solenoid 2451 for opening and closing the second large winning opening 2012, and the second large winning opening 2012 decorated with light. An electrical component is provided, such as an LED, for illuminating. The gate member 2630 is provided with a gate sensor 2011 for detecting the game ball B as an electric component.

In addition, the attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2450 of the front unit 2000 are provided with a plurality of LEDs for decorating the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2012. .

Further, the front unit 2000 is provided with a front inter-unit connector 1060 connected to the rear inter-unit connector 1150 of the rear unit 6B, details of which will be described later. The front inter-unit connector 1060 is attached behind the attacker unit 2400 .

In the front unit 6A, the number of LEDs provided in the front unit 2000 is smaller than the number of LEDs provided in the rear unit 6B. Furthermore, the total number of electric parts such as LEDs and sensors in the front unit 6A is smaller than the total number of electric parts provided in the rear unit 6B. This suppresses an increase in the cost of the front unit 6A.

The front unit 2000 includes a decoration unit including a decoration with a predetermined decoration and a plurality of LEDs for luminous decoration of the decoration, a light guide plate, and a plurality of LEDs for luminous display of the pattern of the light guide plate. , a sub-display device capable of displaying a performance image separately from the performance display device 1600, and a game ball B received in the role prize winning port is distributed to either the V winning port or the losing port. A sorting device or the like may be provided. Even when the above units and devices are provided, the total number of electric parts such as LEDs, sensors, and solenoids (actuators) in the front unit 6A should be less than the total number of electric parts provided in the rear unit 6B. is desirable.

[9-1a. Unit fixing part of the front unit]
Next, the unit fixing portion 1020 of the front unit 6A will be described in detail. The unit fixing portion 1020 is a portion for fixing the front unit 6A to the rear unit 6B, and is provided in plural (three places in this case). The unit fixing portions 1020 are provided at three locations, an upper left corner, an upper right corner, and a lower right corner, when viewed from the front. The unit fixing portion 1020 of the front unit 6A penetrates in the front-rear direction and has an insertion hole 1020a through which the locking claw 1135 of the rear unit 6B is inserted, and is slidable in the left-right direction so as to hide the insertion hole 1020a from the front. and a unit fixing member 1021 (see FIG. 174). The insertion hole 1020a is provided through the front component member 1000A and the panel holder 1120A of the game panel 1100A.

A unit fixing member 1021 of the unit fixing portion 1020 is attached to the front structural member 1000A in a non-removable state. The unit fixing member 1021 includes a lock body 1021a attached to the front structural member 1000A so as to be slidable from the front to the left and right, a hook-shaped lock piece 1021b projecting rearward from the lock body 1021a, and a lock piece 1021b. and a guide portion 1021c obliquely provided at the tip.

The unit fixing member 1021 slides the lock body 1021a in the left-right direction, and engages the lock claw 1135 with the lock piece 1021b inserted into the insertion hole 1020a, thereby fixing the front unit 6A to the rear unit 6B. It can be permanently fixed. That is, by operating (sliding) the unit fixing member 1021, the front unit 6A can be attached to or detached from the rear unit 6B.

Also, in the unit fixing portion 1020, a portion adjacent to the unit fixing member 1021 on the front surface is marked with "o" and "x" marks separated in the direction in which the unit fixing member 1021 slides. On the other hand, the unit fixing member 1021 is provided with an arrow pointing in the direction of the "o" mark and the "x" mark on the unit fixing portion 1020. As shown in FIG. The state in which the arrow of the unit fixing member 1021 points to the "o" mark of the unit fixing portion 1020 is the lock position state, and the state in which the arrow points to the "x" mark is the release position state. It is shown that.

Of the three unit fixing portions 1020, the two unit fixing portions 1020 at the upper right corner and the lower right corner are the game board fixing members 1134 (board fixing 1133). Also, the unit fixing member 1021 used for the unit fixing portion 1020 in the lower right corner has a front view shape different from that of the other unit fixing members 1021, and a certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 is provided on the front surface. Therefore, when operating the unit fixing member 1021 to detach the front unit 6A from the rear unit 6B, or when operating the game board fixing member 1134 to detach the game board 5A from the main body frame 4, The certificate stamp attached to the certificate stamp attaching part 1012 provided on the front surface of the unit fixing member 1021 comes into the field of view of the operator, and the description contents of the certificate stamp can be confirmed, and the wrong front unit 6A or the game board can be detected. 5A can be prevented from being attached.

[9-1b. Function display unit insertion part of front unit]
Next, the function display unit insertion portion 1050 of the front unit 6A will be described. The function display unit insertion portion 1050 is provided at a portion below the unit fixing portion 1020 provided at the upper left corner in the front view of the front unit 6A so that the function display unit 1400 of the rear unit 6B faces forward. is formed in This function display unit insertion portion 1050 is notched rightward from the left side and is penetrated in the front and rear direction. can be positioned.

[9-1c. Insertion groove of board fixing part of front unit]
Next, the board fixing portion insertion groove 1051 of the front unit 6A will be described. The board fixing part insertion grooves 1051 are provided at the upper right corner and the lower right corner in the front view of the front unit 6A, and the board fixing part 1133 of the rear unit 6B is inserted. The board fixing part insertion groove 1051 is provided by cutting out the panel holder 1120A of the front structural member 1000A and the game panel 1100A. Unit fixing portions 1020 at the upper right corner and the lower right corner are provided adjacent to the board fixing portion insertion groove 1051 . When attaching the front unit 6A to the rear unit 6B, the board fixing part insertion groove 1051 can guide the front unit 6A to the rear unit 6B, and by inserting the board fixing part 1133 of the rear unit 6B, The front unit 6A can be positioned with respect to the rear unit 6B.

[9-1d. Positioning hole of front unit]
Next, the positioning hole 1055 of the front unit 6A will be explained. A plurality of positioning holes 1055 are formed forward from the rear surface of the front unit 6A (see FIG. 175, etc.). By inserting the positioning bosses 1136 of the rear unit 6B into the positioning holes 1055, the front unit 6A is positioned vertically and horizontally with respect to the rear unit 6B.

[9-1e. First connection fitting and second connection fitting of the front unit]
Next, the first connection fitting 1056 and the second connection fitting 1057 of the front unit 6A will be described. The front unit 6A has a front end attached to the outer rail 1001, a rear end protruding rearward from the front surface of the front unit 6A and a first connection fitting 1056, and a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the front unit 6A. In addition, the rear end has a second connection fitting 1057 from which the rear surface of the front unit 6A protrudes rearward (see FIG. 176). The second connection fitting 1057 is provided so as to pass through the front unit 6A in the front-rear direction. Although not shown, the first connection fitting 1056 and the second connection fitting 1057 are attached to the front structural member 1000A.

The first connection fitting 1056 is provided so as to contact the outer side of the outer rail 1001 at the lower left corner of the front unit 6A. The first connection fitting 1056 has its front end attached to the outer rail 1001 in the vicinity of the portion where the game ball B shot from the ball shooting device 540 first contacts the outer rail 1001 in the pachinko machine 1 . The first connection fitting 1056 has a U-shaped rear contact portion 1056a provided at the rear end, and a spring portion 1056b capable of urging the rear contact portion 1056a rearward.

The second connection fitting 1057 is provided at the upper left corner of the front unit 6A, below the unit fixing portion 1020 and to the left of the spec display portion 1013. As shown in FIG. The second connection fitting 1057 includes a U-shaped rear contact portion 1057a provided at the rear end, a rear spring portion 1057b capable of urging the rear contact portion 1057a rearward, and a rear spring portion 1057b provided at the front end. and a front spring portion 1057d capable of urging the front contact portion 1057c forward.

The rear contact portion 1056a of the first connection fitting 1056 and the rear contact portion 1057a of the second connection fitting 1057 come into contact with the attachment reinforcing sheet metal 1132 through the opening 1137 of the rear unit 6B by attaching the front unit 6A to the rear unit 6B. do. As a result, the first connection fitting 1056 and the second connection fitting 1057 provided at positions separated from each other are electrically connected by the attachment reinforcing sheet metal 1132 . In addition, the front contact portion 1057c of the second connection fitting 1057 is connected to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 with the game board 5A attached to the main body frame 4. As a result, the outer rail 1001 is electrically connected to the door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame 3 via the first connection fitting 1056 , the mounting reinforcing sheet metal 1132 and the second connection fitting 1057 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is electrically connected to the ground on the game hall side through the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. A ground path is constructed to dissipate static electricity from the

[9-1f. Front component of front unit]
Next, the front structural member 1000A of the front unit 6A will be described. The front component 1000A in the front unit 6A has the same configuration as the front component 1000 in the game board 5, and includes an outer rail 1001, an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a lower right rail 1004, It has a right rail 1005 , a blocking portion 1006 , a backflow prevention member 1007 , an out port 1008 , a security concave portion 1009 and a notch portion 1010 . The outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000A is made of a metal plate.

The front structural member 1000A also includes a certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 provided in the lower right corner and a specification display portion 1013 provided in the upper left corner when viewed from the front. The specification display portion 1013 is provided above the function display unit insertion portion 1050 and outside the outer rail 1001 along the outer rail 1001 . The front structural member 1000A is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100A, the back unit 3000, and the like, which are arranged behind, can be visually recognized from the front.

The certificate stamp pasted on the certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 is a sticker that describes the maker, serial number, type of game board, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5A). In more detail, the "certificate stamp" has a certificate stamp main body that has a modified pentagonal outline in which a horizontally long rectangle is in contact with the base of a horizontally long trapezoid, and a predetermined pattern is applied to the entire surface of the certificate stamp body. there is A combination certificate of a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the type of the game board, and the name of the manufacturer are written on the horizontally long rectangular part of the certificate stamp body. In addition, the "certificate stamp" makes it possible to identify the type of game board by the color of the certificate stamp itself. Furthermore, the "certificate stamp" has a manufacturing number tag sticker attached to the trapezoidal part of the body of the certificate stamp, on which the manufacturer's symbol, the manufacturing number, and the two-dimensional bar code are written. The two-dimensional barcode of the production number tag contains information ID (for example, the ID of the game board, the ID of the main control board to be paired, the ID of the peripheral control board to be paired, etc.), type, manufacturer code, manufacture Information such as year, serial number, etc. is entered. For this reason, the "certificate stamp" of the present embodiment is a combination of a certificate stamp main body (so-called certificate stamp) and a production number slip.

The spec sticker attached to the spec display portion 1013 is a sticker on which the specs of the game board 5A such as the jackpot probability, the number of prize balls, the number of jackpot rounds, the count, and the like are described. The spec display portion 1013 (spec sticker) is provided at a portion that can be visually recognized from the front through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when the game board 5A is attached to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加These certificate stamps and spec stickers are shipped to the game hall side in a state of being affixed in advance.

The certificate stamp affixed to the certificate stamp affixing section 1012 is paired with the management seal affixed to the management seal affixing section 1301 of the main control unit 1300 and the management seal affixed to the management seal affixing section 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 . Such contents are described so that it can be determined whether or not they are related to each other. As a set of descriptions, for example, the manufacturing number described on the certificate stamp is also described on the management sticker attached to the main control unit 1300 and the peripheral control unit 1500 . At this time, the description to be paired may be a seal different from the management seal.

[9-1g. Game panel of front unit]
Next, the game panel 1100A of the front unit 6A will be explained. The game panel 1100 in the front unit 6A has the same configuration as the game panel 1100 in the game board 5. It is a flat panel plate 1110 made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-like panel holder 1120A attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000A. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100A, and a front unit 2000 is attached.

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100A is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, polystyrene, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120A. ). In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The attachment of the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120A in the game panel 1100A is the same as the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 described above.

[9-1h. front unit of front unit (first front unit)]
Next, the front unit 2000 of the front unit 6A will be explained. The front unit 2000 of the first front unit 6A1 as the front unit 6A is capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open. , a gate 2010 provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a through which the game ball B can pass; A first starting port 2003 which is always open as possible, and a second starting port 2004 which enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2010.例文帳に追加And, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol that is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2003 or the second special symbol that is drawn by receiving the game ball B to the second start port 2004 It is provided with a large prize winning port 2005 and a second large prize winning port 2012 from which a game ball B can be received.

In addition, the front unit 2000 of the first front unit 6A1 is provided upstream of the out port 1008, is always open to accept the game ball B, and does not return the received game ball B to the game area. and two sub-out ports 2021 for discharging to the outside of 5a. The two sub-out ports 2021 are provided at a portion above the center in the vertical direction near the right end of the game area 5a and at a portion near the lower right corner of the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 of the first front unit 6A1 has a gate sensor 2011 that detects the game ball B passing through the gate 2010, and the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2011. A starting port solenoid 2412 for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 in response, and a second starting port sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 are provided.

In addition, the front unit 2000 of the first front unit 6A1 is selected according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by the detection of the game ball B by the first starting opening sensor 2101 (see FIG. 172) or the second starting opening sensor 2401 Attacker solenoid 2414 for opening and closing the big winning hole 2005, big winning hole sensor 2402 for detecting game ball B received in big winning hole 2005, game ball B by first starting hole sensor 2101 or second starting hole sensor 2401 and a second attacker solenoid 2451 for opening and closing the second big winning opening 2012 according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottered by the detection of.

The front unit 2000 of the first front unit 6A1 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. A side unit 2200 which is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 when viewed from the front and which has three general winning holes 2001, and a side unit 2200 which is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. and a side upper left unit 2300 .

In addition, the front unit 2000 of the first front unit 6A1 is provided on the right side of the start opening unit 2100 in the front view, which is the lower right corner in the game area 5a. An attacker unit 2400 having two sub-out ports 2021, a second starting port sensor 2401, a starting port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, and a prize winning port sensor 2402 is provided.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 of the first front unit 6A1 is provided above the attacker unit 2400 and has a second large winning opening 2012, a second attacker solenoid 2451, and a second large winning opening sensor 2452. A second attacker unit 2450, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a, and a second attacker unit 2450. A side right center unit 2610 having one general prize winning port 2001 and one sub-out port 2021 provided above the side right center unit 2610 and a gate 2010 and a gate sensor 2011 provided above the side right center unit 2610 and an inter-unit connector front 1060 attached near the right end of the rear surface of the attacker unit 2400 .

[9-1h-1. starting unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 6A, as shown in FIG. and a guiding portion 2122 protruding. The starting port unit 2100 forms a first starting port 2003 with a receiving portion 2121 . The guiding portion 2122 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the game panel 1100A (front unit 6A) through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100A.

The guide portion 2122 of the starting port unit 2100 is inserted into the ball receiving port 3101 of the back ball guide unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 while the front unit 6A is fixed to the rear unit 6B. Therefore, when the front unit 6A is attached to the rear unit 6B, by inserting the guiding portion 2122 into the ball socket 3101, the front unit 6A is guided to a predetermined position of the rear unit 6B.

The guide portion 2122 protruding rearward in the front unit 6A is inserted into the cylindrical or gutter-shaped ball socket 3101 so that the rear end of the guide portion 2122 is guided more than the bottom of the ball socket 3101. A higher step is formed at the bottom of the portion 2122 .

By the way, in this embodiment, the game ball B received from above (winning) in the winning opening such as the first starting opening 2003 is guided backward once, and then guided downward in the back ball guiding unit 3100. Therefore, the rear wall for guiding downward may be relatively close to the winning opening. In this case, depending on the momentum of the game ball B that has entered the winning hole, the game ball B in contact with the rear wall bounces forward, and even though it has won once, it flows backwards and returns to the position of the winning hole. The sight of the ball B may give the player a sense of distrust and reduce his interest in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 177, the game ball B received in the winning opening (first starting opening 2003) from above is guided backward by the guiding portion 2122, and after being delivered to the ball receiving opening 3101, is guided downward. Since the flow of the game balls B is crank-shaped, the circulation speed of the game balls B tends to be decelerated. Therefore, when a later (subsequent) game ball B comes into contact with a preceding game ball B received in a winning hole, the following game ball B bounces upstream and flows backward to return to the winning hole. There is a risk of

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the guide portion 2122 is inserted into the ball receiving port 3101, a step is formed at the rear end of the guide portion 2122. The game ball B comes into contact with the rear wall provided behind the ball receiving opening 3101 after being transferred to the opening 3101, or the game ball B coming later comes into contact with the preceding game ball B, and moves to the upstream side. Even if it bounces back, the bounced game ball B can be bounced back to the downstream side by coming into contact with a step, preventing the game ball B from flowing back to the winning opening and preventing the game ball B from returning to the winning opening. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing backward and returning to the prize winning opening even though it was once received (winning a prize), and giving the player a sense of distrust when the game ball B can be seen from the winning prize opening. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can surely entertain the player with receiving the game ball B into the prize-winning hole and suppress the decline of the player's interest in the game. .

[9-1h-2. Side unit and side upper left unit]
A side unit 2200 of the front unit 6A has three general winning holes 2001 and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100A (panel plate 1110). Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this side unit 2200 as well, the guiding portion for guiding the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear is similar to the guiding portion 2122 of the starting port unit 2100, which is the front unit 6A. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface and is inserted into the ball socket 3101 of the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 .

The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 6A has the same configuration as the side upper left unit 2300 of the game board 5. FIG. Therefore, description is omitted.

[9-1h-3. Attacker Unit and Second Attacker Unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the first front unit 6A1 has the same configuration as the attacker unit 2400 of the game board 5. Also in this attacker unit 2400, similarly to the guiding portion 2122 of the starting opening unit 2100, the guiding portion that guides the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005 to the rear is provided on the rear surface of the front unit 6A. , and is inserted into the ball socket 3101 of the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 .

Also, the attacker unit 2400 of the first front unit 6A1 has an attacker decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, although not shown. The attacker unit 2400 (the big winning opening 2005, the second starting opening 2004, etc.) can be decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED of the attacker decoration board.

The second attacker unit 2450 of the first front unit 6A1 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center accessory 2500 and between the lower right guide passage 2525 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. , is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100A. The second attacker unit 2450 is provided with a second big prize winning opening 2012 openable to the left.

The second attacker unit 2450 of the first front unit 6A1 includes the second large winning opening sensor 2452 for detecting the game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2012, the first starting opening sensor 2101 or the second starting opening sensor It has a second attacker solenoid 2451 for opening and closing the second big winning opening 2012 according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by detecting the game ball B by 2401.

Also in the second attacker unit 2450 of the first front unit 6A1, similarly to the guide portion 2122 of the starting port unit 2100, the guide portion that guides the game ball B received in the second big winning port 2012 backward It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the unit 6A and is inserted into the ball socket 3101 of the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000.

Also, the second attacker unit 2450 of the first front unit 6A1 has a second attacker decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, although not shown. The second attacker unit 2450 (the second big winning opening 2012) can be decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED of the second attacker decoration board.

The rear unit may be provided with an LED (attacker decoration board) for decorating the attacker unit 2400 with light emission and an LED (second attacker decoration board) for decorating the second attacker unit 2450 with light emission.

[9-1h-4. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the first front unit 6A1 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front. installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame, and the production display device 1600 provided in the rear and the back lower production unit 3600, the upper rear production unit 3620, and the rear left production unit provided in the rear unit 3000 are provided. Various production units such as 3640 and back right production unit 3660 can be visually recognized from the front.

The center accessory 2500 of the first front unit 6A1 includes a transparent frame-shaped center base 2511 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100A (panel plate 1110), and guides the game ball B from the outside of the center base 2511 to the inside of the frame. a possible warp passage 2512, a stage 2513 which is provided at the lower side of the frame of the center base 2511 and releases the game ball B, which has circulated in the warp passage 2512, into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction; It has

The center base 2511 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2511a extending in the front-rear direction, a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2511b protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2511a and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100A, and the peripheral wall portion. and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2511c protruding from the inner periphery of 2511a.

The warp passage 2512 is open at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2511a on the left side in front view and on the front side of the front surface of the game panel 1100A (panel plate 1110) so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. The warp passage 2512 can guide the entering game ball B to the stage 2513 .

The stage 2513 has a curved shape in which the central side in the left-right direction is depressed, and is positioned directly above the first start-up port 2003 of the start-up unit 2100, that is, the state in which the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100A. , is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2513 has a portion (central release portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portions 2513b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the stage 2513 is assembled on the game board 5</b>A, the raised portion (central release portion 2513 a ) at the center in the left-right direction is located directly above the first starting port 2003 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2003 with a very high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 of the first front unit 6A1 is provided in the upper right corner, and has a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two passages through which the game balls B can flow. The guide path group 2520 guides the game ball B above the gate 2010, the side right center unit 2610, the second attacker unit 2450, and the attacker unit 2400.

When the center accessory 2500 of the first front unit 6A1 is assembled on the game board 5A, the right end of the guide path group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is aligned with the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (front configuration It is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the member 1000A in the vicinity of the impacting portion 1006, and is formed so that the game ball B struck to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 always passes through the guide passage group 2520. .

The guide passage group 2520 has a length in the vertical direction that is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in the shape of a groove that is open forward, and the game balls B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good condition.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2511a of the center accessory 2500, and includes a first guide passage 2521 away from the peripheral wall portion 2511a and a left side of the first guide passage 2521 along the peripheral wall portion 2511a. and a second guide passage 2522 extending along the The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated left and right. In addition, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are laterally adjacent to each other and open obliquely downward and to the right along the arc above the right rail 1005 .

The guide path group 2520 is positioned above the gate 2010 with the center accessory 2500 assembled on the game board 5A. In addition, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is positioned directly below the lower end of the impingement portion 1006 of the front component 1000A, and most of the game balls B that abut against the impingement portion 1006 are first guided. It is configured to enter passageway 2521 .

In addition, the center accessory 2500 of the first front unit 6A1 protrudes rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2511a, and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. is provided. The lower right guide passage 2525 has an entrance opening upward across the front width in the left-right direction, and an exit opening obliquely downward to the left with a width of one game ball B.

The lower right guide passage 2525 has its right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 and is located between the attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2450 when assembled on the game board 5A. Therefore, between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2525, the second attacker unit 2450, the side right middle unit 2610, and the gate member 2630 are arranged.

[9-1h-5. Side right center unit and gate member]
The side right middle unit 2610 of the first front unit 6A1 is arranged directly above the second attacker unit 2450 in the game area 5a and attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100A. This side right middle unit 2610 has one general prize winning opening 2001 and one sub-out opening 2021 .

Also in the side right middle unit 2610 of the first front unit 6A1, similarly to the guide part 2122 of the starting port unit 2100, the guide part that guides the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 or the sub-out port 2021 backward It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the front unit 6A and is inserted into the ball socket 3101 of the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. As shown in FIG.

The gate member 2630 of the first front unit 6A1 is arranged between the guide path group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2610 in the game area 5a, and is located on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100A. installed in the The gate member 2630 includes a gate 2010 for performing a lottery of normal symbols for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 by the passage of the game ball B, a gate sensor 2011 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2010, have. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2011 is a gate 2010 .

[9-1i. Before unit connector]
Next, the inter-unit connector front 1060 in the front unit 2000 of the first front unit 6A1 will be described. The inter-unit connector front 1060 is attached near the right end of the rear surface of the attacker unit 2400 exposed rearward through the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) from the front.

In front of this inter-unit connector 1060, the attacker unit 2400 has a second starting opening sensor 2401, a big winning opening sensor 2402, a starting opening solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, an attacker decoration board (LED or LED driver), and a second attacker unit 2450. Wiring from the second attacker solenoid 2451, the second big winning opening sensor 2452, the second attacker decoration board (LED or LED driver), the gate sensor 2011, etc. is electrically connected.

The front inter-unit connector 1060 is automatically engaged and connected to the rear inter-unit connector 1150 (see FIG. 172) of the rear unit 6B when the front unit 6A is fixed to the rear unit 6B. Note that in this embodiment, drawer connectors are used in the front 1060 of the inter-unit connector and the rear 1150 of the inter-unit connector. Here, the drawer connector is a connector that engages like a drawer of furniture, and has a guiding function to guide each other. It is a connector that can be connected satisfactorily. In addition to the drawer connector, connectors that can be used in the front 1060 and rear 1150 inter-unit connectors include board-to-board connectors (board-to-board connectors) used for connecting and connecting boards, wiring A general connector (board-to-cable connector) that engages with a connector provided at the tip of a cable and is mounted on a board can be used.

As a result, even if the front unit 6A is provided with electric parts, the rear unit 6B can be electrically connected easily, and the effort required to attach and detach the front unit 6A can be reduced. In addition, since the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B are electrically connected by the front inter-unit connector 1060 and the rear inter-unit connector 1150, when the front unit 6A is attached or detached, workers or other persons may be disturbed by the electrical wiring. There is no risk of disconnection because the other members do not come into contact with each other. In addition, since the front 1060 of the inter-unit connector and the rear 1150 of the inter-unit connector are drawer connectors, electrical connection can be ensured.

Further, the front inter-unit connector 1060 is provided near the right end of the rear surface of the attacker unit 2400, that is, near the right end of the front unit 6A. can be inserted and removed in good condition after the inter-unit connector. More specifically, for example, when only the front unit 6A is removed from the game board 5A mounted on the main body frame 4, in this embodiment, by moving forward while unlocking the unit fixing member 1021, It can be removed from the rear unit 6B (body frame 4).

However, depending on the operator and work conditions, it may be easier to remove the front unit 6A by rotating the front unit 6A around the left side of the front unit 6A so that the right side moves forward, and then moving the front unit 6A forward. Sometimes it is easy. More specifically, for example, in this embodiment, the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5A is mounted can be opened and closed by the outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall with the left side as the axis of hinge rotation. A door frame 3 is also provided so as to cover the main body frame 4 from the front so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed with its left side as the axis of rotation of the hinge. Therefore, in the island facility, when the door frame 3 is opened and the front unit 6A is removed from the game board 5A mounted on the main body frame 4, the left side of the game board 5A (the axial center side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4) is removed. , the presence of the door frame 3 narrows the front working space. For this reason, the front unit 6A is rotated so that the right side moves forward about the left side of the front unit 6A near the axis of the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, and then it is moved forward. It is easier to remove the In such a case, the front 1060 of the inter-unit connector is pulled out obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction, and there is a risk of damage due to the application of excessive force to the front 1060 of the inter-unit connector and the rear 1150 of the inter-unit connector. .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front unit connector 1060 is provided near the right end of the front unit 6A, that is, at a position far from the left side, which serves as the axis during removal work. 1060 will move along a large radius arc. As a result, the tangential direction of the circular arc, which is the locus of movement of the front inter-unit connector 1060, becomes closer to the front-rear direction (joining direction) at the portion where the front inter-unit connector 1060 and the rear inter-unit connector 1150 are joined. The inclination of the moving direction of the front 1060 of the inter-unit connector becomes slight in the longitudinal direction, and no excessive force acts on the front 1060 of the inter-unit connector and the rear 1150 of the inter-unit connector, and they are not damaged. This is the same when the front unit 6A is attached to the rear unit 6B, and the front inter-unit connector 1060 can be engaged with the rear inter-unit connector 1150 from a direction close to the front-rear direction. 1150 can be positively engaged and electrically connected.

Also, the front inter-unit connector 1060 is provided near the right end of the rear surface of the attacker unit 2400, that is, near the lower right corner of the front unit 6A, and the unit fixing portion 1020 is provided near this lower right corner. Accordingly, when the unit fixing member 1021 of the unit fixing portion 1020 is moved from the unlocked position to the locked position when attaching the front unit 6A to the rear unit 6B, the unit fixing member 1021 allows the front unit 6A to be attached to the rear unit 6B. Since the force is pressed, the force also acts strongly on the front inter-unit connector 1060 near the unit fixing portion 1020, and the front inter-unit connector 1060 can be sufficiently engaged with the rear inter-unit connector 1150, ensuring can be connected to

As described above, the first front unit 6A1 of the present embodiment includes the second starting opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2402, the starting opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the attacker decoration board (the LED of the attacker decoration board and the LED driver ), a second attacker solenoid 2451, a second prize winning opening sensor 2452, a second attacker decoration board (LED or LED driver of the second attacker decoration board), a gate sensor 2011, and a plurality of electrical components. These electric parts are provided in a region on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the front unit 6A. More specifically, in the front unit 6A, the electric parts are provided in a right corner area near the right side, in other words, in an area far from the axis of the body frame 4 which is provided to be openable and closable.

In addition, in the first front unit 6A1, electrical components such as the second starting opening sensor 2401 and the big winning opening sensor 2402 are provided in the vicinity of each other. It is desirable that the area in which these electric parts are provided is 1/2, more preferably 1/3 of the entire game area 5a. In addition, it is desirable that the inter-unit connector front 1060 be provided at or near the center of the area where the electrical components are provided. For this reason, the electrical components provided in the first front unit 6A1 are provided in the vicinity of the front inter-unit connector 1060. As shown in FIG.

It is desirable that the electrical parts be provided in the lower right corner area of the front unit 6A. Alternatively, the electric parts may be provided in a region below the vertical center of the front unit 6A. As a result, the electrical components are gathered in a specific area, so that it is possible to easily concentrate the electrical wiring from the electrical components to the inter-unit connector front 1060, and the lower right corner of the first front unit 6A1. With the attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2450 provided in , the electric wiring connected to the front 1060 of the inter-unit connector can be easily made into a structure that is difficult to see from the front through the transparent game panel 1100A (panel plate 1110). can.

In addition, the wiring route from the electrical parts such as the second starter sensor 2401 and the starter solenoid 2412 to the front part of the inter-unit connector 1060 has a pattern or pattern such as a decorative seal or a decorative sheet, and the rear part has a metallic luster. There are countless irregularities such as behind the plated part, the non-translucent member, etc., behind the wall-like part extending back and forth (for example, the peripheral wall part 2511a of the center accessory 2500), and the diffusion lens and texturing. It is desirable that the path pass through the rear of the formed portion, the portion away from the front of the light emitting means such as the LED provided later, and the like. This makes it difficult to see from the front the wiring that connects the electrical component and the front inter-unit connector 1060 .

[9-2. Second front unit of game board]
Next, as the front unit 6A in the game board 5A, a second front unit 6A2 different from the first front unit 6A1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 178 and 179. FIG. Figure 178 (a) is a front view showing the first front unit as the front unit shown in Figure 171 in the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is the first front unit in the game board of the second embodiment. [FIG. 12] is a front view showing a second front unit of a different form; Figure 179 is a front view showing a state in which the game board of the second embodiment, in which the second front unit shown in Figure 178(b) is attached to the rear unit, is attached to the body frame.

The second front unit 6A2 includes the layout of the obstacle nail N planted in the game panel 1100A, the front unit 2000, the certificate stamp pasted on the certificate stamp pasting section 1012, and the spec stamp pasted on the spec display section 1013. The configuration is the same as that of the first front unit 6A1 except for the seal. Below, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the first front unit 6A1, and the description thereof is omitted.

The front unit 2000 of the second front unit 6A2 is capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the game area 5a A gate 2010 is provided at a predetermined position inside the gate 2010 through which the game ball B can pass, and a gate 2010 is provided at the center in the horizontal direction below the center accessory 2500 and is always open to receive the game ball B. a first start port 2003, a second start port 2004 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate 2010, and the first start According to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B to the opening 2003 or the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004, either the game ball B is selected. and a large prize winning port 2005 that allows the acceptance of .

In addition, the front unit 2000 of the second front unit 6A2 is provided at the most downstream in the game area 5a, and is always open to receive the game ball B, and the game ball B that has been received is not returned. An out port 1008 for discharging outside the area 5a is provided.

In addition, the front unit 2000 of the second front unit 6A2 has a gate sensor 2011 that detects the game ball B passing through the gate 2010, and the lottery result of the normal design drawn by the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2011. A starting port solenoid 2412 for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 in response, and a second starting port sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 are provided.

In addition, the front unit 2000 of the second front unit 6A2 is selected according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by the detection of the game ball B by the first starting opening sensor 2101 (see FIG. 172) or the second starting opening sensor 2401 It is provided with an attacker solenoid 2414 for opening and closing the large winning opening 2005 and a large winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 .

The front unit 2000 of the second front unit 6A2 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. A side unit 2200 which is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 when viewed from the front and which has three general winning holes 2001, and a side unit 2200 which is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. and a side upper left unit 2300 .

In addition, the front unit 2000 of the second front unit 6A2 is provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. 2004 , a large winning opening 2005 , a second starting opening sensor 2401 , a starting opening solenoid 2412 , an attacker solenoid 2414 and a large winning opening sensor 2402 .

Further, the front unit 2000 of the second front unit 6A2 is provided above the attacker unit 2400 and has a gate member 2630 having a gate 2010 and a gate sensor 2011. As shown in FIG.

In front unit 2000 of second front unit 6A2, starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, and side upper left unit 2300 are the same as first front unit 6A1.

The attacker unit 2400 of the second front unit 6A2 is provided so that the second starting opening 2004 is positioned at the lower right corner of the game area 5a, and the big winning opening 2005 is the second starting opening 2004 and the first starting opening 2003. It is provided so as to be located between Also, the attacker unit 2400 is provided so that one general prize winning opening 2001 is positioned above the second starting opening 2004 . A gate 2010 is provided directly above the general prize winning opening 2001 .

Also, the attacker unit 2400 of the second front unit 6A2 has an attacker decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, although illustration is omitted. The attacker unit 2400 (the second starting port 2004 and the big prize winning port 2005) can be decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED of the attacker decoration board.

In addition, the attacker unit 2400 of the second front unit 6A2 is provided with a front inter-unit connector 1060 connected to the rear inter-unit connector 1150 of the rear unit 6B on the rear surface. In front of this inter-unit connector 1060, wires from the attacker unit 2400 second starting opening sensor 2401, big winning opening sensor 2402, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, attacker decoration board, gate sensor 2011, etc. are electrically connected. It is

Also in the attacker unit 2400 of the second front unit 6A2, similarly to the guide part 2122 of the starting opening unit 2100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 is pushed backward. A guide portion that guides the ball protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the second front unit 6A2 and is inserted into the ball socket 3101 of the back ball guide unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 .

The center accessory 2500 of the second front unit 6A2 includes a transparent frame-shaped center base 2511 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100A (panel plate 1110), and guides the game ball B from the outside of the center base 2511 to the inside of the frame. a possible warp passage 2512, a stage 2513 which is provided at the lower side of the frame of the center base 2511 and releases the game ball B, which has circulated in the warp passage 2512, into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction; It has

The center base 2511 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2511a extending in the front-rear direction, a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2511b protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2511a and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100A, and the peripheral wall portion. and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2511c protruding from the inner periphery of 2511a.

The warp passage 2512 is open at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2511a on the left side in front view and on the front side of the front surface of the game panel 1100A (panel plate 1110) so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. The warp passage 2512 can guide the entering game ball B to the stage 2513 .

The stage 2513 has a curved shape in which the central side in the left-right direction is depressed, and is positioned directly above the first start-up port 2003 of the start-up unit 2100, that is, the state in which the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100A. , is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2513 has a portion (central release portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portions 2513b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the stage 2513 is assembled on the game board 5</b>A, the raised portion (central release portion 2513 a ) at the center in the left-right direction is located directly above the first starting port 2003 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2003 with a very high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 of the second front unit 6A2 is provided with a guide passage 2526 having a width that allows the game balls B to circulate in a line at a portion above the center in the vertical direction on the right side. It is formed so that the game ball B struck to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 always passes through the guide passage 2526. - 特許庁A gate member 2630 (gate 2010 ) is provided downstream of the guide passage 2526 .

The gate member 2630 of the second front unit 6A2 is arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the game area 5a, between the guide passage 2526 of the center accessory 2500 and the attacker unit 2400, and the game panel It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 at 1100A. The gate member 2630 includes a gate 2010 for performing a lottery of normal symbols for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 by the passage of the game ball B, a gate sensor 2011 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2010, have. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2011 is a gate 2010 .

The second front unit 6A2 of the present embodiment includes, as described above, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2402, the starting opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the attacker decoration board (LED and LED driver), the gate sensor 2011, with a plurality of electrical components. These electric parts are provided in an area to the right of the center in the horizontal direction and below the center in the vertical direction of the front unit 6A, that is, the area in the lower right corner. More specifically, in the front unit 6A, the electric parts are provided in a right corner area near the right side, in other words, in an area far from the axis of the body frame 4 which is provided to be openable and closable.

In this second front unit 6A2, electric parts such as the second starting opening sensor 2401 and the big winning opening sensor 2402 are provided in the vicinity of each other. The area in which these electric parts are provided is provided in the area of 1/3 with respect to the whole game area 5a. Further, the inter-unit connector front 1060 is provided at or near the center of the area where the electrical components are provided. For this reason, the electrical components provided in the second front unit 6A2 are provided in the vicinity of the front 1060 of the inter-unit connector.

Therefore, according to the configuration of the second front unit 6A2, since the electrical components are gathered in a specific area, it is possible to easily gather the electrical wiring to the front 1060 of the inter-unit connector. The attacker unit 2400 provided at the lower right corner of the front unit 6A2 makes it easy to make the electric wiring connected to the front 1060 of the inter-unit connector difficult to see from the front through the transparent game panel 1100A (panel board 1110). can.

In addition, since the second front unit 6A2 of this embodiment does not have the second big winning opening 2012 compared to the first front unit 6A1, the player can enjoy a simpler game. can.

[9-3. Rear unit of game board]
Next, the rear unit 6B of the game board 5A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 172, 176, 180 and the like. FIG. 180(a) is an explanatory view showing the state in which the game board of the second embodiment is locked to the body frame by the rear unit lock member, and (b) shows the state in which the lock by the rear unit lock member is released. It is an explanatory diagram. The rear unit 6B of the game board 5A includes a mounting unit 1130 which can support the front unit 6A on the front surface and is detachably mounted on the main body frame 4, and a substrate mounted on the lower rear side of the mounting unit 1130. It comprises a holder 1200 , a main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 , and a function display unit 1400 for displaying game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 .

The main control unit 1300 of the rear unit 6B has a management seal sticking section 1301 to which a management seal is stuck (see FIG. 170). In this embodiment, the management sticker pasting section 1301 is provided on the board cover 1340 of the main control board box 1320 . The management seal (not shown) affixed to the management seal affixing portion 1301 includes a certificate stamp affixed to the certificate stamp affixing portion 1012 of the front unit 6A and a management seal affixed to the management seal affixing portion 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. On the other hand, contents that form a set are described so that it can be determined whether or not they are related to each other.

More specifically, the management seal attached to the management seal attaching portion 1301 of the main control unit 1300 has the manufacturer's code, the serial number, and the two-dimensional bar code. The two-dimensional bar code of the management seal includes information ID (for example, ID of the game board to be paired, ID of the main control board, ID of the peripheral control board to be paired, etc.), type, manufacturer code, Information such as the year of manufacture, serial number, etc. is entered. The manufacturer's code on the management seal is the same as the manufacturer's code on the certificate stamp. Also, the serial number written on the management sticker is the same as the serial number written on the certificate stamp, or is associated with the serial number on the certificate stamp. The management sticker attached to the main control unit 1300 has the same configuration as the management sticker attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 . Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not they are related (combined) with each other by comparing with the contents of the certificate stamp attached to the front unit 6A.

The main control unit 1300 has a locking piece 1321 elastically locked to the substrate holder 1200 at one end in the left-right direction, and a projecting piece (not shown) inserted into the substrate holder 1200 at the opposite end in the left-right direction. omitted), and The main control unit 1300 can be removed from the substrate holder 1200 by releasing the locking by the locking pieces 1321 .

The main control unit 1300 of the game board 5A of the second embodiment has the same configuration as the first specification main control unit 1300A of the game board 5 of the first embodiment. Note that the configuration may be the same as that of the second specification main control unit 1300B.

The board holder 1200 of the rear unit 6B has the same structure as the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 described above. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The function display unit 1400 has the same function as the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 and is provided so as to protrude from the front surface of the mounting base 1131 of the mounting unit 1130 .

The front surface of the function display unit 1400 is formed so as to match the front surface of the front component 1000A of the front unit 6A when the front unit 6A is attached to the rear unit 6B. As a result, when the front unit 6A is attached to the rear unit 6B, if the front surface of the function display unit 1400 and the front surface of the front structural member 1000A match, it can be seen that the front unit 6A is correctly attached and the function display is performed. If there is a step between the front surface of the unit 1400 and the front surface of the front component 1000A, it can be determined that the unit is not properly attached (insufficient attachment).

In addition, the rear unit 6B of the game board 5A includes a peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the mounting unit 1130, and an effect capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, which is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. A display device 1600, a panel relay board (not shown) disposed on the rear side of the mounting unit 1130 and relaying connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and attached to the rear surface of the mounting unit 1130 and a back unit 3000 to be installed.

The rear unit 3000 of the rear unit 6B is attached to the rear surface of the mounting unit 1130 via the rear box 3010. As shown in FIG. A performance display device 1600 is detachably provided on the rear surface of a back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is detachably provided on the rear surface of the performance display device 1600. - 特許庁

[9-3a. Mounting unit]
The mounting unit 1130 is for fixing the rear unit 6B to the body frame 4, and has the function display unit 1400 attached to the front surface, and the substrate holder 1200 and the rear unit 3000 via the rear box 3010 to the rear surface. is installed. The mounting unit 1130 has an external shape that is large enough to be inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the door frame 3, and is formed in the shape of a flat plate frame. The units, the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the like are visible from the front. The function display unit 1400 is attached near the upper left corner on the front surface of the mounting unit 1130 so as to protrude forward.

As shown in FIGS. 172 and 176, the mounting unit 1130 includes a mounting base 1131 having a substantially rectangular frame shape, a mounting reinforcing sheet metal 1132 attached to the rear side of the mounting base 1131, It has The mounting unit 1130 is provided at the upper right corner and the lower right corner of the mounting base 1131, and includes a board fixing portion 1133 for fixing to the body frame 4, and a game board fixing member 1134 provided in the board fixing portion 1133. , is equipped with

The mounting unit 1130 has a plurality of locking claws 1135 protruding forward from the front surface of the mounting base 1131, and a columnar shape from the front surface of the mounting base 1131. and a locating boss 1136 protruding forwardly. Further, the mounting unit 1130 has an opening 1137 that passes through the mounting base 1131 and exposes the mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132 forward, and two positioning units vertically spaced apart from each other on the left side of the mounting base 1131 . and a contact portion 1138 .

Further, the mounting unit 1130 has a notch portion 1139 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This cutout portion 1139 coincides with the cutout portion 1010 of the front component member 1000A and the cutout portion 1122 of the game panel 1100A. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 face forward through the notch 1139 .

Although not shown, the mounting unit 1130 has an out recess 1123 that is recessed near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side of the rear surface and that is open in the up-down direction. This out recess 1123 is provided at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front unit 6A.

The mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132 of the mounting unit 1130 is formed in a frame shape and provided along the entire circumference of the mounting unit 1130 . The mounting reinforcing sheet metal 1132 has a seat plate portion 1132a bent forward from the lower end (see FIG. 176). The attachment reinforcing sheet metal 1132 prevents the attachment unit 1130 from being distorted. In addition, the seat plate portion 1132a enhances the strength and rigidity of the attachment reinforcing sheet metal 1132, and when attached to the main body frame 4, the seat plate portion 1132a contacts the game board placing portion 501c of the main body frame base 501. , the load from the performance display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 attached behind the mounting unit 1130 can be sufficiently supported.

When the front unit 6A is attached to the rear unit 6B, the rear contact portion 1056a of the first connection fitting 1056 and the rear contact portion 1057a of the second connection fitting 1057 come into contact with the front surface of the mounting reinforcing sheet metal 1132 through the opening 1137. As a result, the mounting reinforcing sheet metal 1132 becomes part of the ground path for releasing static electricity from the outer rail 1001 and the like.

This mounting reinforcing sheet metal 1132 is provided at a predetermined distance (for example, 10 mm to 20 mm or more) from the decoration board and relay board provided in the front unit 2000 and rear unit 3000 of the front unit 6A. As a result, even if the mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132 is used as a part of the ground path, no discharge or short circuit occurs between the mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132 and the decoration substrate, relay substrate, or the like.

The board fixing portion 1133 of the mounting unit 1130 is provided so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the mounting base 1131 at two locations, the upper right corner and the lower right corner, when the mounting base 1131 is viewed from the front. These board fixing parts 1133 are formed so that they can be inserted from behind into corresponding board fixing part insertion grooves 1051 in the front unit 6A. As a result, when the front unit 6A is attached to the front surface of the rear unit 6B, if the upper and lower board fixing parts 1133 are inserted into the board fixing part insertion grooves 1051, the front unit 6A moves vertically and to the right with respect to the rear unit 6B. can be regulated, and the front unit 6A can be guided rearward.

With the front unit 6A attached, the front surface of the board fixing portion 1133 matches the front surface of the front component 1000A. The front surface of the board fixing portion 1133 is provided with a mounting recess 1133a which is recessed rearward and opens to the right, to which the game board fixing member 1134 is mounted (see FIG. 180).

The game board fixing member 1134 of the mounting unit 1130 is operated in a state where the rear unit 6B is inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame 4 to make the rear unit 6B unremovable. The game board fixing member 1134 is mounted in the mounting recess 1133a of the board fixing part 1133, and the tip side, which is the right end, is mounted so as to be rotatable about the axis in the vertical direction and slidable in the horizontal direction. It is

The game board fixing member 1134 has a wedge portion 1134a provided on the distal end side and an operating portion 1134b provided on the proximal end side. When the game board fixing member 1134 is in the lock position (see FIG. 180(a)), the wedge portion 1134a protrudes to the right from the right side of the mounting unit 1130, and is in the release position (see FIG. 180(b)). Then, the wedge portion 1134 a is retracted into the mounting unit 1130 . The game board fixing member 1134 is slid to the lock position and the wedge part 1134a is inserted into the game board lock groove 501q of the main body frame 4, thereby preventing forward movement of the rear unit 6B. The unit 6B can be fixed to the body frame 4.

When this game board fixing member 1134 is rotated around the front end side so that the operation part 1134b is pulled forward by operating the operation part 1134b so that the operation part 1134b is positioned more forward than the front of the board fixing part 1133, left and right It becomes slidable in the direction, and can be slid to the locked position or the unlocked position. Further, when the operating portion 1134b is retracted behind the front surface of the board fixing portion 1133, the operating portion 1134b is locked in the mounting recess 1133a and becomes immovable.

A lock claw 1135 of the mounting unit 1130 protrudes forward from the front surface of the mounting base 1131 in an inverted L shape. The lock claw 1135 has a guide portion 1135a obliquely provided at its tip. This lock claw 1135 is provided so as to be insertable into the insertion hole 1020a in the unit fixing portion 1020 of the front unit 6A. By engaging with , the forward movement of the front unit 6A can be blocked.

The positioning boss 1136 of the mounting unit 1130 protrudes forward from the front surface of the mounting base 1131 and is provided to be insertable into the positioning hole 1055 of the front unit 6A. By inserting the positioning bosses 1136 into the positioning holes 1055, the front unit 6A can be positioned vertically and horizontally on the front surface of the rear unit 6B. The positioning boss 1136 protrudes forward from the front surface of the mounting base 1131 so as to be shorter than the front surface of the board fixing portion 1133 .

As shown in FIG. 175, the positioning boss 1136 has a first positioning boss 1136a projecting long forward and a second positioning boss 1136b projecting shorter than the first positioning boss 1136a. are doing. As a result, when the front unit 6A is attached to the rear unit 6B, the front unit 6A can be guided rearward (to the rear unit 6B) in multiple stages, thereby improving the workability of the attachment and ensuring reliable positioning. I have to.

176, the rear contact portion 1056a of the first connection fitting 1056 and the rear contact portion 1057a of the second connection fitting 1057 of the front unit 6A are inserted into the opening 1137 of the mounting unit 1130. As shown in FIG. Through this opening 1137 , the rear contact portion 1056 a of the first connection fitting 1056 and the rear contact portion 1057 a of the second connection fitting 1057 come into contact with the front surface of the attachment reinforcing sheet metal 1132 .

A positioning contact portion 1138 of the mounting unit 1130 is recessed rearward from the front surface of the mounting base 1131 and is open leftward. The two positioning abutment portions 1138 are provided at a portion of the body frame 4 corresponding to the left position regulating member 531. When the rear unit 6B is attached to the body frame 4, the positioning abutment portions 1138 are aligned. The left position regulating member 531 abuts from the front. By bringing the left position regulating member 531 into contact with the positioning contact portion 1138, the left side of the mounting unit 1130 (rear unit 6B) can be regulated from moving forward and backward. can be positioned.

[9-3b. Peripheral control unit and effect display device of rear unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 and effect display device 1600 of the rear unit 6B will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 170 and 181 and the like. FIG. 181(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the peripheral control unit attached to the effect display device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the peripheral control unit removed from the effect display device. . The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. As shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is detachably attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 .

First, the peripheral control unit 1500 of the rear unit 6B includes a peripheral control board 1510 for controlling effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a transparent peripheral control board housing the peripheral control board 1510. It has a control board box 1520 and a management seal sticking section 1501 to which a management seal is stuck. In this embodiment, a management sticker attaching portion 1501 is provided on the rear surface of the peripheral control board box 1520 .

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images. The peripheral control board 1510 performs peripheral control so that the surface on which various electronic components such as the CPU, VDP, ROM, and IC constituting the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512 are mounted faces backward. Mounted in board box 1520 .

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the attacker decoration board and the second attacker decoration board of the front unit 2000, the decoration boards provided in the back and bottom effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000, actuators (motors and solenoids), position sensors, and the like. It is connected. In addition, the peripheral control unit 1511 includes the effect operation unit outer periphery decoration board 320 provided in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the contact detection body 352, the button outer decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the button inside decoration board 364, Operation button elevation drive motor 367, press detection sensor 373, elevation detection sensor 374, projection force detection sensor 375, projection force adjustment drive motor 381, door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, door frame Right side upper decoration board 432, door frame right side lower decoration board 433, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right decoration board 457, top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. It is connected. Furthermore, the peripheral control unit 1511 is connected to the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 .

The management seal (not shown) affixed to the management seal affixing portion 1501 includes a certificate stamp affixed to the certificate stamp affixing portion 1012 of the front unit 6A and a management seal affixed to the management seal affixing portion 1301 of the main control unit 1300. On the other hand, contents that form a set are described so that it can be determined whether or not they are related to each other.

More specifically, the management seal attached to the management seal attaching portion 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 has the manufacturer's code, the serial number, and the two-dimensional bar code. The two-dimensional bar code of the management seal includes information ID (for example, ID of game board to be paired, ID of main control board to be paired, ID of main control board to be paired, ID of main peripheral control board, etc.), type, manufacturer code, Information such as the year of manufacture, serial number, etc. is entered. The management sticker attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 has the same configuration as the management sticker attached to the main control unit 1300 . Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not they are related (combined) with each other by comparing with the contents of the certificate stamp attached to the front unit 6A.

The management sticker may be attached to the peripheral control board 1510 or may be attached to the ROM, CUP, VDP, etc. mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 .

The peripheral control board 1510 of the rear unit 6B has a ground connection portion 1513 and a peripheral side connector 1514 on the rear surface attached facing forward. The ground connection portion 1513 is provided at a portion near one end in the left-right direction of the peripheral control board 1510 . The ground connection portion 1513 is connected to the ground (GND) in the electronic circuit of the peripheral control board 1510 and formed in a planar shape.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated in the peripheral control board box 1520 , the ground connection part 1513 is aligned with the fitting opening 1523 in the front-rear direction. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached behind the effect display device 1600 , the ground connection portion 1513 is electrically connected to the shield sheet metal 1620 via the ground metal fitting 1623 by contacting the tip of the ground metal fitting 1623 .

The peripheral-side connector 1514 is provided at a portion near the end on the side opposite to the ground connection portion 1513 in the left-right direction. The peripheral-side connector 1514 is inserted into the connection opening 1524 while the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated in the peripheral control board box 1520 . The peripheral side connector 1514 is for transmitting a video signal from the effect display control unit 1512 in the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display device 1600, and is attached to a connection relay board 1624 in the effect display device 1600, which will be described later. is connected to the display-side connector 1625 that is present.

The peripheral control board box 1520 of the rear unit 6B is formed in a transparent thin box-like shape in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated, so that the internal peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized from the outside. The peripheral control board box 1520 is elongated in the left-right direction, and has a mounting piece 1521 projecting outward from one end face in the left-right direction and a mounting recess 1522 recessed at the opposite end face. are doing.

In addition, the peripheral control board box 1520 has a fitting opening 1523 penetrating at a position close to the mounting piece 1521 at the front when attached to the effect display device 1600, and at a position near the mounting recess 1522 on the front. and a connection opening 1524 . The metal fitting opening 1523 is provided at a portion corresponding to the ground connection portion 1513 of the peripheral control board 1510 , and the connection opening 1524 is provided at a portion corresponding to the peripheral side connector 1514 .

The peripheral control board box 1520 has its front surface slanted with respect to the horizontal direction so that the attachment piece 1521 approaches the surface of the effect display device 1600, and the attachment piece 1521 is attached to the attachment locking portion of the rear cover 1621. 1621b, the front surface is set parallel to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600, and the attachment/detachment lock member 1622 is slid to insert the projection 1622a into the mounting recess 1522, so that the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 can be installed.

Although not shown in detail, when the protrusion 1622a of the detachable lock member 1622 is inserted into the mounting recess 1522, the protrusion 1622a causes the peripheral control board box 1520 (peripheral control unit 1500) to move through the mounting recess 1522. It is configured to be pushed toward the forward effect display device 1600 side. This ensures the connection between the peripheral-side connector 1514 and the display-side connector 1625, which will be described later.

The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100A via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. With the game board 5A assembled, the effect display device 1600 allows the display screen to be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100A, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and the mounting unit 1130. can be done.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED backlight, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 of the rear unit 6B includes a shield metal plate 1620 made of a metal plate provided on the rear side of the display screen, a rear cover 1621 provided behind the shield metal plate 1620, and a rear cover 1621 slidable. and a detachable lock member 1622 for detaching the attached peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board box 1520).

In addition, the effect display device 1600 of the rear unit 6B includes a ground metal fitting 1623 whose base end is attached to the shield metal plate 1620 and whose tip extends rearward through the rear cover 1621, the shield metal plate 1620 and the rear cover 1621. and a display side connector 1625 attached to the connection relay board 1624 and connected to the peripheral side connector 1514 of the peripheral control board 1510 . The connection relay board 1624 may be attached to the shield metal plate 1620 or may be attached to the rear cover 1621 . The connection relay board 1624 of this embodiment is attached to the shield metal plate 1620 .

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the shield sheet metal 1620 has approximately the same size as the entire rear surface of the display screen (display device main body).

The rear cover 1621 is formed of a transparent resin, and is provided at one end in the left-right direction of the rectangular mounting area 1621a elongated in the left-right direction to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted. a metal fitting opening 1621c through which the ground metal fitting 1623 passes through at a portion near the mounting locking portion 1621b in the mounting region portion 1621a; and a metal fitting opening 1621c in the mounting region portion 1621a. has a connector opening 1621d through which the display-side connector 1625 passes through at a portion near the end on the opposite side in the left-right direction.

The attachment locking portion 1621b of the rear cover 1621 protrudes rearward in an inverted L shape from the rear surface of the rear cover 1621, and is provided with its tip toward the center of the attachment area portion 1621a. The attachment piece 1521 of the peripheral control board box 1520 is inserted between the tip of the attachment locking portion 1621b and the rear surface of the rear cover 1621. As shown in FIG.

The attachment/detachment locking member 1622 is provided so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the rear cover 1621, and has a protrusion 1622a protruding in the left-right direction at its rear end. The detachable lock member 1622 is slidable in the left-right direction outside the attachment region portion 1621a on the rear surface of the rear cover 1621, on the opposite side of the attachment locking portion 1621b with the attachment region portion 1621a therebetween. is provided. The attachment/detachment lock member 1622 is provided such that a protrusion 1622a protrudes toward the center of the attachment region 1621a. A protrusion 1622a of the attachment/detachment lock member 1622 is formed so as to be insertable into the mounting recess 1522 of the peripheral control board box 1520 .

The base end of the ground metal fitting 1623 is attached to the rear surface of the shield metal plate 1620 , and the tip extends rearward of the rear cover 1621 through the metal fitting opening 1621 c of the rear cover 1621 from the base end. The ground fitting 1623 obliquely extends rearward from the base end, and the vicinity of the tip end is bent forward in an arc shape. The ground metal fitting 1623 is formed of a metal spring material having conductivity and elasticity, and is electrically connected to the shield metal plate 1620 .

When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment region portion 1621 a , the ground metal fitting 1623 contacts the ground connection portion 1513 of the peripheral control board 1510 at its tip and is electrically connected to the ground of the peripheral control board 1510 . Although detailed illustration is omitted, the ground metal fitting 1623 has a fork-like tip branched into a plurality of parts, and contacts the ground connection part 1513 at a plurality of points. Also, a plurality of ground metal fittings 1623 may be provided.

The connection relay board 1624 is connected to an FPC 1626 (flexible printed wiring board) extending from the display device main body of the effect display device 1600 , and the wiring from the FPC 1626 is connected to the display side connector 1625 . In other words, the connection relay board 1624 includes a display side connector 1625 that is connected to the peripheral side connector 1514 and serves as an IN side connector, and an FPC connector that is connected to an FPC 1626 from the performance display device 1600 and serves as an OUT side connector. 1624a and are provided. The display-side connector 1625 is connected to the peripheral-side connector 1514 of the peripheral control board 1510 by attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the attachment region 1621a.

Next, attachment/detachment of the peripheral control unit 1500 to/from the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 in the rear unit 6B will be described with reference to FIG. In the state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment area portion 1621a of the effect display device 1600, the attachment piece 1521 of the peripheral control board box 1520 engages the attachment of the rear cover 1621 as shown in FIG. 181(a). A protrusion 1622a of a detachable lock member 1622 is inserted into the mounting recess 1522 of the peripheral control board box 1520 and positioned at the lock position. As a result, the peripheral control board box 1520 (peripheral control unit 1500) cannot be removed.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, as shown in FIG. 170, a plurality of connectors are exposed rearward on the rear surface of the peripheral control unit 1500, and these connectors are connected to the main control board 1310, the relay board, and the like. The connector of the connected wiring (harness) is connected.

In this state, the tip of the ground metal fitting 1623 of the effect display device 1600 is in contact with the ground connection portion 1513 of the peripheral control board 1510 . The ground metal fitting 1623 is formed of an elastic metal spring material, and its tip is in contact with the ground connection part 1513 so as to press (bias) it backward. Thereby, the ground of the electronic circuit of the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the shield metal plate 1620 via the ground connection portion 1513 and the ground fitting 1623 .

More specifically, the shield sheet metal 1620 on the back side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display device) is for enhancing noise resistance, and is preferably electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. desirable. For this reason, in this embodiment, a ground metal fitting 1623 made of an elastic metal piece is raised from the shield metal plate 1620 on the back side of the effect display device 1600, and is electrically connected to the GND (ground connection portion 1513) of the peripheral control board 1510. I am trying to connect. Furthermore, since the ground metal fitting 1623 has a fork-like tip, any one of the branched tips comes into contact with the ground connection portion 1513 to ensure electrical connection.

Also, in this state, the peripheral side connector 1514 of the peripheral control board 1510 and the display side connector 1625 of the effect display device 1600 are connected. Thereby, the video signal from the effect display control section 1512 in the peripheral control board 1510 can be transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the peripheral side connector 1514 and the display side connector 1625 to display the effect image.

When removing the peripheral control unit 1500 from the effect display device 1600, first, all wiring connectors connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 from behind are removed. Then, the attachment/detachment lock member 1622 is slid away from the peripheral control unit 1500 (released position), and the protrusion 1622a at the tip is removed from the mounting recess 1522 of the peripheral control board box 1520 in the peripheral control unit 1500. In this state, the peripheral control unit 1500 is rotated around the mounting piece 1521 on the opposite side in the horizontal direction so that the side of the mounting recess 1522 of the peripheral control unit 1500 moves rearward to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Make it slanted.

At this time, the peripheral connector 1514 of the peripheral control unit 1500 moves in an arc around the mounting piece 1521 side, and the peripheral connector 1514 moves in a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. becomes. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the peripheral connector 1514 is provided at a position far from the attachment piece 1521, the peripheral connector 1514 moves along an arc with a large radius. As a result, the tangential direction of the arc, which is the movement locus of the peripheral connector 1514, becomes closer to the front-rear direction (joining direction) at the portion where the peripheral connector 1514 and the display connector 1625 are joined. The inclination of the moving direction of the side connector 1514 becomes slight with respect to the front-rear direction, and the peripheral side connector 1514 is smoothly removed from the display side connector 1625 of the effect display device 1600 .

After that, the peripheral control unit 1500 can be removed from the performance display device 1600 by moving the peripheral control unit 1500 obliquely rearward and pulling out the attachment piece 1521 from between the attachment locking portion 1621b and the rear cover 1621 .

On the other hand, when attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 after the performance display device 1600, it can be attached by performing the procedure opposite to the above.

By the way, conventionally, inputs to a liquid crystal display device such as the effect display device 1600 are generally performed via FPC (Flexible Printed Circuit Board) or FFC (Flexible Flat Cable). In the factory, the FPC or the like extending from the liquid crystal display device is connected to the connector provided on the peripheral control board. This connection work is difficult for non-experts, and connection failure often occurs due to oblique connection or shallow insertion.

From such a problem, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the connection work of the FPC or the like from being performed by the replacement worker of the peripheral control unit 1500, the connection relay board 1624 is provided on the back side of the effect display device 1600, and the FPC 1626 and the connection relay board are provided. 1624 (FPC connection connector 1624a) is made by a skilled person at the factory, and the connection relay board 1624 and the peripheral control board 1510 can be easily connected. That is, by providing the connection relay board 1624, the type of connector to be connected is changed.

Therefore, for example, if the peripheral-side connector 1514 and the display-side connector 1625 are used as drawer connectors, and the connection between the connection relay board 1624 and the peripheral control board 1510 is made by the drawer connector, the connection can be made without worrying about fine positioning. It is possible. Since the drawer connector is relatively expensive and costly, the peripheral-side connector 1514 and the display-side connector 1625 are inter-board connectors (board-to-board connectors) that are generally used when stacking boards. board connector).

Thus, in this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is newly provided with the connection relay board 1624, which has not been provided in the pachinko machine so far, and the connection relay board 1624 is provided with the peripheral side connector of the peripheral control unit 1500. A display-side connector 1625 that is directly connected to 1514 is provided. The display-side connector 1625 is an IN-side connector of the connection relay board 1624, and connects an FPC 1626 extending from the effect display device 1600 to an FPC connector 1624a, which is an OUT-side connector of the connection relay board 1624. ing. The display-side connector 1625 and the peripheral-side connector 1514 are of a type that can be reliably connected even by an amateur (for example, a drawer connector, a board-to-board connector (inter-board connector), etc.). That is, by providing the connection relay board 1624 between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display device 1600, the type of connector to be connected is changed.

As a result, in the factory of the pachinko machine 1, an expert first connects the connector of the FPC 1626 to the FPC connector 1624a of the connection relay board 1624, and then connects (inserts and removes) the connector 1625 on the display side. Since it is not necessary to touch the FPC 1626, even an unskilled person can reliably connect the display-side connector 1625 and the peripheral-side connector 1514, and even an unskilled person can perform the effect display without causing any trouble. Peripheral control unit 1500 can be attached to and detached from device 1600 . That is, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control unit 1500) can be replaced without touching the FPC 1626 extending from the effect display device 1600. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost of reusing the effect display device 1600 and to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the effect display device 1600 can be easily reused.

In addition, since the connection relay board 1624 is attached to the effect display device 1600 (shield sheet metal 1620), even if the display side connection connector 1625 of the connection relay board 1624 is repeatedly inserted and removed from the peripheral side connection connector 1514, the connection relay board Since 1624 is stationary, the FPC 1626 from the effect display device 1600 does not move, and the change in the position of the FPC 1626 does not make it easier to pick up noise. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit 1500 is replaced, noise does not occur, and the player can be entertained with a noise-free and excellent effect image, and the player's interest can be suppressed. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Also, when attaching and detaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to and from the performance display device 1600, the attachment piece 1521 of the peripheral control board box 1520, which is far from the peripheral side connector 1514 of the peripheral control unit 1500, is the center of rotation. ing. As a result, the peripheral-side connector 1514 moves along an arc with a large radius, and at the portion where the peripheral-side connector 1514 and the display-side connector 1625 are joined, the movement locus of the peripheral-side connector 1514 corresponds to the movement locus of the peripheral connector 1514 . Since the tangential direction of the arc is close to the front-rear direction (joining direction), the inclination of the moving direction of the peripheral connector 1514 is different from the inserting/removing direction (joining direction) between the display connector 1625 and the peripheral connector 1514. Therefore, the peripheral side connector 1514 can be smoothly and directly connected to the display side connector 1625, and attachment/detachment work of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be facilitated.

In the above, the peripheral side connector 1514 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the display side connector 1625 provided on the connection relay board 1624 of the effect display device 1600 are directly connected. Although the configuration shown in FIG. FIG. 182(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a state in which the peripheral control unit is attached to the performance display device in a form different from that in FIG. is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the connection of .

In the embodiment of FIG. 182, a peripheral control board 1510 and a connection relay board 1624 each have a signal conversion function, and a peripheral-side connector 1514 and a display-side connector 1625 are provided with connectors 1631 at both ends. A harness 1630 is used for connection.

More specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a transceiver IC 1515 for converting a video signal into a serial signal, and the connection relay board 1624 is provided with a receiver IC 1627 for converting a serial signal into a video signal. A peripheral connector 1514 connected to the transceiver IC 1515 of the peripheral control board 1510 and a display connector 1625 connected to the receiver IC 1627 of the connection relay board 1624 are connected to both ends of a harness 1630 made of a twisted cable. A connector 1631 is joined to connect the peripheral control board 1510 and the connection relay board 1624 (see FIG. 182(b)).

In this embodiment, the peripheral side connector 1514 is provided on the surface (rear surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the connection opening 1524 is provided on the rear side of the peripheral control board box 1520 . In addition, in the effect display device 1600, the connector opening 1621d (connection relay board 1624) of the rear cover 1621 is provided outside the attachment region 1621a.

The transceiver IC 1515 of the peripheral control board 1510 and the receiver IC 1627 of the connection relay board 1624 are the same. can be used.

The video signals (RGB signals) transmitted between the peripheral control board 1510 and the connection relay board 1624 (effect display device 1600) are roughly divided into DE (data enable signal), HS (horizontal synchronization signal), VS ( 8 bits for R (red signal), 8 bits for G (green signal), 8 bits for B (blue signal), and at least 28 signal lines for PCLK (clock signal). For example, the "BU17074KV" transceiver IC manufactured by Rohm Corporation can transmit this with only two wires (DFTX+ and DFTX-). Although the frequency of the signal increases accordingly, it is possible to route a relatively long distance by transmitting differential signals and transmitting them with a twisted cable (harness 1630). Note that in FIG. 182(b), in addition to the two electric wires (DFTX+ and DFTX-), the ground line is also a twisted wire. With this configuration, it is more resistant to noise than using ordinary twisted pair wires.

Therefore, if the video signal is transmitted in the form of a serial signal, the number of electric wires can be dramatically reduced in comparison with the LVDS method and the RGB method by adopting the configuration of this embodiment, and the connector for connection can be reduced. In addition, even an inexperienced worker can reliably connect, and the connection work becomes easier. In this embodiment, the reliability of the replacement work of the front unit 6A can be further improved by implementing the above-described measures.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 182, the same effects as those of the embodiment of FIG. 181 can be obtained.

In the above peripheral control unit 1500, the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 are provided on one peripheral control board 1510. However, the peripheral control unit 1511 is not limited to this. In addition to the provided peripheral control board 1510, an effect display control board provided with the effect display control section 1512 may be provided. In this case, the peripheral-side connector 1514 connected to the display-side connector 1625 of the connection relay board 1624 is provided on the performance display control board.

[9-3c. Back unit of rear unit]
Next, the rear unit 3000 of the rear unit 6B will be described. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a second sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2003 of the front unit 2000. A box-like opening 3010a is attached to the rear surface of the mounting unit 1130 in the rear unit 6B behind the game panel 1100A (the front unit 6A) and the opening 3010a in the rear wall. a lock slider 3020 detachably attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and the effect display device 1600; and a back substrate unit 3040 .

The rear unit 3000 of the rear unit 6B includes a rear inter-unit connector 1150 connected to the front inter-unit connector 1060 of the front unit 6A, and a rear ball guiding unit 3100 provided at the lower front end inside the rear box 3010. , the back bottom effect unit 3600 provided behind the back ball induction unit 3100 in the back box 3010, the back top effect unit 3620 provided in the upper corner in the back box 3010, and the left corner in the back box 3010 A back left effect unit 3640 provided and a back right effect unit 3660 provided at the right corner inside the back box 3010 are provided.

The back bottom effect unit 3600, the back top effect unit 3620, the back left effect unit 3640, and the back right effect unit 3660 in the back unit 3000 can show predetermined movable effects and light emitting effects to the player according to the progress of the game. It is possible.

The rear inter-unit connector 1150 of the rear unit 6B is provided at the lower right corner of the rear unit 3000 when viewed from the front, and attached to the front surface of the rear ball guide unit 3100 . The inter-unit connector rear 1150 is exposed forward through the frame of the frame-shaped mounting unit 1130 . After the inter-unit connector 1150, the main control board 1310, the panel relay board, the peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board, etc. are connected to the wiring toward the front unit 6A. After this inter-unit connector 1150 is a drawer connector.

The back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 of the rear unit 6B is attached to the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, and is formed in a shape such that both ends extending left and right are bent upward. The back ball guiding unit 3100 is formed substantially entirely transparent. The back ball guidance unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting opening sensor 2101 that detects the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2003. , is equipped with

In addition, the back ball induction unit 3100 includes a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, a second big winning opening 2012, and a sub-out opening in the front unit 2000 of the front unit 6A. 2021 receives the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100A and discharges it toward the ball receiving port 711a of the board unit 700 in the main body frame 4 below.

This back ball guiding unit 3100 has a ball receiving opening 3101 to which the game ball B received by the winning opening such as the general winning opening 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021 of the front unit 2000 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100A is transferred. have. The ball socket 3101 protrudes forward in a cylindrical or gutter shape, and is a gutter-like shape protruding rearward from the front unit 6A (front unit 2000) when the front unit 6A is attached to the front surface of the rear unit 6B. A guide 2122 is inserted inside (see FIG. 177).

The tip of the ball socket 3101 of the back ball guide unit 3100 protrudes forward from the front surface of the mounting base 1131 of the mounting unit 1130 . Therefore, when attaching the front unit 6A to the rear unit 6B, the front unit 6A can be guided to a predetermined position of the rear unit 6B by inserting the guide portion 2122 of the front unit 6A.

Further, when the guide portion 2122 is inserted into the ball socket 3101 , a step is formed at the rear end of the guide portion 2122 so that the bottom of the guide portion 2122 is higher than the bottom of the ball socket 3101 . Due to this step, the game ball B received in the winning opening such as the first starting opening 2003 is transferred from the guiding portion 2122 to the ball receiving opening 3101 and is played on the rear wall provided behind the ball receiving opening 3101. To make the bounced game ball B bounce back to the downstream side by coming into contact with a step even if the ball B hits or the game ball B which comes after comes in contact with the preceding game ball B and bounces back to the upstream side. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning to the winning opening by preventing the ball from flowing back to the winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing backward and returning to the prize winning opening even though it was once received (winning a prize), and giving the player a sense of distrust when the game ball B can be seen from the winning prize opening. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can surely entertain the player with receiving the game ball B into the prize-winning hole and suppress the decline of the player's interest in the game. .

[9-4. Attachment and detachment to the main frame and replacement of the front unit in the game board of the second embodiment]
Next, attachment/detachment of the game board 5A of the present embodiment to/from the main frame 4 and replacement of the front unit 6A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 183 to 185 and the like. Figure 183 is a front view showing the game board of the second embodiment shown in Figure 169 attached to the body frame. 184 is a front view showing a state in which the front unit of the game board is removed from the state of FIG. 183. FIG. FIG. 185(a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the game board of the second embodiment attached to the body frame from the side, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the state in which the front unit is removed in (a). is. First, attachment and detachment of the game board 5A to and from the body frame 4 will be described.

The game board 5A is shipped from the factory with the front unit 6A (first front unit 6A1) and the rear unit 6B attached to each other. Incidentally, the game board 5A is shipped when only the game board 5A is shipped, and when the game board 5A is shipped together with the outer frame 2, the door frame 3, and the main body frame 4, that is, the entire pachinko machine 1 is shipped. There are cases. Here, a case of shipping only the game board 5A will be described.

At the time of shipment of the game board 5A, the contents of the certificate stamp pasted on the certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 of the first front unit 6A of the game board 5A, and the management seal pasting portion 1301 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear unit 6B. The content of the management sticker attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 and the content of the management sticker attached to the management sticker attaching portion 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are related to each other.

More specifically, the certificate stamp pasted on the first front unit 6A1 includes an association certificate of a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the type of game board, the name of the manufacturer, the code of the manufacturer, the serial number, and a two-dimensional bar code. Are listed. On the other hand, the management seal attached to the main control unit 1300 and the peripheral control unit 1500 of the rear unit 6B describes the manufacturer's code, serial number, and two-dimensional bar code. The certificate stamp and control seal have the same manufacturer's code and the same or related serial numbers. The content (information) of the two-dimensional bar code written on the certificate stamp and the management seal can be displayed by using a predetermined bar code reader. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not they are related to each other from the contents of the attached certificate stamps and management seals.

First, on the side of the game hall where the game board 5A (pachinko machine 1) is installed, the door frame 3 of the corresponding pachinko machine 1 attached to the island facility is opened, and the game board attached to the main body frame 4 is removed. state. To remove the game board, the game board lock member 505 attached to the front surface of the main body frame 4 is rotated from the lock position to the release position, and the lock member (same as the game board fixing member 1134) provided on the game board is turned. member) from the locked position to the unlocked position. In this state, the right side of the game board is pulled forward and slanted, and the left side of the game board is pulled out from the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 of the main body frame 4 to move forward, thereby removing the game board from the main body frame 4. Can be removed.

The game board 5A is attached to the main body frame 4 with the game area 5a of the game board 5A facing forward, and with the left side of the game board 5A positioned more rearward than the right side. While inserting the game board 5A into the game board insertion opening 501b of the frame 4 and placing the lower surface of the game board 5A on the game board placing portion 501c of the main body frame 4, the left side of the game board 5A is reinforced with a U-shaped main body frame. Insert into frame 530 . At this time, the game board 5A is inserted so that the positioning contact portion 1138 provided on the left side of the game board 5A comes into contact behind the left position regulating member 531 of the body frame 4. FIG.

Subsequently, the right side of the game board 5A is moved backward and inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b. As a result, a part of the out recessed portion 1123 of the game board 5A is inserted into the game board restricting portion 501d of the main body frame 4, and the game board 5A is restricted from moving in the horizontal direction and the rearward direction.

In this state, the game board fixing member 1134 provided on the board fixing part 1133 of the game board 5A (rear unit 6B) is slid from the release position to the right lock position, and the wedge part 1134a is moved to the body frame 4. It is inserted into the game board lock groove 501q (see FIG. 180). Also, the game board lock member 505 of the main body frame 4 is rotated from the release position to the lock position, and a part of the game board lock member 505 is inserted into the game board lock groove 1058 of the game board 5A (front unit 6A). (See Figure 173).

As a result, the game board 5A is attached to the body frame 4 (see FIG. 183). In this state, the game board 5A is pressed backward against the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

After attaching the game board 5A to the main body frame 4, the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2, and behind the game board 5A, the main control unit 1300 (main control board 1310) and the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral The control board 1510) is connected to the payout control board 633 of the payout control unit 620d of the board unit 700 (board unit 620, board unit 620A) of the body frame 4, the interface board 635 of the interface unit 620e, etc. using a predetermined wiring cable. to connect.

After that, the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and then the door frame 3 is closed to complete the installation of the game board 5A. When the door frame 3 is closed, the front contact portion 1057c of the second connection fitting 1057 projecting from the front surface of the game board 5A (front unit 6A) contacts the rear surface of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 made of the metal plate of the door frame 3. do. As a result, a ground path is constructed for releasing static electricity from the outer rail 1001 to the ground on the game hall side.

Next, replacement of the front unit 6A with the game board 5A attached to the body frame 4 will be described. When replacing the front unit 6A from the first front unit 6A1 to the second front unit 6A2, a game board replacement set (not shown) is shipped from the factory. The game board replacement set includes the second front unit 6A2, the main control unit 1300 for the second front unit 6A2, the peripheral control unit 1500 for the second front unit 6A2, and the like.

First, in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the body frame 4 to expose the front surface of the body frame 4 forward. In addition, the door frame 3 may be removed. Then, the unit fixing member 1021 is slid from the lock position to the release position in the unit fixing portions 1020 provided at the upper left corner, upper right corner, and lower right corner of the game board 5A (first front unit 6A1).

More specifically, in a state where the first front unit 6A1 (front unit 6A) is fixed and locked to the rear unit 6B in the unit fixing portion 1020, as shown in FIG. 174(a), the unit fixing member 1021 is It is in the lock position, and the lock piece 1021b is engaged with the lock claw 1135 of the rear unit 6B inserted into the insertion hole 1020a. As a result, the forward movement of the first front unit 6A1 is prevented, and the first front unit 6A1 is in a non-removable state. Then, when the unit fixing member 1021 is moved (slid) to the release position, the lock piece 1021b moves away from the lock claw 1135 and is not engaged with the lock claw 1135 (see FIG. 174(b)).

Also, the game board lock member 505 provided on the body frame 4 is rotated from the lock position to the release position, and the game board lock member 505 is released from the game board lock groove 1058 of the first front unit 6A1 (front unit 6A). get rid of

In this state, the first front unit 6A can be moved forward with respect to the rear unit 6B, so the first front unit 6A is moved forward and removed from the rear unit 6B. At this time, the front inter-unit connector 1060 provided on the rear surface of the first front unit 6A is disconnected from the rear inter-unit connector 1150 provided on the front surface of the rear unit 6B, and the first front unit 6A1 and the rear unit 6B are separated. An electrical connection such as an electrical signal between the and is released.

Further, when the first front unit 6A1 is removed from the rear unit 6B and moved forward, the rear contact portion 1056a of the first connection fitting 1056 and the rear contact portion 1057 of the second connection fitting 1057 projecting from the rear surface of the first front unit 6A1. The portion 1057a is separated from the attachment reinforcing sheet metal 1132 of the attachment unit 1130 in the rear unit 6B, and the electrical connection between the first connection fitting 1056 and the second connection fitting 1057 is released.

With the first front unit 6A removed, only the rear unit 6B of the game board 5A is attached to the body frame 4 (see FIG. 184). After this state, the movement of the unit 6B is regulated by the left position regulating member 531 of the body frame 4 whose left side is in contact with the upper and lower positioning contact portions 1138, and the right side is fixed to the upper and lower game boards. The movement is restricted by the game board lock groove 501q of the body frame 4 into which the wedge portion 1134a of the member 1134 is inserted. Therefore, the rear unit 6B does not come off from the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The center of gravity of the rear unit 6B is located behind the mounting unit 1130 attached to the body frame 4 (see FIG. 185). Therefore, even if the movement regulation by the game board fixing member 1134 or the like is released for some reason, the rear unit 6B will not come off from the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame 4 as if falling forward. As a result, it is possible to ensure the safety of the replacement work of the front unit 6A.

In this embodiment, the game board fixing member 1134 and the unit fixing member 1021 are separately provided. In the case of a configuration in which the 6B is almost never detached by tipping forward, the game board fixing member 1134 and the unit fixing member 1021 may be used together.

After removing the first front unit 6A1, the second front unit 6A2 is attached to the front surface of the rear unit 6B. The second front unit 6A2 is attached by inserting the left side between the front surface of the mounting unit 1130 of the rear unit 6B and the left position regulating member 531 of the body frame 4 with the play area 5a facing forward. Later, the rear surface on the right side is brought into contact with the front surface of the rear unit 6B. The second front unit 6A2 is in a state in which the unit fixing members 1021 provided at the upper left corner, upper right corner, and lower right corner are in the released position (the arrow points to the "x" mark).

At this time, since the rear unit 6B has the board fixing part 1133 projecting forward from the front surface of the mounting base 1131, the board fixing part 1133 is inserted into the board fixing part insertion groove 1051. Thus, the second front unit 6A2 can be roughly aligned with the rear unit 6B. Then, when the tip of the board fixing part 1133 reaches the board fixing part insertion groove 1051, the board fixing part 1133 can be used as a guide to move the second front unit 6A2 rearward along the board fixing part 1133.

As the second front unit 6A2 moves rearward, first, the first positioning bosses 1136a having a long forward projection length are inserted into the corresponding positioning holes 1055, and then the first positioning bosses 1136a are inserted into the corresponding positioning holes 1055. A second locating boss 1136b, which is shorter than 1136a, is inserted into the corresponding locating hole 1055. As shown in FIG. As a result, the second front unit 6A2 is positioned gradually with respect to the rear unit 6B, and then completely positioned.

In addition, in the second front unit 6A2 (front unit 6A), the guide portion 2122 of the starting port unit 2100 projects rearward, and the guide portion 2122 is the ball socket of the back ball guide unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 of the rear unit 6B. It is inserted into 3101 and is also guided by ball socket 3101 .

Also, when the second front unit 6A2 moves rearward toward the rear unit 6B, the front inter-unit connector 1060 provided behind the attacker unit 2400 in the second front unit 6A2 moves to the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the rear unit 6B. It engages the inter-unit connector rear 1150 provided in front of the . In this embodiment, drawer connectors are used for the front 1060 and rear 1150 inter-unit connectors, and the second front unit 6A2 and rear unit 6B are connected via the front 1060 and rear 1150 inter-unit connectors. An electrical connection such as an electrical signal is reliably established between.

Further, when the second front unit 6A2 moves rearward, the rear contact portion 1056a of the first connection fitting 1056 and the rear contact portion 1057a of the second connection fitting 1057 protruding from the rear surface of the second front unit 6A2 move toward the rear unit 6B. The mounting unit 1130 passes through the opening 1137 of the mounting base 1131 and abuts on the front surface of the mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132 . At this time, the spring portion 1056b of the first connection fitting 1056 and the rear spring portion 1057b of the second connection fitting 1057 are elastically deformed, and the respective rear contact portions 1056a and 1057a urge the attachment reinforcing sheet metal 1132 rearward. be in contact with it.

The rear contact portion 1056a of the first connection fitting 1056 and the rear contact portion 1057a of the second connection fitting 1057 are brought into contact with the attachment reinforcing sheet metal 1132, whereby the first connection fitting 1056 and the second connection provided at positions apart from each other are connected. The metal fitting 1057 is electrically connected.

Further, by moving the second front unit 6A2 to the rear unit 6B, the lock claw 1135 protruding forward from the mounting base 1131 of the rear unit 6B moves to the insertion hole of the unit fixing portion 1020 of the second front unit 6A2. 1020a. Then, when the rear surface of the second front unit 6A2 is brought into contact with the front surface of the rear unit 6B (mounting unit 1130), the units provided in the upper left corner, upper right corner, and lower right corner of the second front unit 6A2 are fixed. The unit fixing member 1021 provided in each of the sections 1020 is slid from the unlocked position to the locked position (the position where the arrow of the unit fixing member 1021 points to the mark "O").

As a result, the lock piece 1021b of the unit fixing member 1021 is engaged with the lock claw 1135 while being inserted into the insertion hole 1020a, thereby fixing the second front unit 6A to the rear unit 6B in an unremovable state. be. At this time, a gap is formed between the second front unit 6A2 and the rear unit 6B by the guide portion 1021c provided at the tip of the lock piece 1021b and the guide portion 1135a provided at the tip of the lock claw 1135. Even if there is, the second front unit 6A2 is guided rearward by the guiding action of the slanted guide portion 1021c and the guide portion 1135a, and the rear surface of the second front unit 6A2 reliably contacts the front surface of the rear unit 6B. state.

Since the front inter-unit connector 1060 and the rear inter-unit connector 1150 are provided behind the unit fixing portion 1020 at the lower right corner, as described above, the unit fixing member 1021 is pushed backward by moving to the lock position. Thus, the front inter-unit connector 1060 can be strongly pressed against the rear inter-unit connector 1150, and the front inter-unit connector 1060 and the rear inter-unit connector 1150 can be sufficiently engaged.

In this embodiment, a certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 is provided on the front surface of the unit fixing member 1021 provided in the unit fixing portion 1020 at the lower right corner of the second front unit 6A2 (the front unit 6A). Since the certificate stamp is affixed to the portion 1012, when the operator slides the unit fixing member 1021, the certificate stamp affixed to the certificate stamp affixed portion 1012 comes into view, and the content described on the certificate stamp is displayed. can be confirmed, and erroneous attachment of the wrong second front unit 6A2 can be avoided.

In addition, together with the fixing (locking) by the unit fixing member 1021, the game board lock member 505 provided on the main body frame 4 is rotated from the release position to the lock position, and a part of the game board lock member 505 is released into the game. Insert into board lock groove 1058 . As a result, the second front unit 6A2 is pressed against the rear unit 6B by the game board lock member 505, and the second front unit 6A2 is attached to the rear unit 6B.

In this way, the second front unit 6A2 can be attached to the rear unit 6B, and the replacement work from the first front unit 6A1 to the second front unit 6A2 is completed. It should be noted that the main control unit 1300 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are not compatible with only replacing the second front unit 6A2, so the main control unit 1300 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are also replaced.

Subsequently, to replace the main control unit 1300 and the peripheral control unit 1500, first, the body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2, and the main control unit 1300 (main control board 1310) and the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control Remove the wiring connected to the substrate 1510). Then, by operating the locking piece 1321 of the main control unit 1300 , the locking with the substrate holder 1200 is released, and the main control unit 1300 is removed from the substrate holder 1200 .

In addition, in the peripheral control unit 1500, the attachment/detachment lock member 1622 on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 is slid from the lock position to the release position, and the protrusion 1622a of the attachment/detachment lock member 1622 is pulled out from the mounting recess 1522 of the peripheral control unit 1500. . Then, while moving the mounting recess 1522 side of the peripheral control unit 1500 backward and tilting it, the mounting piece 1521 on the side opposite to the mounting recess 1522 is pulled out from the mounting locking portion 1621b, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is removed.

During this removal, by moving the peripheral control unit 1500 backward, the peripheral side connector 1514 is disconnected from the display side connector 1625, and the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the connection relay board 1624 is released. Also, the ground connection portion 1513 of the peripheral control board 1510 is separated from the ground fitting 1623, and the connection between the GND (ground) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the shield sheet metal 1620 is released.

After removing the main control unit 1300 and the peripheral control unit 1500, the main control unit 1300 included in the game board replacement set is attached to the board holder 1200, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the performance display device 1600. These attachments are performed by reversing the procedure described above. Also, when attaching the main control unit 1300 and the peripheral control unit 1500, the content of the management seal attached to the management seal attaching portion 1301 and the management seal attached to the management sticker attaching portion 1501 are changed. Check the contents and install it correctly.

After replacing the main control unit 1300 and the peripheral control unit 1500, the previously removed wires are connected to respective predetermined connectors. This completes the replacement work on the rear side of the game board 5A.

After that, the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 is closed. When the door frame 3 is closed, the front contact portion 1057c of the second connecting fitting 1057 protruding forward of the second front unit 6A2 attached to the body frame 4 via the rear unit 6B contacts the door frame 3. Contact the door frame reinforcing unit 110 . At this time, the front spring portion 1057 d of the second connection fitting 1057 is elastically deformed, and the front contact portion 1057 c is biased (pressed) against the door frame reinforcing unit 110 . As a result, the outer rail 1001 in the second front unit 6A2 is electrically connected to the ground on the game hall side via the first connection fitting 1056, the mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132, the second connection fitting 1057, and the door frame reinforcement unit 110. A connected state is established, and a ground path is constructed for releasing static electricity from the outer rail 1001 .

Thus, the replacement work by the game board replacement set on the game hall side is completed, and the player can play the game by the second front unit 6A2 different from the first front unit 6A1 without replacing the entire game board 5A. can entertain.

In the above example, the main control unit 1300 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are replaced together with the main control unit 1300 in the rear unit 6B. Also good. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is not replaced, for example, when the performance contents are not changed, a plurality of performance contents corresponding to the game specifications (main control unit 1300) are stored in advance in the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. If there is, and if the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with a changeover switch according to the game specifications, and the like.

[9-5. Modification 1 of the game board of the second embodiment]
Next, Modified Example 1 of the game board 5A of the second embodiment will be described. In the above-described embodiment, a wiring cable having connectors at both ends is used for exchanging electric signals between the game board 5A and the main body frame 4, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, direct connection by connectors may be used. FIG. 186 is a modification 1 of the game board of the second embodiment, (a1) is an explanatory view schematically showing the lower right corner of the game board from the front with the game board attached to the main body frame, and (a2 ) is an explanatory diagram showing (a1) from the side, (b1) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the lower right corner of the game board removed from the main body frame from the front, and (b2) is an explanatory view showing the game board as the main body. It is an explanatory view schematically showing from the side along with the game board in a state in which the frame has been removed. FIG. 187(a) is an explanatory diagram showing FIG. 186(a1) in plan view, and FIG. 187(b) is an explanatory diagram showing FIG. 186(b2) in plan view.

More specifically, the body frame 4 includes a connector support portion 506 provided in the game board insertion opening 501b of the body frame base 501, and a body frame side connector 507 attached to the front surface of the connector support portion 506. , is provided. The body frame side connector 507 includes a first body frame side connector 507 a connected to the dispensing control board 633 and a second body frame side connection connected to the door frame sub-relay board 105 via the interface board 635 . and a connector 507b. The first main body frame side connection connector 507a and the second main body frame side connection connector 507b are arranged in rows in the left-right direction.

The connector support portion 506 is provided at the lower right corner of the game board insertion opening 501b when viewed from the front. The front surface of the connector support portion 506 is inclined such that the right end is positioned further rearward than the left end. The body frame side connector 507 is attached so as to protrude perpendicularly to the front surface of the connector support portion 506 .

The body frame 4 also has a game board fixing groove 508 recessed downward at a portion in front of the connector support part 506 in the game board placing part 501c. A part of the fixed operating portion 1145 of the game board 5A is inserted into the game board fixing groove 508 . The game board fixing groove 508 has a front wall (front wall) slanted so that the lower end is positioned more rearward than the upper end. As a result, the game board 5A can be pushed rearward through the fixed operation part 1145 by the tilted front wall to the extent that the fixed operation part 1145 is rotated and its tip is inserted downward. The connection connector 1142 can be firmly engaged with the body frame side connection connector 507 all the way.

On the other hand, on the game board 5A, at the lower right corner in the front view, a mounting seat portion 1140 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the mounting unit 1130 of the rear unit 6B and a connector substrate 1141 attached to the rear surface of the mounting seat portion 1140 are provided. and a game board side connector 1142 attached to the rear surface of the connector board 1141 are provided. The mounting seat portion 1140 is positioned in front of the connector support portion 506 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the game board 5A is attached to the main body frame 4, and its rear surface is parallel to the front surface of the connector support portion 506 of the main body frame 4. As shown in FIG. 187(a), the right end is positioned behind the left end.

The connector board 1141 is elongated in the left and right direction and is attached to the rear surface of the attachment seat portion 1140 . The game board side connector 1142 is attached to the rear surface of the connector board 1141 so as to protrude perpendicularly to the board surface of the connector board 1141 .

The game board side connector 1142 has a first game board side connector 1142a connected to the main control board 1310 and a second game board side connector 1142b connected to the peripheral control board 1510. there is The first game board side connection connector 1142a and the second game board side connection connector 1142b are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction. The first game board side connector 1142a is engaged with the first main body frame side connector 507a, and the second game board side connector 1142b is engaged with the second main body frame side connector 507b.

In addition, the game board 5A includes a concave portion 1144 which is recessed from the front surface of the mounting seat portion 1140 and is open downward, and a fixed operating portion 1145 which is rotatably provided in the concave portion 1144. there is The fixed operation part 1145 is formed in a semi-disk shape, and the rotating shaft extending in the front-rear direction is positioned between the first game board side connector 1142a and the second game board side connector 1142b when viewed from the front. are doing. The fixed operation part 1145 has a release position (see FIG. 186(b1)) where the whole is positioned above the lower end of the game board 5A, and a part that protrudes below the lower end of the game board 5A. 186(a1)) and the locked position.

Types of connectors used for the main body frame side connector 507 and the game board side connector 1142 in Modification 1 include drawer connectors, board-to-board connectors (board-to-board connectors), and the like.

In this modified example 1, when the game board 5A is attached to the main body frame 4, the connector supporting portion 506 of the main body frame 4 and the mounting seat portion 1140 (connector substrate 1141) of the game board 5A face each other. The first main frame side connector 507a and the first game board side connector 1142a are engaged, and the second main frame side connector 507b and the second game board side connector 1142b are engaged. ing. Thus, the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310 are connected via the first main body frame side connector 507a and the first game board side connector 1142a. Also, the interface board 635 (door frame secondary relay board 105) and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected via the second main body frame side connector 507b and the second game board side connector 1142b.

In this state, the front surface of the connector support portion 506 of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the mounting seat portion 1140 of the game board 5A are parallel to each other, and the right end of each is located behind the left end thereof. inclined to Therefore, the direction of engagement between the main frame side connector 507 and the game board side connector 1142, which is perpendicular to the front surface of the connector support portion 506 and the rear surface of the mounting seat portion 1140, is positioned rightward as it goes forward. Inclined.

In this state, the fixed operating portion 1145 is in the locked position, and a part of the fixed operating portion 1145 is inserted (inserted) into the game board fixing groove 508 of the body frame 4, and the fixed operating portion The game board 5A is pushed backward by 1145 . Since this fixed operation part 1145 is provided between the first game board side connector 1142a and the second game board side connection connector 1142b in a front view, the backward pressing force from the fixed operation part 1145 is It acts evenly on the first game board side connector 1142a and the second game board side connector 1142b. Due to this pressing force, the game board side connector 1142 is firmly engaged with the body frame side connector 507 all the way to the back.

Next, when removing the game board 5A from the main body frame 4, the fixed operation part 1145 is rotated from the lock position to the release position, a part of the fixed operation part 1145 is pulled out from the game board fixing groove 508, and the fixed operation part The entire 1145 is positioned above the lower end of the game board 5A. Then, as described above, the right side of the game board 5A is pulled forward, and the left side of the game board 5A is rotated so that the left side becomes the central axis. It is removed from the body frame 4 by moving it forward as if it were pulled out.

At this time, since the direction of engagement between the main body frame side connector 507 and the game board side connector 1142 is inclined to the right as it goes forward, the game board side connector 1142 is engaged. It will move in a direction close to the direction. As a result, the game board side connector 1142 is smoothly pulled out (separated) from the main body frame side connector 507 .

On the other hand, when the game board 5A is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board 5A can be attached to the main body frame 4 and the game board 5A can be attached to the main body frame side connector 507 by performing the procedure opposite to the above. The board-side connector 1142 can be engaged in good condition.

As described above, according to Modification 1, only by attaching the game board 5A to the main body frame 4, the main body frame side connector 507 and the game board side connector 1142 are engaged with each other, and the main body frame 4 and the game board are connected. Wiring connection such as electric signals between 5A can be automatically performed. Therefore, when the game board 5A is attached or detached, it is not necessary for the operator to insert or remove the connector of the wiring cable. occurrence can be eliminated.

Further, according to the first modification, when the game board 5A is attached to the main body frame 4, electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5A is automatically established by the main body frame side connector 507 and the game board side connector 1142. When the game board 5A is removed from the main body frame 4, the electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5A is automatically released by the main body frame side connector 507 and the game board side connector 1142, The attachment and detachment work of the game board 5A with respect to the body frame 4 can be facilitated. At this time, since the board fixing portion 1133 for attaching the game board 5A to the main body frame 4 is provided in front of the main frame side connector 507 and the game board side connector 1142, the game board is fixed by the board fixing portion 1133. 5A can be pressed against the body frame 4, and the connection between the body frame side connector 507 and the game board side connector 1142 can be ensured.

Further, according to the first modification, since the main body frame 4 and the game board 5A are electrically connected by the main body frame side connector 507 and the game board side connector 1142, the main body frame 4 and the game board 5A are electrically connected. Since the wiring cable does not extend between the parts, the wiring cable is not caught or pinched by other parts, and there is no fear of disconnection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5A, so that electrical connection is established. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects in

For example, if the main body frame side connector 507 and the game board side connector 1142 are drawer connectors, the connection can be made without worrying about fine positioning, and the workability of the replacement work can be improved. .

[9-6. Modification 2 of the game board of the second embodiment]
Next, Modified Example 2 of the game board 5A of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 188 and the like. FIG. 188 is a modification 2 of the game board of the second embodiment, and (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the front unit provided with a movable certificate stamp pasting auxiliary member together with the rear unit and the body frame from the side, (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing the front unit provided with a movable certificate stamp pasting assisting member having a form different from that of (a), together with the rear unit and the body frame, from the side. In the above embodiment, in the front unit 6A of the game board 5A, the configuration in which the certificate stamp sticking portion 1012 is provided on the front surface of the unit fixing member 1021 of the unit fixing portion 1020 is shown. It is good also as a structure as shown to.

Modification 2 includes a housing recess 1065 recessed from the front surface of the front unit 6A of the game board 5A, and a certificate stamp pasting auxiliary member 1066 which is housed in the housing recess 1065 and rotatably supported at one end. and is prepared. This certificate stamp sticking auxiliary member 1066 is provided with a certificate stamp sticking portion 1012 on a surface facing in the front-rear direction when accommodated in the accommodation recess 1065 .

In the example of FIG. 188(a), the certificate stamp affixing assisting member 1066 is formed in a flat plate shape, and its rotating shaft is provided in the vicinity of the front end of the front unit 6A. In the example of FIG. 188(b), the certificate stamp affixing assisting member 1066 is formed in an L shape when viewed from the side, and the rotary shaft is provided near the rear end of the front unit 6A.

This certificate stamp pasting assisting member 1066 is provided so that at least a part thereof protrudes outward from the front projection range of the front unit 6A when it is not housed in the housing recess 1065 . Therefore, if the front unit 6A is attached to the front surface of the rear unit 6B attached to the body frame 4 in this state, the certificate stamp pasting auxiliary member 1066 abuts the body frame 4. FIG. As a result, the operator who performs the replacement work of the front unit 6A can be made aware of the existence of the certificate stamp attaching auxiliary member 1066, and the certificate stamp attached to the certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 of the certificate stamp attaching auxiliary member 1066 can be removed. can be visualized. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the contents described on the certificate stamp, and to avoid mounting the wrong front unit 6A.

188(a), even when the front unit 6A is attached to the rear unit 6B attached to the main body frame 4, the certificate stamp attaching auxiliary member 1066 can be attached. Alternatively, a unit fixing portion 1020 (unit fixing member 1021) for attaching the front unit 6A to the rear unit 6B may be provided at the bottom of the housing recess 1065. FIG. Therefore, in order to operate the unit fixing member 1021, it is necessary to rotate the certificate stamp attaching auxiliary member 1066. It is possible to confirm the contents described in the above, and it is possible to further exhibit the same effects as described above.

Also, the certificate stamp affixing auxiliary member 1066 may be formed of a transparent member. As a result, the back side of the certificate stamp stuck to the certificate stamp sticking part 1012 of the certificate stamp sticking auxiliary member 1066 can be seen, the color of the certificate stamp can be confirmed even from the back side, and an illegal trace on the certificate stamp can be found. can be made easier. In detail, for example, if the certificate stamp is colored so that the game board 5A can be distinguished by the color, the front unit 6A to which the certificate stamp is stuck is correct even if the certificate stamp is not seen from the front side. It is possible to determine whether or not

[9-7. Other modifications of the game board of the second embodiment]
Next, another modified example of the game board 5A of the second embodiment, which is different from the above, will be described. First, in the above-described embodiment, the moving member such as the unit fixing member 1021 and the certificate stamp pasting auxiliary member 1066 is provided with the certificate stamp sticking portion 1012. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 may be provided in a non-movable portion.

In this case, it is desirable that the certificate stamp pasting section 1012 be provided adjacent to the unit fixing section 1020 for fixing the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B to each other. As a result, when operating the unit fixing member 1021 of the unit fixing portion 1020 in the replacement work of the front unit 6A, the certificate stamp attached to the certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 provided adjacently is within the field of view of the operator. It is possible to confirm the description contents of the certificate stamp and to prevent the wrong front unit 6A from being attached.

Further, in the above embodiment, as a means for discriminating that the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B are a pair (combination discrimination means), the certificate stamp attached to the front unit 6A and the main control of the rear unit 6B are used. Although the management stickers affixed to the unit 1300 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are used to make a determination based on the content described therein, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following configuration may be employed. As another configuration of the discrimination means, for example, the speckle attached to the front unit 6A, the management seal attached to the main control unit 1300 or the peripheral control unit 1500 or a seal other than the management seal, may be used for determination. Alternatively, the combination discrimination means may be a dedicated seal different from the certificate stamp, spec seal, and management seal described above. Colors, patterns, designs, barcodes, two-dimensional barcodes, and the like may be used as the pair discrimination means.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the second front unit 6A2 has a structure different from that of the first front unit 6A1 in terms of the arrangement of the obstructing nail N and the front unit 2000. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be the same as that of the front unit 6A1. In this case, the shape and color of the design part of the front unit 2000 (for example, the side unit 2200, the center accessory 2500, etc.), the shape and color of the spec seal, etc. It is desirable that the difference in game specifications from the secondary unit 6A2 is conspicuous. With such a configuration, the shape and color of the design section, the shape and color of the spec sticker, etc., function as a "group discriminating means" indicating that the main control unit 1300 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are paired.

Further, in the above embodiment, the unit fixing member 1021 for fixing the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B to each other is slidable between the lock position and the release position, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may rotate between the locked position and the unlocked position.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the game board fixing member 1134 for attaching the rear unit 6B of the game board 5A to the main body frame 4 is provided in the rear unit 6B, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be provided on the body frame 4 .

In the above embodiment, the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B of the game board 5A are directly connected by the front inter-unit connector 1060 and the rear inter-unit connector 1150, which are drawer connectors. However, a wiring cable having connectors at both ends may be used to electrically connect the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B. In this case, the cost is reduced because a relatively expensive drawer connector is not used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the inter-unit connector front 1060 of the front unit 6A is provided on the rear surface of the attacker unit 2400, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the panel holder 1120A, the starter unit 2100, the second attacker unit 2450, the center accessory 2500, etc. may be provided on the rear surface. When the inter-unit connector front 1060 is provided on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120A, most of the panel holder 1120A located outside the game area 5a allows the inter-unit connector front 1060 and the inter-unit connector front 1060 to be connected to the electric parts. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a good appearance by making it difficult to see the wiring between and from the front.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the inter-unit connector rear 1150 of the rear unit 6B is provided on the front surface of the rear unit 3000. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the mounting unit 1130 may be provided with an opening or a notch for the rear 1150 of the inter-unit connector to face forward, and then the mounting unit 1130 may be provided on the front surface of the fixing piece 3010e of the back box 3010. .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the game board 5A, the wiring from the electric parts such as the second starting port sensor 2101 and the starting port solenoid 2412 provided in the front unit 6A are concentrated in the inter-unit connector front 1060. , the wiring extending from the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the rear unit 6B to the front unit 6A side is concentrated in the rear inter-unit connector 1150, and the front inter-unit connector 1060 and the rear inter-unit connector 1150 are connected. Although the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B are electrically connected by connecting the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B, the present invention is not limited to this. 6A and the rear unit 6B may be electrically connected. Specifically, for example, the connectors provided on the electrical components of the front unit 6A and the connectors provided on the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the relay board, etc. of the rear unit 6B are connected at both ends. A wiring cable having a connector may be used to connect them. In this case, in the rear unit 6B, it is desirable to provide the mounting unit 1130 and the back case 3010 of the back unit 3000 with through-holes or notches through which the wiring cables pass. In such a configuration, when the front unit 6A is replaced, the connectors at both ends of the wiring cable may be removed from the connectors of the front unit 6A only, and the wiring cable may be reused, or the rear unit 6B may be used. It is also possible to replace the entire wiring cable by removing only from the connector. As a result, there is no need to use a relatively expensive drawer connector, and an increase in the cost of the game board 5A can be suppressed.

As described above, when a wiring cable having connectors on both ends is used for the electrical connection between the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B, the orientation of the connectors provided on the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B is sideways. Alternatively, the connector provided on the rear unit 6B may be oriented rearward.

Further, as described above, when a wiring cable having connectors at both ends is used for electrical connection between the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B, a large number of wires are required between the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B. Since the cables will be extended, it is desirable to provide a wiring bundling means (for example, a spiral tube, a binding band, a harness holder, etc.) for bundling (bundling) the wiring cables. As a result, the disjointed wiring cables do not become an obstacle or get caught on other members and break.

For electrical connection between the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B, for example, an inter-unit connector front 1060 is provided on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120A of the front unit 6A, and a mounting unit 1130 and a back box 3010 of the rear unit 6B are provided. The fixed piece 3010e is provided with a through hole or a notch through which the front inter-unit connector 1060 protrudes rearward, and the front inter-unit connector 1060 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the fixed piece 3010e is provided with a rear inter-unit connector. 1150, or a connection connector at the tip of a wiring cable extending from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, or the like may be connected.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the attachment unit 1130 is configured separately from the back unit 3000 in the rear unit 6B of the game board 5A. may be configured to be a part of Specifically, for example, in the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000, the flange-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end can be attached to the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame 4. It is formed into a shape and provided with a reinforcing sheet metal on its front or rear surface. A board fixing part 1133, a game board fixing member 1134, a lock claw 1135, a positioning boss 1136, a positioning contact part 1138, and a notch part 1139 are attached to the fixing piece part 3010e of the back box 3010 in the same manner as the mounting unit 1130. and the function display unit 1400 is attached. As a result, there is no need to separately provide the mounting unit 1130, and an increase in the cost of the game board 5A can be suppressed.

Also, in the above embodiment, the front unit 6A of the game board 5A is provided with electric parts such as the second starter sensor 2101, the starter solenoid 2412, and the attacker decoration board (LED and LED driver). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front unit 6A may be configured without electrical components. Specifically, for example, in the case of a winning opening unit having a winning opening door for opening and closing the winning opening, such as the attacker unit 2400, the entire winning opening unit is provided in the rear unit 6B, and the game panel 1100A (panel plate 1110) is provided with the winning opening unit. An opening into which the winning opening unit is inserted from the rear may be provided, and the winning opening and the winning opening door may project forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . Alternatively, the front unit 6A is provided with a winning opening and a winning opening door for opening and closing the winning opening, and the rear unit 6B is provided with a sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening and a winning opening. An actuator (for example, a solenoid or a motor) for opening and closing the door may be provided, and the drive from the actuator may be transmitted to the winning entrance door. In other words, the front unit 6A is assembled to the rear unit 6B such that the electric parts such as the second starting opening sensor 2401, the starting opening solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the big winning opening sensor 2402, etc. are provided in the rear unit 6B. At times, it may be connected to the ball passage of the second starting port 2004 or the big prize winning port 2005 or the opening/closing mechanism.

As described above, the gate sensor 2011 is provided in the rear unit 6B and the gate member 2630 of the front unit 6A is opened rearward as the gate 2010 in the case where the front unit 6A is not provided with electrical parts. The gate sensor 2011 may be inserted into the gate member 2630 from behind. Alternatively, like the second guide passage 2522 in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, the gate 2010 is guided backward from the front surface of the game panel 1100A and then returned to the front surface of the game panel 1100A. In addition, the gate passage may be divided into the front unit 6A side and the rear unit 6B side, and the gate sensor 2011 may be provided on the rear unit 6B side of the gate passage.

Furthermore, as described above, when the front unit 6A is not provided with electrical components, the following configuration can be used. For example, in the rear unit 6B, a light-emitting means such as an LED that emits light forward may be provided behind a portion of the front unit 6A that is desired to be decorated with light. Further, the front unit 6A may be provided with light guide means for decorating a specific portion with light from the rear, and the rear unit 6B may be provided with light emitting means such as an LED for irradiating light to the light guide means. In this way, by configuring the front unit 6A with no electric parts, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the front unit 6A.

In the above-described embodiment, the attachment reinforcing sheet metal 1132 is formed in a frame shape, but is not limited to this. It may be formed in a strip shape, or made up of a plurality of metal plates, or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first connection metal fitting is used as the electrical connection between the outer rail 1001 and the mounting reinforcing sheet metal 1132 and the electrical connection between the mounting reinforcing sheet metal 1132 and the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame 3. 1056 and the second connection metal fitting 1057 are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and electrical connection is achieved by directly connecting (joining) the connection connectors provided on both sides. Alternatively, the connectors provided on both sides may be electrically connected to each other by a wiring cable provided with connectors at both ends.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, as the grounding path of the mounting reinforcing sheet metal 1132, the one that penetrates the game panel 1100A and is connected to the front door frame 3 was shown, but the game panel 1100A is not limited to this. It may be connected to the main body frame 4 by penetrating through, or may be connected to the front door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 by bypassing the side surface of the game panel 1100A.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ground connection portion 1513 of the peripheral control board 1510 and the shield sheet metal 1620 of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected by the plate spring-like ground metal fitting 1623. It is not limited, and electrically connected using a leaf spring made of conductive resin, a coil spring made of metal or conductive resin, a conductive foam, a conductive sponge, or the like. You can do it.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the ground connection portion 1513 connected to the ground. A metal plate connected to the ground of the substrate 1510 may be provided, and the metal plate may be brought into contact with the ground fitting 1623 .

[10. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The game board 5A of the present embodiment is the game board of the present invention, the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5A of the present embodiment is the guide rail of the present invention, and the mounting unit 1130 of the present embodiment is a mounting reinforcement sheet metal. Reference numeral 1132 denotes the metal plate of the present invention, the front 1060 of the inter-unit connector, the rear 1150 of the inter-unit connector, the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400, the peripheral control board 1510, the gate sensor 2011, and the first start opening sensor 2101 in this embodiment. , the second starting sensor 2401, the big winning sensor 2402, the starting solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the second attacker solenoid 2451, the second big winning sensor 2452, and the general winning sensor 3001 are electrical parts of the present invention. , respectively.

[11. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the metal outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000A of the front unit 6A of the game board 5A guides the game ball B into the game area 5a, Generation of static electricity due to contact with the game ball B can be reduced compared to the case of guiding. The portion of the outer rail 1001 that the game ball B comes into contact with first (the portion near the downstream end) is the portion where the game ball B comes into contact with the strongest force, so that high static electricity is likely to be generated. is electrically connected to the attachment reinforcement sheet metal 1132 of the rear unit 6B via the first connection fitting 1056, the static electricity generated by the contact of the game ball B is immediately grounded. It is possible to escape via the reinforcing sheet metal 1132, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of electric discharge or short circuit between the outer rail 1001 and other members, thereby suppressing the occurrence of troubles. At this time, since the mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132 is provided behind the game panel 1100A, the mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132 can be made difficult to see from the front, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is not deteriorated, and troubles due to static electricity occur. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a good appearance while preventing

In addition, since the metal outer rail 1001 that guides the game ball B to the game area 5a is grounded via the mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132, the statically charged game ball B is placed in the game area. Even if the game ball B is to be supplied into the inside 5a, static electricity can be removed from the game ball B by contacting the outer rail 1001 and being guided. Therefore, since the game ball B that is not charged can be supplied into the game area 5a, problems caused by supplying the game ball B that is charged into the game area 5a (for example, the game ball B and Problems caused by discharge or short-circuit between the sensor, problems caused by discharge or short-circuit between the game ball B and the LED or the board, etc.). It is possible to prevent the player from giving a pleasant feeling, and to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132 is provided at a position away from the electrical parts such as the main control board 1310 and the gate sensor 2011, and the ground path of the mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132 is connected forward through the game panel 1001. Therefore, the mounting reinforcing sheet metal 1132 and its ground path are kept away from the electrical components provided behind the game panel 1100A. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of electrical discharge or short circuit between the attachment reinforcing sheet metal 1132 (grounding path) and the electrical components provided behind the game panel 1100A, so that the electrical components are not damaged by static electricity. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing the occurrence of troubles such as the occurrence of noises and making players feel uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to the troubles, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the games. can be provided with certainty.

In addition, a mounting reinforcing sheet metal 1132 connected to the ground is provided behind the game panel 1100A, and since the mounting reinforcing sheet metal 1132 has a larger area (volume) than the outer rail 1001, the large mounting reinforcing sheet metal 1132 can It can be expected that static electricity from 1001 will be diffused and weakened (voltage will be lowered), and discharge and short-circuiting will be less likely to occur.

Further, when the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B are attached to each other, the outer rail 1001 and the mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132 are automatically electrically connected by the first connection fitting 1056 and the second connection fitting 1057. Therefore, the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B can be separated and attached easily, and the time required for changing the game specifications and the model by exchanging the front unit 6A can be shortened as much as possible. can be done.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the game board 5A is composed of the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B that can be separated back and forth, the body frame 4 attached to the island facility of the game hall When you want to change the game specifications or model of the game board 5A installed in the game board 5A, only the front unit 6A of the game board 5A needs to be replaced, and the game specification or model can be changed without replacing the entire game board 5A. The change can be easily made, and the cost required for changing the game specifications and model can be reduced compared to the case of replacing the entire game board 5A. At this time, since the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B are inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the game board attached to the main body frame 4 can stand on its own. Even if the front unit 6A is removed from 5A and only the rear unit 6B is attached to the main body frame 4, the rear unit 6B inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame 4 independently moves forward. You will never fall. Therefore, it is not necessary to support the rear unit 6B so that it does not fall down from the main body frame 4, and the labor involved in removing (replacement) the front unit 6A can be simplified, and workability can be improved. In this way, the front unit 6A can be easily attached to and removed from the game board 5A from the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island facility of the game hall. Since it is possible to carry out the replacement work of the front unit 6A at the game hall without taking it to the factory, the time required for changing the game specifications and model can be shortened as much as possible, and the cost for the change can be reduced, the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 (island facility) in the game hall can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, since the rear unit 6A of the game board 5A has a mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132 having the same size as the outer shape of the game board 5A, the presence of the mounting reinforcement sheet metal 1132 increases the strength and rigidity of the rear unit 6B. can be enhanced. Therefore, since it is possible to easily equip the rear unit 6B with a heavy production device (a production unit such as the back side production unit 3600, the production display device 1600, etc.), a production device that can entertain the player more is provided. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the strength and rigidity of the rear unit 6B are high due to the attachment reinforcing sheet metal 1132, there is no need to share the strength with the game panel 1100A of the front unit 6A. It is possible to configure the front unit 6A with other materials, and it is possible to reduce the weight and cost of the front unit 6A.

Furthermore, since the rear unit 6B is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 1136, when the rear unit 6B and the front unit 6A are attached to each other, the front unit 6A is guided by the positioning bosses 1136 to the rear unit 6B. The front unit 6A can be positioned at the correct position. Therefore, even if the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B are separable, there will be no problem due to misalignment between the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B. It is possible to make it easy to separate. As described above, since the pachinko machine 1 can be easily replaced with the front unit 6A, the game specifications and the model can be easily changed by replacing the front unit 6A, and the same effects as described above can be obtained. It is possible to reliably provide the pachinko machine 1 that plays

In addition, since the plurality of positioning bosses 1136 are composed of a first positioning boss 1136a and a second positioning boss 1136b having different forward projection lengths, the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B can be attached to each other. At this time, the first positioning boss 1136a protruding forward for a long time initially guides the front unit 6A, and as the front unit 6A approaches the rear unit 6B, the second positioning boss 1136a with a short protruding length guides the front unit 6A. 1136b also guides the front unit 6A, and the front unit 6A can be guided in multiple stages with respect to the rear unit 6B. Accordingly, at the initial stage, the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B can be roughly aligned, so that the mounting operation of the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B can be facilitated. can.

Further, since the front unit 6A is provided with a certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 to which a certificate stamp is stuck, the front unit 6A (first front unit 6A1) of the game board 5A which was initially attached to the main body frame 4 also has a certificate stamp. Therefore, by comparing the content written on the certificate stamp with the content of the management sticker pasted on the management sticker pasting section 1301 of the main control unit 1300 of the rear unit 6B, the front unit 6A can be confirmed, and attachment of the wrong front unit 6A or the incorrect front unit 6A can be avoided.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of obstacle nails N, a plurality of winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2003, the game panel 1100A, and the certificate stamp (certificate stamp pasting unit 1012) are Since the front unit 6A as the provided functional part is provided so as to be replaceable from the game board 5A attached to the body frame 4, the game board 5A of the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island equipment of the game hall. On the other hand, only the front unit 6A can be removed without removing the entire game board 5A from the body frame 4 when the game specification or model is desired to be changed. By replacing the front unit 6A with a different game specification and model prepared in advance, the game specification and model can be changed in the game hall, and the game specification and model can be easily changed. Machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, as described above, by replacing the front unit 6A as a functional unit in the game hall, it is possible to easily change the game specifications and model, so that the time required for changing the game specifications and model can be minimized. In addition, it is possible to reduce the cost required for change, suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 (island facility) in the game hall, and reduce the burden on the game hall side. be able to.

Further, since the front unit 6A as a functional unit is provided with a certificate stamp sticking portion 1012 to which a certificate stamp is stuck on the front surface of the unit fixing member 1021, the worker does not need to attach the unit fixing member to replace the front unit 6A. When looking at the unit fixing member 1021 to operate 1021, the certificate stamp provided in the certificate stamp pasting part 1012 comes into the field of vision, and the certificate stamp is not overlooked. Therefore, the content of the certificate stamp provided in the front unit 6A can be confirmed without fail, and it is possible to prevent the front unit from being replaced with a wrong front unit or an illegal front unit.

In addition, in the front unit 6A as a functional unit, a certificate stamp is attached adjacent to the unit fixing member 1021 operated when replacing the game board 5A attached to the main body frame 4. Since the member 1066 is movably provided, the front unit 6A can be attached to the main body frame 4 of the game board 5A while the certificate stamp pasting auxiliary member 1066 is moving to the outside of the game board 5A. If an attempt is made to attach to the remaining portion (rear unit 6B), the certificate stamp pasting auxiliary member 1066 moving outward will interfere with the attachment, or even if it can be attached, the door will be opened from the front of the main body frame 4. When the door frame 3 is to be closed, the door frame 3 cannot be closed or can be closed by the certificate stamp pasting auxiliary member 1066 moving forward. Therefore, when attaching the front unit 6A to be replaced to the rear unit 6B attached to the body frame 4, the certificate stamp pasting assisting member 1066 can be moved and accommodated in the accommodation recess 1065. FIG. When moving the certificate stamp sticking auxiliary member 1066, the certificate stamp stuck to the certificate stamp sticking part 1012 of the certificate stamp sticking auxiliary member 1066 comes into the field of view of the operator, so that the contents of the certificate stamp can be surely confirmed. , the compatibility with the rear unit 6B attached to the body frame 4 can be confirmed (verified) by the contents described on the certificate stamp, and an incorrect front unit or an illegal front unit can be attached. can be avoided.

Furthermore, when the front unit 6A as a functional part has electric parts such as a gate sensor 2011, a starting solenoid 2412, and a decoration board on which LEDs are mounted, the front unit 6A should not have electric parts. In comparison with the case of using the rear unit 6B, a mechanism for transmitting a drive from an actuator such as a solenoid provided in the rear unit 6B, a mechanism for guiding light from an LED provided in the rear unit 6B, and the like are redundant. Since there is no need to provide such a mechanism in the front unit 6A, an increase in the cost of the front unit 6A can be suppressed, and the cost required for changing game specifications and models can be suppressed.

Further, when the front unit 6A is provided with electric parts, as described above, the front unit 6A as a functional unit is provided with a mechanism for transmitting a drive from an actuator such as a solenoid provided in the rear unit 6B. , a mechanism for guiding the light from the LED provided in the rear unit 6B, and the like. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of simplifying attachment and detachment of a front unit 6A without complicating detachment and easily changing game specifications and models in a game hall. can.

Furthermore, since the front unit 6A as a functional part has electric parts such as a gate sensor 2011, a starting solenoid 2412, and a decorative board on which LEDs are mounted, the front unit 6A before replacement is different from the winning unit. It is possible to make the front unit 6A with different openings (opening and closing winning openings) and light-emitting decorations, and it is possible to greatly change the appearance. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be improved and which can be expected to be more effective than the cost of replacing the front unit 6A.

In addition, since the wiring from the electric parts in the front unit 6A as a functional section is collected and connected to the rear unit connector 1150 of the rear unit 6B by the front unit connector 1060, when the front unit 6A is replaced, In addition, the electrical connection can be removed or attached only by removing or attaching the front unit 6A to or from the rear unit 6B, and the replacement work of the front unit 6A can be facilitated.

In addition, since the front 1060 of the inter-unit connector and the rear 1150 of the inter-unit connector are directly connected, the wiring cable does not extend between the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B. There is no possibility of being caught or caught between the parts, and there is no risk of disconnection between the front unit 6A and the rear unit 6B, thereby preventing troubles in electrical connection.

Further, when the game board 5A is attached to the main body frame 4, the main body frame 4 and the game board 5A are electrically connected automatically by the main body frame side connector 507 and the game board side connector 1142. When the game board 5A is removed from the main body frame side connector 507 and the game board side connector 1142, the electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5A is automatically released, and the game board 5A is connected to the main body frame 4. Attachment and detachment work can be facilitated. At this time, since the board fixing portion 1133 for attaching the game board 5A to the main body frame 4 is provided in front of the main frame side connector 507 and the game board side connector 1142, the game board is fixed by the board fixing portion 1133. 5A can be pressed against the body frame 4, and the connection between the body frame side connector 507 and the game board side connector 1142 can be ensured.

Further, since the body frame 4 and the game board 5A are electrically connected by the body frame side connector 507 and the game board side connector 1142, the wiring cable extends between the body frame 4 and the game board 5A. Therefore, the wiring cable is not caught or pinched by other parts, there is no fear of disconnection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5A, and the occurrence of troubles in electrical connection is prevented. be able to.

In addition, since the front unit 6A as a functional part can be replaced without using a tool such as a screwdriver, the front unit 6A can be easily replaced without preparing tools at the game hall side. The replacement work can be easily carried out even by the staff of the game hall.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the main body frame 4, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 701 of the board unit 700 that guides and discharges the game ball B released from the game board 5 (game board 5A). Since the two-ball path 702 is provided with the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 for detecting the game balls B, the number of the game balls B released from the game board 5 can be counted. Therefore, for example, the number of game balls B detected by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 and the game balls paid out by receiving the game balls B into the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001 of the game board 5 Based on the number of B's (the number of prize balls), it is possible to calculate the payout ratio of the game balls B in the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) and detect fraud. At this time, since the ground fitting 706 connected to the ground is provided downstream of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the body frame 4, Due to some kind of trouble, the recovery of the game balls B on the side of the island equipment is defective, and the game balls B discharged from the main body frame 4 start to accumulate, leading to the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the main body frame 4. Furthermore, before the game ball B accumulated from the island facility side reaches the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 provided in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the first A series of game balls B accumulated on the ground metal fittings 706 provided in the ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 come into contact with each other, and the static electricity from the island facility side can be released. For this reason, even if the accumulated game ball B reaches the first ball sensor 703 or the second ball sensor 704, the static electricity from the island facility can be released by the ground metal fitting 706, so the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 to prevent the static electricity from flowing into the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 to avoid damage to the main control board 1510 of the game board 5 due to the static electricity flowing from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing the occurrence of problems due to static electricity.

In addition, since the static electricity of the game ball B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be released by the ground metal fitting 706, noise that may cause false detection although it is not enough to damage the main control board 1510 can be prevented from entering from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, and the number of game balls B released from the game board 5 can be accurately counted.

Furthermore, when the ground metal fitting 706 is provided on one side wall of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the ground metal fitting 706 is longer than twice the diameter D of the game ball B in the direction of circulation of the game ball B. In addition, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are provided upstream of the distance 2.5 times the diameter D of the game ball B from the exit 707 of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. Therefore, even if the game balls B accumulated from the island facility side accumulate in a meandering manner in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, at least one of the plurality of game balls B connected from the island facility side It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can bring one of them into contact with the ground metal fitting 706, reliably release the static electricity from the island equipment side, and reliably exhibit the above-described effects. Also, in this case, even if the position from the first ball sensor 703 or the second ball sensor 704 to the exit 707 is vertical, the series of game balls B accumulated from the island equipment will not come into contact with the ground metal fitting 706 and will be detected by the first ball sensor. 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 can be reliably avoided.

In addition, when the ground metal fittings 706 are provided on the two side walls or bottom walls of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, they are provided longer than the diameter D of the game ball B in the direction of circulation of the game ball B, Since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are provided upstream of the distance D of the diameter D of the game ball B from the exit 707, the distance from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 to the exit 707 is vertical. Regardless of whether or not the game balls B accumulated from the island facility side accumulate in a meandering manner in the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, a plurality of game balls connected from the island facility side At least one of B can be brought into contact with the ground fitting 706, the static electricity from the side of the island facility can be surely released, and the pachinko machine 1 which surely exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be provided.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5A has a game panel 1100A provided with a plurality of obstacle nails N and a plurality of winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001 and the first start opening 2003. is detachable from the game board 5A, for example, when you want to change the game specifications or model of the game board 5A attached to the main body frame 4 attached to the island equipment of the game hall, Only the game panel 1100A (front unit 6A) can be removed without removing the entire game board 5A from the body frame 4. - 特許庁By replacing the game panel 1100A (front unit 6A) with different game specifications and models prepared in advance, the game specifications and models can be changed in the game hall, and the game specifications and models can be easily changed. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of At this time, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2402, etc. are set to the specific area on the side far from the axis of the main body frame 4 bordering on the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 1100A and on the right side of the center in the left-right direction. Since electric parts are provided, the game panel 1100A is connected to the rear inter-unit connector 1150 of the remaining part (rear unit 6B) of the game board via the front inter-unit connector 1060 connected to the electric part. (Front unit 6A) When installing or removing (front unit 6A), there is no need to perform electrical connection work with rear unit 6B here and there on game panel 1100A (front unit 6A). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that allows efficient work inside and facilitates the work of mounting and removing the game panel 1100A (the front unit 6A).

Also, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the island facility of the game hall by rotating the hinge with the game board 5A attached to the main body frame 4, the game panel 1100A (the front unit 6A) is placed near the free end side of the main body frame 4. ) is located in the specific area, the electrical parts such as the second starting opening sensor 2401 and the big winning opening sensor 2402 provided in the specific area are connected or disconnected to the rear unit 6B. It can be made easy to work. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the front inter-unit connector 1060 connected to the electric parts such as the second starting opening sensor 2401 and the big winning opening sensor 2402 is replaced by the rear inter-unit connector 1150 provided in the rear unit 6B. It is designed to be directly connected to When the game panel 1100A (front unit 6A) is removed from the game board 5A attached to the body frame 4, the body frame 4 rotates as a hinge. Since the work space is narrow, it is easier to mount and remove the game panel 1100A at an angle while rotating it around the axis near the axis of the main body frame 4 (the left end). At this time, the game panel 1100A (front unit 6A) is in an oblique state with respect to the rear unit 6B. The inclination of the moving direction of the front connector 1060 becomes slightly with respect to the original inserting/removing direction of the front connector 1060 between units (here, the front-rear direction), and the front 1060 between the units and the rear unit of the game panel 1100A (front unit 6A) Connection and disconnection with the 6B inter-unit connector post 1150 can be made smooth. For this reason, when the game panel 1100A (front unit 6A) is attached or removed, the work involved in electrical connection with the rear unit 6B is easy. ) can be easily attached and detached, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of reliably achieving the above-described effects can be provided.

In addition, since the game panel 1100A (front unit 6A) has an inter-unit connector front 1060 as a wiring connecting means, the second starting port sensor 2401 or the The wiring cables from the electric parts such as the big winning opening sensor 2402 are not separated, and it is possible to prevent the separated wiring cables from being caught in other members and disturbing the work. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the panel 1100A (front unit 6A) can be easily attached and removed.

Furthermore, as described above, the inter-unit connector front 1060 as a wiring connecting means can make it difficult for the wiring cable to get caught on other members, so that the electrical connection between the game panel 1100A (front unit 6A) and the rear unit 6B can be prevented. It is possible to eliminate the risk of disconnection in physical connection, and prevent the occurrence of problems in electrical connection.

In addition, since electrical parts such as the second start sensor 2401 and the big winning sensor 2402 are provided in a specific area of the game panel 1100A (front unit 6A), when using a transparent member as the game panel 1100A, electric The configuration (devise) for hiding the wiring cables extending from the parts can be summarized within a certain range, and the increase in cost can be suppressed. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can make it difficult to hinder the advantage of being transparent, exhibits the intended effect, and is highly appealing to the players.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect display device 1600 as a display unit on the game board 5A is newly provided with the connection relay board 1624, which has not been provided in the past pachinko machines, and the connection relay board 1624 is newly provided. The board 1624 is provided with a display-side connector 1625 that is connected to the peripheral-side connector 1514 of the peripheral control unit 1500 . The connection relay board 1624 is provided with an FPC connector 1624a to which the FPC 1626 extending from the effect display device 1600 is connected. By connecting the display-side connector 1625 with the wiring circuit of the connection relay board 1624, connection with the peripheral control board 1510 can be made by the display-side connector 1625 instead of the FPC connector 1624a. The connector 1625 can be a type of connector (for example, a drawer connector, a board-to-board connector, etc.) that can be reliably connected even by an amateur. In other words, the type of connector to be connected can be changed in the connection relay board 1624 . Therefore, in the factory of the pachinko machine 1, an expert first connects the connector of the FPC 1626 and the connector of the connection relay board 1624, and then makes the connection (insertion and removal) at the display-side connector 1625. Therefore, even an unskilled person can reliably connect the display side connector 1625 and the peripheral side connector 1514, and even an amateur can operate the peripheral control unit 1500 with respect to the effect display device 1600 without causing any trouble. can be attached and detached. As described above, the cost for reusing the effect display device 1600 can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 in which the effect display device 1600 can be easily reused can be provided.

In addition to connecting the connector of the FPC 1626 from the effect display device 1600 to the connection relay board 1624, the connection relay board 1624 is attached to the effect display device 1600 (shield sheet metal 1620). Even if the display-side connection connector 1625 of the connection relay board 1624 is repeatedly inserted and removed, the FPC 1626 from the effect display device 1600 does not move because the connection relay board 1624 is immovable, and noise is not likely to be picked up. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit 1500 is replaced, noise does not occur, and the player can be entertained with a noise-free and excellent effect image, and the player's interest can be suppressed. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Furthermore, since the peripheral side connector 1514 is attached to the peripheral control board 1510, there is no need to provide a connection relay board for attaching the peripheral side connector 1514 in the peripheral control unit 1500 separately from the peripheral control board 1510. An increase in the cost of the unit 1500 can be suppressed.

In addition, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the performance display device 1600, the display side connector 1625 and the peripheral side connector 1514 are automatically connected, so the attachment/detachment work (replacement) of the peripheral control unit 1500 is performed. work), the electrical connection work with the performance display device 1600 can be omitted, and the attachment and detachment work of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be made easier.

In addition, since the display-side connector 1625 and the peripheral-side connector 1514 are directly connected, no wiring cable extends between the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500. There is no possibility of being caught or caught between parts, there is no risk of disconnection between the performance display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500, and the performance image from the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably displayed in the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing a decline in interest by entertaining a player with a performance image.

Furthermore, since the ground of the effect display device 1600 (the shield sheet metal 1620) and the ground of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the ground connection portion 1513 of the peripheral control board 1510) are electrically connected by the ground metal fitting 1623, noise is reduced. , and the operation of electric circuits in the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control board 1510 can be stabilized.

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the performance display device 1600, the tip of the ground metal fitting 1623 attached to the shield metal plate 1620 elastically contacts the ground connection portion 1513 of the opposite peripheral control board. and the peripheral control board 1510 can be automatically grounded, and the connection work can be further facilitated.

Furthermore, since the peripheral control unit 1500 can be attached to and detached from the performance display device 1600 with the attachment piece 1521 provided on one end side of the peripheral control board box 1520 as the center of rotation, the attachment piece 1521 can The peripheral control unit 1500 can be positioned with respect to the performance display device 1600, and the attaching/detaching work of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be facilitated.

Also, when attaching and detaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to and from the effect display device 1600, since the mounting piece 1521 of the peripheral control board box 1520 in the peripheral unit 1500 is the center of rotation, the peripheral side toward the display side connector 1625 can be rotated. The connector 1514 moves in an arc, but since the mounting piece 1521 is provided at a position far from the peripheral connector 1514 , the inclination of the peripheral connector 1514 in the moving direction is the same as that of the display connector 1625 . and the peripheral side connector 1514 in the inserting/removing direction (here, the front-rear direction), the peripheral side connector 1514 can be smoothly and directly connected to the display side connector 1625, and the peripheral control unit 1500 Attachment/detachment work can be facilitated.

Furthermore, as described above, the performance display device 1600 as a display unit and the peripheral control unit 1500 can be easily attached and detached, so that the following excellent effects can be obtained. More specifically, on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, there is a case where the pachinko machine with a predetermined game specification installed in the island facilities is once desired to be changed to a machine with a different game specification. In such a case, the pachinko machine maker takes over the pachinko machine from the game hall side to the factory, cleans it, changes it to the desired game specifications, and ships it to the game hall side. However, when the pachinko machine is brought back to the factory, it takes time to return the pachinko machine whose game specifications have been changed. There was a problem that the operating rate decreased and the burden was placed on the game hall side. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even an amateur can easily attach and detach the performance display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500. When it is desired to change the machine type, the staff of the game hall or the like can remove and replace the peripheral control unit 1500 while the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, and the game specifications and the game specifications can be changed without replacing the entire pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加It is possible to easily change the model. Also, in the pachinko machine 1, since the peripheral control unit 1500 can be replaced while the performance display device 1600 remains as it is, the cost required for changing the game specifications and model can be reduced compared to the case of replacing the entire pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加be able to. Needless to say, it is necessary to replace the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310 for controlling the game when changing the game specifications or the model.

In addition, as described above, the effect control unit can be replaced in the game hall without taking the pachinko machine 1 back to the factory. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine (island facility) in the game hall, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

In addition, since the tip side of the grounding metal fitting 1623 is branched into a plurality of parts like a fork so as to make elastic contact with the grounding connection portion 1513 of the peripheral control board 1510, contact failure may occur due to an increase in the contacting portion. can be reduced, and the ground connection between the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control board 1510 can be ensured.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine, but the game machine is not limited to this, and the game is a pachislot machine or a game that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case, the same effects as those described above can be obtained. Also, the present invention can be applied to a so-called enclosed type game machine in which the player never touches the game ball B, or a game machine called a management game machine.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main frame 5A game board 5a game area 6A front unit 6B rear unit 1000 front structural member 1001 outer rail (guide rail)
1056 First connection fitting 1057 Second connection fitting 1060 In front of inter-unit connector (electric part)
1130 mounting unit 1131 mounting base 1132 mounting reinforcing sheet metal (metal plate)
After connector between 1150 units (electrical parts)
1310 Main control board (electrical parts)
1400 function display unit (electrical parts)
1510 Peripheral control board (electrical parts)
2011 Gate sensor (Electrical component)
2101 first start sensor (electric part)
2401 Second start sensor (electric part)
2402 Grand Prize Opening Sensor (Electrical Parts)
2412 Start Solenoid (Electrical Parts)
2414 Attacker Solenoid (Electrical Parts)
2451 Second Attacker Solenoid (Electrical Parts)
2452 2nd Grand Prize Opening Sensor (Electrical Parts)
3001 general prize gate sensor (electrical parts)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a gaming board having a gaming area in which games are played with gaming balls,
The game board is
a game panel provided with the game area in front;
a mounting unit on which the game panel is mounted on the front;
A metal guide rail provided on the front surface of the game panel for guiding game balls to the game area,
The mounting unit behind the game panel has a metal plate electrically connected to the guide rail and grounded,
The metal plate is arranged in the mounting unit so that a surface on the game panel side thereof has a portion exposed to the game panel side,
An opening is formed in the game panel in which a center accessory is arranged , and the guide rail and the metal plate are pressed against a portion of the metal plate exposed to the game panel without passing through the opening. A gaming machine characterized by being electrically connected through a predetermined connection metal part that is elastically deformable .

Images